IConn High Performance
Performance Wire
W ire Bonder
IConn J Boat
Material Handling System Manual
98888-0000-JB3-01
Copyright © 2013 Kulicke & Soffa Industries Inc (www.kns.com
(www.kns.com)) and all subsequent revision dates. All Rights Reserved. Original English language version.
The information contained in this document is the property of Kulicke & Soffa Industries Inc and is subject to change without notice.
This document may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form, nor stored in a retrieval system of any nature, without the express written authority from:
Kulicke & Soffa Pte Ltd
6 Serangoon North Avenue 5,
#03-16, Singapore 554 910
This page is left intentionally blank
Material Handling System Manual
Use of This Manual
General Introduction
The purpose of this manual is to provide technical information for application
design on the K&S IConn High Performance Wire Bonder.
The Table of Contents and the Index at the back of the manual should be used to
quickly locate specific information within the manual.
The following manuals should be referred to if additional information is required:
•
•
IConn Operation Manual
IConn Maintenance Manual
Terms and Conventions used in this manual
The following format is used in this publication:
•
Syst
System
em modes
modes are cap
capita
italiz
lized.
ed. Example
Example:: PROGRAM mode
•
Control Panel and keyboard
keyboard buttons are in bracke
brackets,
ts, capital
capitalized
ized and
and in bold.
Example: [ENTER]
•
Graphic
Graphical
al Us
User
er Interfac
Interface
e (GUI)
(GUI) buttons
buttons are ca
capital
pitalized
ized and in
in bol
bold
d wit
without
hout
brackets. Example: PROGRAM
•
Numeri
Numeric
c “hot keys” are in brackets
brackets and
and in bold,
bold, followe
followed
d by the function
function name.
Example: [1] AUTO (Mode); [3] DELETE (Menu Option)
•
Moni
Monitor
tor me
messa
ssages
ges are
are in quotes.
quotes. Example
Example:: “Enable
“Enable eye poi
point
nt ret
reteac
each”
h”
•
Alphabe
Alphabetic
tic displays
displays where any letter
letter ma
may
y appear
appear are represe
represented
nted by a capi
capital
tal
letter (X).
Numeric displays
displays wh
where
ere any
any number
number ma
may
y appear
appear are
are represente
represented
d using
using the
pound symbol (#).
•
The following terminology is used in this manual:
Term
Explanation
Ches
Ch
ess
s
Movin
Moving
g tthe
he XY tab
table
le or bond
bond head
head us
usin
ing
g tthe
he mouse
mouse or a
arr
rrow
ow keys.
keys.
Sellect
Se
Sel
Selection is
is iin
nitiated by
by:
1) Place pointer on a button or menu item and press [b1](left mouse button).
2) If item is highlighted (box around item), press [Enter].
3) Press menu item’s ‘hot key’.
Click or
Placing the pointer on a screen button or menu item. [b1] (left mouse button)
Click On
is pressed to initiate the selection.
Drag
Drag
Repo
Reposi
sitio
tioni
ning
ng or re
resi
sizi
zing
ng of an it
item
em on the di
disp
spla
lay
y. Th
This
is is done
done by usin
using
g
the mouse and [b1] (left mouse button) in a held state during the drag.
Releasing [b1] terminates the drag function.
Index
ndex
In
Iniitiat
atiing workholder moti
motion
on..
Scrol
Scr
olll
Movin
Moving
g a te
text
xt fi
fiel
eld
d iin
n suc
such
h a way
way a
as
s tto
o hav
have
e tthe
he da
data
ta move
move up or down
down
within the field. Arrow keys or sliders are used to accomplish this function.
Tar
arget
get
Us
Usin
ing
g chess
chessin
ing
g hard
hardwa
ware
re tto
o plac
place
e the mon
monit
itor
or cros
crossh
shai
airr or s
sca
can
n box a
att a
specific location in one of the display windows.
98888-0000-JB3-01
S-1
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Record of Changes
Change Description
No
S-2
00
Launch Release
01
Safety
Safety In
Info
forma
rmati
tion
on upd
updat
ated
ed with
with la
lase
serr safe
safety
ty dat
data
a and
and warn
warnin
ing
g
Affected
Pages
Revised
Date
ALL
12/2009
Page
S-1
1
Page S-
3/2013
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Safety Information
S.1
General
Kulicke & Soffa refer to the latest international health and safety standards, specifications and
procedures during design and assembly of the
the machine. The machine has an inh
inherently
erently safe
design, however, incorrect maintenance or operation could cause injury to personnel or damage
to the equipment. You must keep the machine in accordance with
w ith the procedures included in this
manual. During operation and maintenance, you must take all reasonable precautions to prevent
injury to personnel and damage to the machine. Standard safety practices and local safety
regulations apply.
The machine is for use in the production of semiconductors. Do not use the machine for other
functions. Unapproved mechanical or electrical modifications can have an unwanted effect on
the safe and efficient operation of the machine. Kulicke & Soffa accept no responsibility for
injury or damage (direct or indirect) caused if you use the machine for other tasks, make
unapproved modifications, or if you use unapproved tools, materials, equipment or procedures.
You must read and understand this safety chapter before you operate the bonder.
S.2
Symbols a
an
nd M
Me
essages
The symbols and messages used in this manual are shown below:
S.2.1
Warning
WARNING:
The symbol and the word WARNING go before text that is safety related and show a potentially
hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Warnings
appear before the related task. Read the warnings before you do the task.
All WARNINGs are printed in B old i talic
li c letters.
S.2.2
Caution
CAUTION:
The symbol and the word CAUTION go before text that is safety related and show a potentially
hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It is also
used to alert against unsafe practices. Cautions appear before the related task. Read the cautions
before you do the task.
All CAUTIONs are printed in B old i talic
li c letters.
S.2.3
Note
Note:
The word Note goes after the text and gives additional data that can help you during a task, or
gives you data about the machine.Notes are printed in B OLD ita
italic
lic letters.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Safety Information
S-1
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.3
S.
3
Equi
Equipm
pmen
entt-S
Spe
peci
cifi
fic
c Wa
Warn
rnin
ings
gs
WARNING:
TYPE 4 ELECTRICAL HAZARD! THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE SUPPLIES A
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE OF
420 VDC. THIS POWER IS USED ON THE X AND Y MOTORS AND XY AMPLIFIER. BEFORE YOU GET ACCESS AND SERVICE THE POWER SUPPLY
MODULE, THE XY AMPLIFIER MODULE OR THE X AND Y MOTORS OR
THEIR RELATED CABLES, MAKE SURE THAT THE MACHINE POWER IS
OFF. DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE FROM THE AC MAINS
AND MAKE SURE THAT THE RED SAFETY LED ADJACENT TO THE 420 VDC
CONNECTOR ON THE POWER SUPPLY IS OFF (APPROXIMATELY AFTER
FIVE MINUTES) BEFORE YOU GET ACCESS TO THE POWER SUPPLY MODULE, XY AMPLIFIER, AND THE X AND Y MOTORS.
WARNING:
TYPE 4 ELECTRICAL HAZARD! DO NOT TOUCH THE ELECTRONIC FLAMEOFF (EFO) WAND OR THE GOLD WIRE DURING OPERATION OR WHEN
MANUALLY FIRING THE EFO. THE SYSTEM PRODUCES A SPARK
BETWEEN THE EFO WAND AND WIRE WHICH CAN CAUSE AN ELECTRICAL
SHOCK IF CONTACTED DURING EFO FIRING. THE POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD IS NOT USUALLY CONSIDERED LIFE THREATENING (AS GIVEN IN IEC
PUBLICATION NO. 479). HOWEVER, K&S RECOMMENDS THAT PEOPLE
WITH ABNORMAL HEART CONDITIONS OR ARTIFICIAL HEART STIMULATION
DEVICES
(E.G.
PACEMAKERS)
ATE OR
SERVICE
THE
EQUIPMENT. MUST NOT BE PERMITTED TO OPERWARNING:
TYPE 4 ELECTRICAL HAZARD! THE EFO PRODUCES UP TO 5 KV ON VARIOUS PARTS INSIDE OF THE EFO CONTROL BOX AND ON THE HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLE. DO NOT OPEN THE EFO BOX. IF IT BECOMES NECESSARY TO
HANDLE THE HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLE OR REMOVE THE BOX, UNPLUG THE
EFO BOX POWER CABLE AND WAIT AT LEAST FIVE MINUTES. USE HIGHVOLTAGE TECHNIQUES AND PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN YOU
HANDLE THIS UNIT.
WARNING:
ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS! SERVO MOTORS USED TO POSITION THE
BOND HEAD AND OPTICS GENERATE STRONG MAGNETIC FIELDS. HEART
STIMULATION DEVICES (E.G. PACEMAKERS) MAY BE ADVERSELY
AFFECTED DURING BOND HEAD MOVEMENT. THEREFORE, PEOPLE WITH
SUCH DEVICES MUST NOT BE NEAR THE EQUIPMENT WHILE IT IS IN
OPERATION.
WARNING:
TYPE 4 ELECTRICAL HAZARD! DO NOT TOUCH THE CLAMP ASSEMBLY
WHEN MACHINE POWER IS ON. THE CLAMP IS OPERATED BY AN ELECTRICAL POTENTIAL OF UP TO 500VDC. WHEN USED
US ED WITH HEAVY WIRE OR
COPPER KIT, IT CAN CAUSE AN ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF CONTACTED. THE
POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD IS NOT CONSIDERED LIFE THREATENING.
S-2
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
WARNING:
CLASS I LASER HAZARD! THE BOND HEAD Z-AXIS ENCODER HAS A
CLASS I LASER (AND IN CERTAIN MODELS, THE X-AXIS AND Y-AXIS
ENCODER). WHILE THE ENCODER SENSOR HEAD IS MOUNTED ON THE
BOND HEAD OR X AND Y TABLE, THE LASER IS NOT DANGEROUS TO YOU
OR MAINTENANCE TECHNICIAN. HOWEVER, WHEN THE SENSOR HEAD IS
REMOVED AND THE MACHINE POWER IS ON, THE LASER LIGHT CAN
CAUSE EYE DAMAGE IF VIEWED DIRECTLY ON AXIS. ALWAYS TURN OFF
THE
MACHINE
POWER
YOU
REMOVE
THE ENCODER SENSOR
HEAD
FROM THE
BONDBEFORE
HEAD OR
X AND
Y TABLE.
WARNING:
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL! THE BOND HEAD LINK IS MADE FROM A BERYLLIUM ALLOY THAT IS CONSIDERED A POTENTIAL CARCINOGEN. HAZARDOUS DUST IS PRODUCED WHEN THIS MATERIAL IS MACHINED, FILED, OR
GROUND. DO NOT MACHINE OR OTHERWISE ATTEMPT TO REWORK THE
BOND HEAD. DO NOT GOUGE THE LINK
LI NK WHEN YOU WORK AROUND THE
BOND HEAD AREA WITH SMALL, SHARP TOOLS AS THIS MAY PRODUCE
CHIPS OR SPLINTERS THAT CAN PENETRATE SKIN. A MATERIAL SAFETY
DATA SHEET FOR BERYLLIUM AND ITS SAFE USE IS AVAILABLE FROM
K&S UPON REQUEST.
WARNING:
INJURY HAZARD! DURING OPERATION, PARTS OF THE MACHINE MOVE
WITHOUT WARNING. KEEP HANDS, TOOLS, AND LOOSE ITEMS OF CLOTHING AWAY FROM THE MHS, XY
X Y TABLE, AND BOND HEAD AREAS.
WARNING:
BURN HAZARD!
HOT SURFACES CAN CAUSE BURNS. THE WORKHOLDER IS HOT DURING
AND AFTER OPERATION. USE HEAT-RESISTANT PROTECTIVE GLOVES OR
LET SURFACE TEMPERATURES DECREASE TO LESS THAN 60°C BEFORE
YOU TOUCH THE WORKHOLDER.
S.4
General Pre
Precauti
tio
ons
The general safety precautions that follow must be observed whenever you operate, adjust, or
service this equipment:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
98888-0000-JB3-01
Comp
ompon
onen
ents
ts of th
thee work
workho
hold
lder
er ar
aree ver
very
y ho
hott
Do not let your fingers, or any material with a low melting point to contact heated areas.
Observ
Observee all
all WARNING
ARNINGS
S and
and CAUTIO
CAUTIONS
NS noted
noted in the tex
texts
ts of
of tthe
he techni
technical
cal pub
public
licati
ations
ons
for the bonder
Al
Alwa
ways
ys disa
disabl
blee all
all moto
motors
rs bef
befor
oree you
you put
put your
your han
hands
ds nea
nearr the
the bond
bond hea
head,
d, XY
XY ta
tabl
ble,
e, MHS
MHS
and other powered systems
Keep
Keep hand
handss clea
clearr o
off the
the bond
bond ar
area
ea dur
durin
ing
g mac
machi
hine
ne oper
operat
atio
ion
n
Oper
Operat
atee the
the bond
bonder
er wi
with
th cove
covers
rs in
inst
stal
alle
led
d at
at all
all time
timess
Discon
Disconnec
nectt the
the elect
electric
rical
al serv
service
ice to the bonder
bonder before
before you remove
remove the rea
rearr cover
coverss or
or open
open
the card rack door, unless machine power is required to do a specific maintenance task
Standa
Standard
rd precau
precautio
tions
ns rela
related
ted to liv
livee elect
electric
rical
al circuit
circuitss must
must be take
taken
n at
at all
all times
times whe
when
n you
you
adjust or service the equipment
Neve
Neverr put
put th
thee tool
toolss or mate
materi
rial
alss on th
thee MHS
MHS or
or bo
bond
nder
er when
when yo
you
u do
do main
mainte
tena
nanc
ncee
Obse
Observ
rvee the man
manuf
ufac
actu
ture
rer'
r'ss recom
recomme
mend
nded
ed safe
safety
ty prec
precau
auti
tion
onss when
when you
you use che
chemi
mica
call
substances
Solv
Solven
ents
ts and
and aero
aeroso
sols
ls,, if used
used,, must
must be
be comp
compat
atib
ible
le with
with the
the bond
bonder
er ope
opera
rati
tion
onal
al
environment and the process
Safety Information
S-3
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.5
Trai
rained
ned Operat
Operators
ors and Servic
Service
eT
Tech
echnic
nician
ians
s
The users for operation and service maintenance must receive training in machine operation and
maintenance given by Kulicke & Soffa. The Performance Based Equipment Training (P.B.E.T.)
given by Kulicke & Soffa makes sure that the participants master job skills to meet measurable
objectives. There are two levels of training:
•
•
Level One
Level One training includes basic machine operation and simple maintenance. Machine
operators must successfully complete this training before you operate the machine.
Level Two
Level Two training covers advanced machine operation and maintenance. Service
technicians must successfully complete both the Level One and Level Two training
courses.
Data on the training courses and locations can be found on the K&S website " www.kns.com".
S.6
S.
6
Se
Servi
rvici
cing
ng El
Elec
ectri
trica
call Eq
Equi
uipm
pmen
entt
CAUTION:
Before you apply AC power to the machine, read through the items outlined
in the safety checklist below.
S.6.
S.6.1
1
•
Types
pes of Electrical
Electrical Hazards thoroughly
Read through section S.6.1 Ty
•
•
Servicing
ng Power
Power Supply thoroughly
Read through section S.6.2 Servici
Read through section S.6.3 Lockout
Lockout/T
/Tagout
agout Procedu
Procedure
re thoroughly
Typ
ypes
es of Elec
Electr
tric
ical
al Ha
Haza
zard
rds
s
At times, it may be required to access certain areas of the machine in order to do setup
procedures, calibrations or regular maintenance
maintenance routines. If the work to be do
done
ne in these areas
relate to components near exposed energized circuits; the steps to do the work, as outlined in the
ATPremier Plus machine manuals, will define the type of electrical hazard. The types of
electrical hazards are:
•
•
•
•
•
Typ
ypee 1:
1: E
Equ
quip
ipme
ment
nt is fully
fully de
de-e
-ene
nerg
rgiz
ized
ed (ele
(elect
ctri
rica
call
lly
y col
cold)
d)
Type 2: Eq
Equipment iiss een
nergized
Live circuits are covered or insulated.
Type 3: Eq
Equipment iiss een
nergized
Live circuits are exposed and accidental contact is possible. Potential exposures are less
than 30 volts RMS (42.2 volts peak).
Type 4: Eq
Equipment iiss een
nergized
Live circuits are exposed and accidental contact is possible. Potential exposures are
greater than 30 volts RMS (42.2 volts peak) or radio frequency is present.
Type 5: Eq
Equipment iiss een
nergized
Measurements and/or adjustments require physical entry into the equipment or equipment
configuration does not allow the use of clamp-on probes.
N ot
ote
e: Wo
Worr k i n e
elect
lectrr i cal ha
haza
zarr d typ
type
es 3 thr
through
ough 5 ar
are
e broug
brought
ht tto
o the r ead
ade
er s at
atte
tenti
ntion
on iin
n the
ATPrr emier Plu
ATP
Pluss use
userr m
ma
anua
nuals.
S-4
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
S.6.
S.6.2
2
Se
Serv
rvic
icin
ing
gP
Pow
ower
er Sup
upp
ply
CAUTION:
You may cause damage to the machine if you apply power that is
i s below the
specified voltage range. Do not connect the machine
machi ne to source power unless
the source power is within the rrange
ange of 200 VAC to 240 VAC. If the source
power is below this range, a step-up transformer is required (see NOTE
below).
N ot
ote
e: Iup
f the
custo
custom
mer sissource
input
vvo
olta
ltage
ge
withi
within
n the r ange
of required
100 VA
VAC
C 200
to 120VA
120VAC
, a ste
stepptransformer
required
to raise
theiissinput
voltage
to the
to 240CVAC
range. The step-up transformer is installed between the ATPremier Plus power supply
and the sour
source
ce i nput vvolt
oltage.
age. C
Cont
ontac
actt yo
your
ur loca
locall K uli cke & S offa sale
saless rre
eprese
presenta
ntatitive
ve
forr m
fo
mo
ore data about this fe
fea
ature
ure..
DC power to all components on the ATPremier Plus are distributed by the power supply via the
Power Distribution Unit (PDU) except the +420VDC to the XY Amp which is sourced directly
from the power supply via an appropriately rated cable.
CAUTION:
There is a red safety LED adjacent to the 420 VDC connector on the power
supply, which, when lit indicates the presence of voltage above 60 VDC.
Make sure this safety LED is off before you disconnect the power supply, XY
amp, or X and Y motors. See figure below for location.
A
A
Safety LED Location
Fi g ure S -1 S afet
fetyy LE D on the P owe
owerr S upp
upply
ly
The power supply does not need to be configured to comply with the source AC line voltage as
long as the source AC line voltage is within the range of 200 VAC to 240 VAC. Source input
voltage frequency differences are also handled automatically.
S.6.
S.6.3
3
Lo
Lock
ckou
out/
t/T
Tag
agou
outt Pr
Proc
oced
edur
ure
e
Kulicke & Soffa strongly recommends that you use a power connector locking device. When you
shut down power from the machine, implement user-supplied locking device on the power cable
to prevent unintentional or accidental restoration of power to the machine during servicing. The
attachment of a tagout device on the lockout device is also recommended. This gives a prominent
warning to all personnel that the machine may not be operated until the tagout device and the
lockout device are removed. Refer to OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910.147 for detailed data on the
control of hazardous energy with lockout/tagout procedures.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Safety Information
S-5
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.7
S.
7
Safe
Safe Use
Use of H
Hea
eated
ted Ma
Mate
teri
rial
al and
and E
Equ
quip
ipme
ment
nt
The workholder heaters are typically heated to a temperature that will immediately burn
unprotected skin if contact is made with the heaters, or with machine components close to the
workholder. Precautions must be taken when you load/unload heated materials and parts or
service equipment in the area around the workholder (work area) to avoid injury.
S.
S.7.
7.1
1
Us
User
er's
's R
Res
espo
pons
nsib
ibili
iliti
ties
es ffor
or P
Per
erso
sona
nall Sa
Safe
fety
ty
It is your responsibility to operate and service the machine safely. You must know all the hazards
and their related safety precautions. Examine all of the safety information given with the
equipment and read the WARNING notices within the technical manuals that support the
machine, and note the areas of the machine that are labeled as hazardous.
S.8
S.
8
Po
Pote
tent
ntia
iall Er
Ergo
gono
nomi
mic
c Ha
Haza
zard
rd – M
Mic
icro
rosc
scop
ope
e Use
Use
There is a potential ergonomic hazard related with use of the microscope mounted on the
machine. The eyepieces of the microscope are 1380 mm (54.3 inches) above floor level. For
some machine users, this eyepiece height will be too low to use without bending; for others, the
eyepiece height will be too high for them to view the work through the microscope. The height of
the microscope is not adjustable. To prevent discomfort and the possibility of repetitive stress
injuries, obey the precautions that follow when you use the microscope.
WARNING:
DO NOT STAND ON TIPTOE WHEN YOU LOOK THROUGH THE MICROSCOPE; THIS IS AN UNSTABLE POSITION THAT MAY RESULT
RES ULT IN A LOSS OF
BALANCE.
A. If the eyepieces are too high: Stand on a portable step while you view the work area through
the microscope. The portable step height should allow you to comfortably look through the
eyepieces, but the portable step height should not exceed 100 mm (4 inches).
B. If the eyepieces
eyepieces are too low: Make sure that the time spen
spentt to view through the microscope
microscope in
a bent position is no more than 20 seconds at a time. If the task requires more than 20 seconds to do, make sure that you stand up straight for approximately 10 seconds after each 20
second view session through the eyepieces. To prevent repetitive stress injury to the back,
the number of sessions at the microscope in a stooped position should not exceed two per
shift, with rest after each 20 second view session.
S.8.
S.8.1
1
Se
Serv
rvic
icin
ing
g He
Heat
ated
ed Eq
Equi
uipm
pmen
entt
If you need to do maintenance in the work area, set the heaters to off and allow sufficient time for
the workholder heaters to cool completely before you start the maintenance procedure.
To make sure that the workholder heaters have cooled:
A. In the Temperature
Temperature Configuration dialog, set 1 TURN ALL ZONES to OFF.
B. Monitor
Monitor the heat zone temperature
temperatures
s shown on the monitor
monitor screen.
screen.
C. When the shown temperatures equal the ambient temperature (approximately 25 °C), start
the maintenance procedure.
S-6
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
S.9
Fire Safety
This section gives the fire suppression equipment required for the ATPremier Plus
P lus Stud Bumper
and the storage of flammable supplies.
S.9.1
Fire S
Su
uppression
It is assumed that the machine will be operated in a clean room equipped with fire detection and
fire suppression equipment. The only requirement for the wire bonding machine is that the fire
extinguishing agent must be suitable for suppression of electrical fires. The machine contains no
combustible liquids or gases, nor are any used in the process done by the machine. If there is no
area fire suppression system in place where the machine operates, fire extinguishing equipment
must be available close to the machine. Use an extinguishing device suitable for electrical and
electronic equipment and compatible with the products used with the machine. Only personnel
trained to fight fires must use fire extinguishers. In the event of a fire, the machine will produce
only those substances that ordinarily result from the combustion of electrical or electronic
equipment. Standard venting and clean-up methods must be used.
S.9.
S.9.2
2
Flam
Fl
amma
mabl
ble
eM
Mai
aint
nten
enan
ance
ce Su
Supp
ppli
lies
es
Some machine preventive maintenance procedures specify use
us e of isopropyl alcohol and grain
alcohol for cleaning and degreasing, which are flammable liquids. Large quantities of alcohol
(more than 1 liter) must be stored in accordance with local regulations. At a minimum, the
alcohol must be kept in approved containers that are clearly labeled, and the containers must be
stored outside of the production area in fireproof lockers. When alcohol is required for machine
maintenance, small amounts must be taken to the machine in labeled and tightly closed
containers. When in use, keep the alcohol away from open flames or other sources of ignition.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Safety Information
S-7
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.10
S.1
0 Emerge
Emergency
ncy Off Switch
Switch
The ATPremier Plus Emergency Off Switch is on the front right-hand side of the upper console
(see Figure S-6). It is a latching switch with a large red knob surrounded by a yellow label. The
switch is large, highly visible and conveniently in position to make sure that Trained Operators
or Trained Service Personnel can easily find and use it, if an emergency power down of the
system is required.
Push the switch knob in to start an emergency power down process. This causes the main power
supply contactor to open and to remove all AC power from the equipment. To power up the
bonder after an emergency power
power down, release the Emergency Off Switch, push the Machine
Machine
OFF Switch, and then push the Machine ON switch to power up the machine.
CAUTION:
When you push the Emergency Off Switch during bonding, operation may
result in the loss of the process program and possibly cause damage to the
product. Make sure that you clear all leadframes from the workholder before
you restart the bonder after an emergency off condition.
S.10.1
S.1
0.1 Eme
Emerge
rgency
ncy Off S
Switc
witch
h Sp
Speci
ecific
ficati
ations
ons
•
•
•
Switc
Switch
h Loc
Locat
atio
ion:
n: Fron
Front,
t, righ
rightt-ha
hand
nd co
corn
rner
er of the
the upp
upper
er co
conso
nsole
le..
Switch
Switch Descri
Descripti
ption:
on: Latchin
Latching
g swit
switch
ch with
with llar
arge
ge red knob,
knob, surrou
surrounde
nded
d by
by a yel
yellow
low lab
label
el
imprinted with the words "EMERGENCY OFF". When activated, the switch latches in the
active position. The switch knob must be rotated clockwise to unlatch and de-activate the
switch.
Functions:
•
Emer
Emerge
genc
ncy
y Of
Off- Pu
Push
sh th
thee eeme
merrge
gen
ncy off
off sswi
witc
tch:
h:
When you push in the switch, it cuts off all A.C. power to the ssystem
ystem by the release
of the main power supply contactor.
•
When
When th
thee emer
emerg
gen
ency
cy off sw
swit
itch
ch is pus
pushe
hed
d:
The emergency off switch remains in the latched position to prevent unauthorized
use of the machine. If the “ON
“ ON” switch button is pushed with the emergency off
switch still latched down, the machine power will still remain off. Go to the next
step to restart from emergency off.
•
Restart ffrrom em
emergency of
off:
Turn the switch knob clockwise to release
rele ase the switch and reset the emergency off
switch.
This and
willthen
release
thethe
switch
to reset
the “ button
out” position.
Push
the machine.
machine
OFF switch
push
machine
ON to
switch
to power
up the
N ot
ote
e: T he e
equi
quipm
pme
ent w
wii ll not rrest
estart
art unl
unless
ess tthe
he e
em
mer g ency off sswitch
witch iiss rre
eset to the
“out
“out"" position.
si tion.
S.10.2
S.1
0.2 Test E
Emer
mergen
gency
cy Of
Offf Swit
Switch
ch Op
Opera
eratio
tion
n
A test of Emergency Off Switch operation must be done regularly as part of the scheduled
machine preventive maintenance. The test must also be done immediately after the machine is
installed at your site, during initial power-up.
In this test the trained service technician must operate the switch to make sure that power is
immediately removed from the machine and make sure that the Main Power switch will not
return power to the machine when the Emergency Off Switch is activated (latched down).
S-8
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
S.1
S.
11 Cove
Coverr Pane
Panels
ls
The MHS workholder cover, the input magazine handler and output magazine handler covers;
the upper console cover panel; and lower console cover panel protect trained operators from
many of the hazards presented by the movement of the mechanical parts, heating elements and
electrical subsystems of the equipment. The covers must be in place and attached during all
normal operations. They must be opened or removed by trained service personnel only.
S.12
S.
12 Mach
Machin
ine
e Em
Emis
issi
sion
ons
s
This section gives the various types of machine emissions for ATPremier Plus Stud Bumper.
S.12.1
S.1
2.1 Ion
Ionizi
izing
ng a
and
nd N
Nonon-Ion
Ionizi
izing
ng R
Radi
adiati
ation
on
•
•
Ionizing Ra
Radiation:
There are no sources of ionizing radiation in the machine.
Non-ionizing Radiation:
The machine has been tested to show compliance with EN 61000-6-4, "Generic
"Generic Emissions
for Industrial Environments".
Environments".
S.12.2 Vibration
If the machine is installed as given in the ATPremier Plus Stud Bumper Machine Installation
Guide, with the machine on its leveling feet and with no contact between the machine and site
walls or other equipment, the machine will not let out any appreciable vibration when in
operation.
Elastomer vibration isolators are used on the leveling feet to support the machine and prevent
vibrations produced by the bonding and material handling equipment to transmit to the floor.
S.12.3 Noise
Continuous acoustical noise emitted by the machine will not be more than 85 dB(A), measured
from the operator position as prescribed in ANSI S1.13 “Methods for the Measurement
Measurement of Sound
Pressure Levels."
Levels."
S.
S.12
12.4
.4 Ga
Gase
ses,
s, Vap
apor
or,, D
Dus
ustt
The machine produces no gases, vapors, or dust as a result of its operations.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Safety Information
S-9
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.13
S.1
3 Warn
arning
ing and Safety
Safety L
Labe
abels
ls
This section gives the safety and identification labels on the ATPremier Plus Stud Bumper. The
safety labels inform trained operators and trained service personnel that a hazardous condition
may exist in the general area of each of those labels. This requires caution if actions must be
done in those areas. The identification labels are informative and intended to help trained
operators and trained service personnel to do their duties safely.
A: S.13.2 Burn Hazard
Hazard Warning
Warning
B: S.13.3 Pinch Point
Point Hazard Warning
Warning
C: S.13.4 Electri
Electrical
cal Hazard Warning
Warning
S.13.1 Emerge
Emergency
ncy Off
D: S.13.5 Genera
Generall Hazard Warning
Warning
A
B
C
D
S.13.3 Pin
S.13.3
Pinch
ch Point
Hazard Warning
S.13.3 Pinch Point
Hazard Warning
S.13.8 Operat
Operator
or ESD
Connection Point
Label
Fi g ure S-2 Ma
Machi
chine
ne Fr ont and MHS S afet
fetyy Label
Label Ta
Tagg s
S-10
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
S.13.4 Electr
Electrical
ical
Hazard Warning
Machine Rear View With Covers
S.13.4 Electr
Electrical
ical Hazard
Hazard
Warning
S.13.5
.5 Gen
Genera
erall
S.13
Hazard Warning
S.13.7 Equi
S.13.7
Equipme
pment
nt
Grounding IEC
Lower Console Rear View Without Cover
Fi g ure S-3 Ma
Machine
chine R ea
earr S afet
fetyy Label
Label Ta
Tag s
98888-0000-JB3-01
Safety Information
S-11
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.14.3 FDA Explana
Explanatory/
tory/
Certification Label
S.1
S.14.2
4.2 Equi
Equipmen
pmentt
Identification/Manufacturer’s
Identification Label
S.13.6 Discon
Disconnect
nect Power
Power Label
S.13.4 Electri
Electrical
cal Hazard
Hazard
Warning
Lower Console Front View
(without cover)
Electrical
ical Hazard
Hazard
S.13.4 Electr
Warning
Card Cage Front View
(when cage door is opened)
Clamp Driver Board
Zoom-in Card Cage Front View
Fig ure S-4 Lower Cons ol
ole
e Fr ont S afet
fetyy Label
Label Ta
Tagg s
S-12
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
S.14.1 EFO Box Ordering
Ordering Notice Label
Label
S.13.4 Electri
Electrical
cal Hazard Warning
Warning
S.13.3 Pinch Point Hazard
Hazard Warning
Warning
Upper Console Rear View
(without rear cover)
S.13.9 Berylli
Beryllium
um Product Warning
Warning
Bond Head Link Bottom View
Fig ure S -5 B ond Hea
Head,
d, E FO, and
and MHS S afet
fetyy Label
Labelss
98888-0000-JB3-01
Safety Information
S-13
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.13
S.13.1
.1 Em
Emer
erge
genc
ncy
y Of
Offf
Fig ure S -6 E mergency Off
Off Labe
Labell
•
•
•
Label: Emergency Off Label
Description:
The label further identifies and increases the visibility of the Emergency Off Switch to
make sure that the Trained Operators and Service Personnel are fully aware of its location
and function.
Color: Bl
Black on
on Yel
elllow Ba
Background
S.
S.13
13.2
.2 Bu
Burn
rn Ha
Haza
zard
rd Warni
arning
ng
Haza
ard Wa
Warning
rning L abel
Fi g ure S -7 B urn Haz
WARNING:
HOT TEMPERATURES CAN EXCEED 200°C.
•
•
•
Label: Bu
Burn Ha
Hazard Wa
Warning
Description:
Trained Operators and Service Personnel are warned of hot surfaces in the
t he workholder
area and on the bond head and optics assembly.
Color: Bl
Black on
on Yel
elllow Ba
Background
S.
S.13
13.3
.3 Pi
Pinc
nch
h Poi
Point
nt Ha
Haza
zard
rd W
War
arni
ning
ng
Warning
rning L abe
bell
Fig ure S -8 Pi nch Point Wa
•
•
•
S-14
Label: Pi
Pinch Point Ha
Hazard Label
Description:
Trained Operators and Service Personnel are warned to keep hands and fingers clear
c lear of the
area. This applies to the front areas of the input and output magazine handlers, rear cover
area of the input and output magazine handlers, and on the front of the workholder area.
Color: Bl
Black on
on Yel
elllow Ba
Background
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
S.
S.13
13.4
.4 El
Elec
ectr
tric
ical
al Haz
Hazar
ard
d Wa
Warn
rnin
ing
g
Fi g ure S -9 E le
lectrical
ctrical Haza
Hazard
rd Warning
Warning Labe
Labell
•
•
•
Lab
abel
el:: El
Elec
ectr
tric
ical
al Haz
Hazar
ard
d Warn
arnin
ing
g Lab
abel
el
Descri
Descripti
ption:
on: This
This label
label alerts
alerts Tr
Train
ained
ed Serv
Service
ice Personn
Personnel
el to
to th
thee pres
presenc
encee of high
high volt
voltage
age in
the area
Color: Black on Yellow Ba
Background
S.
S.13
13.5
.5 Ge
Gene
nera
rall Ha
Haza
zard
rd W
War
arni
ning
ng
eneral
ral Haz
Haza
ard Warning
Warning Labe
Labell
Fi g ure S-10 G ene
•
•
•
Label: Wa
Warning, Ge
General Ha
Hazard La
Label
Description:
This label alerts Trained Service Personnel (TSP) to the presence of danger at the
workholder area, Upper and lower console areas when covers are taken out The TSP is
required to follow-up on the related labels (next to the General Hazard Label) and read the
safety information before you try to service
s ervice the equipment.
Color: Black on Yellow Ba
Background
S.
S.13
13.6
.6 Di
Disc
scon
onne
nect
ct P
Pow
ower
er La
Labe
bell
•
•
•
98888-0000-JB3-01
-11
1 Dis conn
connect
ect Powe
Powerr B ef
efore
ore S ervicing L abe
bell
Fig ure S -1
La
Labe
bel:
l: Di
Disc
scon
onne
nect
ct Po
Powe
werr Befo
Before
re Se
Serv
rvic
icin
ing
g La
Labe
bell
Description:
The label notifies Trained Service Personnels that the input power cord of the power
supply assembly must be disconnected before you service the
t he equipment within the lower
console of the machine.
Color: Wh
White on
on Bl
Blue Ba
Background
Safety Information
S-15
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.
S.13
13.7
.7 Eq
Equi
uipm
pmen
entt Gr
Grou
ound
ndin
ing
g IE
IEC
C
Fig ure S -1
-12
2 E quip
quipm
men
entt G roun
rounding
ding IE C Label
Label
•
•
•
Label: Eq
Equipment G
Grroundin
ing
g IE
IEC La
Label
Description:
•
Labe
Label:
l: Iden
Identi
tifi
fies
es th
thee con
conne
nect
ctio
ion
n poi
point
nt for
for inpu
inputt pow
power
er gr
grou
ound
nd
Color: Bla
lacck on White Background
S.13.8
S.1
3.8 Ope
Operat
rator
or E
ESD
SD Co
Conne
nnecti
ction
on P
Poin
ointt Lab
Label
el
Operato
torr E S D C onne
onnection
ction Point Labe
Labell
Fi g ure S -13 Opera
•
•
•
La
Labe
bel:
l: Oper
Operat
ato
or ESD
ESD Con
onn
nec
ecti
tio
on Po
Poin
intt Lab
Label
el
Description:
Label identifies the connection point to attach the ESD wrist strap. This is to avoid
equipment damage from electrostatic discharge.
Color: Bla
lacck on White Background
S.
S.13
13.9
.9 Be
Bery
ryll
lliu
ium
m Pro
Produ
duct
ct W
War
arni
ning
ng
eryllium
ium P roduct Wa
Warning
rning L abe
bell
Fig ure S -14 B eryll
•
•
•
S-16
Labe
Label:
l: Bery
Beryll
lliu
ium
m Produ
Product
ct War
Warni
ning
ng Labe
Label.
l. “BER
“BERYL
YLLI
LIUM
UM PR
PROD
ODUC
UCT
T. HAZAR
HAZARDOU
DOUS
S
DUST PRODUCED WHEN MACHINED, FILED, OR GROUND”.
Description:
Trained Service Personnel are directed to Manual for safety information with parts made
from Beryllium alloy, which can represent a health hazard under certain conditions.
During normal machine operations and maintenance actions, the Beryllium alloy does not
represent a hazard to machine users or service technicians. Refer to ATPremier Plus Stud
Bumper Maintenance Manual, chapter 5: bond head, for more data.
Color: Bl
Black on
on Yel
elllow Ba
Background
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
S.13.10
S.13.1
0 Hard Stop Cauti
Caution
on
A
A
Hard Stop Limit Line
Fi g ure S -15 Hard S to
top
p C aut
ution
ion
•
•
Labe
Label:
l: Hard
Hard Sto
Stop
p Caut
Cautio
ion
n Labe
Label.
l. “HAR
“HARD
D STOP
STOP CAU
CAUTI
TION
ON.. Do n
not
ot ffor
orce
ce bey
beyon
ond
d the
the hard
hard
stop”.
Description:
Trained operators and service personnel are alerted to not rotate the work light beyond the
hard stop as rotation beyond the hard stop will cause damage to the joint on the goose
•
neck. The hard stop location is denoted on the caution label.
Colo
Color:
r: Blac
Black
k and
and whit
whitee ttex
extt o
on
n yel
yello
low
w, red
red,, and
and gr
gray
ay ba
back
ckgr
grou
ound
nd
98888-0000-JB3-01
Safety Information
S-17
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.14 Ident
Identifica
ification
tion Label Descri
Description
ptions
s
The sections below give descriptions of each identification label that includes label location,
color(s) and purpose, meaning, additional instructions, etc.
S.14.1
S.1
4.1 EFO Box Ord
Orderi
ering
ng Not
Notice
ice Lab
Label
el
-16
6 E FO B ox Ordering
Ordering Notice
Notice Lab
Label
el
Fig ure S -1
•
•
•
Label: EFO
EFO Box Or
Ord
dering No
Notice La
Label
Description:
This label tells the trained service personnel to take note of the full part number that
includes the last two digits when ordering a new or replacement EFO Box. It also instructs
them to consult the customer service representative if required.
Color: Bl
Black on beige ca
card stock
S.14.2
S.14.
2 Equip
Equipment
ment Ident
Identifica
ification/M
tion/Manufa
anufacture
cturer’s
r’s Ident
Identificat
ification
ion L
Label
abel
quipment
nt Identificat
Identification
ion Label
Fi g ure S -17 E quipme
•
•
•
S-18
Labe
Label:
l: Equ
Equip
ipme
ment
nt Ide
Ident
ntif
ific
icat
atio
ion/
n/Ma
Manu
nufa
fact
ctur
urer
er's
's Ide
Ident
ntif
ific
icat
atio
ion
n Labe
Labell
Description:
The label specifies the Equipment and Manufacturer's Identification Numbers (model
number, serial number, series and date manufactured), identifies the country of origin, and
indicates CE compliance. It also shows data on the AC power configuration of the system
on the date shipped and informs the customers and trained maintenance personnel of the
expected maximum power consumption of the bonder at listed nominal voltages. It also
directs trained maintenance personnel to consult the Machine Manuals before you try to
reconfigure the system.
Color: Black on gray
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
S.14.3
S.1
4.3 FDA E
Expl
xplana
anator
tory/C
y/Cert
ertific
ificati
ation
on La
Label
bel
Fi g ure S-18 FD A E xpla
xplana
nattory/
ory/C
C ert
ertificat
ification
ion Label
Label
•
•
•
98888-0000-JB3-01
Lab
abel
el:: F
FDA
DA Ex
Expl
plan
anat
ator
ory/
y/Ce
Cert
rtif
ific
icat
atio
ion
nL
Lab
abel
el
Description:
This label specifies that, with the use of Class 1 lasers within, the equipment is considered
a Class 1 Laser Product as classified per international standard EN/IEC 60825-1:2007. It
also specifies that the equipment complies with the US Food and Drug Administration/
Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH) performance standards for
laser products except for deviations as documented in FDA/CDRH Laser Notice Number
50 published on June 24, 2007.
This label, in conjunction with the Equipment Identification Label (FDA/CDRH
Manufacturer's Identification Label), comprise the required US FDA/CDRH label
requirement for Class 1 Laser Products.
Color: Black on white
Safety Information
S-19
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.15
S.
15 Lase
Laserr Saf
Safet
ety
y
N ote
te:: T he da
datta below ap
app
plie
li es to
to K & S m
ma
achi
chine
ness w
wii th se
serr i al num
numb
ber s @@
@@E
E @-@@
@- @@X
X X XX X
whe
herr e @ i s alp
alpha
ha cco
onfi g ura
ur ation iinfor
nform
mati
ati on a
and
nd X i s num
nume
er i c.
LASER SAFETY INFORMATION: Mercury & ChipEncoder
These encoders contain an infrared laser diode or diodes. Emitted invisible laser radiation levels
have been measured to be within the CDRH Class 1 range, which is not considered hazardous;
however, to minimize exposure to the diverging beam, the encoder sensor should be installed in
its operational configuration in close proximity to the encoder scale before power is applied.
•
•
•
•
•
In
Inv
vis
isib
ible
le la
lase
serr rrad
adia
iati
tion
on;; wav
wavel
elen
engt
gth:
h: 85
850
0 nm
nm
Max
Max po
power
wer 2.
2.4 mC
mC CW
CW (4
(4.8 mW CW
CW fo
for Mer
Mercu
cury
ry II™
II™)
All mainte
maintenan
nance
ce proc
procedu
edures
res such
such as cleani
cleaning
ng must
must be
be p
perf
erform
ormed
ed with
with the Micr
MicroE
oE enc
encode
oderr
turned off.
Do not
not ins
inser
ertt any
any refl
reflec
ectiv
tivee surf
surfac
acee into
into the
the bea
beam
m path
path whe
when
n enco
encode
derr is pow
power
ered
ed..
Do no
not aatttempt tto
o se
service tth
he een
ncoder.
MicroE Systems
125 Middlesex Turnpike, Bedford, MA 01730
Serial # XXXXX
Model # Mercury II 1900XY/ZCRS
Manufactured Date: October 201
2011
1
A. Caution - use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
B. This laser product
product is designated
designated as Class 1 during all procedures
procedures of operat
operation.
ion.
•
Non-accessi
ssible Laser Parameters:
•
Wavelength: 850 nm
•
Laser Power: <4.8 mWatts
C. The bond head Z-axis encoder and the XY table X and Y encoders contain a Class 1 laser.
While the encoders are mounted in the bonder, the laser poses no danger to the user or
maintenance technician. However, when the encoder heads are removed and machine power
p ower
is on, the laser light can cause eye damage if viewed directly on axis. Always turn off/lock-out
machine power before you remove the sensor heads from the bond head or the XY table.
D. Under normal usage, there is no user maintenance required or any scheduled maintenance
necessary to the laser encoders. The laser encoders should not be opened and no repair,
service or modification shall be done by customer. Only trained K&S service personnel or
K&S trained customer service engineers are able to service the encoders.
S-20
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
E. Due to the complex
complexity
ity and special tools
tools required for the rep
repair
air,, setup and recalibration, in the event that the X or Y encoder becomes faulty, the repair and/or replacement is
to be done with the return of the complete X/Y table assembly to the factory. In some
instances, and subject to the fault finding results, a trained K&S service engineer may make
the repairs on-site. The repair or replacement of the Z-axis encoder can be done at a customer site but only by a trained K&S service engineer or K&S trained customer service engineer.
F. A bonder with a faul
faulty
ty laser enc
encoder
oder should
should be taken out of service
service for rep
repair
air by a qualified
qualified
service engineer as mentioned above.
G. For customer performed service functions, only K&S trained customer service engineers,
supplemented by K&S supplied calibration tools and maintenance procedures contained
within the equipment's Maintenance Manual, are permitted.
N ot
ote
e: T he da
data
ta below app
pplilie
es to
to K & S m
mac
achi
hine
ness wi
wi th se
serr i al num
numb
ber s @@
@@H
H @-@@
@- @@X
X XX XX
wherr e @ i s alp
whe
alpha
ha confi
confi g ura
ur ation iinfor
nform
mati
ati on a
and
nd X iiss num
nume
er i c.
H. Caution - use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
I. This llaser
aser product
product is designated
designated as Class
Class 1 during
during al
alll procedures
procedures of
of operation.
operation.
•
Non-accessib
sible Lase
serr Par
Parameters:
•
Wavelength: 850 nm
•
Laser Power: <1.5 mWatts
J. The bond head ZZ-axis
axis encoder
encoder contains
contains a class 1 laser.
laser. While the encoder
encoder is mounted
mounted in the
bonder, the laser poses no danger to the user or maintenance technician. However, when the
encoder head is removed and machine power is on, the laser light can cause eye damage if
viewed directly on axis. Always turn off/lock-out machine power before you remove the sensor head from the bond head.
K. Under norm
normal
al usage, there is no user maintenance
maintenance required
required or any scheduled
scheduled maintenan
maintenance
ce
necessary to the laser encoders. The laser encoders should not be opened and no repair,
service or modification shall be performed by customer. Only trained K&S service personnel
or K&S trained customer service engineers are allowed to service the encoders.
L. The repai
repairr or replacement
replacement of the Z-axis
Z-axis encoder can be done
done at a customer site
site but only by a
trained K&S service engineer or K&S trained customer service engineer.
M. A bonder with a faulty laser encoder should be ttaken
aken out of service for repair by a qualified
service engineer as mentioned above.
N. For customer performed service functions, only K&S trained customer service engineers,
supplemented by K&S supplied calibration and maintenance procedures contained within the
equipment's Maintenance Manual, are permitted.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Safety Information
S-21
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.16
S.1
6 Declar
Declarati
ation
on o
off Ex
Exemp
emptio
tion
n
Kulicke & Soffa Pte Ltd declares that our products, i.e. ball bonders, wedge bonders, die bonders
and similar industrial equipment are exempt from the European RoHS (Restriction of Use of
Certain Hazardous Substances) and WEEE (Waste of Electrical and Electronics Equipment)
directives based on the equipment under the not applicable category of “Large-scale, stationary
industrial tools” as referenced in EU Directive 2011/65/EU (RoHS) Article 2§4(d) and Article
3§(3).
Examples of this type of equipment have previously been reviewed by third party evaluators (see
Note 1) who determined that the equipment
equipment reviewed meet the aabove
bove criteria (see Note 2) and, as
such, are deemed to be outside the scope of both European Union (EU) RoHS and WEEE.
N ote
te:: 1) T
TUV
UV R hei
hei nla
nland
nd of N
No
or th A mer i ca
ca,, R oH S & WE E E – Offi
Official
cial le
lettter of exe
exem
mpti on,
K uli
ulicke
cke & Soffa; Sep
Septe
tem
mber 26, 2005
N ote
te:: 2) T
TUV
UV R hei
hei nla
nland
nd of N
No
or th A
Am
mer i ca
ca,, WE E E and R oH S D i r ecti
cti ve A pplica
licab
bi lity tto
o
I ndust
ndustrr i al M
Mac
achi
hine
nerr y; Sep
Septe
tem
mbe
berr 27, 2005
S-22
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
S.17 Shut
Shutdown
down and Start-up
Start-up Procedures
Procedures
In the event of a plant shutdown, bonders must be shut down appropriately. The machine
shutdown and start-up procedures are given below:
S.17.1
S.1
7.1 Mac
Machin
hine
e Shu
Shutd
tdown
own Pro
Proced
cedure
ure
A. Turn “OFF” all heaters (pre-heat, bond site & post-heat) from the GUI.
B. Remove all materials, units, magazines, wires, P-parts, etc from the bonder
bonder..
C. Re-ini
Re-initiali
tialize
ze the workhol
workholder
der..
D. Save Bond Process Programs
Programs (if needed).
needed).
E. Sav
Save
e MD
MDP
P to C:\
C:\ drive
drive..
F. Push the ma
machine
chine off
off button to shut
shut down the machine
machine..
G. Disconnect clean dry ai
airr (CDA) supply line and AC power cord from the AC mains.
H. Wait for machine to cool down to room temperature. Place desiccants on the X/Y motors,
lower console (inside and outside) and heat block. Position the bond headbond head above
the heat block.
I. Place a plastic
plastic sheet
sheet ove
overr the machine
machine to prevent
prevent dust
dust acc
accumulat
umulation.
ion.
J. At this junc
juncture,
ture, inform
inform the personnel
personnel in-charge
in-charge of the site to shut down
down the HV
HVAC
AC (heating,
(heating,
ventilating and air conditioning) system.
S.17.2
S.1
7.2 Mac
Machin
hine
e St
Start
art-up
-up Pro
Proced
cedure
ure
N ot
ote
e: C oo
oorr dinati
dination
on w
wii th faci
facililititie
es is
is e
exxtre
tremely iim
mpo
porr tant
tant tto
o make sur
sure
e tha
thatt there
there iiss smo
smoot
oth
h
transition of the bonders into production.
A. Wait for the production environment to stabilize to the these conditions:
•
•
•
Temperature ~77°F (25°C) or below
low
Relative hu
humidity of
of 4
40
0-60%
Baro
Barome
metr
tric
ic pr
pres
essu
sure
re of 540
540 to
to 810
810 mm Hg (2
(21.
1.2
2 to
to 3
31.
1.9”
9” Hg)
Hg)
B. Remov
Remove
e all desiccants
desiccants from
from the bonder
bonder..
C. Purge the CDA supply (incoming facilities) before you
you connect the CDA supply line to the
bonder.
D. Check the supply (incoming) voltage with a multimeter.
multimeter. This is dependent on the AC voltage
requirement on the machine.
E. Connec
Connectt the AC power
power cord
cord to the AC mains.
mains.
F. Push the machine
machine on button
button to power
power up the
the machi
machine.
ne.
G. Load Bond Process
Process Program.
Program.
H. Inst
Install
all the h
heat
eat block
block & clamp
clamp insert.
insert.
I. Do the bon
bonder
der dry cycle
cycle mode with
with pre-heat,
pre-heat, bond site
site and post-heat
post-heat te
temperat
mperature
ure set-points
set-points
turned “OFF”.
J. Turn “ON
“ON”” pre-heat,
pre-heat, bond site and post-heat
post-heat heaters after suc
successfu
cessfull completi
completion
on of dry cycle.
K. Do the machine setup for producti
production
on qualific
qualification
ation based on customer’s
customer’s standard proce
procedure.
dure.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Safety Information
S-23
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
This pa
pagg e is le
left
ft inte
intentiona
ntionall
llyy bla
blank
nk
S-24
Safety Information
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Table Of Contents
Use of This Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S-1
General Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S-1
Terms and Conventions used in this
this manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-1
Record of Changes
Changes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S-2
Safety Information
Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-1
S.1 General
General - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S-1
S.2 Symbols
Symbols and
and Messages
Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-1
S.2.1 Warni
Warning
ng - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-1
S.2.2 Cauti
Caution
on - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-1
S.2.3 Note - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-1
S.3 Equipment
Equipment-Spec
-Specific
ific Warnin
Warnings
gs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-2
S.4 General
General Precaution
Precautionss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-3
S.5 Trained
Trained Operato
Operators
rs and
and Service
Service T
Techni
echnicians
cians - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S-4
S.6 Servicing
Servicing Electri
Electrical
cal Equipm
Equipment
ent - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S-4
- S-4
S.6.1 Types o
off Electrical
Electrical Haza
Hazards
rds - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-4
S.6.2 Servic
Servicing
ing Po
Power
wer Sup
Supply
ply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-5
S.6.3 Locko
Lockout/Ta
ut/Tagout
gout Pr
Procedu
ocedure
re - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-5
S.7 S.7.1
Safe Use
UUser'
se ofs Heated
He
atedsibilities
Materi
Material
al and
E
Equip
quipment
ment
User's
Respon
Responsibilit
ies for
Pe
Personal
rsonal
Safety
Safety
- - -- -- -- -- ------- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ------- -- -- -- -- -- -- ----- -- -- -- -- -- -- --S-6
S-6
S.8 Potential
Potential Ergono
Ergonomic
mic Hazard
Hazard – Microsc
Microscope
ope Use
Use - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S-6
S.8.1 Servic
Servicing
ing He
Heated
ated E
Equipm
quipment
ent - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-6
S.9 Fire Safety
Safety - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-7
S.9.1 Fire Su
Suppress
ppression
ion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-7
S.9.2 Flamm
Flammable
able M
Mainte
aintenance
nance Supplie
Suppliess - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-7
S.10 Emergency Off Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S-8
S.10.1 Emergency Off Switch Specifications
Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-8
S.10.2 Test Emergency Off Switch Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-8
S.11 Cover Panels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-9
S.12 Machine Emissions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S-9
S.12.1 Ionizing and Non-Ionizing Radiation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-9
S.12.2 Vibration
Vibration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-9
S.12.3 Noise - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-9
S.12.4 Gases,
Vapor,
Dust
- - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- ------- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ----- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ------- -- -- -- -- -- -- ------- -- -- -- -- S-10
- S-9
S.13 Warning
and
Safety
Safety
Labels
S.13.1 Emergency Off - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-14
S.13.2 Burn Hazard Warning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-14
S.13.3 Pinch Point Hazard Warning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-14
S.13.4 Electrical Hazard Warning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-15
S.13.5 General Hazard Warning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-15
S.13.6 Disconnect Power Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-15
S.13.7 Equipment Grounding IEC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-16
S.13.8 Operator ESD Connection Point Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-16
S.13.9 Beryllium Product Warning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-16
S.13.10Hard Stop Caution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-17
S.14 Identification Label Descriptions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-18
S.14.1 EFO Box Ordering Notice
Notice Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-18
S.14.2 Equipment Identification/Manufacturer’s Identification Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-18
S.14.3 FDA Explanatory/Certification Label
Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-19
S.15 Laser Safety - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-20
S.16 Declaration of Exemption
Exemption - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-22
S.17 Shutdown and
and Start-up Procedures
Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-23
98888-0000-JB3-01
Table Of Contents
TOC-1
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
S.17.1 Machine Shutdown Procedure
Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-23
S.17.2 Machine
Machine Start-up
Start-up P
Proced
rocedure
ure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-23
Table Of Contents - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - TOC-1
List of Figures- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LOF-1
List Of Tables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LOT-1
1 Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
1.1 General
General Informa
Information
tion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
Scope - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
MHS Manual
Manual Co
Content
ntentss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-1
MHS Informati
Information
on in Ot
Other
her Man
Manuals
uals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
Safety - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.2 Descriptio
Descriptions
ns - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
General
General - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
Workholder
Workholder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4
Device
Device Indexing
Indexing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
Magazine
Magazine Handlers
Handlers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
1.3 Specificat
Specifications
ions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
1.3.1 Carrier
Carrier Dime
Dimension
nsionss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
1.3.
1.3.1.
1.1
1 J Bo
Boat
at C
Carr
arrie
ierr Dime
Dimens
nsion
ionss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
1.3.2 Magazine
Magazine Dimensi
Dimensions
ons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
1.3.3 Other Specif
Specificati
ications
ons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
1.4 Operator
Operator Contro
Controls
ls - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY OF
OFF
F Switch
Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
Operator
Operator Control
Control Panel
Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-6
Video Monitor
Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9
Signal Light and Audible
Audible Alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-9
1.5 Video and Graph
Graphics
ics Display
Displayss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-1-10
10
1.6 MHS Softw
Software
are Function
Functionss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-1
-1-12
2
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
MHS Configura
Configuration
tion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
MHS Calibrat
Calibration
ion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
MHS Utilities
Utilities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-13
MHS Magazine
Magazine Utiliti
Utilities
es (Wit
(Without
hout Sa
Safety
fety C
Covers)
overs) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
MHS Workholde
Workholderr Util
Utilities
ities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.6.6 MHS Auto
Auto Run
Run Con
Configura
figuration
tion ((Index
Indexing
ing Type)
Type) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
1.6.7 MHS Diagnos
Diagnostics
tics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-17
1.7 Operating
Operating Procedures
Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-1
-1-18
8
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.7.5
1.7.6
Initial
Initial Start–up
Start–up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-18
Load/Unload
Load/Unload Magaz
Magazines
ines Du
During
ring Bo
Bonding
nding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
Stop Auto
Auto Bo
Bonding
nding - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
Clear Leadframes
Leadframes ffrom
rom Ind
Indexer
exer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
Remove
Remove Magazine
Magaziness From Ma
Magazin
gazinee Han
Handlers
dlers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
Bonder/Workh
Bonder/Workholder
older Sy
System
stem Sh
Shutdow
utdown
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-21
1.8
1.8 Pr
Prod
oduc
uctt Co
Conv
nver
ersi
sion
on (Figure 1-17) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-22
1.8.1 Tools/Parts
Tools/Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-23
1.8.2 Replace
Replace Hea
Heatt Bloc
Block
k Inser
Inserts
ts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-23
1.8.3 Load Existing
Existing Proce
Process
ss Program
Program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-24
1.8.4 MHS Material
Material Dimen
Dimension/P
sion/Paramet
arameter
er File
File Handling
Handling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-24
1.8.4.1
1.8.4.
1 Edit Work
Workholder
holder Config
Configuration
uration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-24
1.8.4.2
1.8.4.
2 Edit Ma
Magazine
gazine Handle
Handlerr Parameters
Parameters:: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-25
1.8.5 MHS Operatio
Operation
n Che
Check
ck - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-25
2
Workholde
Work
holderr - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
TOC-2
Table Of Contents
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.1 Abou
Aboutt this
this section
section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
2.2 Desc
Descripti
ription
on - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.2.1 Major Compone
Components
nts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.2.2 Workholder
Workholder Su
Subsyste
bsystems
ms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
2.2.2.1
2.2.2
.1 Puller Assem
Assembly
bly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
2.2.2.2
2.2.2
.2 Front/R
Front/Rear
ear R
Rail
ail Assembl
Assemblies
ies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
2.2.2.3
2.2.2
.3 Prehea
Preheatt Heat Bloc
Block
k Assem
Assembly
bly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
2.2.2.4
2.2.2
.4 Bond Site H
Heat
eat B
Block
lock Assemb
Assembly
ly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7
2.2.2.5
2.2.2
.5 Index/
Index/Tucke
Tuckerr Assem
Assembly
bly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7
2.2.2.6 J Boat MHS Pne
2.2.2.6
Pneumati
umaticc Syste
System
m - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8
2.2.2.7
2.2.2
.7 Indexe
Indexerr Inte
Intermedi
rmediate
ate B
Board
oard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8
2.2.3 Boat Injecti
Injection
on Seq
Sequence
uence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-9
2.2.4 Boat Transfe
Transferr Sequence
Sequence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11
2.2.5 Boat Indexin
Indexing
g and Ej
Ejectio
ection
n Sequ
Sequence
ence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11
2.3 Setu
Setups
ps and Adjustmen
Adjustments
ts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-13
2.3.1 Set-Up Seque
Sequence
nce - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-13
2.3.2 Pulle
Pullerr Pin Se
Setup
tup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15
2.3.2.1
2.3.2
.1 Workho
Workholder
lder G
Gauge
auge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15
2.3.2.2
2.3.2
.2 Puller Pin Se
Setup
tup Sequen
Sequence
ce - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-16
2.3.3 Index Pin/Tuc
Pin/Tucker
ker Eje
Eject
ct Set
Setup
up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-20
2.3.3.1
2.3.3
.1 Index Pin Se
Setup
tup Sequenc
Sequencee - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-20
2.3.3.2
2.3.3
.2 Tucke
Tuckerr Ejec
Ejectt Set
Setup
up Seq
Sequenc
uencee - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-22
2.3.4 Bond Site
Site Heat
Heat Block
Block Ali
Alignmen
gnmentt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-24
2.3.5 Rail Paralle
Parallelism
lism Ad
Adjustme
justment
nt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-27
2.3.6 Preheat
Preheat Heat
Heat Block/B
Block/Bond
ond S
Site
ite Alignme
Alignment
nt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-32
2.3.7 Puller Rack Backlash
Backlash A
Adjustm
djustment
ent - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-36
2.3.8 Heat Block
Block V
Vacuu
acuum
m Senso
Sensorr Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-38
2.4 Work
Workhold
holder
er Calibrat
Calibration
ion Pro
Procedu
cedures
res - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-40
2.4.1 Workholder
Workholder C
Calibra
alibration
tion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-40
2.4.1.1
2.4.1
.1 Introd
Introductio
uction
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-40
2.4.1.2
2.4.1
.2 Do the Workho
Workholder
lder Calib
Calibration
ration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-40
2.4.2 Heat Block Calib
Calibratio
ration
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-51
2.4.2.1
2.4.2
.1 Introd
Introductio
uction
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-51
2.4.2.2
2.4.2
.2 Do the Heat Block
Block Cal
Calibrati
ibration
on - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-51
2.4.3 Tucker
Tucker Eject Calibratio
Calibration
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-52
2.4.3.1
2.4.3
.1 Introd
Introductio
uction
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-52
2.4.3.2
2.4.3
.2 Do the Tucke
Tuckerr Ejec
Ejectt Cal
Calibrati
ibration
on - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-52
2.4.4 Workholder
Workholder C
Calibra
alibrations
tions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-53
2.5 Work
Workhold
holder
er Configu
Configuratio
ration
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-54
2.5.1 Boat/Devic
Boat/Devicee Dime
Dimensions
nsions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-55
2.5.1.1
2.5.1
.1 Boat Dimen
Dimensions
sions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-55
2.5.1.2
2.5.1
.2 Devic
Devicee Dime
Dimensions
nsions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-56
2.5.1.3
2.5.1
.3 Bond P
Plane
lane O
Offset
ffset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-57
2.5.2 Indexing
Indexing Paramete
Parameters
rs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-57
2.5.3 Indexing
Indexing Options
Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-59
2.5.4 Workholder
Workholder C
Configu
onfiguratio
ration
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-59
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
J Boat Indexer
Indexer Assembly
Assembly Removal
Removal and Installat
Installation
ion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-61
J Boat Slider
Slider Ass
Assembl
embly
y Rem
Removal
oval and
and Insta
Installatio
llation
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-66
Preve
Preventive
ntive Mainte
Maintenanc
nancee - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-69
Parts Replacemen
Replacementt Procedures
Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-71
2.9.1 Bond Site/Pr
Site/Preheat
eheat Heat Block Assemb
Assembly
ly Part
Partss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-71
2.9.1.1
2.9.1
.1 Compre
Compression
ssion Spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-71
2.9.1.2
2.9.1
.2 Prehea
Preheatt Heater
Heater Assembl
Assembly
y - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-73
2.9.1.3
2.9.1
.3 Prehea
Preheatt Thermocou
Thermocouple
ple As
Assembly
sembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-75
2.9.1.4
2.9.1.4
2.9.1.5
2.9.1
.5
2.9.1.6
2.9.1
.6
2.9.1.7
2.9.1
.7
98888-0000-JB3-01
Bond Site H
Heate
eaterr Asse
Assembly
mbly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-76
Bond S
Site
ite Th
Thermoc
ermocouple
ouple Assemb
Assembly
ly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-78
Prehea
Preheatt Heat Bloc
Block
k Assem
Assembly
bly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-79
Bond Site H
Heat
eat B
Block
lock Assemb
Assembly
ly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-80
Table Of Contents
TOC-3
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.9.1.8
2.9.1
.8 Preheat
Preheat Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-82
2.9.1.9 Bond Site Mo
2.9.1.9
Motor
tor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-85
2.9.1.10
2.9.1
.10 Preheat
Preheat Lin
Linear
ear Sl
Slide
ide Assembly
Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-86
2.9.2 Puller Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-88
2.9.2.1
2.9.2
.1 Pulle
Pullerr Fing
Finger
er - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-88
2.9.2.2
2.9.2
.2 Pulle
Pullerr Rac
Rack
k - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-89
2.9.2.3
2.9.2
.3 Pulle
Pullerr Moto
Motorr - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-90
2.9.2.4
2.9.2
.4 Pulle
Pullerr Sole
Solenoid
noid - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-93
2.9.3 Index/Tucke
Index/
Tucker
r Part
Parts
s - an
- -d- Pin
- - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2-95
2-95
2.9.3.1
2.9.3
.1
Index
Arm
and
2.9.3.2
2.9.3
.2 Tucke
Tuckerr - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-98
2.9.3.3
2.9.3
.3 Tucke
Tuckerr Soie
Soienoid
noid - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-99
2.9.4 Rail Parts
Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-101
-2-101
2.9.4.1
2.9.4
.1 Index
Indexer
er Mo
Motor
tor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-101
2.9.4.2
2.9.4
.2 X Axi
Axiss Lea
Leadscrew
dscrew Assem
Assembly
bly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-103
-2-103
2.9.4.3
2.9.4
.3 Leads
Leadscrew
crew B
Bearin
earing
g - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-105
-2-105
2.9.5 Sensor Assemb
Assemblies
lies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-106
2.9.5.1
2.9.5
.1 X Reg
Registrat
istration
ion Sensor
Sensor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-106
2.9.5.2
2.9.5
.2 Optic
Optical
al Swi
Switch
tch As
Assembli
semblies
es - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-107
2.9.5.3
2.9.5
.3 J Boa
Boatt Pres
Present
ent Sensor
Sensor Amplif
Amplifier
ier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-109
2.9.6 Indexer
Indexer Flex Cable
Cable A
Assembl
ssembly
y - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-111
2.9.6.1
2.9.6
.1 Pulle
Pullerr Flex C
Cable
able A
Assemb
ssembly
ly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-111
2.9.6.2
2.9.6
.2 Gripp
Gripper
er Fle
Flex
x Cable
Cable Asse
Assembly
mbly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-113
2.9.7 Heat B
Block
lock V
Vacuum
acuum Solen
Solenoid
oid Va
Valve
lve - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-116
3
Magazine
Maga
zine Handle
Handlersrs- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1
3.1 About
About This Section
Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-1
3.2 Descriptio
Description
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3.2.1 General
General - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3.2.2 Major Compone
Components
nts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3.2.3 Magazine
Magazine Handler
Handler Positions
Positions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
3.2.3.1
3.2.3
.1 Input and O
Output
utput Pickup Position
Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-3
3.2.3.2
3.2.3
.2 Input and Ou
Output
tput S
Slot
lot Posi
Positions
tions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.2.3.3
3.2.3
.3 Input Stagin
Staging
g Posit
Position
ion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.2.3.4
3.2.3
.4 Depo
Deposit
sit Position
Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.2.4 Optional
Optional Equ
Equipmen
ipmentt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.2.4.1
3.2.4
.1 Safety Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.2.4.2
3.2.4
.2 Bar Code
Code Re
Readers
aders (Option
(Optional)
al) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.3 Setup
Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-6
3.4 Magazine
Magazine Handle
Handlerr Calibrat
Calibration
ion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
3.4.1 Input/Output
Input/Output Trays Calibr
Calibration
ation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
3.4.2 Input/Output
Input/Output Slot Calibr
Calibration
ation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
3.5 Magazine
Magazine Handler
Handler Config
Configurati
uration
on - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3
-3-13
-13
3.6 Magazine
Magazine Handler
Handler Adjus
Adjustmen
tments
ts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-13
3.6.1 Set-up the Belt
Belt Tension
Tension - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13
3.6.2 Tray Adjustme
Adjustment
nt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15
3.7 Magazine
Magazine Handler
Handler Remov
Removal
al and Insta
Installatio
llation
n - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-1
-3-15
5
3.7.1 Input Magaz
Magazine
ine Handler
Handler - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15
3.7.2 Output Magazine
Magazine Handle
Handlerr - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-21
3.8 Preventive
Preventive Maint
Maintenanc
enancee - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-2
-3-24
4
3.9 Part Replac
Replacement
ement Procedures
Procedures - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-26
3.9.1 Replace
Replace Sen
Sensor
sor Asse
Assemblie
mbliess - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26
3.9.2 Replace
Replace Ca
Cable
ble Assembl
Assemblies
ies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-29
3.9.2.1
3.9.2
.1 Magaz
Magazine
ine G
Gripper
ripper Assem
Assembly
bly Motor
Motor Ca
Cable
ble - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-29
3.9.2.2
3.9.2
.2 Y Axi
Axiss Moto
Motorr Cab
Cable
le - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-30
3.9.2.3
3.9.2
.3 Z Axi
Axiss Moto
Motorr Cab
Cable
le - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-30
3.9.3 Replace
Replace Maga
Magazine
zine H
Handle
andlerr Circ
Circuit
uit Board
Board Assem
Assembly
bly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
TOC-4
Table Of Contents
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3.9.4 Repla
Replace
ce Loa
Load
d Tray Timing Belt
Belt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
3.9.4.1
3.9.4.
1 Repla
Replace
ce Dr
Driven
iven Timing Belt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
3.9.4.2
3.9.4
.2 Repla
Replace
ce Dr
Drive
ive Tim
Timing
ing Be
Belt
lt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
3.9.5 Repla
Replace
ce Loa
Load
d Tray Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35
3.9.6 Repla
Replace
ce Ma
Magazin
gazinee Gri
Gripper
pper P
Parts
arts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.9.6.1
3.9.6.
1 Repla
Replace
ce Ma
Magazine
gazine Grippe
Gripperr Paw
Paw/Paw
/Paw Return
Return Springs
Springs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.9.6.2
3.9.6
.2 Repla
Replace
ce Ma
Magazin
gazinee Stop
Stop Butt
Buttons
ons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-40
3.9.7 Repla
Replace
ce Br
Brake
ake Assembl
Assembly
y - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41
3.9.8 Repla
Replace
ce
Stepper
Mo
tors -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3-44
3-44
3.9.8.1
3.9.8
.1 Ste
Zpper
AxisMotors
Motor
3.9.8.2
3.9.8
.2 Y Axis Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-46
3.9.8.3
3.9.8
.3 Magaz
Magazine
ine G
Gripper
ripper Assemb
Assembly
ly Mot
Motor
or - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-48
4 Electronics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1
4.1 Abou
Aboutt This
This Section
Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1
4.2 Overa
Overall
ll Descripti
Description
on - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --4-2
4-2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
System
System Organizat
Organization
ion - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
Stepper
Stepper Drive
Drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
Sensor
Sensor Hand
Handling
ling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5
DMHS Backpl
Backplane
ane A
Assembl
ssembly
y - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7
4.3 Subsyste
Subsystem/Boa
m/Board
rd Descript
Descriptions
ions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.3.1 Circuit
Circuit Boa
Board
rd Loc
Locations
ations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.3.2 Circuit
Circuit Boa
Board
rd Asse
Assemblie
mbliess - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14
4.3.2.1
4.3.2
.1 DMHS In
Indexer
dexer/Sole
/Solenoid
noid Dri
Driver
ver Boa
Board
rd - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14
4.3.2.2 DMHS He
4.3.2.2
Hex
x Half Steppe
Stepperr Driver
Driver Circuit
Circuit Boards
Boards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15
4.3.2.3
4.3.2
.3 DMHS St
Stepper
epper Contr
Controller
oller B
Board
oard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
4.3.2.4
4.3.2
.4 DMHS Mi
Micro/Tri
cro/Tri Half Steppe
Stepperr Drive
Driverr Board
Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-18
4.3.2.5
4.3.2
.5 Magaz
Magazine
ine Ha
Handler
ndler IInterme
ntermediate
diate Board ((08888
08888-4116-4116-000-xx
000-xx)) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
4.3.2.6
4.3.2
.6 Indexe
Indexerr Inte
Intermedia
rmediate
te Boa
Board
rd (08
(08888-42
888-4226-000
26-000-xx)
-xx) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-21
4.3.2.7
4.3.2
.7 Magaz
Magazine
ine Ha
Handler
ndler Connection
Connectionss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-22
4.3.3 Repla
Replace
ce DMH
DMHS
S Card Rack Circuit
Circuit Boar
Boards
ds - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-23
4.3.4 Replacing
Replacing tthe
he Inpu
Input/Outp
t/Output
ut Mag
Magazine
azine Handl
Handler
er Intermedia
Intermediate
te Boa
Board
rd - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-24
4.3.5 Repla
Replace
ce Ind
Indexer
exer IInterme
ntermediate
diate Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-26
4.4 MHS S
Senso
ensors
rs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-28
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
Sensor
Sensor Type
Typess - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-28
Workholder
Workholder Se
Sensor
nsor Loc
Location
ationss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-29
Magazine
Magazine Handler
Handler Sensor Locat
Locations
ions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-30
Reflective
Reflective Sensor A
Amplifi
mplifier
er Setup
Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-33
4.4.4.1
4.4.4
.1 J Boa
Boatt Pres
Present
ent Sensor
Sensor S
Setup
etup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-34
4.4.5 Sensor
Sensor Statu
Statuss Displ
Display
ay - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-34
4.5 Cab
Cable
le Assembli
Assemblies
es - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35
5 Main
Maintena
tenance
nce - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Abou
Aboutt This
This Section
Section - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-1
Preve
Preventive
ntive Mainte
Maintenanc
nancee Schedule
Schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --5-2
5-2
Spec
Special
ial Too
Tools
ls and Gauges
Gauges - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5
Trou
Troublesh
bleshootin
ooting
g - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5
5.4.1 MHS Workholde
Workholderr and Mo
Motor
tor Cy
Cycling
cling D
Diagno
iagnostics
stics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5
5.4.1.1
5.4.1.
1 Indexer
Indexer Diagn
Diagnostics
ostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
5.4.1.2
5.4.1
.2 Puller Diagn
Diagnostic
osticss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
5.4.1.3
5.4.1
.3 Heat Block Diagn
Diagnostics
ostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7
5.4.1.4
5.4.1
.4 Magaz
Magazine
ine H
Handle
andlerr Diagnostic
Diagnosticss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7
5.4.2 Temperature
Temperature Contr
Controller
oller D
Diagno
iagnostics
stics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8
5.4.2.1
5.4.2
.1 System Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8
5.4.2.2 Any Zon
5.4.2.2
Zonee Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9
5.4.2.3
5.4.2
.3 Zone Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9
5.4.3 Re–Initiali
Re–Initialize
ze MH
MHS
S - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
98888-0000-JB3-01
Table Of Contents
TOC-5
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5.4.4 Maintenance
Maintenance Diagnostics
Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
5.4.5 MHS Toolbar
Toolbar U
Utility
tility Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-14
5.4.5.1
5.4.5
.1 MHS Wo
Workhol
rkholder
der U
Utilitie
tilitiess - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-14
5.4.5.2
5.4.5
.2 MHS Ma
Magazine
gazine Utiliti
Utilities
es - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-16
5.4.6 MHS Manual
Manual Mod
Modee Utili
Utilities
ties - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-16
5.4.6.1
5.4.6
.1 Index Utiliti
Utilities
es - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-16
5.4.6.2
5.4.6
.2 Heat Block Utiliti
Utilities
es - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18
5.4.6.3
5.4.6
.3 Prehe
Preheat
at Blo
Block
ck Util
Utilities
ities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-18
5.4.6.4
.4 Pin U
5-19
5.5 MHS Errors
E5.4.6
rrors
- - - -Utilitie
-tilities
- - -s- -- -- ----- ---- -- -- -- -- -- -- --------- -- -- -- -- -- -- ------- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --------- -- -- -- -- -- -- ------5-21
5.5.1 Error Indicat
Indications
ions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-21
5.5.1.1
5.5.1
.1 Error Recov
Recovery
ery O
Options
ptions Dialo
Dialog
g Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-21
5.5.1.2
5.5.1
.2 Signa
Signall Ligh
Lights
ts and Audible
Audible Ala
Alarm
rm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-21
5.5.2 Error and
and Sta
Status
tus Mess
Messages
ages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-22
5.5.2.1
5.5.2
.1 ”Home Not Fo
Found”
und” or ”N
”Not
ot Out of Ho
Home”
me” Errors
Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-22
5.5.2.2
5.5.2
.2 Materi
Material
al Co
Conditio
ndition
n Error
Errorss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-22
5.5.2.3
5.5.2
.3 Statu
Statuss Messa
Messages
ges - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-23
5.5.2.4
5.5.2
.4 Calib
Calibratio
ration
n Messages
Messages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-23
5.5.2.5
5.5.2
.5 Magaz
Magazine
ine H
Handli
andling
ng Err
Errors
ors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-23
5.5.2.6
5.5.2
.6 Injec
Injection,
tion, Index
Indexing,
ing, aand
nd Eje
Ejection
ction Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
5.5.2.7
5.5.2
.7 Initia
Initializat
lization
ion Errors
Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-28
5.5.2.8
5.5.2
.8 Program Execut
Execution
ion Err
Errors
ors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-29
5.6 MHS–Relat
MHS–Related
ed Bondin
Bonding
g Problems
Problems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-3
-5-30
0
5.6.1 Eye Point
Point Find
Find Fail
Failures
ures - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
5.6.2 Non–Stick
Non–Stick o
on
n Pad (NSOP) Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-32
5.6.3 Non–Stick
Non–Stick on Lead (NSOL)
(NSOL) Errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-33
A Glossary of Terms
Terms & Abbreviations
Abbreviations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - A-1
B IConn J Boat
Boat Wire Bonder MHS
MHS Wiring Diagrams
Diagrams - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B-1
Index - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - INDEX-1
TOC-6
Table Of Contents
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
List of Figures
Figure S-1 Safety LED on the Power Supply - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -S-5
Figure S-2 Machine Front and MHS Safety Label Tags - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-10
Figure S-3 Machine Rear Safety Label Tags - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-11
Figure S-4 Lower Console Front Safety Label Tags - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-12
Figure S-5 Bond Head, EFO, and MHS Safety Labels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-13
Figure S-6 Emergency Off Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-14
Figure S-7 Burn Hazard Warning
Warning Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-14
Figure S-8 Pinch Point Warning Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-14
Figure S-9 Electrical Hazard Warning Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-15
Figure S-10 General Hazard Warning Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-15
Figure S-11 Disconnect Power Before Servicing
Servicing Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-15
Figure S-12 Equipment Grounding IEC Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-16
Figure S-13 Operator ESD Connection Point Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-16
Figure S-14 Beryllium Product Warning
Warning Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-16
Figure S-15 Hard Stop Caution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-17
Figure S-16 EFO Box Ordering Notice Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-18
Figure S-17 Equipment Identification Label
Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-18
Figure S-18 FDA Explanatory/Certification Label - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - S-19
Figure 1-1 The IConn J Boat
Boat Material Handling System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-3
Figure 1-2 “C” Style Magazine Handling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-5
Figure
- - - -(MMI)
- - - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1-7
Figure 1-3
1-4 Operator
Operator Controls
Control Panel
1-8
Figure 1-5 Video Monitor Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
Figure 1-6 MHS Configuration (Workholder
(Workholder and Magazine Handler) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
Figure 1-7 MHS Calibration Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-13
Figure 1-8 Access to MHS Utilities (Manual Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
Figure 1-9 Standard Mag Handler Utilities Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
Figure 1-10 Workholder Utilities Dialog Box
Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
Figure 1-11 Boat Inject Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
Figure 1-12 Clamp Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
Figure 1-13 Heat Block Vacuum Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
Figure 1-14 Access to Auto Run Configuration Dialog B
Box
ox - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-17
Figure 1-15 Access to MHS Diagnostics Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-18
Figure 1-16 Load Magazines on Magazine Handler (Input Magazine Handler Shown) - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
Figure 1-17 Product Conversion Sequence
Sequence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-22
Figure 2-1 Slider Assembly: Major Components
Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
Figure 2-2 Indexer Assembly: Major Components (Front View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-4
- 2-4
Figure 2-3 Indexer Assembly: Major Components (Rear View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
Figure 2-4 MHS Boat Injection Sequence (Top View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-10
Figure 2-5 MHS Boat Transfer Sequence (Top View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-11
Figure 2-6 MHS Boat Indexing
Indexing and Ejection
Ejection Sequence (Top View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-12
Figure 2-7 Workholder Setup Sequence,
Sequence, Sheet 1 of 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-13
Figure 2-8 Workholder Setup Sequence,
Sequence, Sheet 2 of 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-14
Figure 2-9 Workholder Gauge Funtionality for Puller Pin Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15
Figure 2-10
2-10 Install the Workholder Setup and Calibration Gauge Assembly Position - - - - - - - - - - 2-17
Figure 2-11 Install the Workholder
Workholder Setup and Calibration Gauge Assembly at 45o angle - - - - - - - - 2-17
Figure 2-12 Puller Pin Y axis Adjustment
Adjustment (Top View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-18
Figure 2-13 Puller Pin Level 1 Adjustment
Adjustment (Right Side View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-18
Figure 2-14 Puller Pin Level 2 and Level 3 Adjustment (Rear View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-19
Figure 2-15 Puller Pin Level 4 Adjustment (Side View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-19
Figure 2-16 Index Pin Alignment Groove - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-20
Figure 2-17 Index Pin - Y axis Adjustment and Up/Down Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-21
Figure 2-18 Tucker Eject Alignment Surfaces
Surfaces - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-22
98888-0000-JB3-01
List of Figures
LOF-1
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Figure 2-19 Tucker “Raised Position” Adjustment
Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-23
Figure 2-20 Tucker Pin Lower Travel Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-23
Figure 2-21 Install the Workholder Setup Gauge Position (Right Side View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-24
Figure 2-22 Bond Site Heat Block Alignment (Top View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-25
Figure 2-23 Y Value At The Top Right Corner of the GUI Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-25
Figure 2-24 Rear Rail Assembly (Rear View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-28
Figure 2-25 Front Rail Assembly (Front View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-28
Figure 2-26 Install the Rail Width Gauge Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-29
Figure 2-27 Install the Rail Width Gauge and Gauge Pins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-30
Figure 2-28 Rail Parallelism - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-31
Figure 2-29 Install the Rail Width Gauge - 3.6” Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-33
Figure 2-30 Install the Rail Width Gauge at 45o angle (Right Side View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-33
Figure 2-31 Install the Preheat Setup Gauge and the Gauge Pins - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-34
Figure 2-32 Preheat Heat Block Alignment (Top View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-35
Figure 2-33 Puller Rack Backlash - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-36
Figure 2-34 Vacuum Sensor Controller - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-38
Figure 2-35 Workholder Calibration Menu - Remove Material - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-41
Figure 2-36 Workholder Calibration - Install Bond Site Heat Block Gauges/Inserts - - - - - - - - - - - -2-41
Figure 2-37 Workholder Calibration - Heat Block Focus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-41
Figure 2-38 Workholder Calibration - Heat Block Crosshair
Crosshair Alignment (Left - Rear Corner) - - - - - -2-42
Figure 2-39 Heat Block Crosshair Alignment (Right - Front Corner) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-42
Figure 2-40 Workholder Calibration - Remove Heat Bloc
Block
k Gauge/Insert - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-42
Figure 2-41 Workholder Calibration - Install Rail Width Gauge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-43
Figure 2-42 Workholder Calibration - Install the Rail Width Gauge Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-43
Figure 2-43 Workholder Calibration - Install the Rail Width Gauge at 45o angle - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-44
Figure 2-44 Workholder Calibration - Teach Heat Block
Block Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-44
Figure 2-45 Workholder Calibration
Calibration - Pin Touches Bond Site Heat Block Assembly - - - - - - - - - - -2-44
Figure 2-46 Workholder Calibration - Remove Rail
Rail Width Gauge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-45
Figure 2-47 Workholder Calibration - Install Bond Site Heat Block Gauge/Insert - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-45
Figure 2-48 Workholder Calibration - Teach Bond
Bond Height Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-45
Figure 2-49 Workholder Calibration - Remove Heat Bloc
Block
k Gauge/Insert - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-45
Figure 2-50 Workholder Calibration - Install the Workholder Setup an
and
d Calibration Gauge Assembly Position
2-46
Figure 2-51 Workholder Calibration - Install the Workholder
Workholder Setup and Calibration Gauge Assembly at 45o
angle - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-46
Figure 2-52 Workholder Calibration - Install the Gauge Pede
Pedestal
stal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-47
Figure 2-53
Workholder Calibration
Pedestal Crosshair
Focus - -Alignment
- - - - - - -t -(Right
- - - - -Side)
- - - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -2-48
-2-4
-2-47
7
Figure
2-54 Workholder
Calibration -- Gauge
Gauge Pedestal
Alignmen
Figure 2-55 Workholder Calibration - Gauge Pedestal Crosshair Alignment
Alignment (Left Side) - - - - - - - - -2-4
-2-48
8
Figure 2-56 Workholder Calibration - Remove the Gau
Gauge
ge Pedestal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-48
Figure 2-57 Workholder Calibration - Puller move into Input Magazine Handler Area - - - - - - - - - -2-49
Figure 2-58 Workholder Calibration - Remove
Remove the Workholder Setup and Calibration Gauge Assembly 2-49
Figure 2-59 Workholder Calibration - Teach Preheat Heat B
Block
lock Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-49
Figure 2-60 Workholder Calibration - Pin Touches Preheat Heat Block Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-50
Figure 2-61 Workholder Calibration - Remove the Rail Width Gauge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-50
Figure 2-62 Workholder Calibration - Remove
Remove All Calibration Gauges - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-50
Figure 2-63 Workholder Calibration - Install Heat Block IInserts
nserts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-50
-2-50
Figure 2-64 Workholder Calibration - Complete
Complete - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-50
Figure 2-65 Heat Block Calibration - Install Bond Site Heat Block Gauges/I
Gauges/Inserts
nserts - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-51
-2-51
Figure 2-66 Heat Block Calibration - Move Bond Head - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-51
Figure 2-67 Heat Block Calibration - Remove the Heat Block Gauge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-52
Figure 2-68 Heat Block Calibration - Complete - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-52
Figure 2-69 Tucker Eject Calibration - Warning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-52
Figure 2-70 Tucker Eject Calibration - Align the Tucker - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-53
LOF-2
List of Figures
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Figure 2-71 Tucker Eject Calibration - Tucker Tip Extends
Extends 1/16 inches - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-53
Figure 2-72 Workholder Configuration
Configuration Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-54
Figure 2-73 Boat/Device Parameters Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-55
Figure 2-74 Boat Dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-56
Figure 2-75 Hole On Boat End Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-56
Figure 2-76 Device Dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-57
Figure 2-77 Index Parameters Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-57
Figure 2-78 Indexing Options Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-59
Figure 2-79 Workholder Configuration
Configuration Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-59
Figure 2-80 Remove/Replace J Boat Indexer Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-63
Figure 2-81 Remove/Replace J Boat Indexer Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-64
Figure 2-82 Remove/Replace J Boat Slider Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-68
Figure 2-83 Compression Spring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-72
Figure 2-84 Preheat Heater and Thermocouple
Thermocouple Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-74
Figure 2-85 Bond Site Heater and Thermocouple Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-77
Figure 2-86 Replace Preheat Heat Block Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-80
Figure 2-87 Replace Bond Site Heat Block Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-81
Figure 2-88 Remove Preheat Assembly (Front View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-83
Figure 2-89 Replace Preheat Motor - Exploded Rear View - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-84
Figure 2-90 Replace Bond Site Motor - Exploded Rear
Rear View - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-86
Figure 2-91 Replace Preheat Linear Slide Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-87
Figure 2-92 Puller Finger (Front Wall Assembly - Rear View) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-88
Figure 2-93 Puller Rack - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-89
Figure 2-94 Puller Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-92
Figure 2-95 Puller Solenoid - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-94
Figure 2-96 Index Arm and Pin - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-97
Figure 2-97 Tucker - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-99
Figure 2-98 Tucker Solenoid - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-100
Figure 2-99 Indexer Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-102
Figure 2-100 X Axis Leadscrew Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-104
Figure 2-101 X Registration Sensor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-107
Figure 2-102 J Boat Present Sensor Amplifier Controls/Indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-109
Figure 2-103 Puller Flex Cable Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-112
Figure 2-104 Gripper Flex Cable Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-114
Figure 2-105 Heat Block Vacuum Solenoid Valve (XY Table Assembly - Right View) - - - - - - - - 2-116
Figure 3-1 Magazine Handlers Major Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4
Figure 3-3
3-2 Tray
Assembly
(Load
andns
Unload
Trays)
Trays) -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 3-5
Figure
Touching
Benching
Buttons
Butto
(Side View)
3-8
Figure 3-4 Magazine-Sized Gauge and Workholder
Workholder Setup & Calibration Gauge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
Figure 3-5
3-5 Install the Workholder Setup & Calibration Gauge Assembly Position - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-10
Figure 3-6 Install the Workholder
Workholder Setup & Calibration Gauge Assembly at 45o angle - - - - - - - - - - 3-11
Figure 3-7 Install the Workholder Setup & Calibration Gauge - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-12
Figure 3-8 Magazine Handler Configuration Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13
Figure 3-9 Load Tray, Belt Tension Components
Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
Figure 3-10 Remove/Install Magazine Handler
Handler (Input Magazine Handler Shown) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17
Figure 3-11 Input Tray Assembly - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19
Figure 3-12 Cable Routing & Sensors (Input Magazine Handler
Handler Shown - Detail A) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-27
Figure 3-13 Cable Routing & Sensors (Input Magazine Handler
Handler Shown - Detail B)
B) - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28
Figure 3-14 Load Tray Assembly (Exploded
(Exploded View - Bottom of Tray) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-34
Figure 3-15 Bottom Paw/Spring Replacement (Lower
(Lower Jaw Gripper Assembly) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-37
Figure 3-16 Top Paw/Spring Replacement (Upper Jaw Magazine Gripper Assembly Shown) - - - - - 3-39
Figure 3-17 Brake Assembly Replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-43
Figure 3-18 Remove/Replace Z Axis Motor
Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45
Figure 3-19 Remove/Replace Y Axis Motor
Motor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47
98888-0000-JB3-01
List of Figures
LOF-3
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Figure 4-1 Model 3131 Control
Control System Organization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
Figure 4-2 Typical Stepper Motor Control Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
Figure 4-3 Sensor Data Input to Control System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-6
Figure 4-4 DMHS Backplane Board P/N 08888-4000-000-xx,
08888-4000-000-xx, Major Compon
Components
ents - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7
Figure 4-5 Sensor Data Input to Control System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
Figure 4-6 Serial Communications Path - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9
Figure 4-7 Card Rack Circuit
Circuit Board Assembly Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-11
Figure 4-8 MHS Interface Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-12
Figure 4-9 Power Supply Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-13
Figure 4-10 DMHS Indexer/Solenoid Driver Board,
Board, P/N 08888-4032-000-xx,
08888-4032-000-xx,
Major Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-14
Figure 4-11 DMHS Hex Half-Stepper Drivers, P/N 08888-4166-000-xx,
08888-4166-000-xx,
Major Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-16
Figure 4-12 DMHS Stepper Controller Board, P/N 08888-4300-000
08888-4300-000-xx,
-xx,
Major Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-17
Figure 4-13 DMHS Micro/Tri Half Stepper Driver Board, Major Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-19
Figure 4-14 Magazine Handler Intermediate Board Layout, Majo
Majorr Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-20
Figure 4-15 Indexer Intermediate Board
Board Connection Points - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-21
Figure 4-16 Input or Output Interconnect Boards,
Boards, Cable and Sensor Connections - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-22
Figure 4-17 Replace Input or Output Magazine Handler Intermediate
Intermediate Board (Input Side) - - - - - - - -4-25
Figure 4-18 Replace Indexer Intermediate Board
Board (Front View of J Boat Indexer Assembly) - - - - - -4-27
Figure 4-19 Workholder Sensor Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-29
Figure 4-20 Magazine Handler Sensors - Detail A (Input Magazine Handler Shown) - - - - - - - - - - -4-30
Figure 4-21 Magazine Handler Sensors - Detail B (Input Magazine Handler Shown) - - - - - - - - - - -4-31
Figure 4-22 Tray Assembly Sensors - Detail C (Output Tray Assembly Shown) - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-32
Figure 4-23 Reflective Sensor Amplifier Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -4-33
Figure 5-1 Access to Workholder and Magazine Handler Cycling Menus - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5
Figure 5-2 Indexer Motor Diagnostics
Diagnostics Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
Figure 5-3 Puller Diagnostics Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
Figure 5-4 Heat Block Diagnostics Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-7
Figure 5-5 Magazine Handler Motor Diagnostics
Diagnostics Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-8
Figure 5-6 Temperature Controller Diagnostics
Diagnostics Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9
Figure 5-7 Maintenance Diagnostics Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-10
Figure 5-8 Sensor Diagnostics Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-11
Figure 5-9 Access to Workholder and Mag Handler Utilities (without safety cover) - - - - - - - - - - - -5-14
Figure 5-10 Boat Inject Dialog Box - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-15
Figure 5-12
5-11 Heat
Heat Block
Block Vacuum
Dialog Box
- - -Box
- - - -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -5-15
Figure
Dialog
-5-15
-5-15
Figure 5-13 Access to MHS Utilities (Manual Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-16
Figure 5-14 Index Utilities Dialog Box (Manual Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-17
Figure 5-15 Heat Block Utilities Dialog Box (Manual Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-18
Figure 5-16 Preheat Block Utilities Dialog Box (Manual Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-19
Figure 5-17 Pin Utilities Dialog Box (Manual Mode) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-20
Figure 5-18 Error Recovery Options Dialog Boxes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -5-22
LOF-4
List of Figures
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
List Of Tables
Table 2-1 Boat Injection - Puller Pin and Boat Present Sensor Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-9
Table 2-2 Workholder Preventive Maintenance Schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-69
Table 3-1 Magazine Handler Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24
Table 4-1 DMHS Circuit Boards, 3U Circuit Board (Top
(Top Level) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
Table 4-2 DMHS Indexer/Solenoid Driver Board, P/N 08888-4032-000-xx
08888-4032-000-xx - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-14
Table 4-3 DMHS Hex Half-Stepper Drivers, P/N 08888-4166-000-x
08888-4166-000-xx
x - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15
Table 4-4 DMHS Stepper Controller Board, P/N 08888-4300-000-xx
08888-4300-000-xx - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
Table 4-5 DMHS Micro/Tri Half Stepper Board,
Board, P/N 08888-4214-000-xx
08888-4214-000-xx - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-18
Table 4-6 Magazine Handler Intermediate
Intermediate Board, P/N 08888-4116-000-xx
08888-4116-000-xx - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
Table 4-7 Indexer Intermediate Board,
Board, P/N 08888-42
08888-4226-000-xx
26-000-xx - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-21
Table 4-8 Recommended Signal values for output
output signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-34
Table 4-9 MHS Cable Assemblies - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-35
Table 5-1 MHS Preventive Maintenance Schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
Table 5-2 Special Tools and Gauges - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-5
98888-0000-JB3-01
List Of Tables
LOT-1
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Thiss pa
Thi
pagg e is le
left
ft inte
intentiona
ntionall
llyy bla
blank
nk
LOT-2
List Of Tables
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
1
Introduction
1.1
General Informati
tio
on
1.1.1
Scope
This manual contains information for operation, maintenance, setup, and troubleshooting of the J Boat Material Handling System (MHS) used on the IConn High
Performance Wire Bonder. It is the Material Handling System Manual
Manua l of the IConn
Manual Set.
1.
1.1.
1.2
2
MH
MHS
S Ma
Manu
nual
al Co
Cont
nten
entts
The J Boat MHS manual is divided into five (5) sections:
•
Sect
Sectio
ion
n 1:
1: IInt
ntro
rodu
duct
ctio
ion
n
Contains descriptions of the J-Boat MHS equipment, controls/indicators used
in MHS operations, and machine software functions involved in MHS setup
and use. It also includes simple daily MHS operating procedures, and product
conversion procedures.
•
Sect
Sectio
ion
n 2: Work
Workho
hold
lder
er
Covers the workholder subsystem of the J-Boat MHS,
MHS , which transports, heats,
and clamps leadframe or
or other device carriers for bonding. Contains detailed
descriptions of the workholder and provides procedures for setup, calibration,
workholder removal/installation, and parts replacement.
•
Sec
Secti
tion
on 3: Magazi
Magazine
ne Hand
Handle
lers
rs
Covers the two MHS subsystems that handle carrier storage magazines: the
input magazine handler (at workholder input end) and output magazine handler (at workholder output end). Although there are some physical difference
between the subsystems, they are functionally identical. This section contains
descriptions of the magazine handlers and provides procedures for setup, calibration, magazine handler removal/installation, and parts replacement.
•
Sect
Sectio
ion
n 4: El
Elec
ectr
tron
onic
ics
s
Contains a general description of the J Boat MHS electronic control system
and more specific information concerning circuit board locations within the
machine, functions of individual circuit boards in the system, and location/identification of cables, motors, and sensors. Also includes procedures for circuit
board replacement, sensor replacement, and sensor setup.
•
Sect
Sectio
ion
n 5: Main
Mainte
tena
nanc
nce
e
Specifies preventive maintenance requirements for the J Boat MHS and provides error recovery/troubleshooting information. This includes coverage of
IConn software functions that may be helpful when determining the cause of
machine errors.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-1
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
1.
1.1.
1.3
3
MH
MHS
S In
Info
form
rmat
atio
ion
n in Ot
Othe
herr M
Man
anua
uals
ls
The IConn manual set consists of six volumes. In addition to this volume
(described in the previous paragraph), five other publications are shipped with the
machine.
•
IConn Operation Manual
This volume covers machine operation, programming, and use of the many
machine software functions, including calibrations, control parameter definitions,
and programming procedures for the MHS.
•
IConn Maintenance Manual
Provides maintenance information for the machine as a system and for all major
components individually with the exception of the MHS, which is covered in this
volume.
•
IC
ICon
onn
n Oper
Operat
ator’
or’s
s Hand
Handbo
book
ok
Provides operating, maintenance, and troubleshooting information useful to
machine operators. Printed in a smaller format than the other manuals and on
clean-room paper for use at a machine in the production area.
•
IC
ICon
onn
n Inst
Instal
alla
lati
tion
on Gui
Guide
de
Identifies machine operating site requirements and provides procedures for
unpacking, machine installation, and power-up tests. Also includes instructions for
repacking a IConn machine for return shipment.
1.1.4
Safety
The IConn High Performance Wire Bonder with Model 3035 J Boat MHS has
been designed and manufactured
manu factured to operate safely. However,
However, as with any production machine, certain specific and general safety precautions should always be
observed. These are listed in the “Safety Information” section, which immediately
follows the title page of this manual. Other WARNINGS and CAUTIONS have
also been added where appropriate throughout the text of this manual and in the
other volumes of the IConn manual set.
1-2
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
1.2
Descriptions
1.2.1
General
1-1)) is designed for use on
The J Boat Material Handling System (MHS) (Figure
( Figure 1-1
the IConn High Performance Wire Bonder. The MHS performs all functions necessary to move and position carriers and their magazines (automatically or under
user control) during the wire bonding process. The MHS consists of three major
subsystems:
•
Inpu
Inputt Magaz
Magazine
ine Handle
Handlerr (handl
(handles
es inpu
inputt magaz
magazines
ines))
•
Workholder
•
Outp
Output
ut Magaz
Magazine
ine Hand
Handler
ler (han
(handle
dles
s output
output m
maga
agazin
zines)
es)
Input Magazine Handler
Output Magazine Handler
Z Tower Assembly
Z Tower
Assembly
Input Tray
Assembly
Output Tray
Assembly
MHS Electronic
Control System
(DMHS Backplane
Board and other
control system located
in card rack, behind door
J Boat Workholder
(behind cover)
Fi g ure 1-1
1-1 The IC onn J B oa
oatt Ma
Matterial Han
Handl
dling
ing S ys te
tem
m
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-3
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
The input magazine handler stages several multi–slot magazines that contain carriers holding die–bonded devices. Multiple magazines are used to provide sufficient storage capacity of these devices to minimize material replacement time.
Each magazine has a fixed pitch (distance) between carrier slots, but the number
of magazine pitches between adjacent carriers stored in the magazine may vary.
Magazine dimensions and slot pitches must be constant within the same process
batch or lot.
The workholder extracts a carrier from the input magazine and provides the necessary incremental movement and registration into and out of the location where
wires are bonded to devices (bond site). The workholder is capable of locating
each device of the carrier at the bond site with a high degree of repeatability while
providing a high transfer rate to maintain high throughputs.
The center section of the workholder has two heated blocks capable of independent vertical motion: one preheats the device to the temperature required for wire
bond formation; the other maintains device temperature during bonding. The heat
h eat
block lifts devices upwards away from the boat after each index operation. The
bond site heat block holds the device with vacuum during bonding. After the
device at the bond site has been bonded, the heat blocks moves downward to
return the devices to the boat,
boat , the bond site vacuum is switched off, then the heat
blocks continue to move downward to a position where they will not interfere with
the boat or its devices during the carrier index.
Independently programmable heaters are located:
• Pri
Prior
or to th
the
e bon
bond
d sit
site
e ((Pre
Prehe
heat)
at)
•
At the
the bond
bond site
site (Bo
(Bond
nd site
site))
Each heater location has an independent thermocouple and temperature controller circuit to program, measure, and control heater performance. The temperature
controller circuits are all part of a circuit board assembly housed in the lower console card rack.
The output magazine handler stages multiple–slot magazines for ejection of processed carriers. Output magazines are initially empty and accept carriers into the
magazine slots as they are removed from the workholder. Multiple magazines are
used to provide sufficient storage capacity.
1.2.2
Workholder
The workholder consist of the indexer and slider assemblies that provides carrier
handling capabilities for the purpose of wire bonding. The following functions are
available for carrier handling:
1-4
•
Carrie
Carrierr e
extra
xtracti
ction
on from an input
input magazin
magazine
e
•
Devi
Device
ce index
ndexin
ing
g
•
Device
Device vacuum
vacuum clam
clampin
ping
g and positio
positionin
ning
g functio
functions
ns
•
Independent
Independent heat block
block functionality
functionality (raises and lowers
lowers the preheat
preheat or bo
bond
nd
site heat block without affecting the rest of the workholder)
•
Multipl
Multiple
ep
prog
rogramm
rammabl
able
e bond
bond plane
plane levels
levels
•
Carrie
Carrierr ejec
ejectio
tion
n into
into an output
output magazi
magazine
ne
•
Carrie
Carrierr jjam
am detecti
detection
on during
during ejecti
ejection.
on.
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
1.2.3
.2.3
Dev
evic
ice
e In
Inde
dexi
xing
ng
Indexing operations take place whether the bonder is configured to run in an Auto
Run operation (normal operating mode where wires are bonded) or a Dry Cycle
operation (wires are not bonded). Both operations include a Normal Index (automatic) mode and a Manual Index mode. Normal indexing automatically moves a
device via the boat to and from the bond site. Manual indexing requires the user
to select “Index” from the function bar or the MMI to move a device to and from
the bond site.
A Dry Cycle operation also includes a Dry Index Mode that allows the bonder
exercises all parts of the MHS without using magazines and boats.
1.2.4
.2.4
Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne H
Ha
and
ndle
lers
rs
The magazine handlers provide the MHS workholder with input (raw material supply) and output (finished material storage) functions. They stage magazines of
unbonded material for carrier extraction, and magazines with empty slots for
insertion of carriers after bonding. The magazine
mag azine handlers operate under machine
control with no attention required from the user other than to load unprocessed
magazines and unload processed magazines. The user can, however, initiate the
following magazine handling functions:
•
Jo
Jog
gm
mag
agaz
azin
ine
e up
up one
one slot
slot
•
Jo
Jog
gm
mag
agaz
azin
ine
e dow
down
no
one
ne slot
slot
•
Pic
Pick
k up
up mag
magaz
azin
ine
e ffro
rom
m loa
load
d ttray
ray
•
•
Pla
Place
ce maga
magazi
zine
ne on un
unlo
load
ad tray
tray
Mov
Move
e ma
maga
gazi
zine
ne to
to first
first sl
slot
ot pos
positi
ition
on
•
Ent
Entry
ry of maga
magazi
zine
ne hand
handli
ling
ng para
parame
mete
ters
rs
•
Mag
Magaz
azin
ine
e ha
hand
ndle
lerr cal
calib
ibrat
ratio
ion
n
Magazines are manipulated within the magazine handlers by a method referred to
as the "C" style, which reflects the path that the magazine takes from the load tray
to the unload tray (see Figure 1-2
1-2).
). Note that the direction in which the magazines
travel is reversed for the output magazine handler versus the direction they travel
on the input magazine handler.
handler. At the input side, full magazines are placed on
the lower tray (load tray), and when emptied are placed on the upper tray (unload
tray). At the output side,
side, empty magazines are placed on the upper tray (load
tray) and, when filled, are placed on the lower tray (unload tray).
Gripper
Gripper
Magazine
Magazine
(empty)
(empty)
Load Tray
Unload Tray
s
s
e
c
o
r
P
s
s
e
c
o
r
P
Gripper
Gripper
Magazine
Magazine
(contains boats with
unbonded devices)
(contains boats with
bonded devices)
Unload Tray
Load Tray
InputSide
MagView
Handler
Side
View
Output
Mag
Handler
Fi g ure 1-2
1-2 “C ” S tyl
tyle
e Ma
Magg azine Handling
Handling
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-5
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
1.3
Specifications
1.
1.3.
3.1
1
Ca
Carr
rrie
ierr Di
Dime
mens
nsio
ions
ns
1.3
.3.1
.1.1
.1
J Bo
Boat Car
Carri
rie
er Dim
Dimen
ensi
sion
ons
s
Package
Lengt
Length
h
Width
Width
Th
Thic
ickn
knes
ess
s
Devi
De
vice
ce Pit
Pitch
ch
1.
1.3.
3.2
2
J Boat
21
215.
5.9
9 tto
o 304.
304.8
8 mm
mm (8.
(8.5
5 to 12 in
in.)
.)
78
78.74
.74 to 109
109.2
.22
2 mm (3.
(3.1
1 to 4.3
4.3 in
in.)
.)
9.
9.62
62 mm (0
(0.3
.38
8 iin.
n.))
6.
6.4
4 to 152 mm ( 0.
0.25
25 tto
o 6.0
6.0 in.)
in.)
Boatt Index
Boa
Index Hole
Hole P
Pitc
itch
h
12.7
12.7 mm to 38
38.1
.1 mm
mm (0.
(0.5
5 to 1.5 in)
First
First H
Hole
ole to End
End
Minimu
Minimum:
m: n
none;
one; Maximu
Maximum:
m: 1
1.6
.6 iin.
n.
Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne Di
Dime
mens
nsio
ions
ns
Magazine
Width
Wid
th
83.82
83.82 mm
mm to
to 119.3
119.38
8 mm
mm (3.3
(3.3 in to 4.7 in)
Length
Len
gth
215.
215.9
9 mm to 3
305
05 mm
mm (8.5
(8.5 in
in to 12.0
12.0 iin)
n)
Heig
He
ight
ht
50 mm
mm to 178m
178mm
m (2.00
(2.00 in to
to 7.
7.00
00 in)
in)
Slot Pitch5
Maximu
Max
imum
m Ma
Magaz
gazine
ine
1.
1.3.
3.3
3
Dimension
Minimum 10.16 mm (0.4 in)
Max
Maximu
imum
m 5.
5.5
5 kg (12.125
(12.1254
4 Ibs)
Ibs) load
loaded
ed
Ot
Othe
herr S
Spe
peci
cifi
fica
cati
tion
ons
s
For other machine/MHS specifications, refer to IConn Operation Manual and
IConn Maintenance Manual.
1.4
Operator C
Co
ontrols
1.
1.4.
4.1
1
EM
EMER
ERGE
GENC
NCY
Y OF
OFF
F Sw
Swit
itch
ch
Emergency OFF switch (Figure
(Figure 1-3)
1-3) is located on the front face of the upper console assembly (red mushroom switch). The switch removes all power from the
bonder and MHS when pressed (electrically identical to the Main Power switch on
the front of the computer console). However, if latched down it will prevent operation of the main
main power
power switch.
switch.
1.
1.4.
4.2
2
Op
Oper
erat
ator
or C
Con
ontr
trol
ol P
Pan
anel
el
NOTE: The operator control panel
panel is sometimes referred to as the ’Man–
Machine Interface’ or ’MMI’ in IConn manuals.
The Operator Control Panel (Figure
(Figure 1-4)
1-4) is the primary operator interface for both
teaching and operating the machine. The three-button mouse and various key
switches have multiple functions depending on mode, current procedure, machine
status
sta
tus,, etc.
etc.
1-6
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Signal Light Tower
(Hidden)
Main Power Switch
Video Monitor
EMERGENCY OFF
(EOFF) Switch
Control Panel
Mouse
Fi g ure 1-3 Operat
Operator
or C ont
ontrols
rols
•
Thre
Three–
e–Bu
Butt
tton
on Mous
Mouse
e
Moves table in the X and Y axes. Also moves screen cursor to select items on the
graphics display. Three push button switches (part of the mouse) have functions
defined in the graphics display (identified as B1, B2, and B3 in display).
•
[MOTOR STOP]
Disables all servo motors and stepper motors when activated by simultaneously
pressing both of the two (2) switch actuators. Stops machine and workholder
operation. The bonder will drop out of the current mode and enter Standby Mode
when this control is latched. The [MOTOR STOP] button does not remove power
from the PC boards
boar ds or power supply.
•
[SHIFT]
Used in conjunction with other keys to provide additional functions.
•
[INDEX]
This momentary button commands the MHS to perform one index cycle. The
function is valid under conditions determined by the bonder status.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-7
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Wire Feed
Control/Indicator
Air Guide Control/
Indicator
Mouse Buttons
B1, B2, B3
Function Keys
Motor Stop
Run/Stop
Index
Mouse
Auto Index
Alpha Keypad
Numeric Keypad (with Shift
Enter, Escape, and Arrow keys)
Tensioner Control/Indicator
1-4 Operat
Operator
or Control P ane
anell (MMI)
Fi g ure 1-4
•
[AUTO INDEX]
When pressed, commands the MHS to index after bonding of every device. Key
lamp lights when auto index has been selected. Active in Auto mode only.
•
[ENTER]
A momentary push button pressed to enter reference points, bond positions, and
other program information into memory.
• [ESCAPE]
A momentary button pressed to exit the menu displayed on screen and return to
the previous menu.
•
[RUN/STOP]
Pressed to start bonding in auto mode. Key lamp is ON while the machine is
bonding. When key lamp is lit, pressing key stops Auto mode operation and
enables Sequence Stop mode. Sequence Stop mode provides many of the same
operator options as Manual mode. Active in Auto mode only
only..
•
[ARROW KE
KEYS]
Press to move an axis of motion or screen feature (cursor, PRS box sides, etc.)
Active only during some calibrations or teaching procedures, as defined on the
graphics display.
display.
•
Fu
Func
ncti
tion
on Key
Keys
s ([F1
([F1]] - [F1
[F10]
0]))
The function keys are referenced to the virtual buttons displayed at the bottom of
the monitor display. Functions change with machine status. Pressing [SHIFT] while
pressing a function key selects the tool bar function
f unction immediately above the virtual
button that defines
defines that function key.
key.
•
Al
Alph
pha
a Key
Keys
s ((A
A tthr
hrou
ough
gh Z)
Used to enter alpha characters
char acters (for program file name entry, etc.)
•
Air Guid
Guide
e Contr
Control
ol// Indic
Indicato
atorr
Pressing button turns air pressure to air guide ON and OFF
OFF.. LED lights when air
guide is ON.
•
Wi
Wirre Fe
Feed Co
Control
Wire spool rotates to feed wire when button is pressed.
•
Tensi
ension
oner
er Con
Contr
trol/
ol/ In
Indi
dica
cato
torr
Pressing button turns vacuum to wire tensioner ON and OFF.
OFF. LED lights when
vacuum to wire tensioner is ON.
1-8
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
1.4.3
Vid
ide
eo M
Mo
onit
ito
or
The video monitor provides a magnified view of various areas of the device in the
display video window and displays messages, option menus and other program
information. A second window shows a graphical representation of the taught
device, that indicates the locations of reference points, bond pads, leads, wires,
and other device characteristics. Device images are acquired by a solid–state
camera head mounted on the optics housing. Lenses and a system of mirrors
complete the optical system (standard configuration).
Electronic crosshairs in the video window and graphics window on the monitor
screen are used to teach or target reference points and bond positions.
1.4.
1.4.4
4
Si
Sign
gnal
al Li
Ligh
ghtt a
and
nd Au
Audi
dibl
ble
eA
Ala
larm
rm
This unit can be programmed to indicate various operating conditions. Two–,
three–, or four–light units may be fitted depending on machine specification.
Green, red, and yellow lights (standard implementation) will light under the following conditions if signal light programming has not been performed:
•
GREEN:
Normal operation in Auto mode.
•
•
RED:
•
[MOTOR STOP] active
•
Critic
Critical
al system
system error
error (logi
(logic–a
c–acti
ctivate
vated
d emer
emergen
gency
cy off)
off)
YELLOW:
•
PRS eye point
point or VLL
VLL lead
lead non–r
non–reco
ecogni
gnitio
tion
n
•
Miss
Missin
ing
g ba
ball
ll de
dete
tect
cted
ed
•
BITS er
error
•
No maga
magazi
zine
ne in el
elev
evat
ator
or
•
MHS
MHS or
or el
elev
evat
ator
or ja
jam
m
•
Mach
Machin
ine
e mot
motio
ion
n err
error
or
•
RAM parit
rity er
error
•
Logic–
Logic–act
activa
ivated
ted emerge
emergency
ncy off
off cond
conditi
ition
on
•
Heat
Heat bl
bloc
ock
k te
tempe
mpera
ratu
ture
re al
alar
arm
m
An audible alarm is part of the signal light assembly. The alarm can be programmed to sound and alert the operator under some or all of the conditions
listed above. Several sounds are available to indicate different events. Refer to
IConn Operation Manual for information concerning signal light and alarm programming.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-9
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
1.
1.5
5
Vide
deo
oa
and
nd Gr
Grap
aphi
hics
cs Dis
Displ
play
ays
s
The monitor display (Figure
(Figure 1-5)
1-5) is the primary source of machine and program
information. Display content varies depending on mode, current operation and
machine status.
Fi g ure 1-5 Video Mon
Monitor
itor S creen
Unless specific operating routines have been initiated, the information on the
screen will be organized as follows:
•
MODE
Current mode is highlighted on the bar at the top of the screen. Modes are Auto,
Manual, Program, Configure, Calibration, Utilities, Diagnostic, and Sys(tem)
Admin(istration).
•
LIVE
LIV
E VIDE
VIDEO
O AND DEV
DEVICE
ICE GRA
GRAPHI
PHIC
C WIND
WINDOWS
OWS
Two views of the device are present on the monitor screen. One shows video
from the bond site, either live or digitized by the PRS. The other is a graphic representation of the taught device which shows the lead and die reference systems,
wires, operator points, and eyepoints. The views may be exchanged between the
larger and smaller windows in the display by pressing the [F1] key.
•
MENU
ME
NUS
S AND
AND DI
DIAL
ALOG
OG BO
BOXE
XES
S
Provide most optional operations when teaching and operating the bonder. Click
on desired functions within menu to begin them. Dialog boxes appear during
operations to allow the user to set parameters, select operating conditions, and
perform specific actions.
1-10
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
•
CROSSHAIR
The crosshair is an electronic image in both the live video window and device
graphics window that has two purposes. It is used to target reference points to
positively locate reference systems and, secondly, it is used to target bond locations. In the second function the crosshair represents the position of the bond tool
over the device. Since the objective lens and the capillary are not in line above
the device, the distance between them (Crosshair Offset) must be taught to
achieve
achiev
e this alignment.
alignment.
•
AXIS
AX
IS POS
POSIT
ITIO
ION
N INDI
INDICA
CATO
TORS
RS
•
PRS BOX
At the top–right of the screen, X, Y and Z indicators give
g ive the position of the X-Y
table (X and Y axes) and bond head capillary (Z axis) from their ‘zero’ points
(established during machine initialization). The distances are expressed in mils or
millimeters, depending upon the unit of measure selected by the user during
machine configuration.
Active in the live video window when eye
eye points are being taught and during PRS
calibration, the PRS box is a green, outline box centered on the crosshair. The
area enclosed by the box is the scene which the PRS learns so that it can locate
the eye point during operation. The eye point itself is at the geometrical center of
the eye point scene. The size of the box can be changed to suit the scene.
•
OPER
OP
ERAT
ATIN
ING
G INF
INFOR
ORMA
MATI
TION
ON
Several types of operating information
informa tion are present in the display. The name of the
current process program is above the larger device image window. Operator
prompts
andworkholder
instructionsheat
appear
below
process
program name. Temperatures
of
the three
zones
are the
below
the
th e window.
•
TOO
OOL
L BAR
BAR AN
AND
D FUN
FUNCT
CTIO
ION
N KEY
KEYS
S
The tool bar is the upper of two rows of virtual buttons in the lower part of the display.. Function keys ([F1] - [F10]) are defined in the lower of the two rows of virtual
play
buttons. These keys will have different functions depending upon the machine
operating mode.
Selecting a tool bar button will display a menu, enable a function, or start a procedure. The purpose of the tool bar is to provide easy access to functions that are
performed often during machine operation (bond–site illumination adjustment,
MHS operations, relearn bond height, etc.) The tool bar buttons are active during
most machine functions. Tool bar functions can also be selected by
b y holding down
the [SHIFT] key on the control panel and pressing the function key designated by
the virtual button directly below the tool bar button.
To initiate function key options, the user can either press the indicated control
panel function key or select the appropriate
appropriat e virtual button in the display to activate
the desired function.
•
ERR
ER
ROR MESSAGES
When operating, error detection will generate an appropriate message on the
monitor that describes the nature of the problem, and may provide access to software options that will help when correcting the error. Error messages may
describe an MHS malfunction, a defect in the program or device (such as PRS/
VLL teach or find failure), the entry of unacceptable information, a missing wire,
missing ball, or other machine malfunction.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-11
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
1.
1.6
6
MHS So
Sofftw
twar
are
e Fu
Fun
ncti
ction
ons
s
The following MHS functions are programmed or can be accessed through
machine software, using the control panel and graphics displays presented on the
monitor.
1.
1.6
6.1
MH
MHS
S Co
Conf
nfig
igur
urat
atio
ion
n
Dimensions and settings related to the carriers, devices, and magazines used
during
the bonding
operation
entered through
the MHS
configuration
menus.
Workholder
configuration
canare
be accessed
by making
the following
selections:
1-6.) Magazine handler configuraCONFIGURE and [6] WORKHOLDER (See Figure 1-6.)
tion can be accessed by selecting CONFIGURE and [7] MAG HANDLER.
Refer to IConn Operation Manual, Section 5, for descriptions of workholder and
magazine handler configuration menus, dialog boxes, and parameters.
Select #7
Select #6
Press
ESCAPE
(or click on
menu title)
Fi g ure 1-6 MHS C onfig urat
uration
ion (Workholder
(Workholder and
and Mag
Mag azine Handl
Handler)
er)
1.
1.6
6.2
MH
MHS
S Ca
Cali
libr
brat
atio
ion
n
The MHS Workholder Calibration functions can be found in the CALIBRATION
mode > [4] WORKHOLDER (See Figure 1-7.)
1-7.) The following is a brief description of
each function.
•
WORKHOLDER: This function contains several workholder calibrations: pedes-
tal insert focus height calibration, bond height calibration, location of the diagonal center of the bonding area, rail calibration, preheat block height calibration.
•
HEAT BLOCK: Teaches the pedestal bond height position. This calibration is
also part of the Workholder Calibration function. It has been made available as
a separate function so that the user can avoid running the entire workholder
calibration after replacing the pedestal insert.
•
1-12
TUCKER EJ
EJECT: Determines the distance from the index gripper home position
to the index gripper position where the working end of the tucker is aligned
with the outer surface of the output magazine handler side wall.
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Select #5
Select #4
Press [DONE]
Fi g ure 1-7
1-7 MHS C alibra
librattion Menu
Menuss
•
WORKHOLDER CALIBRATION: Displays a dialog box containing the results of all
the
workholder
calibrations.
of the items
in user.
the dialog box are for viewing
purposes
only and
cannot beAllchanged
by the
The MHS Magazine Handler Calibration functions can be found in the CALIBRATION mode > (5) MAG HANDLER (See Figure 1-7.)
1-7.) These functions are:
•
INPUT TRAYS: Establishes locations of the input side magazine trays.
•
OUTPUT TRAYS: Establishes locations of the output side magazine trays.
•
INPUT SLOT: Establishes location of the workholder rails in the Y and Z axes
with regard to the input magazine handler gripper.
•
OUTPUT SLOT: Establishes location of the workholder rails in the Y and Z axes
with regard to the output magazine handler gripper.
•
CALIBRATION RESULTS: Displays a dialog box containing the results of all the
magazine handler calibrations. All of the items in the dialog box are for viewing
purposes only and cannot be changed by the user.
See Section 2: Workholder, for more information concerning workholder calibrations. See
Section 3: Magazine Handlers,
Handlers , for information concerning magazine
handler
calibrations.
1.6.3
MHS U
Uttili
litties
ies
The MHS Utilities are accessed by selecting MANUAL and then [3] MHS UTILITIES.
(See Figure 1-8.)
1-8.) These utilities allow manual control of MHS subsystems. Refer
to Section 5 for more information. Utilities available are:
•
IND
IN
DEX UT
UTIL
ILIITIES
Allow the operator to adjust the number of index cycles, reset the index count,
verify correction, inhibit strip injection, select or stop an indexing mode, park the
index gripper at a safe
safe location, and home the index gripper.
•
HEA
HE
AT BLO
BLOCK UT
UTIL
ILIT
ITIE
IES
S
Allow the operator to position the bond site heat block at an entered offset value
from its raised position and to raise the heat block to bond plane height, lower tthe
he
heat block to carrier clearance height, or home the heat block.
•
PREH
PR
EHEA
EAT
T BLO
BLOCK
CK UT
UTIL
ILIT
ITIE
IES
S
Allow the operator to move the preheat block at its raised position, carrier clearnace position, or home position
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-13
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
•
PIN UTILITIES
Allow the operator to raise /lower/home the puller pin, raise or lower the indexer
pin, and raise or lower the tucker.
Select #3
Press [DONE]
1-8 A cces s to MHS
MHS Ut
Utilit
ilities
ies (Manua
(Manual Mod
Mode)
e)
Fi g ure 1-8
1.6.4
1.6
.4
MHS Mag
Magazi
azine
ne U
Util
tilitie
ities
s (W
(With
ithout
out Saf
Safety
ety Cov
Covers
ers))
The standard Mag Handler Utilities dialog box appears when MAG OPER is
selected from the upper function bar (see Figure 1-9
1-9).
). The functions listed in this
dialog box allow the user to send a command to either magazine handler to perform a single action.
Select #8
Fig ure 1-9
1-9 S ta
tanda
ndard
rd Mag
Mag Han
Handl
dler
er Utilit
Utilities
ies Dial
Dialog
og B ox
NOTE: If the magazine handlers are enclosed within safety covers, the Mag
Handler Utilities dialog box contains ‘Latch’ and ‘Unlatch’ commands in
addition
to those
shown
in Figure
1-9. output
1-9.
These magazine
commandshandler
are used
to
manipulate
the locks
on the
input and
access
doors. Safety covers are optional equipment and will not be present on
all IConn machines.
The Mag Handler Utilities dialog box selections and their function are defined as
follows:
•
[1]]
[1
JOG
JO
G INP
INPUT
UT// OUTP
OUTPUT
UT MA
MAG
G Causes the supply magazine to step to the next
slot.
•
REVERS
ERSE
E JOG
JOG INPUT
INPUT// OUTPU
OUTPUT
T MAG
MAG Causes the supply magazine to step
[2] REV
backward to the previous slot.
•
[3]
[3]
EJEC
EJ
ECT
T INPU
INPUT/
T/ OUT
OUTPU
PUT
T MAG
MAG Causes the supply magazine currently in use
to be placed on the Unload tray.
•
1-14
[8]]
[8
MAG
MA
G SE
SELE
LECT
CTIO
ION
N Toggles INPUT mode or OUTPUT mode.
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
1.
1.6.
6.5
5
MH
MHS
S Wo
Work
rkho
hold
lder
er U
Uti
tili
liti
ties
es
The Workholder Utilities menu appears when W/H OPER is selected from the tool
bar. (See Figure 1-10)
1-10) The functions listed in this menu allow the operator to send
a command to the workholder to perform a single action or call up a dialog box
listing additional commands.
Select DONE to exit dialog
Fi g ure 1-10 Workhold
Workholder
er Ut
Utilit
ilities
ies Di alo
logg B ox
The workholder utilities are defined as follows:
•
•
[1]]
[1
STO
TOP
P IND
INDEX
EXIN
ING:
G: Halts the indexing of carriers through the workholder.
[2
[2]]
PUL
ULL
L BO
BOAT IN
IN:: Causes the workholder to pull a carrier from the input (left–
side) magazine.
•
[3
[3]]
•
[4
[4]]
•
BOAT INJ
INJEC
ECT
T: Opens another dialog box. That dialog box, shown in Figure 1-11,
1-11, allows the operator to set the ON or OFF status of the puller for pulling carriers from the input (supply) magazine into the workholder. Once the
desired setting is made, the user selects DONE which causes the Workholder
Utilities dialog box to appear.
EJE
JECT
CT BO
BOAT
AT:: Causes the workholder to push a carrier into the output
(right–side) magazine.
CLEA
CL
EAR
R WOR
WORKH
KHOL
OLDE
DER:
R: Causes the workholder to remove all carriers.
[5
[5]]
•
[1] BOAT INJECT OFF: Halts carrier injection. No additional carriers are
pulled into the workholder. Those carriers already in the workholder are
processed normally (unless Stop
Stop Indexing is activated) and then ejected
into the output magazine.
•
[2] BOAT INJECT ON: Restores normal operation.
Fi g ure 1-1
1-11
1 B oa
oatt Inject Dial
Dialog
og B ox
•
HEA
EAT
T BLO
BLOC
CK: Allows the user to perform heat block related functions.
Pressing [6] causes the Heat Block dialog box to appear as shown in Figure 112 . Once the desired setting is made, the
t he user selects DONE which causes the
Workholder Utilities dialog box to appear.
[6]]
[6
•
[1] LOWER HEAT BLOCK: Causes the heat block to be lowered to the index-
ing height (i.e., the position below the boat, so as to clear the boat during
the indexing of a device).
•
[2] RAISE HEAT BLOCK: Causes the heat block to be raised to the bonding
height.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-15
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
•
[3] HOME HEAT BLOCK: Causes the heat block to be lowered to the home
position.
Fi g ure 1-12 C lamp Di alo
logg B ox
•
HEAT
HE
AT BLO
BLOCK
CK VAC
VACUU
UUM:
M: Opens the dialog box shown in Figure 1-13
1-13.. The
user may then set the vacuum to On or Off. Once the desired setting is made,
the user selects DONE which causes the Workholder Utilities dialog box to
appear.
[7
[7]]
•
[1] HEAT BLOCK VACUUM ON: Applies heat block vacuum.
•
[2] HEAT BLOCK VACUUM OFF: Removes heat block vacuum.
Fi g ure 1-13
1-13 Hea
Heatt B lo
lock
ck Vacuum Dial
Dialog
og B ox
1.6.6
1.6
.6
MHS Aut
Auto
o Ru
Run
n Co
Confi
nfigur
gurati
ation
on ((Ind
Indexi
exing
ng T
Type
ype))
The type of MHS indexing to be used while the bonder is operating in Auto mode
is selected in the AUTO RUN CONFIGURATION dialog box. This dialog box is
key, (6) CONFIGURE AUTO, and (2) AUTO
accessed by selecting the AUTO mode key,
1-14)) The (6) INDEXING option is selected to change indexing
RUN. (See Figure 1-14
type. NORMAL Indexing should be selected for normal production operations.
Refer to IConn Operation Manual for more information concerning Auto Run configuration.
1-16
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Select #2
Select #6
Select Done
Select Done
Fig ure 11-14
14 A ccess to Auto
Auto Run Config ura
urattion Dial
Dialog B ox
1.6.7
.6.7
MH
MHS
S Diag
Diagno
nost
stic
ics
s
Diagnostic routines related to the material handling system may be accessed in
1-15)) Refer to Section 5 for more information conDiagnostic mode. (See Figure 1-15
cerning diagnostic routines.
•
WORKHOLDER CYCLING: Allows the operator to verify workholder motor opera-
tions.
•
MAG HANDLER CYCLING: Allows the operator to verify magazine handler motor
operations.
•
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER: Diagnostic display for workholder temperature
control system. Useful when diagnosing problems with preheat, bond site, and
•
post–heat heaters.
RE-INITIALIZE MHS: Starts an MHS initialization sequence in which all axes of
motion of the workholder and magazine handlers are moved to home positions.
•
MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTICS: Diagnostic display that shows status of sensors.
Useful when diagnosing problems with workholder or magazine
handler
hand
ler sensor
sensors.
s.
•
98888-0000-JB3-01
BAR CODE DIAGNOSTICS: Diagnostic display that allows the user to test operation of bar code reader (optional) that may be mounted on the input and output
magazine handlers. This option is active only if bar code reader are present on
the machine.
Introduction
1-17
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
#1
SelectSelect
#1
Select
Select
#2#2
Select#3
#3
Select
Select #5
Select #5
Select #1
Select #1
Sensor Diagnostics
(See Section 5)
Sensor Diagnostics
(See Section 5)
Fig ure 11-15
15 A ccess to MHS Diagnos tics Menus
Menus
1.7
Operatin
ting P
Prrocedures
res
The following procedures are those commonly performed when bonding with the
J Boat MHS Model 3035 MHS and IConn Bonder.
1.
1.7
7.1
Init
Initia
iall S
Sttart
rt–
–up
NOTE: This procedure assumes that the machine has been previously set up
and calibrated, and that a process program is avaliable on the hard disk
drive or on a floppy disk for the device and carrier that will be processed.
It is also assumed that the correct P–parts (bond site heat block insert
and preheat heat block insert) for the carrier and device being processed have been installed. If necessary
ne cessary,, install the heat blocks following instructions in paragraph 1.8.4
1.8.4.. Refer to the appropriate kit
installation instruction if it is necessary to install equipment for a different
type of carrier.
CAUTION: Remove all P-parts when prompt to avoid damaging the rails.
A. Perform bonder power–up sequence (refer to IConn Operation Manual).
Manual).
B. Make sure all system pneu
pneumatic
matic gaug
gauges
es indicate adequate
adequate press
pressure.
ure. (Refer to
IConn Maintenance Manual for pneumatic
pneumatic settin
settings.)
gs.)
C. Make sure wi
wire
re feed system
system is correctly
correctly configured.
configured.
1-18
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
D. Load desir
desired
ed process program.
program. The input magazine
magazine handle
handler,
r,
workholder, and output magazine handler are automatically converted to correct positions for selected carrier, device, and magazine. Temperature
Temperature controller states (on or off) and set points will be loaded as part of the program. Allow
at least 30 minutes for the workholder heaters to stabilize at set–point temperatures.
E. Enter “H.B. (heat
(heat block) Operator
Operator Point”.
Point”. Follow instruct
instructions
ions in the display
display.
F. Se
Sele
lect
ct AUTO at top of graphics display.
G. Place magazines containing
containing carriers with
with unbonded devices onto the load tray
of the input magazine handler. Place empty magazines onto the load tray of
the output magazine handler. Make sure that the magazines are correctly oriented to feed carriers into or receive carriers from the workholder and that they
are benched against the magazine handler side plate. (See Figure 1-16).
1-16).
H. Make sure co
correct
rrect process
process program
program name is displayed.
displayed. (See Figure 1-5 for
location.)
I. Ve
Verif
rify
y mast
master
er bond
bond para
paramet
meters
ers..
Z Tower Assembly
Input Tray
Unload Tray
Note:
When placing magazine on load tray
tray,,
make sure magazine is parallel to
front edge of motorised tray and
benched against input side plate
Input Magazines Wall
Magazines
Magazine guide should be set
approximately 1/1 in. (1.5mm)
from end of magazine
Place magazine on load tray
belts. Belts move magazine to
pickup position.
Load Tray
Fi g ure 1-16 Load Magazines
Magazines on Mag
Mag azine Handle
Handlerr (Input
(I nput Ma
Magg azine Handle
Handlerr S hown)
NOTE: If Bond Position was not previously taught, the machine will require that
the user teach the position before it will perform an index. Refer to Section 2 for information concerning MHS Teach.
J. Press [INDEX] to initiate carrier indexing. The input magazine handler picks up
a magazine from the load tray and align the first boat in that magazine with the
workholder. The boat is then pulled from the magazine onto the workholder
rails and indexed to where the bond site heat block raises the first device to
bond height.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-19
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
K. Pr
Pre
ess [RUN/STOP] key on control panel to start automatic bonding. Press
[AUTO INDEX] for automatic indexing (if desired).
1.7.2
1.7
.2
Loa
Load/U
d/Unlo
nload
ad Mag
Magazi
azines
nes Dur
During
ing Bon
Bondin
ding
g
NOTE: If Safety Covers are installed on the magazine handlers, the magazine
handler access doors must be unlatched and opened in order to load/
unload magazines. The door latches are controlled through options on
the Mag Handler Operations menu that can be called up by a tool bar
button.
A. Select MAG OPER.
B. Load additi
additional
onal magazines
magazines of carriers
carriers onto the load tray of the input magazine
magazine
handler and empty magazines onto the load tray of the output magazine handler, as finished magazines are placed on the unload trays (See Figure 1-16
1-16).
).
C. Do not allow the magazi
magazine
ne handler load trays
trays to become empty or operati
operation
on
will be halted.
D. Remove mag
magazines
azines from unload
unload trays. Do not allow the unload
unload trays to remain
full or operation will be halted.
1.
1.7
7.3
Sto
top
pA
Au
uto Bon
ondi
ding
ng
NOTE: This procedure assumes that the operator wishes to halt the auto bonding operation before all carriers in the input magazines are bonded.
A. Select W/H OPER button on tool bar (see Figure 1-10
1-10).
).
B. Set [5] BOAT INJECT. The Boat Inject dialog box appears (see Figure 1-1
1- 11).
C. Sele
Select
ct [1] BOAT INJECT OFF . Select DONE to exit the Boat Inject dialog box.
Select DONE to exit the Workholder Utilities dialog box.
D. Bonding wil
willl continue until
until all remaining carriers
carriers in the workholde
workholderr are bonded
and ejected into an output magazine. No new carrier will be pulled into the
workholder from the input magazine.
1.
1.7.
7.4
4
Cl
Clea
earr L
Lea
eadfr
dfram
ames
es fr
from
om In
Inde
dexe
xerr
NOTE: Use the procedure that follows if bonding has been halted with carriers
in the workholder, and bonding will not be continued.
A. Select W/H OPER button on the tool bar (see Figure 1-10).
1-10).
B. Sel
Select
ect [3] EJECT BOAT from Workholder Utilities dialog box. Carriers in workholder are moved into the output magazine.
C. Sele
Select
ct DONE to exit the Workholder Utilities dialog box.
1.7.5
1.7
.5
Rem
Remove
ove Mag
Magazi
azines
nes Fro
From
mM
Maga
agazin
zine
eH
Hand
andler
lers
s
NOTE: This procedure assumes that bonding is halted and that there are magazines in the magazine handler grippers.
A. Select MAG OPER button on the tool bar (see Figure 1-9
1-9).
).
B. Sel
Select
ect [3] EJECT INPUT MAG. and [7] EJECT OUTPUT MAG. from the Mag Handler
Utilities dialog box.
1-20
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
NOTE: If Safety Covers are installed on the magazine handlers, the magazine
handler access doors must be unlatched and opened in order to load/
unload magazines. The door latches are controlled through options on
the Mag Handler Operations menu that can be called up by a tool bar
button.
C. Remov
Remove
e magazines from
from the load tray and unload tray of the input magaz
magazine
ine
handler.
D. Remov
Remove
e magazines
magazines from the load tray and
and unload tray of the output
output magazi
magazine
ne
handler.
E. Se
Sele
lect
ct DONE to exit the Mag Handler Utilities dialog box.
1.7.6
1.7
.6
Bon
Bonder
der/Wo
/Workh
rkhold
older
er Sys
System
tem Shu
Shutd
tdown
own
NOTE: This procedure secures the bonder/workholder at the end of a shift/day
shift/day..
A. On wire feed system, press the [AIR GUIDE] and [TENSIONER] buttons on the
MMI to turn off air pressure. (AIR GUIDE and TENSIONER LED indicators OFF.)
B. Make sure
sure carriers
carriers are removed
removed from workholde
workholder.
r.
C. Make sure mag
magazines
azines are
are removed from
from magazine
magazine handlers
handlers..
NOTE: The [MOTOR STOP] key has two (2) actuators, and is comprised of two (2)
key switches. Both actuators must be pressed at the same time to activate the Motor Stop function. This arrangement prevents accidental activation of Motor Stop.
D. Pr
Pres
ess
s [MOTOR STOP] (key lamp in [MOTOR STOP] key goes ON.) The bonder
enters Standby Mode.
E. Machine
Machine power may
may be turned off
off at the Main
Main Power circuit
circuit breaker
breaker if desired.
desired.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-21
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
1.8
Product Conversi
rsion (Figure 1-17)
START
Heat block inserts
right type for
boat?*
NO
Install new heat block inserts.
Perform heat block calibration.
YES
Load process program from disk.
disk.
NOTE: If process program
program has
not been taught, refer to IConn
Operation Manual.
MHS Configuration
file for boat on disk?
NO
Enter boat/device/magazine
dimensions and parameters as
needed.
YES
Check MHS operatio
operation
n.
Check/edit MHS parameters and dimensions.
NO
MHS operation OK?
YES
DONE
Fi g ure 1-1
1-17
7 Pr oduct C onve
onvers
rs ion S eq
equen
uence
ce
1-22
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
1.8.1
1.8.
1.8.2
2
Tools/Pa
/Parts
•
Pr
Preh
ehea
eatt B
Blo
lock
ck In
Inse
sert
rt
•
Bond
Bond Si
Site
te Heat
Heat Blo
Block
ck In
Inse
sert
rt
•
M4 x 1 1
1/2
/2”” Sock
Socket
et Hea
Head
d Cap
Cap Scre
Screw
w (SHC
(SHCS)
S)
Re
Repl
plac
ace
e He
Heat
at Bl
Bloc
ock
k In
Inse
sert
rts
s
The following steps show the replacement of the preheat block insert and bond
site heat block insert. This procedure assumes that the workholder has been
cleared of all material, the temperature controllers are on, and the workholder
heating zones are at their operating temperature
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH THE HEAT BLOCK, THE INSERT
INSE RT OR OTHER PARTS
WITHIN THE WORKHOLDER RAILS IF THE TEMPERATURE CONTROLLERS ARE ON. THESE ITEMS ARE EXTREMEL
EX TREMELY
Y HOT AND WILL
INSTANTL
INSTAN
TLY
Y BURN UNPROTECTED SKIN.
controllers
NOTE: In the following procedure, it is assumed that the temperature controllers
are on and the workholder heating zones are at operating temperatures.
A. Turn the temperature controllers off:
1. Se
Sellect [4] CONFIGURE from the mode bar.
b ar.
2. Se
Sellect [4] TEMPERATURE from the Configure mode menu.
3. Sele
Select
ct th
the
e TURN ALL ZONES OFF button in the Temperature Set Points dialog box. While the heat block cools, observe its temperature reported in the
temperature status display on the monitor (see IConn Operation Manual for
location).
WARNING: DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE OR ATTEMPT TO
TOUCH EITHER HEAT BLOCK OR ITS INSERT UNTIL THEY HAVE
COOLED.
B. Remove
Remove the heat block inserts
inserts on the preheat
preheat and/or
and/or bond site.
1. Install
Install a M4 x 38 mm screw
screw into the tapped
tapped hole
hole at the rear edge
edge of the
insert.
2. Use a small
small amount of pressure
pressure to pull
pull the insert
insert to th
the
e front rai
rail.
l. This
action lift up the rear edge of the insert out of the heat block.
3. Remove the insert
insert from the
the heat
heat blo
block.
ck.
C. Insta
Installll the heat block
block insert on the preheat
preheat and/or
and/or bond site.
1. Hold the insert
insert at 45 degrees
degrees angle,
angle, with
with the fron
frontt side points
points dow
down.
n.
2. Install
Install the insert to the heat
heat block unti
untill the notch at it
its
s front-bo
front-bottom
ttom edge
engage to the pin on the heat block.
3. Use a small
small amount of pressure
pressure to
to push the insert
insert down until
until it moves
moves
quickly into the heat block.
D. Remove the screw
screw from
from the insert.
insert.
E. Refer to section
section 2 to calibrate
calibrate the
the workholder
workholder..
98888-0000-JB3-01
Introduction
1-23
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
1.
1.8.
8.3
3
Lo
Load
ad E
Exi
xist
stin
ing
gP
Pro
roce
cess
ss Pr
Prog
ogra
ram
m
A. Click on PROGRAM at the mode bar. Select [1] LOAD/SAVE/CLEAR from the Program Mode menu to clear the current process program.
B. Cl
Cliick on [3] LOAD PROCESS PROGRAM. A dialog box appears listing the available process programs.
C. Scroll thro
through
ugh the list on the display to find the process
process program file for the
device that will be processed. Click on the process program file name. Click on
LOAD to load the program.
D. A message appe
appears
ars in the displaying
displaying stating
stating that the setu
setup
p procedure
procedure must be
performed. Click on OK, then perform setup. Refer to Section 2 of this manual
for Teach
Teach Bond Position
P osition procedure.
E. Press [ESCAPE] key as needed to exit Program Mode.
1.8.4 MHS Mater
Material
ial D
Dimens
imension/P
ion/Parame
arameter
ter File Hand
Handling
ling
When performing product conversion, the user can change MHS configuration to
fit the new product by either using the K&S prepackaged software supplied with
the machine or by editing configuration parameters in Configuration mode.
The prepackaged software eliminates the task of entering each parameter and
dimension separately via the GUI software. It can only be used when the process
program uses a 3.1 inch to 4.3 inch wide boat.
If the prepackaged MHS software does not conform with the boat that will be
used, the user must manually enter MHS dimensions and parameters through
Configure mode. The following paragraphs overview the procedures required to
do this. The dimensions and parameters that reside under the Workholder configuration menu are defined in Section 2 and those that reside under the Mag Handler configuration menu are defined in Section 3.
1.
1.8.
8.4.
4.1
1
Edit
Edit Wor
Workh
khol
olde
derr Conf
Config
igur
urat
atio
ion
n
To edit the configuration of the workholder (see Section
Sectio n 2.5
2.5,, Figure 2-72
2-72):
):
A. Select [4] CONFIGURE from the mode bar.
B. Sel
Select
ect [5] WORKHOLDER from the Configure mode menu .
C. Do the fol
following
lowing from
from the Workhold
Workholder
er menu:
1. Sel
Select
ect [1] DEVICE PARAMETERS. Enter the boat/device dimensions and, as
required, set the index hole at the end of the boat to TRUE or FALSE.
Select APPLY, and then DONE after all changes have been made.
2. Select [2] INDEXING PARAMETERS. Enter the index parameter values. Select
DONE after all changes have been made.
3. Select [3] INDEXING OPTIONS. As required, set the indexing options to yes
or no. Select DONE after all changes have been made.
4. Sel
Select
ect [4] WORKHOLDER CONFIGURATION. As required, set CHECK
DEVICE OVERHEAT and CHECK HEAT BLOCK VACUUM to ON or OFF.
Enter the workholder configuration parameters. Select APPLY, and then
DONE after all changes have been made..
NOTE: All parameters accessed through the Workholder menu selection [5]
RESERVED PARAMETERS cannot be configured by
b y the user.
5. Press [ESCAPE] as needed to exit the Configure mode.
1-24
Introduction
98888-0000-JB3-01
98888 0000 JB3 01
Material Handling System Manual
1.
1.8.
8.4.
4.2
2
Edit
Edit Maga
Magazi
zine
ne Hand
Handle
lerr Para
Parame
mete
ters
rs::
To edit the configuration of the magazine handler (see Figure 1-6).
1-6).
1. Se
Sellect [4] CONFIGURE from the mode bar.
b ar.
2. Se
Sellect [7] MAG HANDLER from the menu.
3. Se
Sellect [1] MAGAZINE PARAMETERS from the Mag Handler configuration
menu. In the dialog box, select INPUT to enter dimensions for the input
only, or BOTH for both magmagazines only,
only, OUTPUT for output magazines only,
azines. Enter values for the magazine dimensions. Select DONE after all
changes have been made to the dialog box.
4. If INPUT or OUTPUT was selected in step 1, open the Magazine Dimensions
dialog box again and select the remaining magazine type (Input or Output).
Enter dimensions for that magazine, then select DONE.
5. Se
Sellect [2] MAG INDEX PARAMETERS. Enter magazine index parameter values. Select DONE after all changes have been made to dialog box.
6. Se
Sellect [3] MAGAZINE SLOT ORDER. Select and define a sequential slot order,
or enter a user–defined slot order, for input and/or output magazines.
7. Se
Sellect [4] MAGAZINE ALIGNMENT. Enter magazine alignment parameter values. Select DONE after all changes have been made to dialog box.
8. Se
Sellect [5] MAG CONFIGURATIO
CONFIGURATION
N. Enter magazine index parameter values.
Select DONE after all changes have been made to dialog box.
9. Se
Sellect [6] MAGAZINE EJECT OPTIONS. Enter magazine index parameter values. Select DONE after all changes have been made to dialog box.
10.Select [7] TEACH INPUT MAG SLOT . Enter magazine index parameter values.
Select DONE after all changes have been made to dialog box.
11. Select [8] TEACH OUTPUT MAG SLOT. Enter magazine index parameter values. Select DONE after all changes have been made to dialog box.
12.Press [ESCAPE] as needed to dismiss all menus.
13.Select SAVE BND button from the tool bar to save the MHS information as
part of the current process program.
1.
1.8.
8.5
5
MH
MHS
S Op
Oper
erat
atio
ion
n Ch
Chec
eck
k
A. Place a magazine filled with sample carriers (same type that will be used in
production) on the input magazine handler load tray.
B. Place an empty
empty magazine
magazine on the output magazine
magazine handl
handler
er load tray
tray..
C. Make sure there is no material in the workholder.
workholder. If there is, click on the W/H
OPER button on the tool
to ol bar. Select [3] EJECT LEADFRAME. The carrier will be
ejected from the workholder output. Select DONE to remove dialog box from
display.
D. Se
Sele
lect
ct MANUAL mode. Select [4] MHS UTILITIES from the Manual mode menu.
Select [1] INDEX UTILITIES.
CONTINUOUSLY
SLY. Select APPLY. MHS operations begin:
E. Se
Sele
lect
ct NORMAL INDEX CONTINUOU
1. The input magazine
magazine handler
handler will grasp
grasp the magazine
magazine on the load plat
platform
form
and position the first slot level with the workholder. The output magazine
handler grasps the empty magazine on the load platform and positions its
first slot to receive a carrier from the workholder.
2. The leadframe
leadframe in the first
first slot is pulled
pulled by the pull
puller
er into the wo
workhold
rkholder
er and
moved to a position where it can be picked up by the index gripper.
3. The index
index gripper moves
moves the first
first devi
device
ce on the ca
carrier
rrier to the b
bondsit
ondsite
e
where it is aligned, positioned, and clamped. The device is unclamped and
the next device is moved to and clamped at the bond site. This continues
until all devices
devices of the carrier have been clamped.
clamped.
Introduction
98888 0000 JB3 01
Introduction
1 25
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4. After the last
last device is unclampe
unclamped
d the tucker on the index
index gripper pus
pushes
hes
the carrier into a slot in the magazine held by the output magazine handler
gripper.
5. The indexing
indexing cycle continues
continues until
until stopped
stopped by the user or until th
the
e input
magazine runs out of carriers.
F. Observe
Observe the magazine handlers
handlers and wo
workholde
rkholderr as they operate. If an error
error is
indicated, note the information given in the error dialog box on screen, then
click on CONTINUE . If the MHS will not continue to operate and the error dialog
box is displayed again, click on ABORT, then refer to the troubleshooting information in Section 5 of this manual.
G. When satisfied
satisfied that the MHS is operating
operating properly or that all opera
operational
tional pro
probblems have been identified, select the WH OPER button on the GUI tool bar.
Select [1] STOP INDEXING from the Workholder Utilities menu. Click on CANCEL
to exit the menu. Select DONE to exit the menu.
H. Sele
Select
ct MAG OPER from the tool bar (see Figure 1-10 ). Select [3] EJECT INPUT
MAG and [7] EJECT OUTPUT MAG to eject the input and output magazines.
Select DONE to exit the Mag Handler Utilities menu. Select W/H OPER from the
tool bar and select [4] CLEAR WORKHOLDER. Use tweezers to remove leadframes from the workholder. Select DONE to exit the Workholder Utilities menu.
I. Adjust magazin
magazine
e dimensions,
dimensions, leadfra
leadframe
me dimensions,
dimensions, and MHS p
paramete
arameters
rs as
needed to correct problems noted while the MHS was operating. Save MHS
configuration when done. Refer to Section 2 for more information.
1 26
Introduction
98888 0000 JB3 01
Material Handling System Manual
2
Workholder
2.1
About tth
his s
se
ection
Here is what you will find in this section:
•
Section 2.2
2.2,, Description
Description,, gives an overview of the J boat workholder and how
it functions with the IConn High Perfromance Wire Bonder. There is also a
brief description of all the major components of the J boat workholder.
•
Each
Each se
sect
ctio
ion
n from
from Sect
Sectio
ion
n 2.3 through 2.9 details the calibration, operating
instructions and maintenance procedures for the workholder:
•
Section 2.3,
2.3, Setups and Adjustments, details the initial hardware setup of
the workholder.
•
Procedures.
Section 2.4,
2.4, Workholder Calibration Procedures.
•
Section 2.5,
2.5, Workholder configuration.
•
Section 2.6,
2.6, Workholder Removal and Installation
•
Section 2.7,
2.7, J Boat Slider Assembly Removal and Installation
•
Section 2.8,
2.8, Preventive Maintenance.
•
Section 2.9,
2.9, Parts Installation Procedures.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
21
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.2
Description
The J boat workholder contains the mechanisms and assemblies to index boats
from the input magazine handler, to the bond site, then onto the Output Magazine
Handler. It also supplies heat to the device, lifts the device from the boat for bonding, and holds the device during bonding at the bond site.
2.
2.2
2.1
Ma
Majo
jorr C
Com
omp
pon
one
ent
nts
s
The major components of the workholder are:
•
Sl
Sliider As
Ass
sembly
This assembly contains the heat block assembly that holds and heat up each
device on the carrier during bonding operation.
•
Bo
Bond
nd Sit
Site As
Asse
semb
mbly
ly
The bond site assembly contains heat block that heats the device to the
temperature necessary for bonding. It lifts up the device to the bond height
and hold down the device during the bonding operation.
Bond Site Heat Block Assembly
Bond Site Heat Block Motor
Bond Site Assembly
Fi g ure 2-1 S lider As s em
embl
bly:
y: Major
Major Compone
Component
ntss
22
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
•
In
Inde
dexe
xerr Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
The indexer assembly contains the mechanisms to move the carrier for
extraction, indexing and ejection.
•
Puller As
Ass
sembly
The puller pin pulls a boat within the input magazine and pulls it into the
workholder.
•
X Regi
Regist
stra
rati
tion
on Se
Sensor
nsor
Finds the leading edge of the boat when is injected into the workholder.
•
Fron
Frontt and
and Rear
Rear Rail
Rails
s
Support the boat as it is indexed
in dexed through the workholder in the X axis direction and in the Y axis direction to the correct boat width.
•
Prehea
heat Ass
Asse
embl
mbly
The preheat assembly contains heat block that increases the temperature
of the device before bonding that is necessary for bond formation (hot processes).
•
In
Inde
dex/
x/T
Tuc
ucke
kerr Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
Indexes the boat through the workholder in the X axis for device bonding
and, once all devices have been bonded, tucks (pushes) the boat into the
output magazine.
•
Air Ma
Manifold
Distributes air pressure from the bonder main manifold to pneumatic
devices on the workholder.
•
Moto
Motorr Ass
Assembl
embliies.
es.
Move the workholder assemblies (i.e, puller, heat blocks and index/tucker)
via leadscrew or rack and pinion drive.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-3
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
J Boat Present
Sensor (Input)
X Registration Sensor
Preheat Heat Block Assembly
Puller Assembly
Index/Tucker Assembly
Rear Rail
J Boat Present
Sensor (Output)
Puller Motor
Indexer Motor
Front Rail
Rail Height Spac
Spacer
er
X Axis Leadscrew
Assembly
PCB Cover
Indexer Intermediate Board
(Hidden)
Rail Height Spac
Spacer
er
Fi g ure 2-2
2-2 Indexer As s em
embl
bly:
y: Major
Major Compone
Component
ntss (F ront View)
2-4
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Index/Tucker Assembly
Boat Present Sensor
Amplifier (Output)
Rear Rail
Front Rail
Boat Present Sensor
Amplifier (Input)
Puller Assembly
Preheat Assembly
Preheat Motor
Fi g ure 2-3
2-3 Indexer A s s em
embl
bly:
y: Major
Major Component
Componentss ( R ea
earr View)
Refer to Section 4 of this volume for information concerning the stepper motor
control system.
2.
2.2.
2.2
2
Wo
Work
rkho
hold
lder
er Sub
Subsy
syst
stem
ems
s
The position and the function of each workholder subsystem are specified in this
section. The subsystems are:
2.2.2.1
•
Pu
Pulller Assem
ssemb
bly
•
Fr
Fron
ont/
t/Re
Rear
ar Ra
Rail
il Ass
Assem
embl
blie
ies
s
•
Preh
Prehea
eatt Heat
Heat Blo
Block
ck Ass
Assem
embl
bly
y
•
Bon
Bond
d Sit
Site
e Hea
Heatt Blo
Block
ck As
Asse
semb
mbly
ly
•
In
Inde
dex/
x/T
Tuc
ucke
kerr Ass
Assem
embl
bly
y
•
J Bo
Boat
at MHS
MHS Pneu
Pneuma
mati
tic
c Sys
Syste
tem
m
•
In
Inde
dexe
xerr Inte
Inteme
medi
diat
ate
e Boar
Board
d
Puller As
Assembly
During the operation, when a boat is sensed by the
th e sensor at the input magazine,
the motor operates the rack and pinion to move the puller assembly in the X axis
direction to the pick-up position in the magazine. At this point, the puller solenoid
de-energizes and the puller pin moves to the up position. The puller assembly
pulls a boat from the input magazine to the preheat site of the indexer assembly
for indexing.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-5
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
It contains the following parts:
•
Puller Finger
Operates in three positions: pin up, pin down and pin trigger position. (The pin
is at up position when pulling a boat from the magazine).
•
Pul
Puller So
Solenoid
Controls the pin up/down position of the puller pin. (The solenoid is de-energized when the puller pin moves up.)
•
Pulle
Pullerr Pin
Pin Se
Sens
nsor
or and
and Fig
Figer
er Flag
Flag
Used to determine the sensor triggering position of the puller pin.
•
Motor
Moves the puller assembly along the indexer assembly in the X axis direction
by the rack and pinion drive.
•
Home Sensor
Detects the home positioin of the puller assembly on the inde
indexer
xer assembly.
2.
2.2.
2.2.
2.2
2
Fr
Fron
ont/
t/Re
Rear
ar Ra
Rail
il Asse
Assemb
mbli
lies
es
The front/rear rail assemblies support and guide the boat as it moves through the
indexer assembly. The width of the front/rear rail is set manually according to the
width of the boat. Each contains the following subassemblies:
•
Fron
Frontt a
and
nd Rear
ear R
Rai
ails
ls
Support and guide the boat as it moves through the indexer assembly in the X
axis direction movement.
2.
2.2.
2.2.
2.3
3
Preh
Prehea
eatt Heat
Heat Bl
Bloc
ock
k Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
The preheat block assembly increases the temperature of the device before it is
at the bond site position. During operation, the preheat motor operates the preheat block in the vertical movement along the linear slider. Before the boat is
indexed, the preheat block is lowered. When a device is at the preheat site, the
preheat block moves up to the "pick up" position to move the device up above the
top surface of the boat for heating. After the device is heated, the preheat block is
lowered and the device is placed on the top surface of the boat. The preheat
block then moved to the home position as detected by the home sensor, and the
device is indexed to the bond site.
Each contains the following subassemblies:
•
Preh
Prehea
eatt Hea
Heatt B
Blo
lock
ck Mo
Moto
torr
Moves the preheat block vertically.
•
Linear Sliders
Allows the heat block to move smoothly in the vertical (V) axis based on the
programmed boat and device dimensions.
•
Base Block
Supports the heat block.
•
Heater Ca
Cartrid
ridge
Heats the heat block site to the temperature set during configuration. (Heat is
provided by a 250 watt element fitted inside the cartridge that operates under
control of a temperature controller circuit.)
•
Thermocouple
Monitors the temperature of the heater cartridge. (The thermocouple is seated
inside the cartridge.)
•
Home Sensor
Detects the home position of the preheat heat block.
2-6
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.2.
2.2.
2.4
4
Bond
Bond Site
Site Heat
Heat Bl
Bloc
ock
kA
Ass
ssem
embl
bly
y
At the bond site, the bond site motor transfers drive to the heat block via the leadscrew allowing it to move vertically along the linear slider. Before the boat is
indexed , the heat block is lowered. Once a device reaches the bond site, the heat
block is raised to heat the device and to lift it to bond height. While the device is
out of the boat, vacuum secures it to the heat block for bonding. Once the device
is bonded, the heat block to the heat block to move to its lower position via the linear slider; vacuum is turned OFF releasing the device onto the boat; and heat
block is moved to the home position as detected by the home sensor.
2.2
.2.2
.2.5
.5
In
Inde
dex/
x/T
Tuc
ucke
kerr Ass
Assem
emb
bly
In operation, the indexer/tucker assembly is positioned in relation to the boat so
that the indexer pin is above an index
index hole. The air cylinder then activates causing the indexer pin to move, via the cross roller way slider, to its down position
and pin the boat. Once pinned, the indexer motor provides drive via the leadscrew
to move the indexer along the X axis linear slide. In this way the boat is moved
from left to right until the all devices are bonded. After the last device is bonded,
the tucker solenoid energizes and the tucker moves to its down position. As the
indexer/tucker assembly moves to the right, the tucker pushes the boat into the
output magazine. If greater than normal resistance to boat motion is detected
during boat indexing or ejection, the index overload sensor will stop the operation.
operat ion.
At this point, the user will be instructed to clear the jam and restart the operation.
•
Indexer Motor
Transfers drive to the indexer/tucker assembly
as sembly via the leadscrew.
•
Li
Lin
near Sl
Sliiders
X Axis - allows the index/tucker assembly to move in the X axis.
Cross Roller Way - allows the index pin to move in the Y axis.
•
Coupling
Couples the indexer motor to the leadscrew. Reduces any misalignment
between the motor and the leadscrew while minimizing backlash.
•
Index Pin
Holds the boat during indexing.
•
Ind
Index
ex Pin
Pin Pos
Posit
itio
ion
n Sens
Sensor
ors
s and
and Fl
Flag
ag
Two sensors detect the current vertical position of
o f the pin: raised position, lowered position with pin engaged in a boat indexing hole, or lowered position
with no boat under the index arm.
•
In
Inde
dex
x Over
Overlo
load
ad Sens
Sensor
or
Detects greater than normal resistance to boat motion during boat indexing
and ejection operations. Too much resistance to boat motion
mot ion indicates the
boat is jammed.
•
A ir C
Cy
ylinder
Causes the indexer pin to move to its down position and pin the boat.
•
Tuc
ucke
kerr Sole
Soleno
noid
id (1
(12
2 vol
volt)
t)
Controls the up and down position of the tucker.
•
Tucker
Pushes the boat into the output magazine once the last device on the boat is
bonded.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-7
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.
2.2.
2.2.
2.6
6
J Boat
Boat MHS
MHS Pneu
Pneuma
mati
tic
c Syst
System
em
The J Boat MHS pneumatic system supply vacuum to the bond site heat block
and supply air pressure to
t o the air cylinder of the index/tucker assembly. Its components are on the workholder and at other position on the machine. Components
of the system are:
•
33-Wa
Way
yV
Vac
acuu
uum
m Sole
Soleno
noid
id Val
Valve
ve
Controls the air pressure supply to the air cylinder that moves the index pin to
its up or down position. It is at the rear of the front wall assembly of the indexer
assembly.
•
Vac
acuu
uum
m Val
Valve
ve Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
Controls the vacuum that holds the device to the bond site heat block. It is on
the right side of the
t he XY table assembly..
•
Vacuu
acuum
m Ge
Gene
nera
rato
torr
Supply the vacuum used at the bond site from an air pressure input. It is on the
upper console assembly.
assembly.
•
Ai
Airr Regulator
Regulates the air pressure input to the J Boat MHS pneumatic system components. It is on the upper console assembly.
•
Heat
Heat Bl
Bloc
ock
k Vac
Vacuu
uum
m Sens
Sensor
or
Monitors the vacuum that holds the devices at the bond site heat block. If no
vacuum or low vacuum is sensed after a device is positioned for bonding, an
error is indicated and machine auto operation is stopped. It is on the interface
panel.
2.
2.2.
2.2.
2.7
7
In
Inde
dexe
xerr Inte
Interm
rmed
edia
iate
te Boar
Board
d
The indexer intermediate board has the following functions:
•
An interface
interface between
between the IConn card rack
rack and
and the Workh
Workholder
older electrical
electrical comcomponents.
•
Supplies
Supplies operatin
operating
g voltage
voltages
s to the motors,
motors, solenoids
solenoids and sensors.
sensors.
The indexer intermediate board is at the front right side of the
t he indexer assembly to
minimize cable routing within the workholder (see Section 4).
2-8
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.2.
2.3
3
Bo
Boat
at IInj
njec
ecti
tion
on S
Seq
eque
uenc
nce
e
During the boat injection sequence, the workholder extracts a boat from the input
magazine and delivers it to the preheat zone through combined motions of the
puller assembly and the input magazine handler. The puller engages a boat within
the input magazine, pulls it out of its slot, and presents it to the X registration sensor. The puller then moves the boat and position the first device in the boat at the
hand-off location (preheat block)(see Figure 2-4).
2-4).
Depending on the conditions of the puller pin and boat present sensors, certain
types of boat injection
injection results can occur from the boat injection
injection sequence. Such
results are defined in Table 2-1
2-1..
Table 2-1 Boat Injection - Puller Pin
Pin and Boat
Boat Present Sensor Conditions
Conditions
Puller
Pull
er Pin
Pin Sen
Sensor
sor Puller
Puller Pin Sens
Sensor
or Boat Present Sensor
Condition
Condition
Boat Injection Result
Boat Detected
Pin Up
Blocked
Move boat to X Registration Sensor
Boat Detected
Pin Not Up
Blocked
Stop or retry the same slot
Boat Detected
Pin Not Up
Unblocked
Stop or retry the same slot
Boat Not Detected
Pin Always Up
Unblocked
Move to the next slot or stop and report
error (Optional)
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-9
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Magazine
Boat Present
Sensor
Boat
X Registration
Sensor
Rear Rail
1. The boat is ready for injection
Puller
2. The puller motor moves the puller finger into the magazine. The puller
solenoid deactivates and the puller
pin moves to the up position.
3. The puller assembly moves to the
workholder. The pin engages one of
the hole in the boat. As the puller
pulls the boat from the magazine, the
boat present sensor detects the boat.
4. The puller moves to the right to the X
registration sensor. This cycle is
repeated until the sensor is blocked
or the software is in the time out
mode. Registration finds the leading
edge of the boat.
5. The puller moves the boat to the preheat block. The pin stays in the up
position until control is transferred to
the index. The preheat block lift up
the device.
Fi g ure 2-4
2-4 MHS B oa
oatt Injection S eq
equen
uence
ce (Top
(Top View)
View)
Preheat Block
2-10
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.2.
2.2.4
4
Bo
Boat
at Trans
ransfe
ferr Se
Sequ
quen
ence
ce
During the boat transfer sequence, control of the boat on the workholder rails is
transferred from the puller assembly to the indexer assembly (see Figure 2-5).
2-5).
Bond Site
Heat Block
Index/Tucker
1. The workholder prepares to begin the
transfer sequence.
2. The puller solenoid activates and
puller pin moves to the down position. The puller moves left to make
room for the index.
3. The index moves left and then pins
the boat at the preheat block.
Fi g ure 2-5
2-5 MHS B oa
oatt Tra
Trans
ns fer Sequence
Sequence (Top View)
2.2.
2.2.5
5
Bo
Boat
at In
Inde
dexi
xing
ng a
and
nd E
Eje
ject
ctio
ion
n Se
Sequ
quen
ence
ce
During the indexing sequence, the boat is positioned in the workholder where the
first device can be picked up from the boat and lifted
lifted to bond height by the bond
site heat block. At the same time, the temperature of the next device in the boat
is raised by the preheat block at the same time). Once the bonding
operation is complete for the first device, the boat indexes to the right and
presents the next device
device for bonding. This sequence continues, and when the
last device on the boat is bonded, the boat is ejected into the output magazine
(see Figure 2-6
2-6).
).
The bonder will stop the indexing or ejection operation if the index overload sensor detects a greater than normal resistance
resistance to boat motion. The software, which
translates this action to be a boat jam at the workholder output, will display an
error dialog box on the monitor. If this occurs, the user should clear the jam and
restart the operation
98888-0000-JB3-01
Workholder
2-11
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
FIRST DEVICE
First Device
1. With the boat held by the index
assembly at the end of the Transfer
Sequence, the heat blocks are lowered. The indexer moves the first
device on the boat to the bond site.
The heat blocks lift up the devices.
NEXT DEVICE ON BOAT
1. When the first device has been
bonded, the heat blocks are lowered. The index assembly moves
the next device on the boat to the
bond site. The heat blocks moves
up to lift up the devices.
2. The index assembly moves its pin
out of the boat index hole. The index
assembly moves to the left to the
next index position and holds the
boat. This position is at the bond
site unless there is no hole to hold.
Next Device
Preheat Block
NEXT BOAT
Bond Site
Heat Block
1.The index assembly moves the completed boat to the right, away from
the bond site.
2.The index assembly lifts up its pin,
moves to the transfer position, and
do the transfer sequence.
3.The index assembly moves the next
boat to the bond site position and do
the sequence for "First Device".
First Device
4.The index assembly lifts up its pin,
releases the boat at the bond site.
The index assembly moves to the
right and lowers the tucker. The
tucker ejects the boat into the output
magazine. The tucker moves up
and the index assembly moves to
the left to the bond site and holds
the boat. The process continues
with the "Next Device on Boat".
Fi g ure 2-6
2-6 MHS B oa
oatt Indexing and Ejection S eq
equen
uence
ce (Top
(Top View)
2-12
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.3
2.3
Se
Setu
tup
ps an
and
d Adjus
djustm
tmen
entts
2.3.1
.3.1
Se
Sett-Up
Up Seq
eque
uen
nce
The flowchart in Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8 shows a suggested set–up sequence
for the workholder that should be followed after the machine is first installed. Note
that the area within the dash–line box contains operations that should be performed whenever the type of carrier or device used in production is changed. The
rest of the operations on the flowchart should only be necessary after disassemble/assemble the workholder or after the machine is moved to a different location.
START
Puller Pin
engage
correctly?
NO
Do the Puller Pin setup.
See paragraph 2.3.2
NO
Do the Index Pin setup.
See paragraph 2.3.3.1
NO
Do the Bond Site Heat
Block Alignment.
See paragraph 2.3.4
NO
Do the Rail Parallelism
Adjustment.
See paragraph 2.3.5
YES
Index Pin
engage
correctly?
YES
Teach Tucker Eject Position.
See paragraph 2.3.3.2.
Bond
Site Heat Block
aligned with optical
crosshair?
YES
Is
the Rails
parallel?
YES
A
Fi g ure 2-7
2-7 Workhold
Workholder
er S et
etup
up Sequence,
Sequence, S hee
heett 1 of 2
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-13
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
A
Preheat
Heat Block aligned
with Rails and Bond
Site?
NO
Do the Preheat Heat Block/ Bond
Site Alignment.
See paragraph 2.3.6
YES
Do the Workholder Calibrations. See paragraph 2.4.
Correct
Heat Block Inserts
installed?
NO
Install new Heat Block
Inserts.
YES
Enter MHS configuration
parameter values and select
MHS options.
See paragraph 2.5
Carrier/Device
Carrier/
Device S pecific
repeat each time carrier or
device type is changed.
Teach carrier bonding
position.
DONE
Fi g ure 2-8
2-8 Work hold
holder
er Setup S eque
equence,
nce, Shee
S heett 2 of
of 2
2-14
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.3.2
.3.2
Pul
ulle
lerr Pin Setup
etup
2.3
.3..2.1
Workholder Gauge
The puller pin setup procedure uses the workholder setup and calibration gauge
assembly K&S P/N: 03035-0501-000-XX. The part of the gauge used to set up
the puller pin is divided into four levels. Each level is individually referenced
during this procedure as to where the top
to p surface of the puller pin must be on that
level. The holes in the gauge are used to engage the tip of the puller pin as it travels through
in the gauge. Figure 2-9 shows the part of the gauge used and
identifies
itsthe
fourslot
levels.
Rear Rail
Workholder Gauge
(T
(Top
op View)
Vie w)
Puller Pin
(Beneath Gauge in Slot)
Front Rail
Top View
Level 1
Puller Pin Up
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Puller Pin Down
Puller Pin
Puller Pin
Sensior ON Sensor OFF
Level 1
Puller Pin Up
Level 2
Puller Pin
Sensior ON
Level 3
Puller Pin
Sensor OFF
Level 4
Puller Pin Down
2-9 Workhold
Workholder
er Ga
G aug e Funtiona
Funtionalit
lityy for Puller
Puller Pi n S et
etup
up
Fi g ure 2-9
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-15
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.
2.3.
3.2.
2.2
2
Pull
Puller
er Pi
Pin
n Setu
Setup
p Sequ
Sequen
ence
ce
The purpose of this adjustment is to make sure that the puller pin is engaged to
the correct hole in the gauge. The adjustment is necessary, only when the
machine is first installed or if the puller pin is disassembled. It is not necessary to
do this adjustment at any other time.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Workholder
Workholder setup and calibration
calibration gauge assembl
assembly
y (P/
(P/N:
N: 0
03035-05
3035-0501-000
01-000-XX)
-XX)
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Turn temperature controllers OFF:
1. Sel
Select
ect [4] CONFIGURE from the mode bar.
2. Select [4] TEMPERATURE from the Configure mode menu.
3. Sele
Select
ct th
the
e TURN ALL ZONES OFF button from the "Temperature Set Points"
dialog box. While the heat blocks cool down, observe their temperature at
the temperature status display on the monitor.
4. Sel
Select
ect DONE when the heat blocks cool down to close the dialog box.
5. Pu
Push
sh th
the
e [ESCAPE] button to exit the Configure mode.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE
WITH
THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED
DOWN.
B. Move the puller
puller to home
home position:
position:
1. Sel
Select
ect [2] MANUAL from the mode bar.
2. Sel
Select
ect [3] MHS UTILITIES from the Manual menu.
3. Sel
Select
ect [4] PIN UTILITIES from the MHS Utilities menu.
4. Sel
Select
ect HOME PULLER from the Pin Utilities menu.
5. Select APPLY to move the puller to home position.
6. Sel
Select
ect DONE to close the dialog box.
C. Displ
Display
ay the
the sensor
sensor panel:
panel:
1. Sel
Select
ect [7] DIAGNOSTIC from the mode bar.
2. Sel
Select
ect [5] MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTICS from the Diagnostic mode menu.
3. Sel
Select
ect [1] SENSOR from the Maintenance Diagnostics menu.
4. Moni
Monito
torr tthe
he PULLER PIN sensor on the Sensor Diagnostics panel while
doing the puller pin adjustments.
D. Put workhol
workholder
der setup and calibration
calibration gauge
gauge assembly between
between the rails (se
(see
e
2-12).
).
Figure 2-10 and Figure 2-12
WARNING: DO NOT DAMAGE THE REAR RAIL BOAT BIAS SPRING WHEN YOU
PUT THE WORKHOLDER SETUP AND CALIBRATION GAUGE
ASSEMBLY BETWEEN THE RAILS.
1. Make sure
sure that the index
index slot of the
the gauge is o
on
n the right
right side, point
point
towards the Output Magazine Handler Assembly (see Figure 2-10).
2-10).
2-16
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Rear Rail
Output Magazine
Handler Assembly
Front Rail
Index slot on the
right side.
Fi g ure 2-10
2-10 Ins ta
tall
ll th
the
e Workholde
Workholderr S et
etup
up and
and Calibrat
Calibration
ion G aug e As s em
embl
blyy P os
osition
ition
2. Hold
Hold the
the gau
gauge
ge at
at 45o angle (rear edge down) and put the rear edge of the
gauge on the rear rail (see Figure 2-1
2- 11).
3. Without
Without moving the gauge
gauge forward,
forward, slowly
slowly lower the
the gauge until
until it is on the
front rail (see Figure 2-11).
2-11).
4. Make sure that
that the gauge
gauge can move
move along the rrails
ails with
with small resista
resistance.
nce.
Gauge at 45o angle
Front Rail
Rear Rail
Fi g ure 2-11
2-11 Ins ta
tall
ll the Work hold
holder
er S et
etup
up and
and Calibration
Calibration G aug e As s em
embly
bly at
at 45o angle
E. Move the gauge
gauge to the left and let the puller
puller pin move in the oval slot
slot on the left
front side of the gauge. As the puller pin moves in the slot, make sure that it is
in center position. If not:
1. Loosen the
the two M2 screws
screws at the left
left sid
side
e of the pull
puller
er solenoid
solenoid (see Figure
2-12).
2-12
).
2. Adjust the puller
puller pin in the Y-axis
Y-axis direction
direction (front
(front and back) until
until the pin is in
the center position when it moves in the slot of the gauge.
3. Tig
ight
hten
en the
the screw
screws.
s.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-17
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
.
Puller Pin
2x M2 Screws
Puller Pin Solenoid
Fi g ure 2-12 Pulle
Pullerr Pi n Y axis
axis A djus
djustm
tment
ent (Top View)
F. Disconnect
Disconnect the pull
puller
er pin solenoid
solenoid cable at connector
connector J2 on the puller
puller assemassembly circuit board.
NOTE: If necessary,
necessary, refer to Figure 2-9 while doing the following “LEVEL”
adjustments.
2-13).
G. Do the LEVEL
LEVEL 1 (Puller
(Puller Pin UP)
UP) adjustment
adjustment (see Figure 2-13).
1. Set the position
position of the
the puller pin
pin tip below
below level 1 of
of the gauge.
gauge.
2. Turn the
the M3 set screw
screw above the
the pulle
pullerr pin solen
solenoid
oid to adjust
adjust the tip of
of the
puller pin until it touches level 1.
M3 Set Screw
Puller Pin Solenoid
Fi g ure 2-13 P ul
ulle
lerr Pi n Level
Level 1 Adjus tm
tment
ent (R ig ht S ide View)
2-18
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
H. Do the LEVEL 2 (Pu
(Puller
ller Pin Sensor
Sensor ON) adj
adjustment
ustment (see
(see Figure 214).
14
).
1. Move the gauge
gauge until the
the tip of the puller
puller pi
pin
n touches level
level 2.
2. Look
Look fo
forr th
the
e PULLER PIN sensor display on the Sensor Diagnostic dialog
box, loosen the sensor flag mounting screw and adjust the puller pin sensor flag until the sensor turns ON.
3. Tighten
Tighten the sensor flag mountin
mounting
g screw.
screw.
Puller Pin Sensor Flag
Puller Pin Sensor
Sensor Flag Mounting Screw
2-14 P ull
uller
er Pi n Level 2 and
and Level 3 Adjus tm
tment
ent (R ea
earr View)
Fi g ure 2-14
I. Do the LEVEL
LEVEL 3 (Pulle
(Pullerr Pin Sensor
Sensor OF
OFF)
F) adj
adjustm
ustment
ent (s
(see
ee Figure 2-14
2-14).
).
1. Move the gauge
gauge until the
the tip of the puller
puller pi
pin
n touches level
level 3.
2. Manually
Manually push th
the
e puller pin
pin down to get
get into this position
position..
3. Make
Make sur
sure
e that
that the
the PULLER PIN sensor display in the Sensor Diagnostic dialog box is OFF. If not, adjust the sensor flag until the sensor turns OFF.
H.)) and Level 3 (step I.
I.)) adjustments. Make
4. Do a check
check for
for Level
Level 2 (step
(step H.
sure that the adjustments are adjusted correctly.
5. Connect
Connect the puller so
soleniod
leniod cable
cable to connect
connector
or J2 on the puller ass
assembly
embly
circuit board.
2-15).
).
J. Do the LEVEL 4 (Puller Pin DOWN)
DOWN) adjustment
adjustment (see Figure 2-15
1. Move the gauge
gauge until the
the tip of the puller
puller pi
pin
n touches level
level 4.
2. Look
Look fo
forr tthe
he PULLER PIN sensor display in the Sensor Diagnostic dialog
box, turn the top M3 set screw on the flag mounting arm to adjust the tip of
the puller pin until it touches level 4.
M3 Set Screw
2-15 P ul
ulle
lerr Pin
P in Level 4 Adjus tm
tment
ent (S ide View)
View)
Fi g ure 2-15
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-19
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
K. Sel
Select
ect DONE to exit the Sensor Diagnostic dialog box.
L. Sel
Select DONE to exit the Maintenance Diagnostics menu.
M. Pu
Push
sh the
the [ESCAPE] button if necessary to exit the Diagnostics mode.
N. Remove the workh
workholder
older setup and calibration
calibration gauge assembly
assembly..
2.
2.3.
3.3
3
Inde
Index
x Pi
Pin/
n/T
Tuc
ucke
kerr E
Eje
ject
ct S
Set
etup
up
2.3
.3.3
.3.1
.1
In
Ind
dex Pi
Pin Se
Setup
tup Seq
Sequ
uenc
ence
The purpose of this adjustment is to make sure that the index pin is engaged to
the correct groove in the
th e gauge. The adjustment is necessary, only when the
machine is first installed or if the index pin is disassembled. It is not necessary to
do this adjustment at any other time.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Workholder
Workholder setup and calibration
calibration gauge assembl
assembly
y (P/
(P/N:
N: 0
03035-05
3035-0501-000
01-000-XX)
-XX)
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Turn temperature controllers OFF:
1. Sel
Select
ect [4] CONFIGURE from the mode bar.
2. Select [4] TEMPERATURE from the Configure mode menu.
3. Sele
Select
ct th
the
e TURN ALL ZONES OFF button from the "Temperature Set Points"
dialog box. While the heat blocks cool down, observe their temperature at
the temperature status display on the monitor.
4. Sel
Select
ect DONE when the heat blocks cool down to close the dialog box.
5. Pu
Push
sh th
the
e [ESCAPE] button to exit the Configure mode.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
B. Put workhol
workholder
der setup and calibration
calibration gauge
gauge assembly between
between the rails (se
(see
e
section 2.3.2.2,
2.3.2.2, step D.
C. Disconnect the tubing from the fitting in the index mount. This tubing supplies
air to the index pin air cylinder.
D. Manual
Manually
ly lift the index
index pin and move the gauge
gauge under it.
E. Set the pin posit
position
ion until it moves
moves smoothly
smoothly to the lower she
shelf
lf of the groove at
2-16).
).
the right front portion of the gauge (see Figure 2-16
Upper Shelf
Lower Shelf
Groove
2-16
16 Inde
Indexx P in Alig nm
nmen
entt G roove
Fig ure 2-
2-20
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
F. Make sure that
that the pin
pin aligns correctl
correctly
y in the groove.
groove. If not:
not:
1. Loosen the
the two M3 screws
screws that attach
attach the pi
pin
n to the asse
assembly
mbly
(see Figure 2-17).
2-17).
2. Adjust the
the pin until
until it is
is aligned
aligned directly
directly on the groo
groove.
ve.
3. Tig
ight
hten
en the
the screw
screws.
s.
2x M3 Screws
Sensor Flag Mounting Screw
Indexer Pin
Sensor Flag
Fi g ure 2-17
2-17 Index Pi n - Y axis A djus tm
tment
ent and Up/
Up/Down A djus
djusttme
ment
nt
G. Display
Display the sensor panel:
panel:
1. Se
Sellect [7] DIAGNOSTIC from the mode bar.
2. Se
Sellect [5] MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTICS from the Diagnostic mode menu.
3. Se
Sellect [1] SENSOR from the Maintenance Diagnostics menu.
4. Monitor
Monitor the sensors on the Sensor
Sensor Diagnostics
Diagnostics panel
panel while doi
doing
ng the index
pin UP and pin DOWN adjustments.
NOTE: Before doing the following steps, make sure
sure that there is no interference
between the work light and the operation of the index sensor.
H. Put the index pin
pin in the lower
lower shelf of the groove
groove on the gauge
gauge and do a index
pin DOWN position check.
I. Lo
Look
ok for the INDEXER PIN RIGHT and INDEXER PIN LEFT sensors display in the
Sensor Diagnostic dialog box. Make sure that the INDEXER PIN RIGHT sensor is
ON and INDEXER PIN LEFT sensor is OFF. If not (see Figure 2-17
2-17):
):
1. Loosen the sensor
sensor flag mountin
mounting
g screw
screw..
2. Adjust
Adjust the s
sens
ensor
or flag
flag until
until the
the INDEXER PIN RIGHT sensor is ON and
INDEXER PIN LEFT sensor is OFF.
3. Tighten
Tighten the sensor flag mountin
mounting
g screw.
screw.
J. Put the index
index pin in the upper
upper shelf
shelf of the groove
groove on the gauge
gauge and do a index
index
pin UP position check.
K. Make sure
sure tthat
hat the INDEXER PIN RIGHT sensor and INDEXER PIN LEFT sensor
are OFF. If not:
1. Loosen the sensor
sensor flag mountin
mounting
g screw
screw..
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-21
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2. Adjust
Adjust th
the
e sensor
sensor flag
flag until
until the
the INDEXER PIN RIGHT sensor and INDEXER PIN
LEFT sensor are OFF.
3. Tighten
Tighten the sensor flag mounting
mounting screw.
screw.
L. Sel
Select DONE to exit the Sensor Diagnostic panel.
M. Sele
Select
ct DONE to exit the Maintenance Diagnostic menu.
N. Push
Push th
the
e [ESCAPE] button if necessary to exit the Diagnostics mode.
O. Remove the workholder
workholder setup and calibration gauge assembly.
assembly.
P. Connect the tubing that supplies air to the index pin air cylinder
cylinder..
2.
2.3.
3.3.
3.2
2
Tucke
uckerr Eje
Eject
ct Setu
Setup
p Sequ
Sequen
ence
ce
The purpose of this setup is to make sure the tucker eject is positioned correctly
cor rectly..
This is done to avoid interference between the tucker tip and other indexer parts
during carrier ejection.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Workholder
Workholder setup and calibration
calibration gauge assembl
assembly
y (P/
(P/N:
N: 0
03035-05
3035-0501-000
01-000-XX)
-XX)
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Turn temperature controllers OFF:
1. Sel
Select
ect [4] CONFIGURE from the mode bar.
2. Select [4] TEMPERATURE from the Configure mode menu.
3. Sele
Select
ct th
the
e TURN ALL ZONES OFF button from the "Temperature Set Points"
dialog box. While the heat blocks cool down, observe their temperature at
the temperature status display on the monitor.
4. Sel
Select
ect DONE when the heat blocks cool down to close the dialog box.
5. Pu
Push
sh th
the
e [ESCAPE] button to exit the Configure mode.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
B. Put workhol
workholder
der setup and calibration
calibration gauge
gauge assembly between
between the rails (se
(see
e
section 2.3.2.2,
2.3.2.2, step D..
D..
C. Move the gaug
gauge
e to the right and put the tucker
tucker tip over the upper
upper shelf at the
front, right side of the gauge (see Figure 2-18).
2-18).
Upper Shelf
Lower Shelf
2-18
8 Tucker Eject
Ej ect A lig nm
nment
ent S urfa
urfaces
ces
Fi g ure 2-1
D. Make sure tha
thatt the tucker tip touches
touches the upper
upper shelf. If not (see
(see Figure 2-19
2-19):
):
1. Find the set
set screw below
below the tucker
tucker solenoid
solenoid and loosen
loosen it.
2. Adjust the
the set screw until the tucker
tucker top
top touches tthe
he upper sh
shelf.
elf.
2-22
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3. Ti
Tight
ghten
en the
the set screw
screw..
..
Tucker Solenoid
Set Screw
Fi g ure 2-1
2-19
9 Tucker “R
“R ais ed P os
osition”
ition” A djus
djustm
tment
ent
E. Move the gauge
gauge to the right until the
the tucker tip is above
above the lower sh
shelf
elf at the
front, right side of the gauge.
F. Move the
the tucker
tucker down to the
the lower
lower shelf
shelf of the guage:
guage:
1. Select [2] MANUAL from the mode bar.
2. Se
Sellect [3] MHS UTILITIES from the Manual menu.
3. Se
Sellect [4] PIN UTILITIES from the MHS Utilities menu.
4. Sele
Select
ct th
the
e LOWER TUCKER option from the Pin Utilities dialog box.
5. Select APPLY.
G. Make sure that
that the tucker tip touches
touches the lower
lower shelf. If not (see ):
1. Loosen the
the M3 set screw
screw at the left
left side of the ttucker
ucker so
solenoid
lenoid
(see Figure 2-20
2-20).
).
2. Use a wrench
wrench tool to turn
turn the M3 hex
hex screw until
until the tucker
tucker tip ttouches
ouches the
the
lower shelf on the gauge.
3. Ti
Tight
ghten
en the
the M3 set
set screw
screw..
4. Sele
Select
ct th
the
e LIFT TUCKER option from the Pin Utilities dialog box.
5. Se
Sellect APPLY.
6. Pr
Pre
ess th
the
e [ESCAPE] button if necessary to exit the Manual mode.
Tucker Solenoid
M3 Set Screw
M3 Hex Screw
Fi g ure 2-20
2-20 Tucker Pi n Lower
Lower Travel
Travel A djus
djustm
tment
ent
H. Remove the workho
workholder
lder setup and calibration
calibration gauge assembly
assembly.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-23
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.
2.3.
3.4
4
Bo
Bond
nd Si
Site
te He
Heat
at Bl
Bloc
ock
kA
Alig
lignm
nmen
entt
The purpose of this adjustment is to align the heat block with the X axis of the
Bond Head. The adjustment is necessary, only when the machine is first installed
or if the bond site heat block assembly is disassembled. It is not necessary to do
this alignment frequently.
Specification
•
Y val
value
ue is +/- 0.
0.02
0254
54 mm (1 mi
mil)
l)..
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Workho
Workholde
lderr Setup
Setup Gaug
Gauge
e (P/N:
(P/N: 0303
03035-0
5-0908
908-001
-001-XX)
-XX)
•
Tor
orque
que Wre
Wrenc
nch,
h, 13 lb.
lb.in
in.. (1.4
(1.47
7 Nm)
Nm)
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Turn temperature controllers OFF:
1. Sel
Select
ect [4] CONFIGURE from the mode bar.
2. Select [4] TEMPERATURE from the Configure mode menu.
3. Sele
Select
ct th
the
e TURN ALL ZONES OFF button from the "Temperature Set Points"
dialog box. While the heat blocks cool down, observe their temperature at
the temperature status display on the monitor.
4. Sel
Select
ect DONE when the heat blocks cool down to close the dialog box.
5. Press [ESCAPE] to exit the Configure mode.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
B. Insta
Installll the workholder
workholder setup gauge on the bond site heat bloc
block
k assembly.
assembly.
2-21):
):
When you install the gauge, make sure that (see Figure 2-21
1. The engrave
engrave part number
number on the top
top surface of
of the gauge points
points to you.
you.
2. The notch at
at the front edge
edge of the gauge
gauge engages
engages to the pin on the
the bond
site heat block assembly.
assembly.
Engraved Part Number
Workholder Setup Gauge
Notch
Notch engages to the pin
Fi g ure 2-21
2-21 Ins ta
tall
ll th
the
e Workholde
Workholderr S et
etup
up G aug e Position
Pos ition (R ig ht S ide View)
2-24
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
C.
Align the
the horizontal
horizontal line of the
the cross
crosshair
hair to the lef
leftt rear edge
edge of
the gauge (see Figure 2-22).
2-22). If necessary, select the F10 button on the function bar to adjust the illumination until the edge can see clearly.
Align the crosshair horizontal
horizontal line to the
rear edge to the left side as shown.
M3 Screws
Align the crosshair horizontal
horizontal line to the
rear edge to the right side as shown.
03035-0908-001
Workholder Setup Gauge
Fi g ure 2-22
2-22 B ond S ite Hea
Heatt B lo
lock
ck A lig nm
nment
ent (Top View)
D. Make a note of the Y value at th
the
e top right corner
corner of the graphical
graphical user interinterface (GUI) display for left rear edge position of the gauge (see Figure 2-23
2-23).
). At
the same time, take note of the X value.
Align the crosshair horizontal
horizontal
line to the rear edge to the
left side as shown.
Y Value
Fi g ure 2-23
2-23 Y Value
Value A t The To
Top
p R ig ht C orner of
of the
the G UI Dis pl
pla
ay
E. Chess the horizont
horizontal
al line of the crosshair
crosshair to the right
right rear edge of the gaug
gauge.
e.
F. Make a note of the
the Y value for this
this position.
position. At th
the
e same time
time,, take note of
of the
X value
G. ference
Compare
the be
measured
Y position
for to
thestep
rightH.and left edges. The difmust
0.0254 mm
(1 mi).values
If not, go
98888-0000-JB3-01
Workholder
2-25
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
H. If the value is gre
greater
ater than 0.0254
0.0254 mm (1 mil), do the bond
bond site heat bloc
block
k
2-22):
):
alignment (see Figure 2-22
1. Hold the heat
heat block assembly
assembly,, then loose
loosen
n the four M3 screws th
that
at attach
the heat block to the heat block slider assembly slowly to 1/4 turn.
2. Rotate
Rotate the heat block assembly
assembly and
and chess the hori
horizonta
zontall line of the crosscrosshair to the rear edge of the heat block gauge.
3. Chess the horizont
horizontal
al line of the crosshair
crosshair from left
left to right edges
edges (the
approximate X values in step D. and F.) of the gauge.
4. Make sure
sure that the rear
rear edge of the gauge
gauge is straight.
straight. Us
Use
e the Y value o
on
n
the display to do the check (refer to step G.).
5. Tighten
Tighten each
each of the four M3 screws
screws on the
the bond site heat
heat block
block assembl
assembly
y
with a 1/4 turn in diagonal sequence, to set the assembly position.
6. Use a torque
torque wrench
wrench to apply a torque
torque of 13 lb.in.
lb.in. (1.47 Nm)
Nm) to the four M3
M3
screws in diagonal sequence.
7. Make sure
sure that the heat
heat block assembly
assembly does
does not mov
move
e when the sc
screws
rews
are tightened.
I. Do a check
check on
on the bond
bond site
site heat
heat block
block align
alignmen
ment.
t.
1. Align the horizont
horizontal
al line of the crosshair
crosshair to the left
left rear edge, then to right
right
rear edge of the gauge.
2. Make note
note of the Y value on
on the display
display and
and comp
compare.
are.
3. Do the
the alignm
alignment
ent again
again (see
(see step
step H.)
H.) if the value is greater than 0.0254
mm.
J. Rem
Remove
ove the
the work
workhold
holder
er gaug
gauge.
e.
K. Continu
Continue
e the rail parallelis
parallelism
m adjustment
adjustment (see par
paragraph
agraph 2.3.5
2.3.5).
).
2-26
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.3.
2.3.5
5
Ra
Rail
il Pa
Para
rall
llel
elis
ism
m Ad
Adju
just
stme
ment
nt
The purpose of this adjustment is to adjust the the front and rear workholder rails
until the rails are parallel to each other and the heat block is parallel to the rails.
This adjustment will continue after the bond
bon d site heat block alignment is done (see
2.3.4).
).
paragraph 2.3.4
NOTE: Do the bond site head block alignment first before you do the rail
parallelism adjustment.
Specification
•
Parallel
Parallelism
ism be
between
tween the front
front and
and rear rail is +/- 0.1 mm over tthe
he len
length
gth of the
rails.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Wor
Workho
kholde
lderr Setup
Setup Gaug
Gauge
e (P/N:
(P/N: 03035
03035-09
-090808-001001-XX)
XX)
•
Ga
Gauge
uge Pin (P
(P/N
/N:: 0303
030355-09
0908
08-00
-0055-XX)
XX)
•
Rails Width Gauge (Example:
(Example: 3.6” (stan
(standard),
dard), P/N: 03035-0
03035-0908-003
908-003-XX)
-XX)
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Turn temperature controllers OFF:
1. Se
Sellect [4] CONFIGURE from the mode bar.
b ar.
2. Select [4] TEMPERATURE from the Configure mode menu.
"Temperature Set Points"
3. Sele
Select
ct th
the
e TURN ALL ZONES OFF button from the "Temperature
dialog box. While the heat blocks cool down, observe their temperature at
the temperature status display on the monitor.
4. Se
Sellect DONE when the heat blocks cool down to close the dialog box.
5. Press [ESCAPE] to exit the Configure mode.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
B. Make sure that
that the heat block is at the home
home position.
position. If not, move the he
heat
at
block to its home position:
1. Se
Sellect [4] MANUAL from the mode bar.
2. Select [3] MHS UTILITIES from the Manual menu.
3. Se
Sellect [2] HEAT BLOCK UTILITIES from the MHS utilities menu.
4. Se
Sellect [4] HOME HEAT BLOCK. The bond site heat block moves to its home
position.
5. Se
Sellect DONE.
C. Loosen the four M5 scre
screws
ws at the two ends of the rear rail assembly,
assembly, that
2-24).
).
attach the rear rail to the input and output base supports (see Figure 2-24
D. Manuall
Manually
y move the rear rail a sma
smallll distance
distance to the back
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-27
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
.
Front Rail Assembly
Rear Rail
Assembly
M5 Screw
M5 Screws
M5 Screws
(one screw is not shown)
earr R ail A s s em
embl
blyy (Rear View)
Fi g ure 2-24 R ea
E. Loosen the fou
fourr M5 screws at the two ends
ends of the front rail assembly
assembly,, that
attach the front rail to the input and output base supports (see Figure 2-24 and
Figure 2-25
2-25).
).
F. Manually
Manually move the
the front rail
rail a small distance
distance to
to the fron
front.
t.
M5 Screw
Front Rail Assembly
M5 shown)
Screw
(not
Fi g ure 2-25 Fr
Front
ont R ail A s s em
embl
blyy (Front View)
2-28
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
G. Install
Install the workholder
workholder setup gauge on the bond site heat block
block
assembly. When you install the gauge, make sure that (see Figure 2-21
2-21):
):
1. The engrave
engrave part number
number on the top
top surfac
surface
e of the gaug
gauge
e points to you.
2. The groove
groove at the front
front edge of the gauge
gauge touches
touches the pin on the bond
bond site
heat block assembly.
H. Instal
Installl the rail width
width gauge on the workholder
workholder se
setup
tup gauge.
WARNING: DO NOT DAMAGE THE REAR RAIL BOAT BIAS SPRING WHEN YOU
PUT THE RAIL WIDTH GAUGE BETWEEN THE RAILS.
1. Make sure that
that the cut-out
cut-out of the gauge
gauge is on th
the
e right side,
side, point towards
towards
the Output Magazine Handler Assembly (see Figure 2-26).
2-26).
Output Magazine
Handler Assembly
Cut-out on the right side
Fi g ure 2-26
2-26 Ins ta
tall
ll th
the
e R ail Width
Width Ga
G aug e P os
osition
ition
2. Put the rail
rail width
width gauge on the workhold
workholder
er gauge.
gauge.
2-27):
):
I. In
Inst
stall
all th
the
e gaug
gauge
e pins
pins (se
(see
e Figure 2-27
1. Align the
the first hole
hole of the rail width
width gauge
gauge with the fi
first
rst hole of the
the workholder setup gauge.
2. Continue
Continue to align
align the remaini
remaining
ng holes in the gauges.
gauges.
3. Install
Install the gauge
gauge pins through
through the holes
holes in the rail
rail width g
gauge.
auge.
NOTE: on
If the
pins cannot
dowidth
not use
force.
Dothe
thepins
hole
alignment
thegauge
workholder
gaugeinstall,
with rail
gauge
until
can
be
install.
4. Make sure
sure that the ga
gauge
uge pins install
install tthrough
hrough th
the
e holes in the
the gauges.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Workholder
2-29
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Gauge Pins
First Hole of the Rail Width Gauge
Rail Width Gauge
Fi g ure 2-27
2-27 Ins ta
tall
ll the Rail Width G aug e and
and Gaug e Pins
J. Do th
the
e rail
rail paral
parallel
lelism
ism (see
(see Figure 2-28
2-28):
):
1. Manually
Manually push the
the front rail
rail to the front surface
surface of tthe
he rail wi
width
dth gauge.
gauge.
2. is
Make
sure
surfront
e thatrail.
theIfbottom
bo
ttom surface
surface at the front
front edge of the
the rail width
width gauge
on the
not,
a. Lift up the
the rail width
width gauge
gauge until the
the edges of the gauge
gauge are aligned
aligned to
the front surface.
b. Hold the gauge
gauge and manually
manually move
move the fro
front
nt rail a smal
smalll dista
distance
nce to the
rear until the front, bottom surface of the gauge is on the front rail.
3. Tighten
Tighten the four M5 scre
screws
ws at the two ends of the front
front rail assem
assembly
bly,, that
attach the front rail assembly to the base supports (see Figure 2-24 and
Figure 2-25).
2-25).
4. Manually
Manually push the re
rear
ar rail to the
the rear surface
surface of the rail
rail width g
gauge.
auge.
5. Make sure the
the bottom surface
surface at the
the rear ed
edge
ge of the rail
rail width gauge
gauge is on
the rear rail. If not,
a. Lift up the
the rail width
width gauge
gauge until the
the edges of the gauge
gauge are aligned
aligned to
the rear rail surface.
b. Hold the gauge
gauge and manually
manually move
move the rea
rearr rail a smal
smalll dista
distance
nce to the
front until the rear, bottom surface of the gauge is on the rear rail.
6. Tighten
Tighten the four M5 screws
screws at the two end
ends
s of the rear rail assembly
assembly,, that
attach the rear rail assembly to the base supports (see Figure 2-24 and
Figure 2-25).
2-25).
2-30
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Push the rear rail
Rail Width Gauge
Push the front rail
Bottom surface of the Rail
Width Gauge on the
Rear Rail
Bottom surface of the Rail
Width Gauge on the
Front Rail
Lift up the Rail Width Gauge
to align with the rails surface.
2-28
8 R ail Para
Parall
llel
elis
is m
Fi g ure 2-2
K. Remove
Remove the
the gauge
gauge pins
pins..
L. Move the rail
rail width
width gauge a
across
cross the rails.
rails. Make
Make sure that th
the
e gauge can
can
moves smoothly and you can feel the guage with small friction.
M. Remove the the rail width gauge and the workholder gauge from the Workholder.
N. Continue
Continue the preheat heat block
block alignment (see
(see paragrap
paragraph
h 2.3.6).
2.3.6).
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-31
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.3.6
2.3
.6
Pre
Prehea
heatt H
Heat
eat Blo
Block/
ck/Bon
Bond
dS
Site
ite Alig
Alignme
nment
nt
The purpose of this adjustment is to align the preheat heat block with the rails and
sets the distance between the preheat and bond site. This is to make sure that the
carrier is correctly index. The adjustment is necessary, only when the machine is
first installed, or if the preheat or bond site heat block assembly is disassembled.
It is not necessary to do this alignment frequently. This adjustment will continue
after the rail parallelism adjustment is done (see paragraph 2.3.5).
2.3.5).
NOTE: Do the rail parallelism adjustment before you do the preheat heat block/
bond site alignment.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Workho
Workholde
lderr Setup
Setup Gaug
Gauge
e (P/N:
(P/N: 0303
03035-0
5-0908
908-001
-001-XX)
-XX)
•
Gaug
Gauge
e Pin
Pin (P
(P/N
/N:: 0303
03035-0
5-090
9088-00
005-X
5-XX)
X)
•
Rail
Rails
s Wid
Width Gaug
Gauge
e
•
Preheat
Preheat Setup
Setup Gauge
Gauge Assem
Assembly
bly (P
(P/N:
/N: 0303503035-050
0502-0
2-000-X
00-XX)
X)
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Turn temperature controllers OFF:
1. Sel
Select
ect [4] CONFIGURE from the mode bar.
2. Select [4] TEMPERATURE from the Configure mode menu.
3. Sele
Select
ct th
the
e TURN ALL ZONES OFF button from the "Temperature Set Points"
dialog box. While the heat blocks cool down, observe their temperature at
the temperature status display on the monitor.
4. Sel
Select
ect DONE when the heat blocks cool down to close the dialog box.
5. Press [ESCAPE] to exit the Configure mode.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
B. Make sure tha
thatt the preheat heat
heat block is at
at the home posi
position.
tion. If not
not,, move the
heat block to its home position:
1. Sel
Select
ect [4] MANUAL from the mode bar.
b ar.
2. Select [3] MHS UTILITIES from the Manual menu.
3. Sel
Select
ect [3] PREHEAT HEAT BLOCK UTILITIES from the MHS utilities menu.
4. Select HOME PREHEAT BLOCK. The preheat heat block moves to its home
position.
5. Sel
Select
ect APPLY then DONE.
C. Do a check on the preheat heat block ali
alignment
gnment with the rail and the dis
distance
tance
between the preheat and bond site.
1. Install
Install the workholder
workholder setup
setup gauge on the preheat
preheat heat block as
assembly
sembly..
2. Install
Install the rail width
width gauge between
between the rails,
rails, above the preheat
preheat heat block
block
assembly.
WARNING: DO NOT DAMAGE THE REAR RAIL BOAT BIAS SPRING WHEN YOU
PUT THE RAIL WIDTH GAUGE ASSEMBLY BETWEEN THE RAILS.
a. Make sure
sure that the cut-out
cut-out of the gauge
gauge is on th
the
e right side,
side, point
towards the Output Magazine Handler Assembly (see Figure 2 26).
26).
2-32
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Output Magazine
Handler Assembly
Cut-out on the right side
Fi g ure 2-29
2-29 Ins tall the
the Rail Width
Width G aug e - 3.6”
3.6” Pos ition
b. Hold
Hold tthe
he gau
gauge
ge a
att 45o angle (rear edge down) and put the rear edge of
2-30).
).
the gauge on the rear rail (see Figure 2-30
c. Without
Without moving the
the gauge forward,
forward, slowly
slowly lower
lower the gauge
gauge until the
front edge is on the front rail.
d. Move the rail
rail width
width gauge across
across the rails.
rails. Make
Make sure that th
the
e gauge
can moves smoothly and you can feel the guage with small friction.
Gauge at 45o angle
Rear Edge of the Gauge
Front Edge of the Gauge
Rear Rail
Front Rail
Fi g ure 2-30 Ins ta
tall
ll the R ail Width G aug e at 45o ang le (R ig ht S ide View)
View)
3. Install
Install the preheat
preheat setup gauge
gauge assembly
assembly in front of the ffirst
irst hole o
on
n the rail
width gauge (see Figure 2-31 ).
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-33
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
a. Do a check if the pin
pin on the preheat
preheat setup gauge
gauge touches th
the
e left side o
off
the bond site heat block assembly (see Figure 2-31 ). If not, do the preheat/bond site alignment in step D.
Rail Width Gauge
Gauge Pins
Preheat Setup Gauge
Pin touches the left side
of the bond site heat block assembly
Bond Site Heat Block Assembly
First Hole of the Rail Width Gauge
NOTE: The position of the preheat setup gauge pin shown in this figure is
possibly different in its position for the other types of applications.
Set the pin position to the correct type of application used.
Fi g ure 2-31
2-31 Ins ta
tall
ll the P rehea
reheatt S et
etup
up Gaug e and the G auge Pi ns
4. Instal
Installl the gaug
gauge
e pins
pins (se
(see
e Figure 2-31):
2-31):
a. Align the first
first hole of
of the rail width
width gauge
gauge to the first
first hole of the
the workholder setup gauge.
b. Continue
Continue to align
align the remaini
remaining
ng holes in the gauges.
gauges.
c. Install
Install the gauge
gauge pins through
through the holes
holes in the rail
rail widt
width
h gauge.
NOTE: If the gauge pins cannot install,
install, do not use force. Do the hole alignment
on the workholder gauge with rail width gauge until the pins can be
install.
d. Do a check ifif the gauge pins
pins is installe
installed
d through the
the holes in the
the
gauges. If not, do the preheat block alignment in step D.
D...
D. Do the preh
preheat
eat heat block
block alignment
alignment (see
(see Figure 2-32):
2-32):
1. Remove the
the gauge pins
pins from the gauges
gauges on the preheat
preheat as
assembly
sembly..
2. Do not
not remove
remove the
the preheat
preheat setup
setup gauge.
gauge.
3. Get access
access to the preheat
preheat heat
heat block assembly
assembly a
att the left si
side
de of the preheat block assembly.
4. Hold the preheat
preheat heat block assembly
assembly,, then loosen the four
four M3 screws that
attach the heat block to the preheat top plate slowly to 1/4 turn.
2-34
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
.
Rail Width Gauge
M4 Screws
Preheat Setup Gauge
Get access to the
preheat heat block
assembly
M4 Screws
Fi g ure 2-32 P rehea
reheatt Heat B lock Alig nme
nment
nt (Top View)
5. Manually
Manually turn the preheat
preheat heat block assembl
assembly
y until the firs
firstt hole of the rail
width gauge is aligned to the first hole of the workholder setup gauge.
6. Manually
Manually turn the preheat
preheat heat block assembly
assembly until
until::
a. The first hole
hole of the rail
rail width
width gauge is aligned
aligned to
to the first h
hole
ole of the
workholder setup gauge.
b. All the holes
holes on the rail
rail width gauge
gauge are al
aligned
igned to all
all the holes
holes on the
workholder setup gauge.
c. The pin on the
the preheat setup
setup gaug
gauge
e touches the
the left s
side
ide of the bond
bond
site heat block assembly.
assembly.
7. Install
Install the gauge pins
pins through the
the holes in the rail width
width gaug
gauge
e (see Figure
2-31).
2-31
).
8. Make sure that
that the gauge
gauge pins is instal
installed
led throu
through
gh the holes
holes in the workworkholder setup gauge.
9. Tighten
Tighten each of the
the four M3 screws
screws on the preheat
preheat heat
heat block assembly
assembly
with a 1/4 turn in diagonal sequence, to set the assembly position.
10.Use a torque wrench to apply a torque of 13 lb.in. (1.47 Nm) to the four M3
screws in diagonal sequence.
11.Make sure that the preheat heat block assembly does not move when the
screws are tightened.
E. Remove
Remove the gauge pins,
pins, preheat setup
setup gauge, rail width
width gauge
gauge and workholder setup gauge on the rails and preheat assembly.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-35
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.
2.3.
3.7
7
Pu
Pulle
llerr Ra
Rack
ck B
Bac
ackl
klas
ash
h Ad
Adju
just
stme
ment
nt
Specification
•
Backlas
Backlash
h of 0.0015
0.0015 +/- 0.0010
0.0010 in. (Ra
(Range
nge = 0.0
0.0005
005 - 0.0025
0.0025 in.
in.))
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Dial
Dial In
Indi
dica
cato
torr with
with Magan
Maganet
etic
ic Sta
Stand
nd
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Remove the lubricant from the puller rack.
B. Measure the back
backlash
lash at the center,
center, left, and right positions
positions of the rack (see
2-33):
):
Figure 2-33
1. Move the puller
puller assembly
assembly to the
the center of
of the rack un
until
til the lef
leftt edge is
aligned to the notch on the front wall.
2. Put the dial indicator
indicator on the linear
linear slider
slider so that its tip touches
touches the low
lowest
est
point on the puller mount.
3. Measure
Measure the backlas
backlash
h at the
the center
center position.
position.
4. Move the puller
puller assembly
assembly to the
the left side
side limit
limit,, and then back
back to the right
right
approximately 3 mm (1/8 inch).
5. Measure
Measure the backlash
backlash at
at the left
left side positio
position.
n.
6. Move the puller
puller assembly
assembly until
until the right
right edge is aligned
aligned to th
the
e right edge of
of
the rack.
7. Measure
Measure the backlas
backlash
h at the
the right
right side positi
position.
on.
8. Reposition
Reposition the dial indicato
indicatorr and measure the
the backlash
backlash at the right-si
right-side
de
position.
C."" if one of the measured position are out of the specification
9. Go to st
step
ep "C.
of 0.0005 to 0.0025 in.
NOTE: If the measurements at all positions are within specification,it is not necessary to continue with this procedure.
Slide Block
(Puller Assembly)
X Axis Linear Slide Assembly
Slide Block
(Index Assembly)
Set Screw
Front Wall Notch
Pull
Puller
er Rack
Rack Set
Set S
Scr
crew
ew
Fi g ure 2-33 Pull
Puller
er R ack B ackla
cklass h
2-36
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
C. Move the pull
puller
er assembly
assembly to the output
output side of the indexer
indexer assembly until it is off of the rack.
D. Loosen th
the
e two M3 screws that
that attach the
the rack, then tor
torque
que the screw
screws
s to
5 in lbs.
E. Move the puller
puller assembly
assembly to the center of the rack until the left
left edge is aligned
aligned
to the notch on the front wall.
F. Put the dial indicator
indicator on the linear
linear slider
slider until its tip touches
touches the low
lowest
est point on
the puller mount.
2-33).
).
G. Measure the
the backlash at the
the center position
position (see Figure 2-33
1. If the backlash
backlash is less than 0.0005
0.0005 in., turn
turn the se
sett screw
screws
s at the two ends
of the rack to the right (in). to move the rack to the rear of the indexer
assembly.
2. If the backlas
backlash
h is greater
greater than 0.0025 in., turn
turn the se
sets
ts crew
crews
s at the two
ends of the rack to the left (out) to move the rack to the front of the indexer
assembly.
3. Repeat step
step 1 to 2 until the backlash
backlash is within
within the spe
specific
cification
ation of 0.0005
0.0005 to
0.0025 in.
H. Move the pull
puller
er assembly
assembly to the left side
side limit, and the
then
n to the right side
approximately 1/8 in (3 mm).
I. Put the dial
dial indicator
indicator on
on the left
left side
side and mea
measure
sure the lleft
eft bac
backlash
klash s
specifi
pecificacation. If it is not within the specification of 0.0005 to 0.0025 in.:
1. Move the puller assembl
assembly
y to the far righ
rightt side of
of the rac
rack.
k.
2. Turn the left-s
left-side
ide set screw.
screw.
a. If it is less than
than 0.0005
0.0005 in., turn
turn it to th
the
e right to move tthe
he rack to the
rear of the indexer assembly.
b. If it is greater than 0.0025
0.0025 in., turn
turn it to the
the left
left to move the rac
rack
k to the
front of the indexer assembly.
3. Do the step 2 procedure
procedure until the
the backlash
backlash is within the sp
specific
ecification
ation of
0.0005 to 0.0025 in.
J. Move the puller
puller assembly
assembly until its
its right edge is aligned
aligned to the rig
right
ht edge of the
rack.
K. Put the dial indicator
indicator on the right
right side and measure
measure the right backlash
backlash specifispecification. If it is not within the specification of 0.0005 to 0.0025 in.:
1. Move the
the puller assembly
assembly to the left s
side
ide lilimit.
mit.
2. Turn the right-s
right-side
ide set screw
screw..
a. If it is less than
than 0.005
0.005 in., turn
turn it to th
the
e right to move the
the rack to
to the re
rear
ar
of the indexer assembly.
assembly.
b. If it is greater than 0.0025
0.0025 in., turn
turn it to the
the left
left to move the rac
rack
k to the
front of the indexer assembly.
3. Do the step 2 procedure
procedure until the
the backlash
backlash is within the sp
specific
ecification
ation of
0.0005 to 0.0025 in.
L. Remove the dial
dial indicator
indicator,, and move the puller
puller assembl
assembly
y away from the rack
rack
to the output side of the indexer assembly.
M. Torque the scr
screws
ews to 8 in. lbs. (0.9 Nm)
Nm)
B."" again.
N. Do th
the
e step
step "B.
O. Torque the screws
screws to 14 in. lbs. (1.6
(1.6 Nm).
P. Apply a small quatity
quatity of lubricate
lubricate to the the
the rack (refer to Sec
Section
tion 5: MainteMaintenance).
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-37
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.
2.3.
3.8
8
He
Heat
at B
Blo
lock
ck V
Vac
acuu
uum
m Se
Sens
nsor
or S
Set
etup
up
The purpose of this procedure is to make sure that the heat block vacuum sensor
controller is setup to detect if a device is properly held down on the heat block.
This procedure also set up the conditions under which the low vaccum sensor
operates. All references to ’buttons’ in the steps that follow refer to the control buttons located on the vacuum sensor controller operator panel (see Figure 2-34)
2-34)
and not to keys on the machine operator control panel (MMI).
2-34
4 Va
Vacuum
cuum S ensor C ont
ontroll
roller
er
Fi g ure 2-3
NOTE: Make sure that the necessary workholder calibrations, configurations and adjustments, for the correct type of carrier and device
used, are done before setting up the vacuum sensor. If not, do the
necessary workholder calibration, configurations and adjustments,
refer to Section 5 of IConn Operation Manual.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
None.
Procedure
A. Find the vacuum sensor/controller at the front of the interface panel.
B. Unlock
Unlock Vacu
Vacuum
um Sen
Sensor:
sor:
1. Press SET button and hold for 4 seconds or longer to display the [LOC] setting.
2. Pr
Pres
ess
s the
the UP or DOWN arrow button until [UNL] appears on the digital display screen.
3. Press SET button.
C. Unit Measurement
Measurement Setting
1. Press
Press and
and hol
hold
d the
the SET button for 2 seconds or longer.
2. Pr
Pres
ess
s the
the UP or DOWN arrow button to set the unit of measurement to [INH].
3. Press SET button to set the unit. Proceed to color setting in step D.
D. Co
Colo
lorr Settin
Setting
g
1. Pr
Pres
ess
s the
the UP or DOWN arrow button and select the display color to
[
] (red).
2. Press SET button to set the colour. Proceed to operating mode setting in
step E.
E. Set Operatin
Operating
g Mode
Mode
1. Pr
Pres
ess
s the
the UP or DOWN arrow button to display [HYS] (Hysteresis).
2. Press SET button to set the operating mode. Proceed to output type setting
in step F.
2-38
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
F. Set Outp
Output
ut Typ
Type
e
1. Pr
Pre
ess th
the
e DOWN arrow button and select [NC] (normally closed).
2. Press SET button to set the output type. Proceed to response time setting
in step G.
G. Response
Response Time Setting
1. Pr
Pre
ess th
the
e UP or DOWN arrow button and select [2.5] (2.5 ms).
2. Press SET button to set the response time. Proceed to auto preset setting
in step H.
H. Auto Preset
Preset Setti
Setting
ng
1. Pr
Pre
ess th
the
e UP or DOWN ar
arrrow bu
button and se
select [
] ((m
manual).
2. Press SET button to set the auto preset type. Proceed to vacuum setting in
step I.
I. Vaccu
accum
m Sett
Settin
ing
g
1. Press SET button to display the set value. [N_1] (normally closed) and current set value e.g. [.330] will appear on the digital display screen and blink
alternately.
2. Press SET button to display the next set value (if available).
3. Set the curren
currentt va
value
lue to [-15.0].
a. Pr
Pres
ess
s the
the UP or DOWN arrow button. The first digit, right-most digit on
the LCD display will blink. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button and set
the first digit value to ‘0’.
NOTE: If any of the button has not been pressed for more than 10 seconds, the
current value will be automatically set and the function will return to the
set value display mode.
b. Press SET button to move to the second digit in left direction. The second digit blinks. Press the UP or DOWN arrow button and set the second
digit value to ‘.’ .
c. Press SET button to move to the third digit. Press the UP or DOWN arrow
button and set the third digit value to ‘5’.
d. Press SET button to move to the fourth digit. Press the UP or DOWN
arrow button and set the fourth digit value to ‘1’.
e. Press SET button to move to the fifth digit. Press the UP or DOWN arrow
button and set the fifth digit value to ‘-’.
f. Pres
Press
s and
and ho
hold
ld th
the
e SET button for 3 second or longer to save the vacuum value for [N_1].
4. Press
Press and
and hol
hold
d the
the SET button for 4 seconds or longer to return to the normal measuring mode to perform the switch operations.
J. Set the Hyst
Hystere
eresi
sis
s (H) value to the zero (if necessary).
1. Press SET button once to display current H value.
2. Pres
Press
s an
and
d hold
hold the
the UP and DOWN arrow buttons simultaneously to reset the
value to zero [0.0].
3. Press
Press and
and hol
hold
d the
the SET button for 3 seconds to save the H value.
K. Lock
Lock Out
1. Press
Press and
and ho
hold
ld the
the SET button for 4 seconds or longer to display the current
[UNL] setting.
2. Pr
Pre
ess th
the
e UP or DOWN arrow button until [LOC] appears on the digital display screen. Press SET button.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-39
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.
2.4
4
Wor
orkh
khol
olde
derr Ca
Cali
libr
brat
atio
ion
n Proc
Proced
edur
ures
es
WARNING: WORKHOLDER CALIBRATIONS
CALIBRATIONS SHOULD BE PERFORMED WITH
WORKHOLDER HEATERS AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE FOR
MOST ACCURATE RESULTS.
RESULTS. IF T
THE
HE WORKHOLDER IS HEATED,
HEATED,
AVOID TOUCHING HEATED PARTS WHEN REMOVING PARTS OR
MATERIAL
MA
TERIAL (CARRIERS, HEA
HEAT
T BLOCK INSERT,
INSERT, CLAMP INSERT) OR
WHEN PERFORMING OTHER OPERATIONS.
NOTE: The following calibration procedures
procedures are designed to provide parameters which allow for the alignment of the workholder so as to ensure correct centerlines of bond.
NOTE: Calibrations should be performed with no material in the workholder or
magazine handlers.
NOTE: It is assumed that the die cavity of the heat block targeted during workholder calibrations is on the workholder X axis and Y axis centerlines.
NOTE: MHS calibration should not be done unless the X, Y,
Y, and Z servo motion
axes have been tuned, bond plane height has been established, and
crosshair offset has been calibrated.
2.
2.4.
4.1
1
Workh
orkhol
olde
derr Ca
Cali
libr
brat
atio
ion
n
2.4.1.1
Introduction
The Workholder calibration contains a group of routines used to calibrate certain
areas of the workholder. Each routine displays a series of dialog boxes in the
proper sequence to complete the calibration. Each dialog box contains instructions on how to perform that specific step in the calibration. All instructions should
read and understood before select ok to proceed. All workholder calibrations
should be performed when the heat blocks are at the operating temperature to
produce the most accurate results.
2.
2.4.
4.1.
1.2
2
Do th
the
e Wor
Workh
khol
olde
derr Cal
Calib
ibra
rati
tion
on
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH THE HEAT BLOCK OR INSERTS WITH UNPROTECTED HANDS IF THE WORKHOLDER HEATERS ARE AT OPERATOPERATING TEMPERATURE. WHEN REMOVING THE HEA
HEAT
T BLOCKS OR
INSERTS, INSTALL A SCREW AT THE REAR EDGE OF THE HEAT
BLOCK/INSERT AND GRASP THE SCREW WITH PLIERS. THERE IS
ONE M4 TAPPED HOLE IN THE HEA
HEAT
T BLOCK/INSERT FOR THIS PURPOSE.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Workholder
Workholder Setup Gauge (P/N: 03035-0908-00
03035-0908-001-XX)
1-XX) (Heat Block Gauge)
•
Heat
Heat Block
Block In
Inse
sert
rts
s (P
(P-p
-part
art))
•
Rails
Rails Widt
Width
h Gauge
Gauge - 3.6”
3.6” (P/N:
(P/N: 0303
03035-0
5-0908908-003
003-XX)
-XX)
•
Workholder
Workholder setup and calibration
calibration gauge assembl
assembly
y (P/
(P/N:
N: 0
03035-05
3035-0501-000
01-000-XX)
-XX)
Procedure
A. Select [5] CALIBRATION from the mode bar.
B. Sel
Select
ect [4] WORKHOLDER from the Calibration menu.
C. Sele
Select
ct [1] WORKHOLDER from the Workholder menu.
D. Remov
Remove
e all material
material from the Workholder
Workholder..
2-40
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
holder
er Ca
C alibrat
libration
ion Menu - R em
emove
ove Ma
Mate
teri
ri al
Fi g ure 2-35 Work hold
E. Make sure that the correct
correct heat block gauge/inse
gauge/insert
rt is install
installed
ed on the bond site
2-36).
).
heat block assembly, then select OK (see Figure 2-36
Fi g ure 2-36
2-36 Workhold
Workholder
er C alibra
libration
tion - Ins ta
tall
ll B ond Si te Hea
Heatt B lo
lock
ck G aug es/
es/Ins
Ins ert
ertss
F. Do the
the heat bloc
block
k foc
focus
us (see
(see Figure 2-37
2-37))
1. Use
Use tthe
he mou
mouse
se an
and
d [B2] (center button on the mouse) to move the bond
head until the heat block gauge/insert on the bond site appears on the
screen.
2. If necessary
necessary,, adjust the illuminat
illumination
ion using
using the F10 button on the function
bar.
3. Do the heat
heat block focus
focus by pushing
pushing the Up or D
Down
own arrow buttons
buttons on the
the
MMI until the heat block gauge/insert can be seen clearly on the screen.
4. Se
Sellect OK.
.
Fi g ure 2-37
2-37 Work hold
holder
er Calibration
Calibration - Heat B lock Focus
G. Position
Position the crosshair
crosshair on the
the heat block.
block.
1. Use
Use tthe
he mou
mouse
se an
and
d [B2] to position the crosshair on the left rear corner of
the heat block (see Figure 2-38).
2-38).
2. If necessary
necessary,, adjust the illuminat
illumination
ion using
using the F10 button on the function
bar.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-41
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
3. Sel
Select
ect OK.
Crosshair
Fi g ure 2-38
2-38 Workhold
Workholder
er Calibrat
Calibration
ion - Hea
Heat B lo
lock
ck C ros s ha
hair
ir A lig nm
nment
ent (Left - R ea
earr C orner)
4. Use
Use tthe
he mouse
mouse and [B2] to position the crosshair on the right front corner of
2-39).
).
the heat block (see Figure 2-39
5. If necessary
necessary,, adjust the
the illuminatio
illumination
n using the F10 button on the function
bar.
6. Sel
Select
ect OK.
Crosshair
Fig ure 22-39
39 Hea
Heatt B lock C ross ha
hair
ir A lig nm
nmen
entt (R ig ht - Front Corner)
H. Remov
Remove
e the heat block gauge/insert
gauge/insert from the bond site,
site, then select OK (see
Figure 2-40).
2-40).
Fi g ure 2-40
2-40 Work hold
holder
er Calibration
Calibration - R em
emove
ove Heat B lock Ga
G aug e/
e/Ins
Ins ert
2-42
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
I. Install
Install the
the rail width gauge between the rails
rails (see Figure 2-41).
2-41).
WARNING: DO NOT DAMAGE THE REAR RAIL BOAT BIAS SPRING WHEN YOU
PUT THE RAIL WIDTH GAUGE BETWEEN THE RAILS.
.
Fi g ure 2-41
2-41 Work hold
holder
er Calibration
Calibration - Ins ta
tall
ll R ail Width G aug e
1. Make sure that
that the cut-out
cut-out of the gauge
gauge is on th
the
e right side,
side, point towards
towards
the Output Magazine Handler Assembly (see Figure 2-42).
2-42).
Output Magazine
Handler Assembly
Cut-out on the right side
Fi g ure 2-42
2-42 Work hold
holder
er Calibr
Calibra
ation - Ins ta
tall
ll the R ail Width G aug e P os ition
2. Hold
Hold the
the gau
gauge
ge at
at 45o angle (rear edge down) and put the rear edge of the
gauge on the rear rail (see Figure 2-43).
2-43).
3. Without
moving
mov
ingfront
the rail.
gauge
gauge forward,
forward, slowly lower
lower the gauge until
until the front
edge is on
the
4. Make sure that
that the gauge
gauge can move
move along the rrails
ails with
with small resista
resistance.
nce.
5. Se
Sellect OK.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-43
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Gauge at 45o angle
Rear Edge of the Gauge
Front Edge of the Gauge
Rear Rail
Front Rail
holder
der Calibration
Calibration - Ins ta
tall
ll the R ail Width G aug e at
at 45o angle
Fi g ure 2-43 Work hol
J. Teach the bond
bond site heat
heat block assembl
assembly
y at rail level
level (see Figure 2-44
2-44):
):
Fi g ure 2-44
2-44 Work hold
holder
er Calibration
Calibration - Tea
Teach
ch Heat
Heat B lock As s em
embly
bly
1. Move the rail
rail width gauge
gauge and position
position it until the bottom
bottom surfac
surface
e of the pin,
at the left side of the gauge, is directly above the heat block assembly of
bond site (see Figure 2-45).
2-45).
2. Use the Up and
and Down arrow
arrow button
button on the MMI to move
move the heat
heat block
assembly up until the top surface touches the pin of the rail width gauge.
3. Sel
Select
ect OK (see Figure 2-44).
2-44).
Pin touches the top surface
of the bond site heat block assembly
Bond Site Heat Block Assembly
Rail Width Gauge
Fi g ure 2-45
2-45 Workhold
Workholder
er Calibrat
Calibration
ion - Pin Touches
Touches B ond S ite Hea
Heatt B lo
lock
ck A s s em
embl
blyy
2-44
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
K. Remove tthe
he rail width
width gauge
gauge from the rails,
rails, then
then select OK (see
Figure 2-46).
2-46).
Fi g ure 2-46
2-46 Workhold
Workholder
er Calibrat
Calibration
ion - R em
emove
ove Rail Width Gauge
L. Install
Install the heat block gauge/inser
gauge/insertt on the bond site heat block assembly
assembly,, then
2-47).
select OK (see Figure 2-47).
holder
er Calibr
Calibra
ation - Ins ta
tall
ll B ond S ite Hea
Heatt B lock Ga
G aug e/
e/Ins
Ins ert
Fi g ure 2-47 Work hold
M. Teach the bond height
height position (see Figure 2-48).
2-48).
1. Use the mouse
mouse to move the
the bond head
head positi
position
on directly
directly above tthe
he heat
block gauge/insert at the bond site.
2. Make sure
sure that the capillar
capillary
y is above the
the solid po
portion
rtion of th
the
e heat block
block
gauge/insert surface shown on the screen.
3. Sel
Select OK. The capillary will moves up and down on the heat block gauge/
insert surface.
Fi g ure 2-48
2-48 Workhold
Workholder
er Calibrat
Calibration
ion - Tea
Teach
ch B ond Heig ht P os
osition
ition
N. Remove the hea
heatt block gauge/insert
gauge/insert from the bond site,
site, then select OK (see
2-49).
).
Figure 2-49
2-49 Work hold
holder
er Calibration
Calibration - R em
emove
ove Heat B lock Ga
G aug e/
e/Ins
Ins ert
Fi g ure 2-49
O. Teach the bond
bond center position:
position:
1. Put workholder
workholder setup
setup and calibration
calibration gauge assembly
assembly between
between the rai
rails
ls
(see Figure 2-51).
2-51).
WARNING: DO NOT DAMAGE THE REAR RAIL BOAT BIAS SPRING WHEN
WHE N YOU
PUT THE WORKHOLDER SETUP AND CALIBRATION GAUGE
ASSEMBLY BETWEEN THE RAILS.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Workholder
2-45
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
a. Make sure
sure that the index
index slot of the
the gauge iis
s on the right
right side, point
point
towards the Output Magazine Handler Assembly (see Figure 2-50).
2-50).
Output Magazine
Handler Assembly
Index slot on the right side.
holder
er Ca
C alibrat
libration
ion - Ins ta
tall
ll the Work hold
holder
er S et
etup
up and
and Calibration
Calibration Gaug e
Fi g ure 2-50 Work hold
A s s embly Pos
P os iti
ition
on
b. Hold
Hold tthe
he gau
gauge
ge at
at 45o angle (rear edge down) and put the rear edge of
2-51).
).
the gauge on the rear rail (see Figure 2-51
c. Without moving
moving the gauge
gauge forward,
forward, slowly
slowly lower
lower the gauge until
until it is on
the front rail (see Figure 2-51
2-51).
).
d. Make sure
sure that the
the gauge moves smoothly
smoothly along the
the rails.
rails.
Gauge at 45o angle
Front Rail
Rear Rail
holder
er Ca
C alibrat
libration
ion - Ins ta
tall
ll the Work hold
holder
er S et
etup
up and
and Calibration
Calibration Gaug e
Fi g ure 2-51 Work hold
A s s embly at
at 45o angle
2. Move the workhold
workholder
er setup and calibra
calibration
tion gauge
gauge to the bond site.
site.
3. Make sure
sure the index slot
slot is aligned
aligned to the bond
bond center.
center.
4. Install
Install the gauge pedestal
pedestal on the
the workholder
workholder setup and calibratio
calibration
n gauge
2-52).
).
(see Figure 2-52
a. Make sure that
that the engrave
engrave words, “FOCUS
“FOCUS BK”, on the gauge
gauge pedestal
pedestal
points to you.
2-46
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
b. Install
Install the gauge
gauge pedestal
pedestal on the right
right side of the
the workholder setup and calibration gauge.
Workholder Setup and Calibration
Gauge Assembly
Gauge Pedestal
2-52 Work hold
holder
er Calibr
Calibra
ation - Insta
Ins tall
ll the G aug e P ede
edess ta
tall
Fi g ure 2-52
5. Se
Sellect OK.
2-53))
6. Do the
the gauge
gauge pedesta
pedestall focus
focus (see Figure 2-53
a. Do the gauge
gauge pedestal
pedestal focus by pus
pushing
hing the Up or Do
Down
wn arrow buttons
buttons
on the MMI until the gauge pedestal can be seen clearly on the screen.
b. If necessary
necessary,, adjust the
the illumination
illumination us
using
ing the F10 button on the function
bar.
c. Select OK..
Fi g ure 2-53 Work hol
holder
der C alibrat
libration
ion - G au
augg e P ede
edess ta
tall Foc us
7. Position
Position the crossha
crosshair
ir on the gauge
gauge pedestal
pedestal..
a. Use
Use th
the
e mous
mouse
e and
and [B2] to position the crosshair on the right side of the
gauge pedestal (see Figure 2-54).
2-54).
b. Make sure that
that the crosshair
crosshair is aligned
aligned on the edge
edge of the gauge pedespedestal top shelf.
c. If necessary
necessary,, adjus
adjustt the illuminat
illumination
ion using
using the F10 button on the function
bar.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-47
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
d. Select OK.
Crosshair
Align the crosshair on the edge of the top
shelf at the right side of the gauge pedestal.
Gauge
Pedestal
Fi g ure 2-54 Workhold
Workholder
er Calibrat
Calibration
ion - G aug e Pedesta
Pedestall C ros s ha
hair
ir A lig nm
nment
ent (R ig ht S ide)
e. Use
Use the
the mous
mouse
e and
and [B2] to position the crosshair on the right side of the
gauge pedestal (see Figure 2-55).
2-55).
f. Make sure
sure that the crosshair
crosshair is aligned
aligned on the
the edge of the gauge
gauge pe
pedesdestal top shelf.
g. If necessary
necessary,, adjust
adjust the illuminati
illumination
on using the F10 button on the function
bar.
h. Select OK.
Crosshair
Align the crosshair on the
the edge of the top
shelf at the right side of the gauge pedestal.
Gauge
Pedestal
2-55 Workhold
Workholder
er Calibrat
Calibration
ion - Gauge Pede
P edess ta
tall Cros s ha
hair
ir A lig nm
nment
ent (Left S ide)
Fi g ure 2-55
P. Remove th
the
e gauge pedestal
pedestal from the workholder
workholder calib
calibration
ration and setup
setup gauge,
then select OK (see Figure 2-56
2-56).
).
Fi g ure 2-56
2-56 Work hold
holder
er Calibration
Calibration - R em
emove
ove the G aug e P ede
edess ta
tall
2-48
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Q. Make sure that
that the input magzine
magzine handler area
area is clear for the
puller to move into.
2-57).
). The index gripper will move the workholder setup
R. Sele
Select
ct OK (see Figure 2-57
and calibration gauge assembly to the X sensor, then to bond site center position.
Fi g ure 2-57 Work hold
holder
er Cal
C alibr
ibra
ation - P ull
uller
er move
move into Input Ma
Mag azine Handle
Handlerr A rea
S. Remove the workholder
workholder setup
setup and calibration
calibration gauge assembly
assembly from the bond
2-58).
site, then select OK (see Figure 2-58).
Fi g ure 2-58 Work hold
holder
er Ca
C alibrat
libration
ion - R em
emove
the Workholder
the
Workholder S et
etup
up and
and Calibr
Calibra
ation Ga
G aug e
A ove
s s embly
T. Teach the preheat
preheat heat block
block assembly
assembly at rail level (se
(see
e Figure 2-59
2-59):
):
Fi g ure 2-59
2-59 Work hold
holder
er Calibration
Calibration - Tea
Teach
ch Pr ehe
eheat
at Heat B lock As s em
embly
bly
1. Install
Install the rail width
width gauge
gauge between
between the rails
rails (see step
step I.).
I.).
2. Move the rail width
width gauge and
and position itit until the bott
bottom
om surface of th
the
e pin,
at the left side of the gauge, is directly above the preheat heat block
assembly of preheat assembly (see Figure 2-60).
2-60).
3. Use the Up and
and Down arrow
arrow button
button on the MMI to move
move the hea
heatt block
assembly up until the top surface touches the pin of the rail width gauge.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-49
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2-59).
4. Sel
Select
ect OK (see Figure 2-59).
Pin touches the top surface
of the preheat heat block assembly
Rail Width Gauge
Preheat Heat Block Assembly
Fi g ure 2-60
2-60 Workhold
Workholder
er C alibra
libration
tion - P in Touches
Touches P rehe
rehea
at Hea
Heat Blo
B lock
ck A s s em
embl
blyy
U. Remove the rail wid
width
th gauge from the prehea
preheatt assembly
assembly,, then select OK (see
Figure 2-61
2-61).
).
Fi g ure 2-61
2-61 Work hold
holder
er Calibr
Calibra
ation - R em
emove
ove the R ail Width
Width Gaug e
V. Make sure that all calibratio
calibration
n gauge removed from
from the workhold
workholder
er,, then select
OK (see Figure 2-62
2-62).
).
Fi g ure 2-62
2-62 Work hol
holder
der C alibrat
libration
ion - R em
emove
ove A ll C alibrat
libration
ion Gauges
G auges
W. Install the heat block inserts
inserts on the bond site and preheat heat block assem2-63).
bly,
bly, if necessary, then select OK (see Figure 2-63).
Fi g ure 2-63
2-63 Work hold
holder
er Calibr
Calibra
ation - Ins ta
tall
ll Heat B lock Ins erts
X. Workholder
Workholder Calibrati
Calibration
on compl
completes,
etes, then
then selec
selectt OK (see Figure 2-64
2-64).
).
Fi g ure 2-64
2-64 Work hold
holder
er Calibr
Calibra
ation - C omp
omple
lete
te
2-50
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.4.
4.2
2
He
Heat
at Bloc
Block
kC
Cal
alib
ibra
rati
tion
on
2.4.2.1
Introduction
The function of this calibration is to teach the bond height position. Bond height is
the vertical position of the bond site heat block gauge/insert when the device
focus is set.
2.
2.4.
4.2.
2.2
2
Do the
the H
Hea
eatt B
Blo
lock
ck Cali
Calibr
brat
atio
ion
n
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Workho
Workholder
lder Setup Gauge (P/N: 03035-0908-00
03035-0908-001-XX)
1-XX) (Heat Block Gauge)
•
He
Heat
at B
Blo
lock
ck Ins
Inser
erts
ts (P(P-pa
part
rt))
Procedure
WARNING: DO NOT TOUCH THE HEAT BLOCK OR INSERTS WITH
W ITH UNPROTECTED HANDS IF THE WORKHOLDER HEATERS ARE AT OPERAT
OPERAT-ING TEMPERATURE. WHEN REMOVING THE
T HE HEAT BLOCKS OR
INSERTS, INSTALL A SCREW AT THE REAR EDGE OF THE HEAT
BLOCK/INSERT AND GRASP THE SCREW WITH PLIERS. THERE IS
ONE M4 TAPPED HOLE IN THE HEAT BLOCK/INSERT FOR THIS PURPOSE.
A. Select [5] CALIBRATION from the mode bar.
B. Se
Sele
lect
ct [4] WORKHOLDER from the Calibration menu.
C. Sele
Select
ct [2] HEAT BLOCK from the Workholder menu.
D. Make sure that the corr
correct
ect heat block gauge/inse
gauge/insert
rt is install
installed
ed on the bond site
2-65).
).
heat block assembly, then select OK (see Figure 2-65
Fi g ure 2-65
2-65 Hea
Heatt B lo
lock
ck C alibra
librattion - Ins ta
tall
ll B ond Si te Hea
Heatt Blo
B lock
ck G aug es/
es/Ins
Ins ert
ertss
E. Use
Use the
the mous
mouse
e and
and [B2] to move the bond head until the heat block gauge/
insert on the bond site appears on the screen.
fun ction bar.
F. If necessary
necessary,, adjust th
the
e illumination
illumination using
using the F10 button on the function
G. Continue to move the bond head until the bond tool is above a solid portion of
the heat block gauge/insert (see Figure 2-66).
2-66).
H. Sele
Select
ct OK. The head block assembly moves up and the bond tool (capillary)
touches the heat block gauge/insert.
2-66 Hea
Heatt B lock Calibration
Calibration - Move B ond Hea
Head
d
Fi g ure 2-66
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-51
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2-67).
).
I. Remove
Remove the
the heat
heat block
block gauge
gauge from
from the bond
bond site
site (se
(see
e Figure 2-67
Fi g ure 2-67
2-67 Hea
Heatt B lock Calibration
Calibration - R em
emove
ove the Heat B lock Ga
G aug e
J. Heat block
block calibra
calibration
tion complet
completes,
es, then
then select
select OK (see Figure 2-68).
2-68).
2-68 Heat B lock Calibration
Calibration - C omp
omple
lete
te
Fi g ure 2-68
2.
2.4.
4.3
3
Tuc
ucke
kerr Ej
Ejec
ectt Ca
Calib
libra
ratio
tion
n
2.4.3.1
Introduction
The tucker eject calibration calculates the distance from the indexer/tucker home
position to the position where the end of the tucker pin is aligned with the outer
surface of the Output Magazine Handler side wall. This calibration is necessary
2.
2.4.
4.3.
3.2
2
only when the tucker is replaced.
Do th
the
e Tuc
Tucke
kerr Eje
Eject
ct Cal
Calib
ibra
rati
tion
on
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Ruler
Procedure
A. Select [5] CALIBRATION from the mode bar.
B. Sel
Select
ect [4] WORKHOLDER from the Calibration menu.
C. Sele
Select
ct [3] TUCKER EJECT from the Workholder menu.
WARNING: THE OUTPUT MAGAZINE MAY BE EJECTED AS PART OF THE
TUCKER CALIBRATION. KEEP HANDS AWAY FROM THE OUTPUT
MAGAZINE HANDLER.
D. Keep hands awa
away
y from the Output Magazine
Magazine Handle
Handler.
r. The output
output magazine (if
the gripper holds the magazine) will eject before the calibration start, then
select OK (see Figure 2-69
2-69).
).
Fi g ure 2-69
2-69 Tucker E ject C alibra
libration
tion - Warning
Warning
2-52
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
E. Do th
the
e calibr
calibrati
ation
on (see
(see Figure 2-70):
2-70):
2-70 Tucker E ject C alibra
libration
tion - Alig n the
the Tucker
Fi g ure 2-70
1. Use the Left
Left and Right
Right arrow key
key on the MMI
MMI to move the ttucker
ucker un
until
til the tip
extends 1/16 inches through the opening of the Output Magazine Handler
wall (see Figure 2-71).
2-71).
2. Se
Sellect OK. The tucker moves to home position.
Output Magazine Handler Wall
Tip extends 1/16 inches through the
opening of wall
Tucker
Fi g ure 2-71
2-71 Tucker E ject Calibrat
Calibration
ion - Tucker Tip E xten
xtends
ds 1/
1/16
16 inches
2.4.
2.4.4
4
Wo
Work
rkho
hold
lder
er Ca
Cali
libr
brat
atio
ions
ns
Selecting [4] WORKHOLDER CALIBRATIONS from the ‘Workholder’ menu displays a
dialog box containing the results of all the workholder calibrations. All of the items
in the dialog box are for viewing purposes only and cannot be changed by the
user.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-53
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.
2.5
5
Wor
orkh
khol
olde
derr C
Con
onfi
figu
gura
rati
tio
on
The workholder is configured in the Workholder Configuration menu. Each item in
the menu displays a dialog box that contains parameters related to the operational characteristics of the workholder components.
To access the Workholder Configuration menu (see Figure 2-72),
2-72), select [4]CONFIGURE from the mode bar then select [5] WORKHOLDER from the Configure mode
menu. The dialog box for each item is opened when the item is selected from the
menu by the mouse or the number of the specified item is selected on the keyboard. When the specified dimensions, parameters, or options have been configured, the user can select APPLY, DONE, or CANCEL.
•
Select APPLY to write the settings to the software and the dialog box remains
open.
•
Select DONE to write the settings to the software and close the dialog box.
•
Select CANCEL to close the dialog box and ignore the changes made.
To close the Workholder Configuration menu, push the [ESC] button on the keyboard when necessary.
necessary.
Boat/device dimensions and indexing parameters are specified in the paragraphs
that follow. For information on magazine dimensions and parameters refer to Section 3 of this manual.
Fi g ure 2-72 Workhold
Workholder
er Config urat
uration
ion Menu
Menu
2-54
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.5.
5.1
1
Bo
Boat
at/D
/Dev
evic
ice
e Dim
Dimen
ensi
sion
ons
s
Select [1] DEVICE PARAMETERS from the Workholder Configuration menu (see
2-73). The "Boat/Device Dimensions" dialog box appears. It contains the
Figure 2-73).
boat dimensions, device dimension and bond plane offset adjustment parameters.
Enter the boat and device dimensions to prepare a bond program for a new type
of boat and to adjust the bond plane offset.
2-73 B oa
oat/
t/Device
Device Parame
Parametters Dial
Dialog
og B ox
Fi g ure 2-73
2.5.1.1
Boat Di
Dimensions
The boat dimension parameters in the ‘Boat/Device Parameters’ dialog box are
given below (see Figure 2-74):
2-74):
•
DEVICE PI
PITCH
Device Pitch is the measurement from the center of one device (center of the
index hole marking) to the center of the next device (center of the next index
hole marking) to be indexed. It is the distance
distance the index assembly moves
during each index cycle. The J Boat MHS supports
supports a device pitch from 0.25
inch (6.4 mm) to 6.0 inches
inches (152.4 mm).
•
BOAT WIDTH
Boat Width is the measurement from the front edge of the boat to the rear
edge of the boat. The J Boat MHS supports boat widths from 3.1 inches (78.7
mm) to 4.3 inches (109.2 mm).
•
IND
IN
DEX
EXES
ES PER BO
BOAT
Indexes per Boat is the total number of the index operations necessary to
move the boat through the bond site.
•
RIG
RI
GHT CEN
CENT
TER OFFSE
SET
T
Right Center Offset is the distance measured from the right edge of the boat to
the center of the first right-most device.
•
LEF
LE
FT CEN
CENTE
TER
R OF
OFF
FSE
SET
T
Left Center Offset is the distance measured from the left edge of the boat to
the center of the first left-most device.
•
Y FR
FRON
ONT
T CEN
CENTE
TER
R OFF
OFFSE
SET
T
Y Front Center Offset is the distance from the front edge of the boat to the
t he center of a device.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-55
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
•
HOLE PITCH
Hole Pitch is the distance measured between the centers of two adjacent
index holes. IConn Ball Bonder software supports an index hole pitch of 0.5,
0.6, 0.75, 1.0, and 1.5 inches (12.7, 15.2, 19, 25.4, and 38.1 mm).
LEFT
RIGHT
CENTER
CENTER
OFFSET
OFFSET
BOAT
DEVICE
WIDTH
DEVICE
DEVICE
DEVICE
Y FRONT
CENTER
OFFSET
DEVICE PITCH
HOLE
PITCH
2-74
4 B oa
oatt Di me
mens
ns ions
Fi g ure 2-7
•
CAVITY DOWN SE
SET
Cavity
DownofSet
the on
distance
surface
the boat
the surface
theisboat
which measured
the device from
is onthe
thetop
edge
of theofboat.
(see to
Figure 2-76).
2-76).
•
HOLE ON BOAT END
•
Hole On Boat End is the index
index hole
hole at the
the end of the boat. IItt shoul
should
d be s
set
et to
‘True’ if it is machined to represent part of the size of the index hole. For conditions other than this, the parameter must be set to "False" (see Figure 2-75).
2-75).
TRUE CONDITION
FALSE CONDITION
2-75 Hole On B oa
oatt E nd C ond
onditions
itions
Fi g ure 2-75
2.5.1
.1..2
Device Di
Dimensions
The device dimension parameters in the ‘Boat/Device Parameters’
Paramet ers’ dialog box are
given below (see Figure 2-76):
2-76):
•
BON
BO
ND PL
PLA
ANE HEI
EIG
GHT
Bond Plane Height is the distance measured from the center
cent er bond plane of the
device to the heat surface of the device.
•
VACUUM HE
HEIGHT
Vacuum Height is the distance measured from the surface of the device that is
on the boat to the heat surface of the device.
•
LOWER EX
EXTENSION
Lower Extension is the distance measured from the heat surface of the device
to the bottom of the device.
•
DEVI
VIC
CES PE
PER IN
INDEX
"Device Per Index" specified the number of devices that are moved up by the
heat block for bonding during each index cycle.
2-56
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
BOND PLANE HEIGHT
DEVICE
BOAT CAVITY
DOWN SET
VACUUM HEIGHT
HEAT SURFACE
LOWER EXTENSION
BOAT
Fi g ure 2-7
2-76
6 Device Di me
mens
ns ions
2.5
.5..1.3
Bond Plane Offset
The Bond Plane Offset adjustment sets the heat block height. It is the value
entered in this parameter, which is offset (+/- 50 mils) from the calibrated height
heigh t of
the heat block. This offset is added to the heat block default value set under ‘Heat
Block Utilities’.
2.
2.5.
5.2
2
Inde
Indexi
xing
ng Pa
Para
rame
mete
ters
rs
Select [2] INDEXING PARAMETERS from the Workholder Configuration menu (see
Figure 2-77).
2-77). The "Indexing Parameters" dialog box appears. It allows the user to
enter the parameters that is related to the indexing operation.
Fi g ure 2-7
2-77
7 Index Param
Paramet
eters
ers D ial
ialog
og B ox
The indexing parameters are given below:
•
MAXI
MA
XIM
MUM SL
SLO
OT COU
COUN
NT
Maximum Slot Count keeps the count of empty slots that have been detected
in the input magazine. It should be set to the maximum number of consecutive
empty boat slots allowed for the input magazine during the process program.
For process programs, a fully occupied input magazine is required, it should
be set to zero. This will cause the machine to stop as soon as an empty input
slot is encountered.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-57
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
•
MAX
AXIM
IMUM
UM NO VA
VAC
C CO
COUN
UNT
T
Maximum No Vac Count determines the maximum number of devices that are
allowed to be skipped as a recovery action for a missing vacuum before an
error is indicated. If no vacuum is detected at the bond site heat block, a "Missing Vacuum Recovery" dialog box is displayed. This dialog box gives the user
several options, including the option to skip the present device at the bond
site and resume the process.
•
BOA
BO
AT 1ST
1ST IN
IND
DEX DE
DEL
LAY
•
BOAT
BO
AT 2N
2ND+
D+ IN
INDE
DEX
X DE
DELA
LAY
Y
User-specified delay to allow for device thermal expansion prior to bonding
alignment. Sets the delay time between securing the material at the bond site
and the subsequent align/bond cycle. The delay is applied to the first index of
every boat no matter what type of index used (i.e., Index key, Auto index, dry
cycle index).
Same as the Boat 1st Index Delay parameter except that this delay is applied
to subsequent indexes of every boat (i.e., all indexes of the boat after the first
index of that boat).
•
MIN PREH
EHE
EAT TI
TIME
Min Preheat Time
Time is the minimum amount of time the device is to remain over
the preheat block before being indexed to the bond site heat block.
•
MAX PR
PREHEAT TI
TIME
Max Preheat Time is the maximum amount of time the device is to remain
over the preheat block before being indexed to the bond site heat block.
block. Thisparameter works in conjunction with the Check Device Overheat parameter in
the "Workholder Configuration" dialog box.
•
PREHEAT LIFT
Preheat Lift defines how high the preheat block raises a device above the
boat surface on which it rests. This parameter must be set to a value
value to have
the device lifted high enough so that it is not touching the boat. However
However,,
since the preheat block does not incorporate a device holding mechanism
(vacuum), this parameter should not be set to a height that would cause the
device to slip out of its nest on the boat. Therefore, it is boat dependent.
•
PREH
PR
EHEA
EAT
T THI
HIC
CKNE
NESS
SS
Set the vertical distance between the top and bottom surfaces of the preheat
heat block insert.
•
HEAT
HE
AT BL
BLOC
OCK
K TH
THIC
ICKN
KNES
ESS
S
Set the vertical distance between the top and bottom surfaces of the bond site
heat block insert.
•
RAIL HEIGHT
Set the rail height relative to the preheat and bond site heat block height for
the different type of carrier that will be processed. The applicable spacers are
installed to the indexer assembly to adjust the rail height.
•
PREH
PR
EHEA
EAT
T DE
DEL
LAY TIM
TIME
E
The Preheat Delay Time prevents the device from over-heated before bonding. Sets the delay time before the puller starts to inject the next device to the
bond site.
2-58
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.5.3
.5.3
Ind
Index
exin
ing
gO
Op
pti
tion
ons
s
Indexing Options allow the user to enable or disable the "Count Empty Slot"
parameter. The "Index Options" dialog box is displayed by selecting [3] INDEXING
OPTIONS from the Workholder Configuration menu (see Figure 2-78).
2-78).
2-78
78 Inde
Indexing
xing Opt
Options
ions Dialog
Dialog B ox
Fig ure 2The indexing options parameters are given below:
•
COUN
CO
UNT
T EMP
EMPTY
TY IN
INPU
PUT
T SLO
SLOT
T
Count Empty Input Slot stops the machine if it is enabled and if an input magazine slot is empty. If slots are to be skipped in the input magazine, the Slots/
Step parameter from the "Input Magazine Slot Order" and the "Output Magazine Slot Order" dialog boxes should be used in order to keep the bonder executing the process program (refer to Section 3).
•
COUN
CO
UNT
T NO VA
VAC
C SL
SLO
OT
This parameter, when set to "Yes", works in conjunction with the "Check Heat
Block Vacuum" setting in the Workholder Configuration dialog and the "Maximum No Vacuum Count" setting in the Index Parameters dialog. For example,
if "Check Heat Block Vacuum" is set to "On" and "Maximum No Vacuum
Count" is set for three (3) indexes, the bonder will stop indexing after the third
"skip index" during a "vacuum not present" condition at the heat block as long
as "Count No Vacuum Slot" is set to "Yes".
"Yes".
2.5.
2.5.4
4
Wo
Work
rkho
hold
lder
er Co
Conf
nfig
igur
urat
atio
ion
n
Workholder Configuration allows the user to set parameters that control the
default cycle times used when carried out the diagnostics on the workholder. It
also allows the user to check for device overheating at the preheat block and a
vacuum-present condition at the bond site heat block.
The Workholder Configuration dialog box is displayed by selecting [3] WORKHOLDER CONFIGURATION from the Workholder Configuration menu (see Figure 279.).
79
.).
Fi g ure 2-7
2-79
9 Workhold
Workholder
er C onfig ura
uration
tion Dial
Dialog
og B ox
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-59
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
The Workholder Configuration parameters are given below:
•
CHEC
CH
ECK
K DEV
DEVIC
ICE
E OVE
OVERH
RHEA
EAT
T
Check Device Overheat can be set to ON or OFF, but should be set to ON
when running a hot process. If running a cold process, it should be set to OFF.
When set to ON, the amount of time that the device is heated at the preheat
block is compared with the Max Preheat Time parameter in the "Index Parameters" dialog box. If the device is on the preheat block for a time period longer
than the
one
specified by
"Maxthe
Preheat
Time"
Time"
parameter,
an alert recovery
dialog
box
is displayed
giving
operator
the following
options:
•
•
Skip D
Device
evice (skips
(skips device
device on
on the prehea
preheatt block
block and resume process).
process).
•
Ign
Ignore
ore Overh
Overheat
eat (i
(igno
gnores
res overh
overheat
eat alert
alert and
and resumes
resumes pr
proce
ocess)
ss)..
•
Skip B
Boat
oat (skips
(skips boat at preheat
preheat block
block and rresumes
esumes process
process with
with nex
nextt
boat).
•
Abor
Abortt (re-i
(re-init
nitial
ialize
izes
s an
and
d remo
removes
ves mate
material
rial))
CHEC
CH
ECK
K HEA
HEAT
T BLO
BLOCK
CK VA
VACU
CUUM
UM
Check Heat Block Vacuum can be set to ON or OFF,
OFF, but should be set to ON
when running a process program. When set
se t to ON, the presence of vacuum is
verified whenever a device is at the bond site pedestal or heat block. If no
vacuum is detected, a "Missing Vacuum Recovery" dialog box is displayed giving the operator the following options.
•
•
Skip D
Device
evice (skips
(skips device
device at
at bond
bond site heat block and rresumes
esumes process).
process).
•
Che
Check
ck Vacu
Vacuum
um Sensor
Sensor Again
Again (p
(perfo
erforms
rms a ret
retry
ry using
using sam
same
e devi
device)
ce)..
•
Skip Bo
Boat
at (skips
(skips boat at heat
heat block
block a
and
nd res
resumes
umes process
process with
with next boat).
•
Abor
Abortt (re-i
(re-init
nitial
ialize
izes
s an
and
d remo
remove
ve mate
materia
rial)
l)
CYCLE DELAYS
Cycle Delays relate directly to the Cycle Period parameters in the dialog boxes
that are used to run component diagnostics under the Diagnostic mode (refer
to IConn Operation Manual). There are cycle delays for puller, indexer
indexer,, and
heat block diagnostics. When set by the user, each parameter defines the
default value for how much time (pause) there is to be between each cycle
during the execution of that component's diagnostic.
2-60
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.6
6
J Bo
Boat
at Inde
Indexe
xerr Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly R
Rem
emov
oval
al a
and
nd IIns
nsttalla
allati
tion
on
Purpose
•
Remove the J boat indexer
indexer assembly
assembly fro
from
m the machine.
machine. When necessary
necessary,, use
the following procedure to remove the J boat indexer assembly from the
machine for maintenance.
WARNING: INJURY HAZARD. INCORRECT MAINTENANCE COULD CAUSE
INJURY.. DO NOT DO MAINTENANCE UNLESS YOU HAVE COMINJURY
PLETED THE APPROVED MAINTENANCE TRAINING COURSE. READ
THE DATA IN THE SAFETY CHAPTER.
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The J Boat Indexer Assembly weight approximately 44
pounds (20 Kilograms) . To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
two persons to lift and move the assembly.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
J Boa
Boatt Indexe
Indexerr Assemb
Assembly
ly,, P/N 0303
03035-0
5-0010
010-000
-000-xx
-xx
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remove the preheat heat block assembly and bond site heat block assembly.
D. Open th
the
e lower console front door
door..
E. Remove MMI assembly
assembly from the
the machine.
machine.
1. Make sure that
that the electrica
electricall cables tto
o the MMI asse
assembly
mbly are c
correctl
orrectly
y
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove
Remove all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect the fo
followin
llowing
g cables connectors
connectors at the rea
rearr of the MMI assembly:
•
USB1
USB1 cabl
cable
e from
from th
the
e mat
matro
rox
x box
box
•
USB2
USB2 cabl
cable
e ffrom
rom the matro
matrox
x box
box
•
MMI
MMI cabl
cable
e from
from w
wir
ire
e fe
feed
ed// bi
bits
ts b
boa
oard
rd
4. Remove
Remove two (2) x M4 shoulder
shoulder screws
screws with
with flat nylon
nylon washer
washers
s and wave
washers at the bottom of the lower console top plate that attach the MMI
onto the lower console top plate.
5. Lift up
up the MMI
MMI Assembly
Assembly and remove
remove it from
from the m
machine
achine..
F. Remove the microscope
microscope assembly:
assembly:
1. Loosen the
the M6 screw on
on the left side
side of the iindexer
ndexer ba
base
se that holds
holds the
microscope stand.
2. Remove the microsco
microscope
pe with the stand
stand from the J boat indexer
indexer assembly
assembly..
G. Loosen the two captive
captive screws that attach
attach the PCB cover to the indexer base
base..
H. Remove the PC
PCB
B cover to access
access the indexer intermedi
intermediate
ate board.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Workholder
2-61
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
I. Remove
Remove the input
input tra
tray
y asse
assembl
mbly:
y:
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The Input Tray
Tray Assembly weight approximately 17.64
pounds (8 Kilograms). To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
one to two persons to lift and move the assembly.
1. Make sure that
that the electrical
electrical cables to the
the input tray assembly
assembly ar
are
e correctl
correctly
y
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect the in/
in/out
out tray cable
cable connector
connector from the conne
connector
ctor J14 of the
indexer intermediate board.
4. Loosen the
the four (4) M6 captive
captive screws that attach
attach the in
input
put tray assem
assembly
bly
to the input base plate and machine top plate.
5. Remove the input
input tray assembl
assembly
y from the machin
machine.
e.
J. Rem
Remove
ove the
the output
output tray
tray assembl
assembly:
y:
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The Output Tray Assembly weight approximately 17.64
pounds (8 Kilograms). To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
one to two persons to lift and move the assembly.
1. Make sure
sure that the electrica
electricall cables to
to the output
output tray ass
assembly
embly ar
are
e correctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect the in/
in/out
out tray cable
cable connector
connector from the conne
connector
ctor J15 of the
indexer intermediate board.
4. Loosen the
the four (4) M6 captive
captive screws that attach
attach the in
input
put tray assem
assembly
bly
to the input base plate and machine top plate.
5. Remove the output
output tray assembly
assembly from tthe
he machi
machine.
ne.
K. Remove the th
three
ree (3) M4 screws and
and washers th
that
at attach the
the indexer cov
cover
er
assembly to the J boat indexer assembly.
L. Remove the indexer
indexer cover assembly
assembly..
M. Remove the J boat indexer
indexer assemb
assembly
ly from the machine
machine (see Figure 2-80 and
2-81).
).
Figure 2-81
1. Make sure that
that the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the indexe
indexerr assembly a
are
re correct
correctly
ly
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Remove the input
input and output
output present
present sensor
sensor brackets:
brackets:
a. Loosen the
the M3 set screw
screw in the present
present sensor
sensor brac
bracket
ket that attach
attach the
present sensor.
b. Remove the present
present sensor
sensor from
from th
the
e bracket.
bracket.
c. Remove the
the M3 screw
screw each at the two
two ends of the re
rear
ar rail as
assembly
sembly
that attach the present sensor bracket.
d. Remove the present
present sen
sensor
sor brackets.
brackets.
2-62
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
4. Disconnect
Disconnect the fo
followin
llowing
g cables from
from the ind
indexer
exer inte
intermedia
rmediate
te
board. Refer to Appendix B on the MHS cable routing for details.:
•
MHS Sensor
Sensor Bus
Bus Cable
Cable P/N 0888808888-108
1082-0
2-00000-17
17 to board
board connec
connector
tor J2
•
Indexe
Indexerr DMHS Cabl
Cable
e P/N 08888-1
08888-1250
250-00
-000-xx
0-xx to
to board
board connec
connector
tor J1
•
Solenoi
Solenoid
d Cable
Cable P/N 0888808888-125
1251-0
1-000-x
00-xx
x to board
board con
connec
nector
tor J6
5. Disconnect
Disconnect the following
following cables
cables fro
from
m the inter
interface
face panel
panel at the right
right side of
the XY table assembly, attach to the Upper Console. Refer to
t o Appendix B
on the MHS cable routing for details.:
•
Preheat
Preheat Heater
Heater Asse
Assembl
mbly
y P/N 031
03118-0
18-0333
333-00
-000-00
0-00
•
Preheat
Preheat Ther
Thermoco
mocoupl
uple
e Assembl
Assembly
y P/N 031
0311818-100
1004-0
4-000-1
00-19
9
6. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if neces
necessary
sary to
release the preheat heater and thermocouple cables on the slider assembly. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps positions.
7. Use the T-handle
T-handle wrench
wrench supplied
supplied in the tool kit (P/N:
(P/N: 08888-090
08888-0901-0001-000-xx)
xx)
to remove the four (4) M6 screws and washers from the indexer base.
8. Hold the left
left and right
right side of the front
front wall
wall and lift
lift up the J boat indexer
indexer
assembly from the lower console top plate (see CAUTION).
Input Tray Assembly
Present Sensor Brackets
2-81))
(see Figure 2-81
4x M6 Screws
and Washers
‘C’ Plates
Output Magazine Handler
(Not shown here)
Integrated Table
Lifting
Support
Handler
J Boat
Indexer
Assembly
Lifting Support
Handler
J Boat
Slider Assembly
2-80 R em
emove/
ove/R
R ep
epla
lace
ce J B oa
oatt Indexer As s em
embl
blyy
Fi g ure 2-80
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-63
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
M3 Set Screw
M3 Screw
M3 Screw
M3 Set Screw
Input Present Sensor
Input Present
Sensor Bracket
Input Present Sensor
Rear Rail Assembly
Output Present
Sensor Bracket
Notch on J boat slider
base for indexer pin
4x Threaded holes
Indexer pin engages to the notch
on the slider base
Fi g ure 2-81
2-81 R em
emove
ove//R epl
epla
ace J B oa
oatt Indexe
Indexerr A s s em
embl
blyy
N. Insta
Installll the J boat indexer
indexer assembly
assembly (see
(see Figure 2-80 and Figure 2-81
2-81).
).
1. You must have the aid
aid of at least two persons
persons to hold the J boat ind
indexer
exer
assembly at the left and right side of the front wall, and put on the machine
top plate. (See CAUTION.)
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The J Boat Indexer Assembly weight approximately 44
pounds (20 Kilograms) . To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
two persons to lift and move the assembly.
2. Make sure that
that the rear of the J boat
boat indexer
indexer assembly points
points to th
the
e front of
the slider assembly.
assembly.
3. Move the rear
rear of J boat indexer
indexer assembly
assembly to the
the front of the s
slider
lider as
assembly
sembly
until the benching pin is engaged to the notch on the slider base.
4. Install
Install the J boat indexer
indexer assembly
assembly to the lower console
console top plat
plate
e with the
screws and washers removed before with the T-handle wrench.
5. Torque the screws
screws to 70 in.lb
in.lb (7.9 Nm).
6. Install
Install the input and output
output present
present sensor brackets
brackets to the
the two ends of the
rear rail assembly with the screw removed before.
7. Install
Install the present
present sensors to the sensor
sensor brack
brackets
ets and tighten
tighten the setscrews.
2-64
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
8. Connect
Connect the elec
electrical
trical cables
cables to the
the indexe
indexerr intermediate
intermediate
board. Refer to your notes.
9. Connect
Connect the preheat heater
heater cable and
and thermocouple
thermocouple cable
cables
s connect
connectors
ors to
the interface panel. Refer to your notes.
10.Attach the electrical cables with cable ties and cable clamps to the J boat
indexer assembly and slider assembly. Refer to your notes.
11.Attach the indexer cover assembly to the J boat indexer assembly with the
screws and washers removed before.
12.Install the microscope assembly to the left side of the indexer base and
tighten the screw loosen before.
O. Install
Install the input
input tray assembly
assembly (see CAUTION).
1. Put the input
input tray assembly
assembly on the front
front edge of
of the input base
base plate.
plate.
2. Attach the
the input tray
tray assembly
assembly to the in
input
put base plate
plate with th
the
e captive
screws removed before.
3. Make sure the ‘C’
‘C’ plates on the input
input wall and the input
input fixed wall
wall interloc
interlock
k
each other.
4. Connect
Connect the in/out tray
tray cable connecor
connecor to the con
connector
nector J14
J14 of the indexe
indexerr
intermediate board. Refer to your notes.
5. Attach the
the electrical
electrical cables with
with cable ties
ties and cable clamps
clamps to the inp
input
ut
tray assembly and indexer assembly. Refer to your notes.
P. Install
Install the output tray assembl
assembly
y (see CAUTION).
1. Put the output
output tray assembly
assembly on the
the front edg
edge
e of the output
output base plate.
plate.
2. Attach
Attach the output
output tray assembly
assembly to the output
output base
base plate wi
with
th the captive
captive
screws removed before.
3. Make sure the
the ‘C’ plates
plates on the output
output wall
wall and the output
output fixed
fixed wall int
intererlock each other.
4. Connect
Connect the in/ou
in/outt tray cable connecor
connecor to the connecto
connectorr J15 of the indexer
indexer
intermediate board. Refer to your notes.
5. Attach
Attach the electrical
electrical cables
cables with cable ties
ties and cable cl
clamps
amps to the inp
input
ut
tray assembly and indexer assembly. Refer to your notes.
Q. Install
Install the PCB cover to the indexer base and tighte
tighten
n the two captive screws.
screws.
R. Insta
Installll the MMI
MMI Assembly
Assembly on the
the mach
machine.
ine.
1. Put the MMI assembly
assembly on
on the front edge
edge of the low
lower
er console
console top plate.
plate.
2. Pull the electric
electrical
al cables
cables for the MMI assembl
assembly
y below and through
through th
the
e
opening on the lower console top plate. Refer to your notes.
3. Connect
Connect the cabl
cables
es to the MMI assembl
assembly
y. Refer to y
your
our notes
notes..
4. Install,
Install, but do not tighten
tighten the two (2) shoulders
shoulders scr
screws
ews with flat
flat washers
and wave washers below the lower console top plate to attach the MMI
assembly.
5. Move the MMI
MMI assembly
assembly to the front
front of the J boat
boat indexer
indexer assembl
assembly
y.
6. Tighten
Tighten the screws
screws to attach the MMI
MMI assembl
assembly
y to the lower cons
console
ole top
plate.
S. Close the lower
lower console
console front
front door.
door.
T. Install
Install the preheat heat
heat block assembly
assembly to the preheat
preheat assembly
assembly..
U. Insta
Installll the bond site heat block
block assembly to the slider
slider assembly
assembly..
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-65
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.7
2.7
J Bo
Boat
at S
Sli
lide
derr As
Asse
semb
mbly
ly Rem
Remov
oval
al a
and
nd IIns
nsta
tall
llat
atio
ion
n
Purpose
•
Remove the J boat slider
slider assembl
assembly
y from the ma
machine.
chine. When ne
necessary
cessary,, use
the following procedure to remove the J boat slider assembly from the
machine for maintenance.
WARNING: INJURY HAZARD. INCORRECT MAINTENANCE COULD CAUSE
INJURY. DO NOT DO MAINTENANCE UNLESS YOU HAVE COMPLETED THE APPROVED MAINTENANCE TRAINING COURSE. READ
THE DATA IN THE SAFETY CHAPTER.
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The J Boat Slider Assembly weight approximately 22
pounds (10 Kilograms) . To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
two persons to lift and move the assembly.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
J Boat
Boat Slider
Slider Asse
Assembl
mbly
y, P/N 0303503035-004
0040-00
0-000-xx
0-xx
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remove the inpu
inputt tray assembly
assembly from the machine. Refer
Refer to paragraph 2.6,
2.6,
step I..
I..
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The Input Tray
Tray Assembly weight approximately 17.64
pounds (8 Kilograms). To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
one to two persons to lift and move the assembly.
D. Remove the outpu
outputt tray assembly from
from the machine. Refe
Referr to paragraph 2.6
2.6,,
J...
step J.
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The Output Tray Assembly weight approximately 17.64
pounds (8 Kilograms). To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
one to two persons to lift and move the assembly.
E. Remove the J boa
boatt indexer ass
assembly
embly from the machine.
machine. Refer
Refer to paragraph
paragraph
2.6.
2.6.
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The J Boat Indexer Assembly weight approximately 44
pounds (20 Kilograms) . To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
two persons to lift and move the assembly.
F. Remove the
the J boat slider
slider assembly
assembly from
from the machi
machine.
ne. (See Figure 2-82).
2-82).
1. Make sure that
that the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the J boat slide
sliderr assembly ar
are
e correctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
2-66
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3. Disconnect
Disconnect the ffollowi
ollowing
ng cables connect
connectors
ors and vacuum
vacuum tubing
from the interface panel. Refer to Appendix B on the MHS cable routing for
details.
•
Heat
Heat Block
Block Sensor
Sensor P/N 0341
03411-10
1-1031-0
31-001-1
01-17
7
•
Heat
Heat Block
Block Motor
Motor Asse
Assembly
mbly P/N 0
0888
8888-1
8-1101
101-000
-000-xx
-xx
•
Heat
Heat Block
Block Heate
Heaterr Assembl
Assembly
y P/N 031
0311818-033
0333-0
3-000-0
00-01
1
•
•
Heat
Heat Block Therm
Thermocou
ocouple
ple Ass
Assemb
embly
ly P/N 0311803118-100
1004-0
4-000-2
00-20
0
Clamp
Clamp Grou
Ground
nd W
Wire
ire Cable
Cable P/N
P/N 0
0888
8888-10
8-106464-000
000-xx
-xx
•
Vacuum Tubing
4. Remove the
the cables and vacuum
vacuum hose from the slider
slider routi
routing
ng bracket attach
attach
to the integrated table assembly.
5. Disconnect
Disconnect the va
vacuum
cuum valve
valve hose from the ffitting
itting on the rrear
ear right edge
edge of
the J boat slider assembly.
6. Remove the
the two (2) M6 screws
screws and washers
washers on
on the left and right side
side of
the J boat slider assembly that attach the assembly to the integrated table
assembly.
7. Use the T-handle
T-handle wrench
wrench supplied
supplied in the tool kit (P/N:
(P/N: 08888-090
08888-0901-0001-000-xx)
xx)
to remove the four (4) M6 screws and washers at the front and rear of the
slider base.
8. Hold
the left
lefrom
ft and
right
rigmachine
ht side oftop
theplate.
slider
slider(See
ba
base
seCAUTION
and lift
lift up
slider
lider
assembly
the
.) . the J boat s
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The J Boat Slider Assembly weight approximately 22
pounds (10 Kilograms) . To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
two persons to lift and move the assembly.
G. Install
Install the J boat slider
slider assembly
assembly (See
(See Figure 2-82
2-82))
1. You must have
have the aid of at least
least two persons
persons to h
hold
old the J boat
boat slider
slider
assembly at the left and right side of the slider base, and put on the
machine top plate. (See CAUTION.)
2. Make sure that
that the rear
rear of the J boat slider
slider ass
assembly
embly po
points
ints to the
the front of
the integrated table assembly
assembly..
3. Move the rear
rear of J boat slider
slider assembly
assembly to the front
front of the int
integrated
egrated ttable
able
assembly.
4. Make sure that
that the three
three surfaces
surfaces on the sli
slider
der base to
touches
uches the s
surface
urfaces
s
at the front of the integrated table base.
5. Install
Install the J boat slider
slider assembly
assembly to the machine top
top plate and front of inteintegrated table assembly with the screws and washers removed before with
the T-handle wrench.
6. Torque the screws
screws to 70 in.lb
in.lb (7.9 Nm).
7. Connect
Connect the electr
electrical
ical cables
cables and vacuum tubing
tubing to the inte
interface
rface panel.
panel.
Refer to your notes.
8. Attach the
the electrical
electrical cables with
with cable ties
ties and cable clamps
clamps to the J boat
slider assembly. Refer to your notes.
9. Put the electrical
electrical cables
cables and tubing through
through the sl
slider
ider routing
routing bracket.
bracket.
10.At the rear right edge of the J boat slider assembly, connect the vacuum
valve tubing to the elbow fitting.
H. Instal
Installl the J boat indexer assembly
assembly to the machine. Refer to paragraph
paragraph 2.6.
2.6.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-67
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The J Boat Indexer Assembly weight approximately 44
pounds (20 Kilograms) . To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
two persons to lift and move the assembly.
I. Instal
Installl the input
input tray
tray assembl
assembly
y (see p
parag
aragrap
raph
h 2.6
2.6,, step O.
O.).
).
J. Install
Install the output tray assembly
assembly (see paragrap
paragraph
h 2.6,
2.6, step P.)
4x M6 Screws and Washers
Benching Surfaces
See detail below
Integrated Table
Slider Assembly
Lifting Support
2x M6 Screws
and Washers
Lifting Support
Surfaces on the Integrated table base touch
the surfaces on the Slider Base
Left Threaded holes
Surfaces on the Slider base touch
Right Threaded holes
the surfaces on the Integrated T
Table
able Base
4x Threaded holes
Fi g ure 2-82
2-82 R em
emove
ove//R ep
epla
lace
ce J B oa
oatt S lide
liderr A s s em
embl
blyy
2-68
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.8
Pr
Prev
even
enti
tive
ve Ma
Maiint
nten
enan
ance
ce
A preventive maintenance schedule for the workholder subsystem is provided in
2-2.
Table 2-2.
WARNING: REMOVE POWER FROM THE MACHINE BEFORE CHECKING THE
SECURITY AND INTEGRITY OF THE WORKHOLDER ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS. MAKE SURE ALL HEATING SURFACES HAVE
COOLED BEFORE PROCEEDING.
WARNING: REMOVE POWER FROM THE MACHINE BEFORE CHECKING THE
TIGHTNESS OF THE WORKHOLDER ATTACHING HARDWARE AND
INSPECTING THE PNEUMATIC LINES. MAKE SURE ALL HEATING
SURFACES HAVE COOLED BEFORE PROCEEDING.
Table 2-2 Workholder Preventive Maintenance
Maintena nce Schedule
Action
Period
Tools
Procedure
Clean heat block
8 hours
Vacuum Hose
Remove any dirt or contaminates from
the preheat and bond site heat block
area.
Clean workholder and
40 hours
Vacuum Hose
Remove any dirt or contaminates from
magazine handlers
exposed and moving parts of the workholder.
Lubricate puller drive
rack on workholder
1000 hours
Lubriplate #630-2 P/N: Apply thin coat of Lubriplate to rack
teeth, making sure that all teeth are com39086-6004-000
pletely filled. Remove excess lubricant
from top of rack and around rack when
done.
Replace heat block vacuum hose
1000 hours
1. Hand tools
2. Silicone Tubing, 9”
long, P/N
82719-3000-000
1. Replace the vacuum hose between
the rear of the heat block and the heat
sink.
Make sure all attaching hardware
(screws, washers, nuts, etc.) are
securely installed.
2. Make sure that there are no leaks or
kinks in the hose before resuming production.
Check hardware tightness
1000 hours
Hand Tools
Inspect electrical
connections
1000 hours
—
Check for security and integrity of all
electrical connections on the workholder.
Refer to Section 4 for connector locations.
Inspect pneumatic lines
1000 hours
—
Check for cracks, cuts, leaks, pinching or
kinks. Also check for loose fittings or
signs of stretching or wear. Correct as
required. See Section 4 for connections.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-69
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Action
Period
Tools
Lubricate X-slide
bearing on the indexer
assembly
3 months to 6
months
1. Lubricant (10 ml, in
syringe), P/N:
27790-5020-000
2. Lint-Free Cloth
3. Hand gloves
4. Cotton buds
5. Hex Wrench Set
Procedure
1. Push the [Motor Stop] button.
2. Remove the indexer assembly front
cover.
3. Move the gripper assembly to the left
or right side manually when neccessary.
4. Clean the v-grooves of the X-slide
bearing on the front wall using the lintfree cloth.
5. Apply about 0.1 ml to 0.2 ml of the
lubricant to the top and bottom of the
v-grooves of the X slide bearings.
6. Move the puller assembly and index
assembly along the X-slide bearing
manually for 10 times.
7. Do steps 5 to 6 again for four times.
8. Remove the unwanted lubricant from
the X-slide bearing with the lint-free
cloth.
2-70
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.9
2.9
Pa
Part
rts
s Re
Repl
plac
acem
emen
entt Pr
Proc
oced
edur
ures
es
2.9.1
2.9
.1
Bon
Bond
d Si
Site/
te/Pre
Prehea
heatt He
Heat
at B
Bloc
lock
k As
Assem
sembly
bly Par
Parts
ts
2.
2.9
9.1
.1.1
.1
Compr
pre
ess
ssio
ion
n Spri
ring
ng
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the compression
compression spring on the
the bond site or preheat
preheat heat b
block
lock
assembly.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Compre
Compressi
ssion
on Spring
Spring,, P/N:
P/N: 6354363543-122
1229-0
9-036
36
•
Hand Tool
Procedure
WARNING: IF THE WORKHOLDER IS HEATED, AVOID TOUCHING HEA
HEATED
TED
PARTS
PAR
TS WHEN REMOVING PARTS OR MATERIAL (CARRIERS AND
HEAT
HEA
T BLOCK INSERTS OR WHEN PERFORMING OTHER OPERATIONS. WAIT FOR HEATERS TO COOL.
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remov
Remove
e the heat block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts (see section
section 1).
D. Remove the heat
heat block
block assembly:
assembly:
1. Make sure
sure that the el
electrica
ectricall cables to tthe
he heat blo
block
ck assembly
assembly are correctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Disconnect
Disconnect the hea
heater
ter and thermocoupl
thermocouple
e cable conne
connectors
ctors from th
the
e interface panel.
3. Remove
Remove all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
4. Remove
Remove the applicable
applicable ground
ground strap/wire
strap/wire on the
the bond site
site (see step a.)
a.) or
preheat (see b.
b.)) heat block assembly:
a. At the left side
side of the bond site heat
heat block assembly
assembly,, loosen the M2.
M2.5
5
screw and pull out the metal jacket of the ground strap.
b. At the front of the preheat
preheat heat
heat block assembly
assembly,, remove th
the
e M2.5 screw
then remove the ground wire terminal.
5. Remove
Remove the four (4) M3 screws
screws an
and
d washers that
that attach
attach the heat block
block
assembly to the preheat or bond site assembly.
6. Remove the
the heat block assembly
assembly and put it on a work
work bench.
bench.
2-83):
):
E. Remove the compres
compression
sion spring (see Figure 2-83
1. Hold the lock
lock pin and latch bar
bar that are attach
attach to the heat block assembly
assembly..
2. Remove
Remove the two (2)
(2) M3 flat head
head s
screws.
crews.
3. Remove
Remove the lock pin,
pin, the latch
latch bar and the compress
compression
ion spri
spring.
ng.
4. Discar
Discard
d the compres
compression
sion spring
spring..
2-83):
):
F. Install
Install the replacem
replacement
ent comp
compressio
ression
n spring
spring (see Figure 2-83
1. Install
Install the spring into
into the hole at the front
front of the heat block assembly
assembly..
2. Install
Install the latch bar to the front
front of the heat bloc
block
k assembly.
assembly. Make sure that
the ledge is at the top and points to the rear of the heat block assembly.
3. Hold the latch
latch bar in position
position against
against the front of the heat block
block assembly
assembly..
Make sure that the ledge is on the pin on the top of the heat block assem-
bly.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-71
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4. Align the front
front surface
surface of the latch
latch bar with
with the front
front surface
surface of the heat
block assembly, while the spring is compressed.
5. Position
Position the center
center of the lock
lock pin to the groove
groove in the la
latch
tch bar.
bar.
6. Torque the flat
flat screws
screws removed
removed before to 6 in.Ibs
in.Ibs (0.68
(0.68 Nm).
Heat Block Assembly
Compression Spring
Lock Pin
Latch Bar
2x M3 Flat Head Screws
2-83
83 Comp
Compress
ress ion S pring
Fig ure 2G. Install
Install the heat
heat block
block assembly:
assembly:
1. Put the heat
heat block
block assembly
assembly on tthe
he prehe
preheat
at or bond site.
2. Install
Install the heat block
block assembly
assembly to the preheat or bond
bond site with the screws
screws
and washers removed before. Tighten the screws.
3. Connect
Connect the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the interface
interface panel. Refer
Refer to your note
notes.
s.
4. Attach the
the electrical
electrical cables with
with cable ties
ties and cable cla
clamps
mps to the wor
workkholder. Refer to your notes.
5. Install
Install the ground
ground strap/wire
strap/wire to the applicable
applicable preheat
preheat or bond site heat
heat
block assembly with the screw removed before .
H. Insta
Installll the heat block gauge or inserts
inserts removed before
before to the heat block
assembly (see section 1).
I. Push
Push tthe
he green
green machi
machine
ne ON switch
switch..
J. Se
Sellect OK to start initialization.
K. Do the setup and ca
calibrati
libration
on procedures
procedures (see paragragphs
paragragphs 2.3 and 2.4).
2.4).
2-72
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.9
9.1
.1.2
.2
Preh
reheat Heater
ter Ass
Asse
embly
bly
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the heater assembly
assembly in the preheat
preheat heat block assembly
assembly. This assembly contains a heating element that heats the preheat area up to a temperature
set during configuration.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Hea
Heater
ter Assemb
Assembly
ly,, 0311803118-033
0333-00
3-000-0
0-00
0
Hand Tool
Procedure
WARNING: IF THE WORKHOLDER IS HEATED, AVOID TOUCHING HEA
HEATED
TED
PARTS
PAR
TS WHEN REMOVING PARTS OR MATERIAL (CARRIERS AND
HEAT
HEA
T BLOCK INSERTS) OR WHEN PERFORMING OTHER OPERAOPE RATIONS. WAIT FOR HEATERS TO COOL.
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remov
Remove
e the heat block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts (see section
section 1).
D. Remov
Remove
e the preheat
preheat heat
heat block assembly:
assembly:
1. Make sure
sure that the el
electrica
ectricall cables to tthe
he heat blo
block
ck assembly
assembly are correctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Disconnect
Disconnect the pre
preheat
heat heater and
and thermocouple
thermocouple cabl
cable
e connectors
connectors from
the interface panel.
3. Remove
Remove all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
4. At the front of the preheat
preheat heat block as
assembly
sembly,, remove the M2.
M2.5
5 screw
then remove the ground wire terminal.
5. Remove the
the four (4) M3 screws
screws and
and washers
washers that attach
attach the pre
preheat
heat heat
block assembly to the preheat assembly.
6. Remove the
the preheat
preheat heat block assembly
assembly and put it on a w
work
ork benc
bench.
h.
2-84):
E. Remove the heater
heater element
element assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-84):
1. Loosen the
the heater element
element set
set screws at th
the
e top rear su
surface
rface of the
the heat
block assembly
assembly..
2. At the front of the heat block
block assembly
assembly,, pull out the hea
heater
ter elemen
elementt assembly and discard.
2-84):
F. Install
Install the replacemen
replacementt heater element
element assembly
assembly (s
(see
ee Figure 2-84):
1. Install
Install the new heater
heater element
element assembly
assembly into tthe
he bore at the ffront
ront of the
heat block assembly.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-73
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2. At the top rear surface
surface of the heat block
block assembl
assembly
y, carefull
carefully
y tighten the
the
heater element set screws until it is engaged to the heater elements.
Heater Element Set Screw
Thermocouple
Set Screw
Preheat Heat Block Assembly
Preheat Thermocouple
Preheat Heater Assembly
Heater Element
Set Screw
Fi g ure 2-84
2-84 P rehea
reheatt Hea
Heate
terr and
and Thermocouple
Thermocouple A s s em
embl
blies
ies
G. Install
Install the preheat
preheat heat block assembly:
assembly:
1. Put the heat block
block assembly
assembly on the
the preheat assembl
assembly
y.
2. Install
Install the heat block
block assembly
assembly to the preheat assembly
assembly with
with the screws
and washers removed before. Tighten the screws.
3. Connect
Connect the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the interface
interface panel. Refer
Refer to your note
notes.
s.
4. Attach the
the electrical
electrical cables with
with cable ties
ties and cable cla
clamps
mps to the wor
workkholder. Refer to your notes.
5. Install
Install the ground
ground wire to the front of the preheat
preheat heat block
block assembly
assembly with
the screw removed before.
H. Insta
Installll the heat block gauge or inserts
inserts removed before
before to the preheat heat
block assembly (see section 1).
I. Push
Push tthe
he green
green machi
machine
ne ON switch
switch..
J. Se
Sellect OK to start initialization.
2.4).
K. Do the setup and ca
calibrati
libration
on procedures
procedures (see paragragphs
paragragphs 2.3 and 2.4).
2-74
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.9.
9.1.
1.3
3
Preh
Prehea
eatt Ther
Thermo
moco
coup
uple
le Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the thermocouple
thermocouple assemb
assembly
ly in the pre
preheat
heat heat
heat b
block
lock a
assembl
ssembly
y. This
assembly monitors the temperature of the heater cartridge.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Ther
Thermoc
mocoup
ouple
le Assembl
Assembly
y, P/N: 031
0311818-1004
1004-000
-000-19
-19
•
Hand Tool
Procedure
WARNING: IF THE WORKHOLDER IS HEATED, AVOID TOUCHING HEA
HEATED
TED
PARTS
PAR
TS WHEN REMOVING PARTS OR MATERIAL (CARRIERS AND
HEAT
HEA
T BLOCK INSERTS) OR WHEN PERFORMING OTHER OPERAOPE RATIONS. WAIT FOR HEATERS TO COOL.
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remov
Remove
e the heat block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts (see section
section 1).
2.9.1.2,, step D.
D.).
).
D. Remov
Remove
e the preheat heat
heat block assembly
assembly (see paragraph
paragraph 2.9.1.2
E. Remove the thermocou
thermocouple
ple assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-84):
2-84):
1. Loosen the
the thermocouple
thermocouple set
set screw at the
the top rear surface
surface of the
the heat
block assembly
assembly..
2. At the rear of the heat block
block assembly
assembly,, pull the thermo
thermocouple
couple assembly
assembly
rearward and discard.
2-84):
F. Install
Install the replacement
replacement thermoc
thermocouple
ouple assembly
assembly (s
(see
ee Figure 2-84):
1. Install
Install the new tthermoco
hermocouple
uple assembly
assembly in
into
to the bore at th
the
e rear of the hea
heatt
block assembly
assembly..
2. At the top rear surface
surface of the heat block
block assembly
assembly,, carefull
carefully
y tighten the
thermocouple set screw until it is engaged to the thermocouple.
G. Install
Install the preheat heat block
block assembly (see paragraph
paragraph 2.9.1.2,
2.9.1.2, step G.).
H. Insta
Installll the heat block gauge or inserts
inserts removed bef
before
ore to the preheat heat
block assembly (see section 1).
I. Push the green
green machin
machine
e ON
ON swit
switch.
ch.
J. Sel
Select OK to start initialization.
2.4).
).
K. Do the setup and
and calibration
calibration procedures
procedures (see paragragp
paragragphs
hs 2.3 and 2.4
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-75
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.9
.9.1
.1.4
.4
Bon
Bond Si
Site Heater
ter Ass
Asse
embly
bly
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the heater assembly
assembly in the bond
bond site heat bl
block
ock assembly
assembly.. This
assembly contains a heating element that heats the bond site area up to a
temperature set during configuration.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Heater
Heater Assembl
Assembly
y, 0311803118-033
0333-00
3-000-0
0-01
1
Hand Tool
Procedure
WARNING: IF THE WORKHOLDER
W ORKHOLDER IS HEA
HEATED,
TED, AVOID TOUCHING HEATED
PARTS
PA
RTS WHEN REMOVING PARTS OR MATERIAL (CARRIERS AND
HEAT
HEA
T BLOCK INSERTS) OR WHEN PERFORMING OTHER OPE
OPERARATIONS. WAIT FOR HEATERS TO COOL.
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remove the he
heat
at block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts (see section
section 1).
D. Remove th
the
e bond site
site heat block
block assembly:
assembly:
1. Make sure
sure that the electrica
electricall cables to
to the heat block
block assembly
assembly are c
cororrectly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Disconnect
Disconnect the bon
bond
d site heater and
and thermocouple
thermocouple cable co
connecto
nnectors
rs from
the interface panel.
3. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
4. At the left rear
rear side of the bond site heat
heat block ass
assembly
embly,, loosen the M2.5
screw and pull out the metal jacket of the ground strap.
5. Remove four
four M3 screws
screws and washers
washers that attach
attach th
the
e bond sit
site
e heat block
block
assembly to the bond site heat block assembly.
6. Remove the
the bond site
site heat block
block assembly
assembly and put iitt on a work bench.
bench.
2-85):
E. Remove the heater
heater element
element assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-85):
1. Remove the
the two M2.5 screws
screws at the
the bottom rrear
ear of the heat
heat block.
2. Remove the cable
cable shield that
that attach to the rear of the heat block
block assembly
assembly..
3. Loosen the
the heater element
element set
set screws at
at the front to
top
p surface o
off the heat
block assembly.
4. At the rear of the heat block
block assembly
assembly,, pull the heater
heater element assembly
assembly
rearward and discard.
2-85):
F. Install
Install the replaceme
replacement
nt heater e
element
lement assembly
assembly (see
(see Figure 2-85):
1. Install
Install the new heater
heater element
element assembly
assembly into tthe
he bore at th
the
e rear of the
heat block assembly.
2. At the front top surface
surface of the heat block
block assembly
assembly,, carefull
carefully
y tighten the
heater element set screws until it is engaged to the heater elements.
2-76
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3. Install
Install the cable
cable shield to
to the rear of the
the heat block
block with the
the
screws removed before.
Cable Shield
Bond Site Heater Assembly
Thermocouple Set Screw
2x M2.5 Screws
Bond Site Thermocouple
Heater Element Set Screw
Bond Site Heat Block Assembly
Fi g ure 2-85
2-85 B ond S ite Heat
Heater
er and
and Thermocoupl
Thermocouple
e A s s em
emblies
blies
G. Install
Install the bond site heat
heat block assembly:
assembly:
1. Put the heat
heat block assembly
assembly on the
the bond si
site
te assembly
assembly..
2. Install
Install the heat block
block assembly
assembly to the bond site assembly
assembly with th
the
e screws
and washers removed before. Tighten the screws.
3. Connect
Connect the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the interface
interface panel
panel.. Refer to your notes.
notes.
4. Attach
Attach the electrical
electrical cables
cables with cable ties
ties and cable cl
clamps
amps to the wo
workrkholder. Refer to your notes.
5. Install
Install the ground
ground strap to the
the left rear
rear side of the
the bond site
site heat block
block
assembly with the screw removed before.
H. Insta
Installll the heat block gauge or inserts
inserts removed bef
before
ore to the bond site heat
block assembly (see section 1).
I. Push the green
green machin
machine
e ON
ON swit
switch.
ch.
J. Sel
Select OK to start initialization.
2.4).
).
K. Do the setup and
and calibration
calibration procedures
procedures (see paragragp
paragragphs
hs 2.3 and 2.4
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-77
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.
2.9.
9.1.
1.5
5
Bond
Bond Sit
Site
e Ther
Thermo
moco
cou
uple
ple Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the thermocouple
thermocouple assembly
assembly in the bon
bond
d site
site heat block assemb
assembly
ly..
This assembly monitors the temperature of the heater cartridge.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Thermoc
Thermocoup
ouple
le Assemb
Assembly
ly,, P/N: 0311803118-100
1004-00
4-000-20
0-20
•
Hand Tool
Procedure
WARNING: IF THE WORKHOLDER
W ORKHOLDER IS HEA
HEATED,
TED, AVOID TOUCHING HEATED
PARTS
PA
RTS WHEN REMOVING PARTS OR MATERIAL (CARRIERS AND
HEAT
HEA
T BLOCK INSERTS) OR WHEN PERFORMING OTHER OPE
OPERARATIONS. WAIT FOR HEATERS TO COOL.
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remove the he
heat
at block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts (see section
section 1).
D.).
).
D. Remove the bo
bond
nd site heat block
block assembly
assembly (see parag
paragraph
raph 2.9.1.4,
2.9.1.4, step D.
E. Remove the thermocou
thermocouple
ple assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-85):
2-85):
1. Remove the
the two M2.5 screws
screws at the
the rear bot
bottom
tom of the heat
heat block.
2. Remove the cable
cable shield that
that attach to the rear of the heat block
block assembly
assembly..
3. Loosen the
the thermocouple
thermocouple set
set screw at the
the rear top surface
surface of the heat
heat
block assembly.
4. At the rear of the heat block
block assembly
assembly, pull the therm
thermocoupl
ocouple
e assembl
assembly
y
rearward and discard.
2-85):
F. Install
Install the replacement
replacement thermoco
thermocouple
uple assembly
assembly (se
(see
e Figure 2-85):
1. Install
Install the new thermocou
thermocouple
ple assembly
assembly into the b
bore
ore at the rear of th
the
e heat
block assembly.
2. At the rear top surface
surface of the heat block
block assembl
assembly
y, carefull
carefully
y tighten the
the
thermocouple set screw until it is engaged to the thermocouple
t hermocouple assembly.
3. Install
Install the cable
cable shield to
to the rear of the
the heat block
block with the
the screws
removed before.
G. Install
Install the bond site heat block assembly
assembly (see paragraph
paragraph 2.9.1.4
2.9.1.4,, step G.).
H. Insta
Installll the heat block gauge or inserts
inserts removed before
before to the bond site heat
block assembly (see section 1).
I. Push
Push tthe
he green
green machi
machine
ne ON switch
switch..
J. Se
Sellect OK to start initialization.
K. Do the setup and ca
calibrati
libration
on procedures
procedures (see paragragphs
paragragphs 2.3 and 2.4).
2.4).
2-78
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.9.
9.1.
1.6
6
Preh
Prehea
eatt Heat
Heat Bl
Bloc
ock
k Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the preheat
preheat heat block
block assembly
assembly.. This assembly
assembly in
increases
creases the temtemperature of the device before it is at the bond position. It contains the heat
block and the heat block insulator, which are replaced as a set.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Preh
Preheat
eat Heat
Heat Block
Block Assem
Assembly
bly,, P/N:
P/N: 0303
03035-0
5-0063
063-00
-000-XX
0-XX
Hand Tools
Procedure
WARNING: IF THE WORKHOLDER IS HEATED, AVOID TOUCHING HEA
HEATED
TED
PARTS
PAR
TS WHEN REMOVING PARTS OR MATERIAL (CARRIERS AND
HEAT
HEA
T BLOCK INSERTS) OR WHEN PERFORMING OTHER OPERAOPE RATIONS. WAIT FOR HEATERS TO COOL.
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remov
Remove
e the heat block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts (see section
section 1).
2-86):
D. Remov
Remove
e the preheat
preheat heat block
block assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-86):
1. Make sure that
that the electrica
electricall cables to tthe
he heat blo
block
ck assembly
assembly are correctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Disconnect
Disconnect the pre
preheat
heat heater and
and thermocouple
thermocouple cabl
cable
e connectors
connectors from
the interface panel.
3. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if neces
necessary
sary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
4. At the front of the preheat
preheat heat block as
assembly
sembly,, remove the M2.
M2.5
5 screw
then remove the ground wire terminal.
5. Remove four
four M3 screws
screws and washers
washers that attach
attach th
the
e preheat h
heat
eat block
assembly to the preheat assembly.
6. Remove the
the preheat
preheat heat block assembly
assembly and put it on a w
work
ork benc
bench.
h.
7. Remove
Remove the heater
heater assembly
assembly from the preheat
preheat hea
heatt block assembly
assembly ((see
see
paragraph 2.9.1.2).
2.9.1.2).
8. Remove the
the thermocouple
thermocouple assembly
assembly from the
the preheat heat
heat block assembly
assembly
2.9.1.3).
).
(see paragraph 2.9.1.3
9. Discard
Discard the preheat heat block
block assembly
assembly..
E. Install
Install the replacement
replacement preheat
preheat heat block
block assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-86):
2-86):
1. Install
Install the heater assembly
assembly to the preheat
preheat heat block
block assembly
assembly removed
before.
2. Install
Install the thermocouple
thermocouple assembly
assembly to the preheat
preheat heat block
block assembly
assembly
removed before.
3. Put the preheat
preheat heat block
block assembly
assembly on th
the
e preheat as
assembly
sembly..
4. Install
Install the preheat
preheat heat block assembly
assembly to the preheat
preheat asse
assembly
mbly with th
the
e
screws and washers removed before. Tighten the screws.
5. Connect
Connect the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the interface
interface panel. R
Refer
efer to your notes.
notes.
6. Attach
Attach the electrical
electrical cables
cables with cable ties
ties and cable cl
clamps
amps to the wo
workrkholder. Refer to your notes.
7. Install
Install the ground wire
wire to the front of the preheat
preheat heat bloc
block
k assembl
assembly
y with
the screw removed before.
F. Install
Install the heat block
block gauge or inserts
inserts removed before
before to the prehe
preheat
at heat
block assembly (see section 1).
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-79
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
G. Push the
the green machine
machine ON
ON switch.
switch.
H. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
I. Do the
the setup
setup and calibration
calibration procedures
procedures ((see
see paragra
paragragphs
gphs 2.3 and 2.4).
2.4).
4x M3 Screws
M3 Washers
Heater Element Set Screw
Thermocouple Set Screw
Heater Element
Set Screw
Preheat Thermocouple
M2.5 Screws
Preheat Heat
Block Assembly
Preheat Heater Assembly
Ground Wire Terminal
(not shown)
Preheat Assembly
Fi g ure 2-86
2-86 R ep
epla
lace
ce Preheat
Preheat Hea
Heatt B lo
lock
ck A s s em
embl
blyy
2.
2.9.
9.1.
1.7
7
Bond
Bond Si
Site
te Heat
Heat Bl
Bloc
ock
kA
Ass
ssem
embl
bly
y
Purpose
Replace the bond site heat block assembly. This assembly heats the devices
while at bond site to the temperature required for bonding. It contains the heat
block, heater assembly, thermocouple assembly, and the heat block insulator.
These parts are replaced as a set but the heater assembly or thermocouple
assembly can be replaced as a single part.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Bond Site
Site Heat
Heat Block
Block Assembly
Assembly,, P/N:
P/N:030
0303535-0061
0061-00
-000-XX
0-XX
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
WARNING: IF THE WORKHOLDER
W ORKHOLDER IS HEA
HEATED,
TED, AVOID TOUCHING HEATED
PARTS
PA
RTS WHEN REMOVING PARTS OR MATERIAL (CARRIERS AND
HEAT
HEA
T BLOCK INSERTS) OR WHEN PERFORMING OTHER OPE
OPERARATIONS. WAIT FOR HEATERS TO COOL.
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remove the he
heat
at block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts (see section
section 1).
D. Remove the bo
bond
nd site heat heat
heat block assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-87):
2-87):
1. Make sure
sure that the electrica
electricall cables to
to the heat block
block assembly
assembly are c
coror-
rectly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2-80
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2. Disconnect
Disconnect the b
bond
ond site heater
heater and thermocou
thermocouple
ple cable
cable connectors from the interface panel.
3. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if neces
necessary
sary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
4. At the left rear
rear side of the bond site heat
heat block ass
assembly
embly,, loosen the M2.5
M2.5
screw and pull out the metal jacket of the ground strap.
5. Remove four
four M3 screws
screws and washers
washers that attach
attach th
the
e bond site h
heat
eat bloc
block
k
assembly to the bond site heat block assembly.
6. Remove the
the bond site heat
heat block assembly
assembly from the b
bond
ond site and discard
discard
it.
2-87):
E. Install
Install the replacement
replacement bond
bond site heat block
block assembl
assembly
y (see Figure 2-87):
1. Put the heat
heat block assembly
assembly on
on the slider
slider assemb
assembly
ly..
2. Install
Install the heat block
block assembly
assembly to the slider assembly
assembly with th
the
e screws and
washers removed before. Tighten the screws.
3. Connect
Connect the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the interface
interface panel
panel.. Refer to your notes.
notes.
4. Attach
Attach the electrical
electrical cables
cables with cable ties
ties and cable cl
clamps
amps to the wo
workrkholder. Refer to your notes.
5. Install
Install the ground
ground strap to the
the left rear
rear side of the
the bond site
site heat block
block
assembly with the screw removed before.
F. Install
Install the heat block
block gauge or inserts
inserts removed before
before to the bond sit
site
e heat
block assembly (see section 1).
G. Push the green
green machine
machine ON
ON switch.
switch.
H. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
2.4).
).
I. Do the
the setup
setup and calibration
calibration procedures
procedures ((see
see paragra
paragragphs
gphs 2.3 and 2.4
4x M3 Screws
4x Washers
Ground Strap
Silder Assembly
Bond Site Heat Block Assembly
Fi g ure 2-87
2-87 R epl
epla
ace Bond Si te Hea
Heatt B lo
lock
ck A s s em
embl
blyy
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-81
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.9.1.8
Preheat Motor
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the preheat
preheat motor
motor that moves the pr
preheat
eheat assemb
assembly
ly in vertic
vertical
al di
direcrection.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Prehe
Preheat
at Moto
Motorr, P/N 13565
13565-6
-604
0433-00
001
1
•
Hand tools
Procedure
WARNING: IF THE WORKHOLDER
W ORKHOLDER IS HEA
HEATED,
TED, AVOID TOUCHING HEATED
PARTS
PA
RTS WHEN REMOVING PARTS OR MATERIAL (CARRIERS AND
HEAT
HEA
T BLOCK INSERTS) OR WHEN PERFORMING OTHER OPE
OPERARATIONS. WAIT FOR HEATERS TO COOL.
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remove the he
heat
at block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts (see section
section 1).
D. Remove th
the
e indexer assembly
assembly (see paragraph
paragraph 2.6).
2.6).
E. Remove the preheat
preheat assembly
assembly (see
(see Figure 2-88):
2-88):
1. Make sure that
that the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the preheat as
assembly
sembly are
are correctly
correctly
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Loosen two
two captive
captive screws that
that attach
attach the PCB cover
cover to the ind
indexer
exer base.
base.
3. Remove the
the PCB cover to
to access the
the indexe
indexerr intermediate
intermediate board.
board.
4. Disconnect
Disconnect the pre
preheat
heat motor home
home sensor connector
connector J10 fr
from
om the index
indexer
er
board.
5. At the rear of the preheat
preheat assemb
assembly
ly,, disconnect
disconnect the prehe
preheat
at motor cable
cable
from the motor. Make a note of the connection.
6. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
7. Remove
Remove two M5 screws
screws that attach
attach the preheat
preheat bas
base
e to the front of
of the
indexer base.
8. Remove the
the preheat
preheat assembly
assembly from the rear
rear of the workholder
workholder..
9. Put the preheat assembly
assembly on tthe
he work
work bench.
bench.
2-82
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Preheat Assembly
Preheat Base
2x M5 Screws
PCB Cover
Indexer Base
2x Captive Screws
Fi g ure 2-88
2-88 R em
emove
ove Pr ehe
ehea
at A s s em
embl
blyy (Front
(Fr ont View)
F. Remove
Remove the
the preheat
preheat motor
motor (see
(see Figure 2-89
2-89):
):
1. Get access
access to the preheat
preheat motor
motor from the rear
rear side of the preheat
preheat as
assemsembly.
2. Remove the
the four M4 screws
screws that
that attach the
the motor to tthe
he rear of the
the preheat
base.
3. Remove
Remove the motor
motor with the
the cam an
and
d preheat
preheat home sensor
sensor..
4. Loosen two
two set screws
screws that attach
attach the ca
cam
m to the moto
motorr shaft.
5. Remove
Remove the
the motor
motor and
and discar
discard.
d.
G. Install
Install the replacement
replacement preheat
preheat motor (see Figure 2-89):
2-89):
1. Install
Install the cam to the
the preheat motor
motor with the
the set screws
screws remov
removed
ed before
before..
2. Install
Install the pre
preheat
heat motor
motor with the cam
cam and preheat
preheat home sensor
sensor to the preheat base with the screws removed before.
3. Take note of the preheat
preheat home sen
sensor
sor when you install
install the
the motor.
motor. Make
sure that the home sensor is correctly installed at the bottom right of the
preheat base.
H. Insta
Installll the preheat
preheat assembl
assembly
y (see Figure 2-88):
2-88):
1. Position
Position the preheat
preheat assembly
assembly on the left
left side of the
the indexe
indexerr base.
2. Install
Install the preheat
preheat assembly to the
the indexer base
base with the screws
screws removed
before.
3. Connect
Connect the preheat
preheat home sensor
sensor cable
cable to the conn
connector
ector J1
J10
0 on the
indexer intermediate board. Refer to your notes.
4. Connect
Connect the prehest mo
motor
tor cable connector
connector to the preheat
preheat motor.
motor. Refer to
your notes.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-83
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5. Attach the
the cables with
with cable ties
ties and cable clamps
clamps to the wor
workholde
kholder.
r. Re
Refer
fer
to your notes.
I. Install
Install the
the indexer
indexer assembl
assembly
y to the machine
machine (see paragraph
paragraph 2.6).
2.6).
J. Install
Install the heat
heat block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts removed
removed befor
before
e to the preheat
preheat heat
block assembly (see section 1).
K. Push the green
green machine
machine ON switch.
switch.
L. Sel
Select OK to start initialization.
M. Do the setup and calibration procedures
procedures (see paragragphs
paragragphs 2.3 and 2.4).
2.4).
2x Set Screws
Preheat Motor
Preheat Base
4x M4 Screws
Preheat Home Sensor
Cam
Fi g ure 2-89
2-89 R epl
epla
ace Prehea
Pr eheatt Mot
Motor
or - E xplode
xploded
d Rea
R earr View
2-84
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.9.1.9
Bond Site Motor
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the bond
bond site
site motor
motor that moves the hea
heatt block
block asse
assembly
mbly v
vertical
ertically
ly..
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Hea
Heatt Block
Block Motor
Motor Assemb
Assembly
ly,, P/N 08888
08888-1
-1101
101-000
-000-xx
-xx
Procedure (Figure 2-90).
WARNING: IF THE WORKHOLDER IS HEATED, AVOID TOUCHING HEA
HEATED
TED
PARTS
PAR
TS WHEN REMOVING PARTS OR MATERIAL (CARRIERS AND
HEAT
HEA
T BLOCK INSERTS) OR WHEN PERFORMING OTHER OPERAOPE RATIONS.
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remov
Remove
e the heat block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts (see section
section 1).
D. Remove th
the
e indexer
indexer assembly
assembly (see paragraph
paragraph 2.6
2.6).
).
2.7).
).
E. Remove
Remove the slider
slider assembly
assembly (see
(see par
paragraph
agraph 2.7
F. Remove the
the bond site
site motor from the
the slider
slider assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-90):
2-90):
1. Get access
access to the bond site
site motor from the rear
rear side of the sl
slider
ider assem
assembly
bly..
2. Hold the motor
motor and remove
remove the four
four M4 screws with flat
flat washers
washers that
attach the motor to the rear of the slider assembly.
3. Remove
Remove the motor with motor
motor couplin
coupling
g from the slider
slider assembl
assembly
y.
4. Loosen the
the two set screws
screws that
that attach the
the motor co
coupling
upling to
to the motor
shaft.
5. Remove the motor
motor coupling
coupling from the
the motor
motor shaft.
shaft.
2-90):
):
G. Install
Install the replacement
replacement bond site
site motor (see Figure 2-90
1. Install
Install the motor coupling
coupling to tthe
he moto
motorr shaft:
shaft:
a. Make sure
sure the motor coupling
coupling end
end is flush with
with the mo
motor
tor shaft
shaft end.
b. Make sure
sure that the set
set screws are
are on the flat c
cutout
utouts
s of the moto
motorr shaft
shaft..
c. Tighten
Tighten the two (2) setscr
setscrews
ews in the
the motor coupling.
coupling.
2. Position
Position the motor with
with the motor
motor cable connector
connector points
points downwa
downward.
rd.
3. Make sure
sure the pins on th
the
e motor coupling
coupling are aligned
aligned to
to the holes on the
heat block coupling.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-85
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4. Install
Install the motor with
with coupling
coupling to the slider assembly
assembly with
with the screws and
and
flat washers removed before.
2x Set Screws
Bond Site Motor
4x Washers
4x M4 Screws
Motor Coupling
Fi g ure 2-90
2-90 R ep
epla
lace
ce B ond S ite Mot
Motor
or - Ex pl
plode
oded
d R ea
earr View
H. Insta
Installll the slider assembly
assembly back to the machine.
machine. Refer to paragraph
paragraph 2.7
2.7,, steps
G..
I. Install
Install the
the indexer
indexer assembl
assembly
y to the machine
machine (see paragraph
paragraph 2.6).
2.6).
J. Install
Install the heat
heat block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts removed
removed befor
before
e to the preheat
preheat heat
block assembly (see section 1).
K. Push the green
green machine
machine ON switch.
switch.
L. Sel
Select OK to start initialization.
2.4).
M. Do the setup and calibration procedures
procedures (see paragragphs
paragragphs 2.3 and 2.4).
2.9.1.
2.9
.1.10
10
Prehe
Preheat
at Linear
Linear Sli
Slide
de Assemb
Assembly
ly
Procedure
Replace the preheat linear slide assembly. This assembly moves the preheat heat
block assembly in the vertical direction through the preheat motor.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Preheat
Preheat Linear
Linear Bear
Bearing
ing,, P/N:
P/N: 0303
03035-00
5-004343-004
004-xx
-xx
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remove the he
heat
at block gauge
gauge or inserts
inserts (see section
section 1).
2.7).
).
D. Remove th
the
e indexer assembly
assembly (see paragraph
paragraph 2.7
E. Remove tthe
he preheat
preheat assembly
assembly (see
(see para
paragraph
graph 2.9.1.8,
2.9.1.8, step E.
E.).
).
F. If the preheat
preheat heat block assembly
assembly is on the preheat
preheat assembly
assembly,, remove the
four M3 screws and washers, then remove the assembly.
2-86
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
G. Remove the
the preheat slide
slide assembly
assembly (s
(see
ee Figure 2-91):
2-91):
1. Disengage
Disengage the two
two springs
springs at the front
front of the preheat
preheat assem
assembly
bly..
2. Remove the
the four M3 screws
screws at the front
front of the pr
preheat
eheat ass
assembly
embly..
3. Remove the
the preheat slide
slide assembly
assembly from the preh
preheat
eat assemb
assembly
ly..
H. Remove tthe
he preheat
preheat linear slide
slide assembly
assembly (s
(see
ee Figure 2-91):
2-91):
NOTE: Hold the linear slide in its
its position when you remove the screws on the
linear slide.
CAUTION: Do not move the preheat linear slide block out from the rail. The ball
bearings will fall out.
1. Remove the
the two M4 screws
screws that attach
attach the preh
preheat
eat linear
linear slide assembly
assembly to
the preheat assembly.
assembly.
2. Remove the preheat
preheat linear
linear slide
slide assembly
assembly and discar
discard
d it.
I. Install
Install the
the replacemen
replacementt preheat
preheat linear
linear slide assemb
assembly
ly (se
(see
e Figure 2-91):
2-91):
1. Put the preheat
preheat linear
linear slide assembly
assembly tto
o the mount
mounting
ing position
position of the prepreheat assembly.
2. Install
Install the screws
screws removed before
before to attac
attach
h the preheat lin
linear
ear slide assemassembly to the preheat assembly.
J. Install
Install the
the preheat
preheat slide assembly
assembly (see
(see Figure 2-91):
2-91):
1. Put and hold the preheat
preheat slide
slide assembl
assembly
y against th
the
e preheat lin
linear
ear slide
block.
2. Make sure that
that the holes
holes in the rear
rear of the sli
slide
de assem
assembly
bly is ali
aligned
gned to the
holes in the linear slide block.
3. Install
Install the preheat
preheat slide assembly
assembly with th
the
e screws removed
removed befor
before.
e.
2.9.1.8,,
K. Install
Install the preheat assembly
assembly to the indexer assembly
assembly (see par
paragraph
agraph 2.9.1.8
step H.
H.).
).
L. Install
Install the indexer
indexer assembly
assembly to the machine
machine (see p
paragrap
aragraph
h 2.7
2.7).
).
M. Install the heat b
block
lock gauge or inserts removed before to the preheat heat
block assembly (see section 1).
N. Push tthe
he green
green machine
machine ON switch.
switch.
O. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
P. Do the setup and calibrati
calibration
on procedures
procedures (see paragragp
paragragphs
hs 2.3 and 2.4
2.4).
).
Preheat Linear Slide Assembly
2x M4 Screws
Preheat Slide Assembly
4x M3 Screws
2x Springs
Fi g ure 2-91
2-91 R ep
epla
lace
ce Preheat
Preheat Li nea
nearr S lide A s s em
embl
blyy
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-87
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.9.2
Pulle
ller Parts
2.9.2.1
Puller Finger
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the puller finger.
finger. The puller
puller finger hook th
the
e carrier
carrier to pull iitt out of the
input magazin
input
magazine.
e.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Puller
Puller Finger
Finger,, P/N 03201-0
03201-01
113-00413-004-xx
xx
•
Hand tools
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remov
Remove
e the puller
puller finger
finger (see Figure 2-92
2-92):
):
1. Remove the
the two M2 screws that
that attach the puller
puller fing
finger
er to the puller mou
mount.
nt.
2. Move the puller
puller finger
finger out from
from the rear of the
the front rai
raill slot.
3. Discar
Discard
d the pull
puller
er finger
finger..
D. Insta
Installll the replacement
replacement puller
puller finger
finger (see Figure 2-92
2-92):
):
1. Hold the
the puller finger
finger along
along the rear of
of the front rail
rail slot.
2. Make sure that
that the puller finger
finger is parallel
parallel to the front rail,
rail, and the pin points
points
up at the left side of the indexer assembly.
3. Hold the
the puller
puller finger on
on the puller
puller finger
finger mount.
mount.
4. Install
Install two screws
screws removed before
before to attach
attach the puller fing
finger
er to the puller
finger mount.
5. Torque the
the screws
screws to 7 in. lbs. (0.8
(0.8 Nm).
E. Push the green
green machine
machine ON switch.
switch.
F. Sel
Select
ect OK to start initialization.
2.3.2).
).
G. Do the puller
puller setup procedures
procedures (see paragraph
paragraph 2.3.2
Front Rail Slot
Pin
Puller Mount
Puller Finger
Fi g ure 2-92
2-92 Pulle
Pullerr Fi ng er (Front Wa
Wall
ll A s s em
embl
blyy - Rear
Rear View)
2-88
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.9.2.2
Puller Rack
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the puller
puller rack for
for the puller rack-and
rack-and pin
pinion
ion drive.
drive. This
This rac
rack
k is
installed on the front wall assembly.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Pul
Pulle
lerr Rack
Rack,, P/N 030
03035
35-00
-0010
10-04
-0477-xx
xx
•
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Move the pu
puller
ller assembly
assembly to the
the right lilimit.
mit.
D. Remov
Remove
e the puller rack (see
(see Figure 2-93
2-93):
):
1. Remove the
the two M3 screws
screws that attach
attach th
the
e puller rrack
ack to the front
front rail su
suppport.
2. Remove
Remove the puller rack and di
discard
scard it.
2-93):
):
E. Install
Install the replace
replacement
ment puller
puller rack
rack (see Figure 2-93
1. Put the rack on the front rail support.
support.
2. Make sure that
that the teeth
teeth points
points to you and the
the screw ho
holes
les are aligned
aligned to
the mounting holes in the front rail support.
3. Install
Install the puller rack
rack to the front rail support
support with the screws
screws removed
removed
before.
4. Carefu
Carefully
lly tight
tighten
en the screw
screws.
s.
2.3.7).
).
5. Do the
the backlash
backlash adjust
adjustment
ment (see
(see paragrap
paragraph
h 2.3.7
F. Push the
the green
green machin
machine
e ON switch.
switch.
G. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
2x M3 Screws
Front Rail Support
Puller Rack
ulle
lerr Rack
Fi g ure 2-93 P ul
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-89
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.9.2.3
Puller Motor
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the puller motor.
motor. This motor has
has a pinion
pinion gear instal
installed
led on the motor
motor
shaft. The puller rack-and-pinion provides drive to move puller assembly along
the X axis linear slider in the X axis direction.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Pulle
Pullerr Moto
Motorr P/N 03
0310
1022-10
1006
06-00
-000-x
0-xx
x
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
2.9.2.1).
).
C. Remov
Remove
e the puller finger
finger (see
(see paragraph
paragraph 2.9.2.1
D. Remov
Remove
e the puller
puller assembl
assembly
y (see Figure 2-94
2-94):
):
1. Make sure that
that the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the puller ass
assembly
embly are correctl
correctly
y
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect all the ca
cables
bles connectors
connectors on the circuit
circuit pa
panel
nel that attach
attach to the
puller mount.
4. Remove the
the two M3 screws and washers
washers tha
thatt attach the pu
puller
ller flex ca
cable
ble
assembly with circuit panel to the puller mount.
5. Pull out the puller
puller flex cable
cable assembly
assembly with circu
circuit
it panel from
from the puller
assembly.
6. Remove the
the three M3 screws
screws that
that attac
attach
h the pull
puller
er mount to the
the plate
adapter on the X axis linear slide assembly.
7. Remove the
the puller assembl
assembly
y from the indexer
indexer assembly
assembly and
and put it on a
work bench.
E. Remove
Remove the
the puller
puller motor
motor (see
(see Figure 2-94):
2-94):
1. Remove the
the four M3 screws
screws that attach
attach the
the motor to the p
puller
uller mount.
mount.
2. Remove the
the puller
puller motor from the
the puller
puller assemb
assembly
ly and dis
discard
card it.
2-94):
):
F. Install
Install the replacement
replacement puller
puller motor
motor (see
(see Figure 2-94
1. Put the
the motor
motor on the pull
puller
er mount.
mount.
2. Make sure that
that the cable
cable points
points to you and th
the
e pinion ge
gear
ar points
points down
through the opening in the base of the mount.
3. Install
Install the motor
motor to the puller
puller mount with
with the screws
screws remo
removed
ved before.
before.
G. Install
Install the puller
puller assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-94):
2-94):
1. Put the puller
puller assembly
assembly on the plate
plate adapter
adapter on the X axi
axis
s linear guide.
guide.
2. Make sure
sure tha
thatt the motor
motor cable
cable points
points to
to you.
3. Install
Install the puller
puller assembly to the
the plate adapter
adapter with the screws
screws removed
before.
4. Lightly
Lightly turn the screws
screws to attach the puller
puller assembly
assembly to the plate adaptor
adaptor
loosely.
2-90
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
5. Move the puller mount forward
forward until
until the rear of tthe
he mount
mount is
flush with the rear of the plate adaptor.
6. Hold the puller
puller mount
mount and torque
torque the screws
screws to 14 in.
in. lbs. (1.6 N
Nm).
m).
7. Hold the puller
puller flex cable
cable assembly
assembly with circ
circuit
uit pane
panell into positi
position
on agains
againstt
the mount until the flat surface points to the front wall.
8. Install
Install the puller flex
flex cable assembly
assembly with circuit
circuit panel to the mount
mount with the
screws and washers removed before.
9. Torque the
the screws
screws to 7 in.
in. lbs. (0.8
(0.8 Nm)
Nm)..
10. Connect the electrical cables to the circuit panel on the puller assembly.
Refer to your notes.
11.Attach the electrical cables with cable ties and cable clamps to the indexer
assembly.. Refer to your notes.
assembly
H. Insta
Installll the puller finger
finger to the puller assembly
assembly (see paragraph
paragraph 2.9.2.1).
2.9.2.1).
I. Do the
the back
backla
lash
sh adj
adjus
ustm
tmen
ent.
t.
J. Push the
the green
green machi
machine
ne ON s
swit
witch.
ch.
K. Se
Sele
lect
ct OK to start initialization.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-91
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Puller Finger
Puller Motor
3x M3 Screws
2x M3 Screws
and Washers
Puller Mount
Puller Flex Circuit Cable
Assembly with
with Circuit Panel
4x M3 Screws
Plate Adapter
Fi g ure 2-94 P ull
uller
er Mot
Motor
or
X Axis Linear Guide
2-92
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.9.2.4
Puller So
Solenoid
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the puller solenoid
solenoid that
that mov
moves
es the puller finger up and down.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Pul
Pulle
lerr Soleno
Solenoid
id,, P/N 03107
03107-1
-1080
080-0
-000
00-x
-xx
x
•
Hand tools
•
Allen key set
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remov
Remove
e the puller
puller finger (see
(see paragraph
paragraph 2.9.2.1
2.9.2.1).
).
D.))
D. Remove th
the
e puller assembl
assembly
y (see paragraph
paragraph 2.9.2.3,
2.9.2.3, step D.
E. Remove the puller
puller solenoid
solenoid (see
(see Figure 2-95
2-95):
):
NOTE: Do not loosen or tighten the top set screw in the left side of the puller
arm or it will be difficult to put the arm back to its original position.
1. Make sure that the
the electrical
electrical cable
cables
s to the puller ass
assembly
embly are cor
correctly
rectly
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if neces
necessary
sary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect all the ca
cables
bles connectors
connectors on the cir
circuit
cuit pan
panel
el that attach
attach to the
puller mount.
4. Loosen the
the set screw on
on the puller
puller finger mount
mount that sets
sets the mount
mount to the
pivot pin.
5. Loosen the
the set screw
screw that sets the
the arm tto
o the pi
pivot
vot pin.
6. Pull the
the pivot
pivot pin out from
from the puller
puller mount.
7. Pull the puller
puller arm from
from th
the
e pull
puller
er mount.
mount.
8. Remove the
the two nuts
nuts that attach
attach the sol
solenoid
enoid to th
the
e puller mount.
mount.
9. Remove the
the solenoid
solenoid from the
the puller mount
mount and discard
discard it.
it.
F. Install
Install tthe
he replacement
replacement puller solenoid
solenoid (see Figure 2-95):
2-95):
1. Hold the puller
puller solenoid
solenoid against
against the right
right side of the
the wall on th
the
e puller
mount.
2. Make sure that
that the cable
cable points
points downwa
downward
rd and the threaded
threaded s
studs
tuds are to
the left side through the holes in the mount.
3. Apply a small
small quatity
quatity of screw locking
locking c
compoun
ompound
d to the threaded
threaded stud
studs
s on
the solenoid.
4. Install
Install the nuts
nuts and
and torque them to 7 in lbs. (0.8 Nm
Nm).
).
5. Put the puller arm to the puller
puller mount.
6. Make sure that
that the finger flag
flag on the puller
puller arm, is at the rear and points
points to
the top.
7. Hold the
the puller
puller arm behind
behind the wall on the
the pull
puller
er mount
mount..
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-93
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
8. Make sure
sure that the hole
hole for the pivot
pivot pin is aligned
aligned wi
with
th the holes
holes for the
bearings. The bearings are in the bearing housing in the mount.
9. Turn the
the pivot pin
pin until the
the flat surface
surface is at th
the
e left si
side.
de.
10.Push the pivot pin into the holes for the front bearing, puller arm, and rear
bearing until it stops.
11
11.. Tighten the set screw in the puller arm that sets the arm to the pivot pin
until the screw is aligned with the flat surface of the pin.
12.Tighten the set screw in the puller finger mount that sets the mount to the
pivot pin until the screw is aligned with the flat surface of the pin.
13. Connect the electrical cables to the circuit panel on the puller assembly.
Refer to your notes.
14.Attach the electrical cables with cable ties and cable clamps to the indexer
assembly. Refer to your notes.
G. Do the backlash
backlash adjustment
adjustment..
H. Push tthe
he green
green machine
machine ON switch.
switch.
I. Select OK to start initialization.
Puller Motor
2x Puller Solenoid Nuts
Puller Arm
(set screw not in view)
Finger Flag
Puller Finger Mount
(set screw nit in view)
2x Threaded Studs
2x Bearings
Puller Solenoid
Pivot Pin
Puller Mount and Wall
2-95
5 P ul
ulle
lerr S ol
oleno
enoid
id
Fi g ure 2-9
2-94
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.9.
9.3
3
Inde
Index/
x/T
Tuc
ucke
kerr P
Par
artts
2.9.3.1
Index Ar
Arm an
and Pi
Pin
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the index
index arm
arm and pin. Th
These
ese pa
part
rt are used to index the boa
boatt to put
put
the device at the bond site.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Ind
Index
ex Arm,
Arm, P/N
P/N 032
03201
01-0
-001
0144-018
018-x
-xx
x
•
Ind
Index
ex Pin,
Pin, P/
P/N
N 0320
03201-0
1-001
0144-00
0099-xx
xx
•
Hand Tools
•
Small Press
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remove the index
index arm
arm holder
holder (see Figure 2-96):
2-96):
1. Make sure that the
the electrical
electrical cable
cables
s to the index asse
assembly
mbly are corr
correctly
ectly
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if neces
necessary
sary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect all the ca
cables
bles connectors
connectors on the cir
circuit
cuit pan
panel
el that attach
attach to the
index mount.
4. Remove the two
two M3 screws and washers
washers that attach
attach the holder
holder to the inde
index
x
slider.
5. Remove
Remove the index arm
arm holder from
from the indexer
indexer ass
assembly
embly and put
put it on a
work bench.
D. Remov
Remove
e the spring cap and
and the compress
compression
ion spring
spring (see Figure 2-96
2-96):
):
1. Remove
Remove the two M1.6 screws
screws from
from the righ
rightt side of the iindex
ndex arm ho
holder
lder
that attach the spring cap to the index arm holder.
2. Remove the
the spring cap
cap and the spring
spring from th
the
e index arm
arm holder.
holder.
2-96):
):
E. Remove the index
index arm and pin
pin (see Figure 2-96
1. Remove
Remove the two M1.6
M1.6 screws that
that attach
attach the arm to th
the
e index arm holder
holder..
2. Pull the
the arm away from
from the
the index arm ho
holder
lder..
3. Pull the
the sensor
sensor bar from of the ind
index
ex arm.
arm.
4. Go to step
step "E.5"
"E.5" to remove the pin
pin or the
the arm.
5. To remove the
the pin and the
the arm, discard
discard them a
and
nd go to step "F".
"F".
NOTE: The arm is easy to damage. Carefully push the pin out from the arm.
6. Push the pin
pin out of
of the arm and
and discard
discard the necessary
necessary par
part.
t.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Workholder
2-95
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
F. Install
Install the replacement
replacement index
index pin
pin and the
the ind
index
ex arm (see Figure 2-96
2-96):
):
1. Set the
the index
index ar
arm
m to the correct
correct positi
position.
on.
a. Make sure
sure that the arm with
with the slot
slot point
points
s to the righ
rightt side.
b. Make sure
sure that the tip
tip of the pin points
points up and
and perpendicula
perpendicularr (at a
dimension of 0.0033 in.) to the side of the arm with the slot (see suface
2-96).
).
A on Figure 2-96
NOTE: The arm is easy to damage. Carefully push the pin into the arm.
2. Push the
the round
round end of
of the pin
pin into
into the arm.
arm.
3. Set the sensor bar to the correct
correct position
position..
a. Make sure
sure that the raised
raised step on
on the sens
sensor
or bar poin
points
ts to the slot
slot in the
arm.
b. Make sure
sure that the angle
angle at the bar
bar end points
points to the pin at the
the end of
the arm.
4. Install
Install the sensor bar into
into the index arm with
with the screws removed
removed bef
before.
ore.
5. Set the
the index
index arm holder
holder positi
position.
on.
a. Make sure
sure the the slot
slot on the index
index arm holder
holder is at the left
left side.
b. Make sure
sure that the
the overload
overload sensing
sensing ca
cables
bles are
are at the top.
top.
6. Set the index arm with
with the sensor bar position.
position.
a. Make sure
sure that the end of
of the pin on the
the index arm iis
s at the rear of
of the
index assembly and points down.
7. Install
Install the index
index arm with the
the sensor bar
bar to the index
index arm holder
holder until it
stops.
G. Install
Install the compression
compression spring
spring and the spring
spring cap (see Figure 2-96):
2-96):
1. Hold the
the spring
spring cap against
against the
the index arm
arm holder.
holder.
2. Install
Install one of the M1.6
M1.6 screw
screw removed before
before to the
the top hole of the
the index
arm holder to attach the spring cap to the ho
holder.
lder.
3. Tighten
Tighten the scr
screw
ew lightly
lightly to hold the
the spring cap
cap in its pos
position.
ition.
4. Turn the bottom
bottom of the spring
spring cap
cap to 9
90
0 ο clockwise until the the spring cap
is away from the index arm holder.
5. Install
Install the spring
spring against
against the round surface
surface of the
the sprin
spring
g cap.
6. Turn the
the spring cap
cap with spring
spring against
against the index
index arm hol
holder
der..
7. Install
Install the other M1.6
M1.6 screw removed
removed before
before to the bottom
bottom hole of the inde
index
x
arm holder to attach the spring cap.
8. Torque the
the screws to 6 in. lbs.
lbs. (0.68
(0.68 Nm).
H. Insta
Installll the index
index arm holder
holder (see
(see Figure 2-96):
2-96):
1. Install
Install the index
index arm holder
holder with the index
index arm to the top of the
the index slide
slide
with the screws and washers removed before.
2. Make sure that
that the index arm is at the left
left side of the index
index assemb
assembly
ly..
3. Make sure that
that the holes
holes in the index arm
arm holder are
are aligned to the
the holes in
the top of the index slide.
4. Tighten
Tighten the screws
screws lightly
lightly to hold the index arm
arm holder in its po
position
sition..
5. Pull the
the index arm
arm holder
holder forward
forward to its
its maximu
maximum.
m.
6. Torque the
the screws
screws to 10 in.
in. lbs. (1.1
(1.1 Nm).
Nm).
7. Connect
Connect the electrical
electrical cables to the circuit
circuit panel on the index assem
assembly
bly..
Refer to your notes.
2-96
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
8. Attach the
the electrical
electrical cables
cables with cable
cable tie
ties
s and cable c
clamps
lamps tto
o
the index assembly. Refer to your notes.
I. Push the green
green machin
machine
e ON
ON swit
switch.
ch.
J. Sel
Select OK to start initialization.
K. Calibrate
Calibrate the index ho
home
me position
position to the center of the bon
bond
d positio
position.
n.
Spring
Index Arm
Index Pin
2x M3 Screws
2x M3 Washers
Spring Cap
2x M1.6 Screws
2x M1.6 Screws
SURFACE A
Sensor Bar
Overload Sensing Cable
Index holder
Index Mount
Circuit Panel
2-96
6 Index A rm and P in
Fi g ure 2-9
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-97
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.9.3.2
Tucker
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the tucker blade.
blade. This tucker moves the bo
boat
at in
into
to the output magazine.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Tucker
ucker,, P/N 032
03201
01-01
-0114
14-01
-0133-xx
xx
•
Hand Tools
•
Small Press
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remove
Remove the
the tucker
tucker (see
(see Figure 2-97
2-97):
):
1. Remove the
the two M2 screws
screws that attach
attach the
the tucker lleaf
eaf spring
spring to the tuck
tucker
er
mount.
NOTE: Make sure that the tucker leaf spring do not fall into the indexer assembly. Hold the tucker leaf spring in its position.
2. Remove the
the tucker
tucker leaf spring
spring from the index
index assembly
assembly..
3. Push the dowel
dowel pin out
out of the tucker
tucker mount and remove
remove it from
from the index
index
assembly.
NOTE: Make sure that the dowel pin do not fall into the indexer assembly.
assembly. Put
one of your hands below the tucker mount and hold the dowel pin.
4. Move the tucker
tucker out from
from the slot
slot in the tucker
tucker mount an
and
d discard
discard it.
D. Insta
Installll the replacemen
replacementt tucker
tucker (see Figure 2-97):
2-97):
1. Set
the position
pos
ition
of the
thedown.
tucker until
until the tip
tip is at the rig
right
ht side of the
the index
assembly
and
points
2. Put the end
end of the tucker into
into the slot on the
the tuck
tucker
er moun
mount.
t.
3. Make sure
sure that the holes
holes at the tucker
tucker end are
are aligned to
to the holes in the
tucker mount.
4. Push
Push the pin
pin into
into the tuck
tucker
er mount
mount..
5. Put and hold
hold the tucker
tucker leaf spring
spring against
against the right
right side of th
the
e tucker
mount.
6. Install
Install the tucker
tucker and tucker leaf spring
spring to the inde
index
x mount with the
the screws
removed before.
7. Torque the
the screws to 6 in. lbs.
lbs. (0.68
(0.68 Nm).
E. Push the green
green machine
machine ON switch.
switch.
F. Sel
Select
ect OK to start initialization.
G. Calibrate
Calibrate the
the tucker
tucker eject.
eject.
2-98
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2x M2 Screws
Tucker Leaf Spring
Dowel Pin
Tucker
Tucker Mount
Figure 2-97 Tucker
2.9.3.3
Tucker Soienoid
Purpose
•
Re
Relp
lpac
ace
e tthe
he tu
tuck
cker
er so
sole
leno
noid
id..
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Tu
Tucke
ckerr Sole
Solenoi
noid,
d, P/N:
P/N: 0310
03107-10
7-1080-0
80-00000-xx
xx
•
Hand Tools
•
Scre
Screw
w Lock
Lockin
ing
gC
Com
ompo
poun
und
d
•
Tweezers
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off the machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remove the tucker
tucker mount (see Figure 2-98
2-98):
):
1. Make sure that the
the electrical
electrical cable
cables
s to the index asse
assembly
mbly are corr
correctly
ectly
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if neces
necessary
sary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect all the ca
cables
bles connectors
connectors on the cir
circuit
cuit pan
panel
el that attach
attach to the
index mount.
4. Loosen the
the set screw that
that attach
attach the tucker
tucker moun
mountt to the indexer
indexer mount
mount..
5. Remove the
the spring from
from the notched
notched groo
groove
ve pin in the tucker
tucker mou
mount..
nt..
NOTE: Make sure that the pivot pin and bearings do not fall into the indexer
assembly. Hold the tucker mount with the pivot pin and bearings in its
position.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-99
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
6. Pull the
the pivot pin from the right
right side of
of the tucker
tucker moun
mount.
t.
7. Remove the
the pivot pin
pin and the two bearing
bearings
s that attach
attach the tuc
tucker
ker mount tto
o
the indexer mount.
8. Remove the
the tucker mount
mount from
from the index assembl
assembly
y and put it on a work
work
bench.
D. Remove the two nut
nuts
s that attach the tucker
tucker solenoid to the tucker mount
mount and
discard the solenoid.
E. Insta
Installll the replacement
replacement tucker
tucker solenoid
solenoid (see
(see Figure 2-98):
2-98):
1. Put the solenoi
solenoid
d against
against the front
front of the
the tucker
tucker mount.
2. Make sure
sure that the cable
cable points
points down and the
the threaded
threaded studs are
are into the
holes of the tucker mount.
3. Apply a small
small quatity
quatity of screw locking
locking compoun
compound
d to the threaded
threaded stud
studs
s on
the solenoid.
4. Install
Install the solenoid
solenoid to the tucker mount
mount with the nuts
nuts removed bef
before.
ore.
5. Tighten
Tighten the
the nuts
nuts to 7 in. lbs.
lbs. (0.79 Nm).
F. Instal
Installl the tucke
tuckerr mount
mount (see Figure 2-98):
2-98):
1. Install
Install the two bearings
bearings and pivot pin to the
the right side of the tu
tucker
cker moun
mount.
t.
2. Put the tucker
tucker mount with
with the bearings
bearings and
and the pivot pin
pin agains
againstt the index
index
mount.
3. Hold the tucker
tucker mount
mount in its positio
position
n and tight
tighten
en the set screw
screw..
4. Install
Install the spring
spring removed
removed before to the notch groove
groove pin o
on
n the tucker
tucker
mount.
5. Connect
Connect the electrical
electrical cables to the circuit
circuit panel on the index assem
assembly
bly..
Refer to your notes.
6. Attach the
the electrical
electrical cables with
with cable ties
ties and cable cla
clamps
mps to the inde
index
x
assembly. Refer to your notes.
G. Push the
the green machine
machine ON
ON switch.
switch.
H. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
2x Nuts
Pivot Pin
Index Mount
Solenoid
2x Bearings
Tucker Mount
(notched groove pin and spring not shown)
Fi g ure 2-9
2-98
8 Tucker S ol
oleno
enoid
id
2-100
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.9.4
Rail Parts
2.9.4.1
Indexer Motor
Purpose
•
Re
Repla
place
ce th
the
e in
inde
dexe
xerr moto
motorr.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Ind
Index
exer
er Motor
Motor,, P/N 08888
08888-10
-1066
66-00
-0000-xx
xx
Hand Tools
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off the machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remove tthe
he indexer
indexer assembly
assembly (see p
paragrap
aragraph
h 2.6
2.6).
).
2-99):
):
D. Remove the indexer
indexer motor (see Figure 2-99
1. At the front of the indexer
indexer assembly
assembly,, loosen two captive
captive scre
screws
ws that atta
attach
ch
the PCB cover to the indexer base.
2. Remove the
the PCB cover to
to access the
the indexe
indexerr intermediate
intermediate board.
board.
3. Make sure that
that the electrical
electrical cable
cable to the indexer
indexer motor are
are correctly
correctly identiidentified. If not, make a note of the connection.
4. Disconnect
Disconnect the ind
indexer
exer motor cable
cable connector
connector J21 from the indexer
indexer inte
interrmediate board.
5. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if neces
necessary
sary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
6. Loosen the set
set screw in the flexible
flexible coupling
coupling that attach
attach to the shaf
shaftt of the
X-axis leadscrew assembly.
assembly.
7. Remove the
the two M4 screws
screws that attach
attach the top lleft
eft sid
side
e of the fron
frontt wall to
the front wall input support.
8. Loosen the
the two M4 screw
screw top right
right side of the front
front wal
walll to the front wall
wall output support.
9. Remove the
the two M5 screws
screws with washers
washers tha
thatt attac
attach
h the base of tthe
he front
wall input support to the input base support.
10.Carefully lift the front wall assembly a small distance up until the front wall
input support with shim can remove easily.
11.Remove the front
f ront wall input support with shim.
12.Hold the indexer motor with one of your hands.
13.Remove the four M4 screws with washers that attach the indexer motor
with flexible coupling to the motor mount.
14.Loosen the set screw in the flexible coupling that attach to the shaft of the
indexer motor.
15.Remove the flexible coupling.
16.Remove the indexer motor.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-101
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
E. Insta
Installll the
the replacement
replacement indexer motor (see Figure 2-99):
2-99):
1. Install
Install the flexible
flexible coupling
coupling to the shaft of the indexer
indexer motor an
and
d tighten the
set screw.
2. Torque the
the set screw
screw to 12 lbs. in.
in. (1.36 Nm).
3. Put the indexer
indexer motor with the
the flexible
flexible couplin
coupling
g against the motor
motor mount.
Make sure that the motor cable is at the bottom.
4. Install
Install the indexer
indexer motor with flexible
flexible coupling
coupling to the mot
motor
or mount wit
with
h the
screws and washers removed before.
5. Make sure the shaft
shaft of the X-axi
X-axis
s leadscrew
leadscrew assembl
assembly
y goes into the flexible
flexible
coupling hole.
6. Torque the
the screws
screws to 28 lbs.
lbs. in. (3.16
(3.16 Nm).
Nm).
7. Torque the set screw
screw in the flexible
flexible coupling
coupling to 12 lbs. in. (1.3
(1.36
6 Nm).
8. Carefully
Carefully lift the
the front wall assembly
assembly a small
small distance
distance up until the fro
front
nt wall
input support with shim can install easily.
9. Install
Install the front wall
wall input support
support with shim to the input
input base and fron
frontt wall
with the screws and washers removed before.
10.Make sure that the base of the front wall input support is attached to the
front wall nut bar in the input base support.
11
11.. Tighten the four M4 screws at the top, two ends of the front wall.
F. Connect
Connect the indexer motor
motor cable to the connector
connector J21 on th
the
e indexer intermeintermediate board. Refer to your notes.
G. Push the
the green machine
machine ON
ON switch.
switch.
H. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
2.4).
I. Do the
the setup
setup and calibration
calibration procedures
procedures ((see
see paragra
paragragphs
gphs 2.3 and 2.4).
2x M4 Screws
2x M4 Screws
Top Right Side
of Front Wall
Top Left Side of Front Wall
2x M5 Screws
with Washers
Shim
Set Screws
Front Wall
Output Support
X Axis Leadscrew Assembly
4x M4 Screws
Indexer Motor
Flexible Coupling
Motor Mount
4x M4 Washers
Input Base Support
Front Wall Input Support
Fi g ure 2-9
2-99
9 Indexer Mot
Motor
or
2-102
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.9
9.4
.4.2
.2
X Axi
Axis
s Lea
Lead
dsc
scre
rew
w Ass
Asse
embly
Purpose
•
Rep
Replac
lace
e th
the
e X axis
axis llead
eadscr
screw
ew assemb
assembly
ly..
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
X Axis Leadsc
Leadscrew
rew Asse
Assembl
mbly
y, P/N 0
03101
3101-05
-053535-000
000-xx
-xx
•
Hand Tools
•
Scre
Screw
w Lock
Lockin
ing
gC
Com
ompo
poun
und
d
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off the machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remove tthe
he indexer
indexer assembly
assembly (see p
paragrap
aragraph
h 2.6
2.6).
).
D. Remove the three M3 scre
screws
ws that attac
attach
h the bearing retai
retainer
ner to the right side
of the front wall output support and remove the bearing retainer.
2-100):
):
E. Remove the
the X axis
axis leadscrew
leadscrew assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-100
1. Loosen the set
set screw in the flexible
flexible coupling
coupling that attach
attach to the shaf
shaftt of the
X-axis leadscrew assembly.
assembly.
2. Remove the three
three M4 screws
screws and washers
washers that attac
attach
h the leadsc
leadscrew
rew nut to
the adapter nut.
3. Remove the hex
hex nut that attach
attach the right side
side (threaded)
(threaded) of the leadscrew
leadscrew
to the front rail support.
4. Move the leadscre
leadscrew
w to the right
right to release
release the left
left side of th
the
e leadscr
leadscrew
ew
from the flexible coupling.
5. Tilt the
the leadscrew
leadscrew up to the left and pull
pull it from the front wall
wall output sup
support
port
6. Discar
Discard
d the leadsc
leadscrew
rew..
F. Install
Install the replacemen
replacementt X axis leadscrew
leadscrew as
assembly
sembly (see
(see Figure 2-100
2-100):
):
leadscrew
NOTE: Do a preload check of the leadscrew nut. The preload of the leadscrew
nut should be on the fourth tooth from the point of the spring and clockwise of the leadscrew.
1. Move the leadscre
leadscrew
w nut to the right
right side of
of the leadscrew
leadscrew..
2. Put the X axis leadscr
leadscrew
ew assembly
assembly to the front
front wall s
support
upport :
a. Make sure
sure that the smooth
smooth end of the
the leadscrew
leadscrew is at the m
motor
otor moun
mountt
and into the flexible coupling hole.
b. Make sure
sure that the threaded
threaded end
end of the leadscrew
leadscrew is
is at the fron
frontt wall
output support and into the bearing hole.
3. Put the leadscrew
leadscrew nu
nutt against
against the
the adapter
adapter nut.
4. Install
Install the leadscrew
leadscrew nut
nut to the adapter
adapter nut with
with the screws
screws removed
removed
before.
5. Torque the
the screws
screws to 14 lbs.
lbs. in. (1.6 Nm
Nm).
).
6. Apply a small quatity
quatity of screw
screw locking
locking compou
compound
nd to the threads
threads on the right
end of the leadscrew.
7. Install
Install the hex
hex nut and
and torque
torque it to 20 lbs. in
in.. (2.26 N
Nm).
m).
8. Put the bearing
bearing retainer
retainer against the right
right side of the fron
frontt wall output
output support.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-103
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
9. Install
Install the bearing
bearing retainer
retainer to the front wall output
output support
support with the screws
screws
removed before.
10.Torque the screws to 14 lbs. in. (1.6 Nm).
11
11.. Torque the set screw in the flexible coupling to 12
1 2 lbs. in. (1.36 Nm).
G. Install
Install the indexer assembly
assembly to the machine (see paragraph
paragraph 2.6).
2.6).
H. Push tthe
he green
green machine
machine ON switch.
switch.
I. Select OK to start initialization.
.
Flexible Coupling
X Axis Linear Slider
Slide Block for Index Assembly
Leadscrew Bearing
Bearing Retainer
X Axis Leadscrew Assembly
Adapter Nut
Hex Nut
Leadscrew Nut
3x M4 Screws
2-10
100
0 X Axi s L ea
eadscr
dscr ew A s s em
embl
blyy
Fig ure 2-
3x M3 Screws
2-104
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.9.4
.4.3
.3
Leadscrew Bearing
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the leadscr
leadscrew
ew bearing
bearing that
that supports
supports the rig
right
ht end o
off the X axis lleadeadscrew assembly
assemb ly..
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Bear
Bearin
ing,
g, P/N
P/N 206
20604
04-6
-602
0222-00
00
•
Hand Tools
•
Scre
Screw
w Lock
Lockin
ing
gC
Com
ompo
poun
und
d
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off the machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Move the index asse
assembly
mbly to the left limit on the X axis linear slider
slider..
D. Remove the leadscre
leadscrew
w bearing
bearing (see
(see Figure 2-100
2-100):
):
NOTE: Make sure that the bearing retainer do not fall into the indexer assembly.
assembly.
Hold the bearing retainer in its position.
1. Remove the
the three M3 screws
screws that
that attach
attach the beari
bearing
ng retainer
retainer to the front
front
wall output support.
2. Remove the
the bearing
bearing retainer
retainer from in
indexer
dexer assembly
assembly..
3. Remove
Remove the hex nut that
that attach
attach the right e
end
nd (threa
(threaded)
ded) of the leadscrew
leadscrew to
to
the front wall output support.
4. Push the bearing
bearing from the
the left side
side of the bearing
bearing housing
housing out through
through th
the
e
right and discard it.
NOTE: Make sure that the bearing do not fall into the indexer assembly.
assembly. Put one
of your hands below the right side of the front wall output support and
hold the bearing.
E. Use alcohol
alcohol to remove the remainin
remaining
g of the screw locking
locking compo
compound
und on the
threads at the right side of the leadscrew.
F. Install
Install the replacem
replacement
ent lead
leadscrew
screw bearing
bearing (see
(see Figure 2-100):
2-100):
1. Push the bearing
bearing in through
through the right
right side of
of the bearing
bearing housing
housing until it is
is
flush with the right side of the front wall output support.
2. Apply a small
small quatity
quatity of the screw
screw locki
locking
ng compo
compound
und to the threads
threads on the
the
right side of the leadscrew.
3. Install
Install the nut
nut and torque
torque it to
to 20 in lbs.
lbs. (2.26 Nm).
4. Put the bearing
bearing retainer
retainer against
against the right
right side of the ffront
ront rai
raill support.
support.
5. Install
Install the bearing
bearing retainer
retainer to the front wall output
output suppor
supportt with the screws
screws
removed before.
6. Torque the
the screws
screws to 14 in
in lbs. (1.6
(1.6 Nm).
Nm).
G. Push the green
green machine
machine ON
ON switch.
switch.
H. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-105
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.
2.9
9.5
Se
Sens
nso
or As
Asse
semb
mbli
lies
es
2.9
.9.5
.5.1
.1
X Reg
Regiistra
strati
tio
on Se
Sens
nso
or
Purpose
•
Repl
Replac
ace
e the
the X regis
registr
trat
atio
ion
n sens
sensor
or..
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Hand tools
X Regist
Registrati
ration
on Senso
Sensorr, P/N 0320103201-001
0019-0
9-000-x
00-xx
x
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off the machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
2.6).
).
C. Remove th
the
e indexer assembly
assembly (see paragraph
paragraph 2.6
D. Remov
Remove
e the X registration
registration sensor:
sensor:
1. At the front of the indexer
indexer assembly
assembly,, loosen two cap
captive
tive scre
screws
ws that att
attach
ach
the PCB cover to the indexer base.
2. Remove the
the PCB cover to
to access the
the index
indexer
er intermediate
intermediate board.
board.
3. Make sure that
that the X registration
registration sensor
sensor cable is cor
correctly
rectly id
identifi
entified.
ed. If not,
make a note of the connection.
4. Disconnect
Disconnect the X regis
registration
tration sensor
sensor conn
connector
ector J9 from
from the indexer interintermediate board.
5. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
6. Remove the
the four M2 screws
screws that
that attach the
the sensor emitter and
and receiver
receiver to
the mount.
7. Remove the
the sensor
sensor from the rear
rear rail assembly
assembly and
and discard it.
it.
E. Insta
Installll the replacement
replacement X registra
registration
tion semsor:
semsor:
1. Put the sensor
sensor emitter
emitter to the bottom
bottom of the mount
mount with tthe
he screw ho
holes
les
points down.
2. Install
Install the sensor
sensor emitter to the mount
mount with the screws
screws removed
removed before.
3. Put the sensor
sensor recevier
recevier to the top
top of the mount
mount with the screw
screw hole
holes
s points
points
to the top.
4. Install
Install the sensor
sensor receiver to the moun
moun with the scr
screws
ews removed
removed before.
5. Ti
Tighte
ghten
n the screws
screws..
6. Connect
Connect the X registration
registration sensor
sensor cable
cable to conn
connector
ector J9 on
on the indexer
indexer
intemediate board and do the cable routing. Refer to your notes.
7. Attach the
the electrical
electrical cables
cables with cable
cable ties and cable
cable clamps to th
the
e indexer
assembly. Refer to your notes.
F. Install
Install the indexer
indexer assembly
assembly to the machine
machine (see
(see parag
paragraph
raph 2.6).
2.6).
G. Push the
the green machine
machine ON
ON switch.
switch.
H. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
I. Calibrate
Calibrate the distanc
distance
e between
between the X registrati
registration
on sensor
sensor and the center
center of the
bond site.
2-106
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2x M2 Screws
Receiver
Sensor Mount
X Registration Sensor
Emitter
2x M2 Screws
Fig ure 22-101
101 X Reg is tra
rattion S en
enss or
2.
2.9.
9.5.
5.2
2
Opti
Optica
call Swit
Switch
ch Asse
Assemb
mbli
lies
es
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the optical switch assemblies
assemblies u
used
sed thr
throughou
oughoutt the indexer
indexer and slider
slider
assemblies.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Tie wraps
•
Opti
Optical
cal Switch
Switch Assembl
Assembly
y, as
as rrequ
equire
ired:
d:
•
Indexe
Indexerr Home,
Home, 60 mm
mm (2.36”
(2.36”)) long,
long, P/N
P/N 088
0888888-102
1027-00
7-000-0
0-09
9
•
Indexe
Indexerr Pin Left,
Left, 160
160 mm (6.3
(6.30”)
0”) long,
long, P/N
P/N 088
0888888-1027
1027-00
-000-1
0-10
0
•
Indexe
Indexerr Pin Right,
Right, 160
160 mm (6.30”)
(6.30”) long,
long, P/N
P/N 0888
08888-1
8-1027027-000
000-1
-11
1
•
Puller
Puller Mo
Motor
tor Home
Home,, 120 mm (4.7
(4.72”)
2”) long,
long, P/N
P/N 0888808888-102
1027-0
7-000-1
00-12
2
•
Puller
Puller Pi
Pin
n Sensor
Sensor,, 75 mm (2.95”)
(2.95”) long,
long, P/N
P/N 0888
08888-10
8-102727-000
000-13
-13
•
Preheat
Preheat Moto
Motorr Home,
Home, 228.6
228.6 mm (9”) long
long,, P/N 0341
03411-1031
1-1031-001
-001-28
-28
•
Heat Block Sensor,
Sensor, 736.6
736.6 mm
mm (2
(29”)
9”) long,
long, P/N 0
0341
3411-10311-1031-001-17
001-17
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-107
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off the machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
2.6).
).
C. Remove th
the
e indexer assembly
assembly (see paragraph
paragraph 2.6
D. Remove th
the
e slider assembly
assembly (see
(see paragraph
paragraph 2.7).
2.7).
E. Discon
Disconnect
nect the op
optical
tical switch(s
switch(s)) to be replaced.
replaced.
1. Find the optical
optical switch
switch position.
position. Refer to Section
Section 4 of this manu
manual
al for the
illustration on the optical switch position in the indexer assembly and slider
assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to remove the indexer assembly and slider assembly to
replace the optical switch.
2. Make sure that
that the optical switch
switch cables
cables to the index
indexer
er interme
intermediate
diate board
board
or interface panel are correctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
3. Make a note on the orientat
orientation
ion of the five (5) optical
optical switch
switch wires (re
(red,
d,
black, white, blue and yellow insulation).
4. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
5. Remove
Remove the screw that
that attach
attach the optical
optical switch
switch to the mou
mount.
nt.
NOTE: Make sure that the optical switch do not fall into the indexer assembly.
assembly.
Hold the optical switch in its position.
6. Disconnect
Disconnect the opti
optical
cal switch
switch cable and discard
discard it. Make
Make a note of the reference designator (”J” number) of the connector.
F. Install
Install tthe
he replacem
replacement
ent sensor.
sensor.
1. Put the optical
optical switch
switch against the mount
mount until
until the optica
opticall switch wires
wires are in
the same way as it was removed.
2. Install
Install the optical
optical switch
switch with the
the screw removed
removed before.
before.
3. Connect
Connect the optica
opticall switch cable
cable to the connector
connector on the ind
indexer
exer inter
intermedimediate board or interface panel. Refer to your notes.
4. Attach the
the optical switch
switch cable with
with cable ties
ties and cable clamps
clamps to the
indexer assembly or slider assembly. Refer to your notes.
2.6).
).
G. Install
Install the indexer assembly
assembly to the machine (see paragraph
paragraph 2.6
H. Insta
Installll the slider assembly
assembly to the machine (see paragraph
paragraph 2.7
2.7).
).
I. Push
Push tthe
he green
green machi
machine
ne ON switch
switch..
J. Se
Sellect OK to start initialization. Make sure that the optical switch operates correctly.
NOTE: The Sensor Diagnostic display,
display, accessed through Diagnostic Mode, can
be used to do a check if the replacement sensor operates correctly.
Refer to paragraph 5.4.4 in Section 5 of this manual for more information.
2-108
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.
2.9.
9.5.
5.3
3
J Boa
Boatt Pr
Pres
esen
entt S
Sen
enso
sorr Ampl
Amplif
ifie
ierr
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e and set
set up the
the sensor
sensor amplifie
amplifierr that is part
part of th
the
e J bo
boat
at present
present se
sennsor on the rear rail assembly of the indexer assembly (Figure
( Figure 2-2,
2-2, Figure 2102).
102
).
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Hand tools
Sensor Amplifier
Amplifier Assembly
Assembly,, P/N 0885808858-1032-00
1032-000-12
0-12 (for input side)
•
Sensor Amplifier
Amplifier Assembly
Assembly,, P/N 0885808858-1032-0
1032-000-13
00-13 (for output side)
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off the machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remove the sens
sensor
or amplifier
amplifier from the rear rail assembly
assembly.
1. Make sure that
that the sensor amplifier
amplifier cable
cable to the indexer
indexer interm
intermediate
ediate board
board
is correctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove
Remove all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect the app
applicabl
licable
e cable connector
connector from the iindexer
ndexer int
intermedia
ermediate
te
board connector J19 (for input) or J20 (for output). Refer to Section 4 for
connector position.
4. Identify
Identify the polarity
polarity of the two fiber optic
optic cables with
with arrows on the
the amplifier.
5. Pull up the latch
latch on the amplifi
amplifier
er and remo
remove
ve the two fiber
fiber optic
optics.
s.
6. Remove the
the sensor amplifie
amplifierr cable fro
from
m cable clamps
clamps (if a
any).
ny).
7. Remove
Remove and retain
retain the two (2)
(2) socket head
head cap scr
screws
ews (SHC
(SHCSs)
Ss) and flat
washers that attach the J boat present sensor amplifier for assembling as
stated in step C. Discard the failed sensor amplifier with J boat present
sensor.
Fi g ure 2-102
2-102 J B oa
oatt Pr esent S ensor A mp
mplifier
lifier C ont
ontrols/
rols/Indicat
Indicators
ors
98888-0000-JB3-01
Workholder
2-109
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
D. Insta
Installll the replacement
replacement sensor
sensor amplifier
amplifier..
1. Install
Install two (2) socket
socket head cap screws
screws (SHCSs) and flat
flat washers to attach
attach
the replaced J boat present sensor amplifier to the rear side of the rear rail.
2. Put the J boat present
present sensor amp
amplifier
lifier cable
cable to the indexer
indexer interm
intermediate
ediate
board. Close the cable clamps (if any) and attach with the cable tie if necessary.
3. Connect
Connect the leadframe
leadframe present sensor
sensor amplifier
amplifier cable(s)
cable(s) to J19 connector
connector
(for input) or J20 connector (for output) on the indexer intermediate board.
4. Lift the fiber
fiber optic latch
latch and install
install the end of each fiber
fiber optic cabl
cable
e into its
correct hole in the amplifier. Close the fiber optics latch.
E. Turn on mac
machine
hine power
power.. Select
Select OK in the Standby Mode dialog box.
2-102)) .
F. Set up the
the J boat present
present sensor
sensor amplifie
amplifierr (see Figure 2-102
sensitivity, teach the J boat where most holes are present.
NOTE: For maximum sensitivity,
1. Make sure
sure that the ”LO”
”LO” and ”HS” lights
lights are
are turned ON before
before you teach
teach
the replaced amplifier:
a. Press and hold
hold the TEACH
TEACH (or ”-”) button
button of the
the amplifier
amplifier for two tto
o three
seconds until ”LO” and ”DO” of the Status LEDs flash after another.
b. To set the ‘unblock’
‘unblock’ condition
condition (without
(without J boat),
boat), press the TEACH
TEACH (or ”-”)
button one [1] time.
c. To set the ‘block’
‘block’ condition,
condition, put the sample
sample J boat on the work
workholder
holder
rails and in the path of the sensor beam, then press the TEACH (or ”-”)
button one (1) time.
2. Manually
Manually index the
the whole J boat at
at the sensor and
and make sure the
the amplifier
amplifier
detects the whole J boat.
3. If false triggering
triggering occurs,
occurs, press
press Manual Adjustment
Adjustment Bu
Button
tton (or ”+” and ”-”) to
change the sensitivity of amplifier.
4. Do s
sttep 1. if manual adjustment does not improve the false triggering of
amplifier.
2-110
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
2.9.
2.9.6
6
Inde
Indexe
xerr Fl
Flex
ex Ca
Cabl
ble
e As
Asse
semb
mbly
ly
2.
2.9.
9.6.
6.1
1
Pull
Puller
er Fl
Flex
ex Cabl
Cable
e Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
Purpose
•
Rep
Replac
lace
e th
the
e pulle
pullerr fflex
lex cable
cable assemb
assembly
ly..
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Pull
Puller
er Flex
Flex Cable
Cable As
Assemb
sembly
ly,, P/N 08
08888888-129
1297-00
7-000-x
0-xx
x
Hand Tools
•
Elec
Electro
trosta
static
tic Disc
Dischar
harge
ge (ES
(ESD)
D) Protect
Protective
ive C
Cont
ontain
ainer
er
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off the machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remove tthe
he indexer
indexer assembly
assembly (see p
paragrap
aragraph
h 2.6
2.6).
).
D. Remove th
the
e puller flex
flex cable
cable assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-103
2-103):
):
CAUTION: Operation Hazard. Obey all ESD procedures before you remove or put
the PCBs into storage.
1. Make sure that the
the electrical
electrical cable
cables
s to the puller ass
assembly
embly are cor
correctly
rectly
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if neces
necessary
sary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect all the ca
cables
bles connectors
connectors on the cir
circuit
cuit pan
panel
el that attach
attach to the
puller mount.
4. Loosen two
two captive
captive screws
screws that attach
attach the PCB co
cover
ver to the in
indexer
dexer base.
base.
5. Remove the
the PCB cover to
to access the
the indexe
indexerr intermediate
intermediate board.
board.
6. Disconnect
Disconnect the pul
puller
ler flex cable
cable connector
connector on connect
connector
or J3 of the indexe
indexerr
intermediate board.
7. Remove the
the two M3 screws
screws that attach
attach th
the
e ribbon c
clamp
lamp to the center
center of
the front wall.
8. Remove the
the ribbon clamp
clamp that
that attach tthe
he pulle
pullerr flex cab
cable
le to the center
center of
the front wall.
9. Move
Move the pu
pulle
llerr to the left
left limi
limit.
t.
10.Remove the two M2.5 screws that attach the ribbon cable clamp to the left
side of the front wall.
11.Remove the ribbon
r ibbon cable clamp that attach the puller flex cable along the
front wall.
12.Remove the two M3 screws and washers that attach the puller flex cable
assembly with circuit panel to the puller mount.
13.Remove the puller flex cable from the indexer assembly and put it in an
ESD protective container.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-111
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
.
Puller Assembly
Puller Flex Cable Assembly
with Circuit Panel
Ribbon Clamp
2x M3 Screws
and Washers
2x M3 Screws
Ribbon Cable Clamp
Puller Flex Cable Assembly
2x M2.5 Screws
Slide Block For Puller Assembly
Indexer Intermediate Board
Fi g ure 2-10
2-103
3 P ul
ulle
lerr Flex Cable
Cable A s s em
embl
blyy
E. Insta
Installll the replacement
replacement puller
puller flex
flex cable (see
(see Figure 2-103
2-103):
):
1. Hold the puller
puller flex cable
cable assembly
assembly with circuit
circuit panel against
against the pu
puller
ller
mount. Make sure the flat surface of the circuit panel points to the front
wall.
2. Install
Install the puller
puller flex cable
cable assembly
assembly with circuit
circuit panel to th
the
e mount with th
the
e
screws and washers removed before.
3. Torque the
the screws
screws to 7 in. lbs. (0.8
(0.8 Nm).
4. Put the puller
puller flex cable assembly
assembly against
against the left
left side of the front ra
railil support behind the indexer motor, then put it along the left side of the front wall.
5. Install
Install the ribbon
ribbon cable clamp
clamp at the left side of the front
front wall to atta
attach
ch the
puller flex cable assembly.
assembly.
6. Tighten
Tighten the screws on the ribbon cable c
clamp.
lamp.
7. Connect
Connect the puller flex
flex cable assembly
assembly connector
connector to conn
connector
ector J3 of
indexer intermediate board.
8. Connect
Connect the electrical
electrical cables to the circuit
circuit panel on the puller ass
assembly
embly..
Refer to your notes.
2-112
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
9. Attach the
the electrical
electrical cables
cables with cable
cable tie
ties
s and cable c
clamps
lamps tto
o
the indexer assembly. Refer to your notes.
10.Install the ribbon clamp to the center of the front wall with the screws
removed before.
11.Make sure that
th at the puller flex cable assembly is behind the ribbon clamp.
12.Install the PCB cover to the indexer base and tighten the captive screws.
F. Install
Install the indexer
indexer assembly
assembly to the machine
machine (se
(see
e paragraph
paragraph 2.6
2.6).
).
G. Push the green
green machine
machine ON
ON switch.
switch.
H. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
2.
2.9.
9.6.
6.2
2
Grip
Grippe
perr Fl
Flex
ex Cabl
Cable
e Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
•
Rep
Replac
lace
e th
the
e pulle
pullerr fflex
lex cable
cable assemb
assembly
ly..
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Gri
Gripper
pper Flex
Flex Cabl
Cable
e Assembl
Assembly
y, P/N 08888
08888-12
-128080-000000-xx
xx
•
Hand Tools
•
Elec
Electro
trosta
static
tic Disc
Dischar
harge
ge (ES
(ESD)
D) Protect
Protective
ive C
Cont
ontain
ainer
er
Procedure
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off the machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remove tthe
he indexer
indexer assembly
assembly (see p
paragrap
aragraph
h 2.6
2.6).
).
D. Remove tthe
he gripper flex
flex cable
cable assembly
assembly (see Figure 2-104):
2-104):
CAUTION: Operation Hazard. Obey all ESD procedures before you remove or put
the PCBs into storage.
1. Make sure that the
the electrical
electrical cable
cables
s to the index asse
assembly
mbly are corr
correctly
ectly
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if neces
necessary
sary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect all the ca
cables
bles connectors
connectors on the cir
circuit
cuit pan
panel
el that attach
attach to the
index mount.
4. Loosen two
two captive
captive screws
screws that attach
attach the PCB co
cover
ver to the in
indexer
dexer base.
base.
5. Remove the
the PCB cover to
to access the
the indexe
indexerr intermediate
intermediate board.
board.
6. Disconnect
Disconnect th
the
e gripper flex
flex cable connect
connector
or on connector
connector J23 of the
the
indexer intermediate board.
7. Remove the
the two M3 screws
screws that attach
attach th
the
e ribbon c
clamp
lamp to the center
center of
the front wall.
8. Remove the
the ribbon clamp
clamp that attach
attach the grip
gripper
per flex cable
cable to the cente
centerr of
the front wall.
9. Move the
the index
index assembly
assembly to
to the right limit.
10.Remove the two M2.5 screws that attach the ribbon cable clamp to the
right side of the front wall.
11.Remove the ribbon cable
cab le clamp that attach the gripper flex cable along the
front wall.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-113
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
12.Remove the air tube clips that attach the gripper flex cable along the routing to the center of the front wall.
13.Remove the two M3 screws and washers that attach the gripper flex cable
assembly with circuit panel to the index mount.
14.Remove the gripper flex cable from the indexer assembly and put it in an
ESD protective container.
Index/tucker Assembly
Ribbon Clamp
Ribbon Cable Clamp
2x M3 Screws
2x M2.5 Screws
2x M3 Screws
and Washers
Gripper Flex Cable Assembly
with Circuit Panel
Gripper Flex Cable Assembly
Slide Block For
Index/Tucker Assembly
Indexer Intermediate Board
Fi g ure 2-1
2-104
04 G ripper Flex C abl
ble
e A s s em
embl
blyy
E. Insta
Installll the replacement
replacement gripper
gripper flex
flex cable (see
(see Figure 2-104):
2-104):
1. Hold the gripper
gripper flex cable
cable assembly
assembly with circ
circuit
uit panel a
against
gainst the index
index
mount. Make sure the flat surface of the circuit panel points to the front
wall.
2. Install
Install the gripper
gripper flex cable assembly
assembly with
with circuit p
panel
anel to the moun
mountt with
the screws and washers removed before.
3. Torque the
the screws
screws to 7 in. lbs. (0.8
(0.8 Nm).
4. Put the gripper
gripper flex
flex cable assembly
assembly along
along the ri
right
ght side of the
the front wa
wallll
behind the index assembly.
assembly.
2-114
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
5. Install
Install the ribbon
ribbon cable clamp
clamp at the ri
right
ght side of the
the front wa
wallll
to attach the gipper flex cable assembly.
6. Tighten
Tighten the
the screws
screws on the
the ribbon
ribbon cable
cable clamp.
clamp.
7. Install
Install the air tube clips
clips along the gripper
gripper flex cable
cable assembly
assembly..
8. Put the tubings
tubings to the air tube clips,
clips, along with
with the routing
routing of the gripper flex
flex
cable assembly.
assembly.
9. Connect
Connect the grip
gripper
per flex cable
cable assembly
assembly conn
connector
ector to co
connector
nnector J23
J23 of
indexer intermediate board.
10.Connect the electrical cables to the circuit panel on the index assembly.
Refer to your notes.
11.Attach the electrical cables with cable ties and cable clamps to the indexer
assembly.. Refer to your notes.
assembly
12.Install the ribbon clamp to the center of the front wall with the screws
removed before.
13.Make sure that the gripper flex cable assembly is behind the ribbon clamp.
14.Install the PCB cover to the indexer base and tighten the captive screws.
F. Install
Install the indexer
indexer assembly
assembly to the machine
machine (se
(see
e paragraph
paragraph 2.6).
2.6).
G. Push the green
green machine
machine ON
ON switch.
switch.
H. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
2-115
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2.9.7
2.9
.7
Hea
Heatt B
Bloc
lock
kV
Vacu
acuum
um Sol
Soleno
enoid
id Valv
alve
e
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the solenoi
solenoid
d valve
valve that controls
controls the vacuum flow to the heat bl
block
ock
insert.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Vacuum
acuum valve
valve asse
assembl
mbly
y, P/N 03
03107
107-100
-1000-00
0-000-xx
0-xx
Procedure (Figure 2-105)
Solenoid Valve Bracket
Fitting (Port 2) - Blue Tubing
to Heatsink manifold
Heat Block Vacuum
Solenoid Valve
XY Table Assembly
2x SHCSs
Elbow Fitting (Port 1)- Blue Tubing to
Vacuum quick-disconnect connector
Fig ure 2-105
2-105 Hea
Heatt Blo
B lock
ck V acuum Solenoid
Solenoid Valve
Valve (XY Ta
Tabl
ble
e As s em
embl
blyy - R ig ht View)
View)
A. Remove all material from the workholder.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP] and turn off the machine power.
WARNING: TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL BURNING OF THE SKIN, DO NOT CONTINUE WITH THIS PROCEDURE UNTIL BOTH HEAT BLOCKS HAVE
COOLED DOWN.
C. Remov
Remove
e the upper console
console output
output cover.
cover.
D. Find the heat block vacuum valve assembly (P/N 03118-0330-006-xx) attach
to the right side of the XY Table assembly (see Figure 2-105
2-105).
).
E. Remove s
solenoi
olenoid
d valve from
from the solenoid
solenoid bracket
bracket (see Figure 2-105).
2-105).
1. Make sure that
that the pneumatic
pneumatic tubings
tubings to the
the vacuum v
valve
alve on the XY ttable
able
are correctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable clamps
clamps if necessary
necessary to relea
release
se the tubings.
tubings. Make a
note of the pneumatic tubings position and cable clamps positions.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect the pn
pneumati
eumatic
c tubes from
from the solenoid
solenoid val
valve.
ve.
4. Remove the two (2) SHCSs
SHCSs from the
the solenoid
solenoid val
valve.
ve.
5. Remove
Remove the solenoid
solenoid valve
valve from
from the
the solenoid
solenoid valve bracke
bracket.
t.
6. Remove the air fittings
fittings from the
the solenoid
solenoid val
valve.
ve.
2-116
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
F. Install
Install the replacement
replacement solenoid
solenoid valve.
1. Install
Install the air fittings
fittings into the solenoid
solenoid valve
valve assembly
assembly..
2. Make sure the
the air fittings
fittings are installe
installed
d into the ports
ports corr
correctly
ectly (see
(see Figure 2105).
105
).
3. Put the solenoid
solenoid valve against
against the bracket.
bracket. Make sur
sure
e the clearan
clearance
ce holes
in the solenoid valve are aligned with the holes in the bracket.
4. Attach
Attach the solenoid
solenoid valve
valve to the brac
bracket
ket with screws
screws remo
removed
ved before.
before.
5. Tig
ight
hten
en the
the screw
screws.
s.
6. Connec
Connectt the pneumat
pneumatic
ic tubing
tubings:
s:
a. Connect
Connect the blue p
pneumati
neumatic
c tubing from
from the sli
slider
der asse
assembly
mbly (via tthe
he
heatsink manifold) to the front fitting (port 2) on the valve.
b. Connect
Connect the blue pneu
pneumatic
matic tubing
tubing (from the quic
quick–disc
k–disconnect
onnect con
connecnector on the rear of the machine) to the rear fitting on the vacuum valve
(port 1).
G. Install
Install the upper console
console output
output cover.
cover.
H. Push tthe
he green
green machine
machine ON switch.
switch.
I. Select OK to start initialization.
J. During initializ
initialization,
ation, make sur
sure
e that MHS initializatio
initialization
n is completed successsuccessfully.
K. Do a cycle operation
operation with several
several sample carriers
carriers through the workh
workholder
older
(refer to Section 1 for procedure).
L. Stop
Stop the cycle at intervals
intervals to make sure
sure that the vacu
vacuum
um attach
attach the device at
the bond site.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Workholder
2-117
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
This pa
pagg e is le
left
ft inte
intentiona
ntionall
llyy bla
blank
nk
2-118
Workholder
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3
Magazine Handlers
3.1
About T
Th
his Se
Section
Here is what you will find in this section:
•
Section 3.2
3.2,, Description
Description,, gives an overview of the Input and output magazine
handlers.
•
Each
Each se
sect
ctio
ion
n from
from Sect
Sectio
ion
n 3.3 through 3.9 describes various instructions, calibrations, operation guidelines, maintenance and procedures for the magazine
handlers:
•
Section 3.3,
3.3, Setup
•
Section 3.4,
3.4, Magazine Handler Calibrations
•
Section 3.5,
3.5, Magazine Handler Configurations
•
Section 3.6,
3.6, Magazine Handler Adjustments
•
Section 3.7,
3.7, Magazine Handler Removal and Installation
•
Section 3.8,
3.8, Preventive Maintenance
•
Section 3.9,
3.9, Part Replacement Procedures
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-1
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
3.2
Description
3.2.1
General
The Material Handling System contains of two magazine handler subsystems
(3035) to handle magazines during bonding operations. Each Magazine Handler
Sub-system is made up of two assemblies.
The input magazine
handler
uses devices
the inputfor
Z Tower
T
ower Assembly
to carry
magazines
containing
carrier with
unbonded
delivery
to the indexer
subsystem.
After bonding occurs, the index/eject assembly ejects the completed carriers into
an empty magazine held by the output Z tower Assembly at the output magazine
handler. Both magazine handlers automatically place finished magazines (empty
input or full output) onto a magazine unload tray at the Tray Assembly, and then
pick up another magazine (full input or empty output) from a magazine load tray at
the Tray Assembly.
3.
3.2
2.2
Ma
Majo
jorr C
Com
omp
pon
one
ent
nts
s
The major subassemblies/components of the magazine handlers (see Figure 3-1
and Figure 3-2)
3-2) are:
•
Y–Ax
Y–Axis
is Driv
Drive
e Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
Moves magazine held by the Z T
Tower
ower Magazine Gripper Assembly in the Y-axis
direction (forward and backward).
• Z–
Z–Ax
Axis
is Driv
Drive
e Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
Moves magazine held by the Z T
Tower
ower Magazine Gripper Assembly in the Z-axis
direction
direct
ion (up and down).
•
Maga
Magazi
zine
ne Gri
Gripp
pper
er Ass
Assem
embl
bly
y
Grips magazine at the load tray assembly of the Input/Output Tray Assembly and
holds the magazine during carrier insertion/ejection. After the magazine has been
processed, releases the magazine onto the unload tray of the Input/Output Tray
Assembly..
Assembly
•
Lo
Load
ad Tra
ray
y As
Asse
semb
mbly
ly
Holds unprocessed magazines for pickup by the magazine gripper assembly
a ssembly..
After a magazine is removed from the load tray assembly, a belt–drive mechanism positions the next magazine on the tray for pickup. The load tray is positioned so that magazines can
ca n be easily added by the
th e user.
•
Unlo
Unload
ad Tra
ray
y Asse
Assemb
mbly
ly
Holds processed magazines placed on the unload tray assembly by the magazine
gripper assembly. The unload tray assembly is positioned so that
tha t magazines can
be easily removed by the user.
•
In
Inte
term
rmed
edia
iate
te Bo
Boards
ards
The Magazine Handler Intermediate Boards drives and controls the Z T
Tower
ower
Assembly motors and sensors. The Input/Output Tray Assemblies motors and
sensors are driven and control by the Indexer Intermediate Board. (Refer to Section 4 of this manual for more information)
3-2
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3.2.
3.2.3
3
Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne Ha
Hand
ndle
lerr Po
Posi
siti
tion
ons
s
Separately driven motors of the Z Tower
Tower Assembly, Y and Z axes, position the
magazine gripper assembly that holds magazines during bonding operations. The
Y axis and Z axis assemblies are capable of moving to positions independently of
the each
each other
other..
3.
3.2.
2.3.
3.1
1
In
Inpu
putt and
and Outp
Output
ut Pick
Pickup
up Posi
Positi
tion
on
Pickup position is where the
t he Y and Z axes of Z To
Tower
wer Assembly move the magazine gripper assembly to pickup a magazine with unbonded carriers from the load
tray of Input Tray Assembly or an empty magazine from the load tray of the Output Tray Assembly.
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-3
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Z Axis Drive
Magazine Gripper
Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board
(behind Z Tower Casting)
Assembly
Upper Paw Jaw Magazine
Gripper Assembly
Upper jaw Magazine
Stop Button
Lower Paw Jaw
Y Axis Drive
Magazine Stop Button
Lower Jaw Magazine
Gripper Assembly
Tray Sensor
Magazine Gripper Motor (beneath
lower jaw bracket - not shown)
Z Tower Assembly
Fi g ure 3-1
3-1 Ma
Magg azine Handle
Handlers
rs Ma
Major
jor C omp
omponent
onentss
3-4
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Tray Full Sensor
(Hidden )
Input Magazine Wall
Input Retainer
Unload Tray
Magazine Present Sensor
Retainer Thumbscrew
(2 Places)
Load Tray
Driven Timing Belt (4 Places)
Drive Timing Belt
(Hidden)
Input Tray Assembly
Output Magazine Wall
Tray Full Sensor
(Hidden)
Output Retainer
Unload Tray
Magazine Present Sensor
Load Tray
Drive Timing Belt
(Hidden)
Retainer Thumbscrew
(2 Places)
Driven Timing Belt (4 Places)
Output Tray Assembly
Fig ure 3-2 Tray As s em
embl
blyy (Loa
(L oad
d and
and Unloa
Unload
d Trays
Trays )
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-5
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
3.
3.2.
2.3.
3.2
2
In
Inpu
putt a
and
nd Outp
Output
ut Sl
Slot
ot Posi
Positi
tio
ons
At the Input Z Tower
Tower Assembly, the Y and Z axes are positioned at which the
indexer puller pulls an unbonded leadframe from a magazine slot. At the Output Z
Tower Assembly, the Y and Z axes are positioned at which the index tucker ejects
a bonded device into a magazine slot. The number of slot positions are limited to
the number of slots in the magazine.
3.2
.2.3
.3.3
.3
In
Inp
put St
Stagin
ging Pos
Posiitio
tion
Input Staging Position is the Input Z Tower Assembly Y and Z axes positions
where the magazine gripper assembly can release an empty magazine onto the
unload input tray.
tray.
3.2.3
.3..4
Deposit Position
Deposit Position is the Output Z T
Tower
ower Assembly Y and Z axes positions where
the paws release a filled magazine onto the unload output tray.
tray.
3.
3.2.
2.4
4
Op
Opti
tion
onal
al Eq
Equi
uipm
pmen
entt
3.2.4.1
Safety Covers
Safety covers that completely enclose the magazine handlers are available as an
added-cost option. These covers prevent injury by keeping personnel away from
the moving mechanisms of the magazine handlers while the machine is operating. Each cover has an electrically–latched and interlock switch protected door
through which the operator can add new magazines or remove finished magazines when the machine is stopped.
If a safety cover door is forced open during operation, the interlock switch stops
the machine by removing power from all motors and signals an error condition
that must be cleared before operation can be resumed. When magazine replacement is required, software options on the Mag Handler Utilities menu are used to
unlatch the door so that it may be opened and latch the door after it has been
closed.
3.
3.2.
2.4.
4.2
2
Bar
Bar Code
Code Read
Reader
ers
s (O
(Opt
ptio
iona
nal)
l)
Bar code readers are available that may be mounted on the magazine handlers.
They allow machines that are connected to an external host processor
proce ssor to read bar
code
labels
todata
magazines
during
magazine
load andthe
unload
and send
theattached
bar code
to the host
processor.
Therefore
host operations
processor
can track processing of the individual magazines.
3.3
Setup
The magazine handlers require no mechanical setup after the machine
is ins
instal
talled
led..
3-6
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3.4
3.4
Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne Ha
Hand
ndle
lerr Ca
Cali
libr
brat
atio
ion
n
The Magazine Handler calibrations consist of software routines that are used to
calibrate the input slot, output slot, input trays and output trays. Using a series of
dialog boxes, the software steps the user through each calibration process.
NOTE: Each magazine handler calibration must be executed in its entirety.
entirety.
Clicking
the CANCEL
button
any time before
the calibration is
completeon
requires
a restart
of theatcalibration
procedure.
3.4.
3.4.1
1
Inpu
Input/
t/Ou
Outp
tput
ut T
Tra
rays
ys Ca
Calib
libra
ratio
tion
n
The Input/Output Trays calibrations contain the software routines that prompt the
user to move the input/output magazine handler gripper assembly to specific
positions in the Y axis. It also teach the machine to move to the correct positions
for picking up and ejecting magazines.
WARNING: DURING THE CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES, MAG HANDLER COMPONENTS MOVE. BEFORE EXECUTING EACH STEP,
STEP, REMOVE
HANDS FROM THE MAG HANDLER AREA.
WARNING: THE HEAT
HEAT BLOCKS AND HE
HEA
AT BLOCK INSERTS ARE HOT. EX
EXERERCISE WITH EXTREME CAUTION WHEN WORKING IN THESE AREAS.
NOTE: a) The steps
steps for calibrating
calibrating the
the input trays
trays and the output
output trays
trays are the
same. Therefore, only ‘Input Trays’ calibration operation procedures are
shown here.
b) Either an empty
empty magazine
magazine or a straightedge
straightedge may be used
used in this calicalibration. In the steps below, the use of a magazine is described.
Required Gauges
•
Emp
Empty
ty maga
magazi
zine
ne or st
stra
raigh
ighted
tedge
ge
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
None
Procedure
CALIBRATION from the mode bar, then select MAG HANDLER from the
A. Select
Calibration
mode menu. The ‘Mag Handler’ menu appears.
B. From the ‘Mag
‘Mag Handler’
Handler’ menu, select INPUT TRAYS. Follow the instructions in
the dialog boxes.
C. Remov
Remove
e magazines
magazines or other material
material from the unload
unload and load trays
trays of the
input magazine handler. Select OK when done.
D. Do th
the
e unload
unload tray calibration:
calibration:
1. Put an empty
empty magazine
magazine on the rear of the unload
unload tray
tray.
2. Push the magazine
magazine until
until the rear
rear surfac
surface
e of the magazine
magazine is against
against the
magazine stop surfaces at the
th e rear end of the
th e tray.
3. Use your
your hand and apply
apply a force
force on the fron
frontt of the magazine
magazine to m
make
ake sure
that the magazine is fully touched against the magazine stop surfaces. At
the same time, hold the magazine at this position.
4. Use the Left
Left and Right
Right arrow keys
keys on the MMI,
MMI, and move tthe
he grippe
gripperr (fork)
of the Z tower assembly to the unload tray.
5. Observe
Observe the gripper
gripper as you adjust
adjust the gripper
gripper posi
position.
tion. Move
Move the gripper
gripper
until the two buttons touch the rear surface of the magazine (see Figure 33).
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-7
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
6. Select OK in the dialog box when the gripper is at the correct position.
E. Do the unload tray calibra
calibration
tion check:
check:
1. Remove the magazine
magazine from the
the top tray
tray..
2. Select OK in the dialog box. The tray sensor at the front of the gripper finds
the sensor flag at the unload tray. The gripper then moves to the bottom of
the unload tray and stops. The
T he next dialog box appears on the display.
F. Do the
the load tray
tray calib
calibrati
ration:
on:
1. Put an empty
empty magazine
magazine on the rear of
of the load
load tray
tray..
2. Push the magazine
magazine until
until the rear
rear surface
surface of the magazine
magazine is against
against the
surfaces of the stop blocks at the rear end of the tray.
3. Use your hand
hand and apply
apply a force on
on the front
front of the magazine
magazine to ma
make
ke sure
that the magazine is fully touched against the surfaces of the stop blocks.
At the same time, hold the magazine at this position.
4. Use the Left
Left and Right
Right arrow keys
keys on the MMI, and m
move
ove the gripper
gripper (fork)
(fork)
of the Z tower assembly to the unload tray.
5. Observe
Observe the gripp
gripper
er as you adjust
adjust the gripper
gripper posi
position.
tion. Move
Move the gripper
gripper
until the two buttons touch the rear surface of the magazine (see Figure 33).
6. Select OK in the dialog box when the gripper is at the correct position.
G. Do the load
load tray calibratio
calibration
n check:
1. Remove the magazine
magazine from the
the load tray.
tray.
2. Select OK in the dialog box. The tray sensor at the front of the gripper finds
the sensor flag at the load tray. The gripper then moves to the bottom of the
load tray and stops..
NOTE: This completes the Input Trays calibration procedures. If needed, perform the Output Trays calibration procedures.
Magazine Stop Surfaces or
Stop Block Surfaces
Fig ure 33-3
3 To
Touchin
uchingg B en
enching
ching B ut
utttons (S ide View
View))
3-8
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3.4.
3.4.2
2
Inpu
Input/
t/Ou
Outp
tput
ut S
Slo
lott C
Cal
alib
ibra
rati
tion
on
The Input/Output Slot calibrations contain the software routines that prompt the
user to move the input/output magazine handler gripper assembly to specific
positions in the Y and Z axes. It also teaches the machine to move to the correct
slot positions for boat injection and ejection. Figure 3-4 shows the gauges used in
the Input/Output Slot calibrations. The figure describes each gauge relating to
how
it isbe
used
when performing
the Input
and
Output Slot calibrations. This figure
should
referenced
when performing
the
calibrations.
Input Top Y Axis Hole
Use this end for Output
Slot Calibration
Input Bottom Y Axis Hole
Use this end for Input
Slot Calibration
Input Calibration Pin
Input Z Axis Hole
Output Calibration Pin
Magazine-Sized Gauge
Install on the load tray as shown:
1. Put the left or right side against
the magazine handler wall.
2. Make sure that the label ‘FRONT’
on the gauge points to the user .
Workholder Setup
& Calibration Gauge
Fi g ure 3-4 Ma
Magg azinezine-S
S ized Gauge and
and Workholde
Workholderr S et
etup
up & C alibra
libration
tion G aug e
WARNING: DURING THE CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION PROCEDURES, MHS COMPONENTS
MOVE. BEFORE EXECUTING EACH STEP, REMOVE HANDS FROM
THE MAG HANDLER AND WORKHOLDER AREAS.
WARNING: HOT SURFACES EXIST ON HEAT BLOCKS AND HEAT BLOCK
INSERTS. BE CERTAIN TO EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN
WORKING IN THESE AREAS.
NOTE: The steps for calibrating the input slot and output slot are the same.
Therefore, only the operations required to perform the ‘Input Slot’ calibrations are given in the
t he steps that follow.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Maga
Magazin
zine-Si
e-Sized
zed Gauge,
Gauge, P/N 034
0341212-0999
0999-00
-007-x
7-xx
x
•
Workho
Workholder
lder setup & calibrati
calibration
on gauge
gauge assembly
assembly ((P/N:
P/N: 0303503035-0501-00
0501-000-XX)
0-XX)
Procedure
A. Select CALIBRATION, from the mode bar, then select MAG HANDLER from the
Calibration mode menu.
B. From the Mag
Mag Handler
Handler menu, select INPUT SLOT. This causes the first in a
series of instructional prompts to appear.
C. Remove all boats
boats from the
the workhold
workholder
er.. Select
Select OK.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Magazine Handlers
3-9
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
D. Remove ha
hands
nds from the workholder
workholder area,
area, then select
select OK in the ‘Warning’
prompt.
CAUTION: In the next step, the rail height will be measured by the bond head.
The bond head will move down and touches with the rear rail. Make
sure there is no ball at the capillary tip before you do this step.
E. Observe tthe
he warning
warning in the dialog
dialog box and select
select OK to continue with the rail
height measurement.
F. Remove all material
material from the workholder
workholder.. Remove the heat block inserts.
inserts. If
present. Select OK when done.
G. Install the magazine-sized gauge and workholder setup & calibration gauge:
1. Put the magazine-si
magazine-sized
zed gauge against
against the input magazine
magazine wa
wall,
ll, on the load
tray. Make sure that the label FRONT points to you.
2. Put workholder
workholder setup
setup & calibration
calibration gauge assembly
assembly between
between the rails
rails (see
3-6).
Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6).
WARNING: DO NOT DAMAGE THE REAR RAIL BOAT BIAS SPRING WHEN YOU
PUT THE WORKHOLDER SETUP & CALIBRATION GAUGE ASSEMBLY BETWEEN THE RAILS.
a. Make sure
sure that the index
index slot of the
the gauge iis
s on the right
right side, point
point
towards the Output Magazine Handler Assembly (see Figure 3-5).
3-5).
Rear Rail
Output Magazine
Handler Assembly
Front Rail
Index slot on the
right side.
3-5 Ins ta
tall
ll the Workholde
Workholderr S et
etup
up & Calibrat
Calibration
ion G aug e As s em
embl
blyy Pos
P osition
ition
Fi g ure 3-5
b. Hold
Hold tthe
he gau
gauge
ge at
at 45o angle (rear edge down) and put the rear edge of
the gauge on the rear rail (see Figure 3-6).
3-6).
c. Without moving
moving the gauge
gauge forward,
forward, slowly
slowly lower
lower the gauge until
until it is on
the front rail (see Figure 3-6).
3-6).
3-10
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Gauge at 45o angle
Front Rail
Rear Rail
o
Fi g ure 3-6 Ins ta
tall
ll the Work hold
holder
er Set
S etup
up & Calibr
Calibra
ation G aug e A s s em
embly
bly at 45 angle
3. Move the gauge
gauge to the left
left side of
of the indexer
indexer assem
assembly
bly to the in
input
put magazine handler assembly.
assembly.
4. Make sure that
that the pin on the
the left side
side of the wor
workholder
kholder setup
setup & calibration
calibration
gauge points to the input magazine
mag azine handler assembly. (see Figure 3-7).
3-7).
5. Select OK in the dialog box. The input mag handler picks up the magazinesized gauge.
H. Do the Z axis slot calibra
calibration:
tion:
1. Make sure that
that the magazine-s
magazine-sized
ized gaug
gauge
e is picked
picked up by the gri
gripper
pper
assembly.
2. Use the Up and
and Down arrow
arrow keys on the
the MMI, and mo
move
ve the grip
gripper
per
assembly with the magazine-sized gauge until the Z axis hole on the gauge
is aligned to the rails position.
3. Move the workholder
workholder setup
setup & calibration
calibration gauge to the magazine
magazine-sized
-sized
gauge.
3-4)) on the magazine4. Engage the input
input pin
pin into the Z axis
axis hol
hole
e (see Figure 3-4
sized gauge (see CAUTION below).
5. When the Z axis
axis position
position is correct,
correct, move tthe
he workh
workholder
older setup
setup & calib
calibraration gauge to the preheat assembly, make sure that the pin is free from the
magazine-sized gauge. Select OK in the dialog box.
CAUTION: Do not put the input pin of the workholder setup & calibration gauge
into the magazine-sized gauge while you move the gripper with magazine-sized gague.
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-11
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Magazine-sized
Gaug
Ga
uge
e Sl
Slot
ot
Workholder Setup
& Calibration Gauge
Input Pin
Output Pin
Fi g ure 3-7
3-7 Ins ta
tall
ll the Work hold
holder
er Setup & C alibrat
libration
ion Ga
G aug e
I. Do the
the botto
bottom
m Y axis
axis slot
slot cali
calibrat
bration
ion::
1. Make sure
sure that the magazinemagazine-sized
sized gauge
gauge is pick
picked
ed up by the gr
gripper
ipper
assembly.
2. Use the Up and
and Down arrow
arrow keys on
on the MMI, and m
move
ove the gri
gripper
pper
assembly with the magazine-sized gauge until the bottom Y axis hole on
the gauge is aligned to the rails position.
3. Move the workholder
workholder setup
setup & calibration
calibration gauge to the
the magazine-sized
magazine-sized
gauge.
3-4)) on the
4. Engage the
the input
input pin into
into the bottom
bottom Y axis
axis hole ((see
see Figure 3-4
magazine-sized gauge (see CAUTION below).
5. When the bottom
bottom Y axis positio
position
n is correc
correct,
t, move th
the
e workhol
workholder
der setup
setup &
calibration gauge to the preheat
pr eheat assembly, make sure that the pin is free
from the magazine-sized gauge.
gauge. Select OK in the dialog box
J. Do th
the
e top Y axis
axis slot
slot calib
calibrati
ration:
on:
1. Make sure
sure that the magazinemagazine-sized
sized gauge
gauge is pick
picked
ed up by the gr
gripper
ipper
assembly.
2. Use the Up and
and Down arrow
arrow keys on
on the MMI, and m
move
ove the gri
gripper
pper
assembly with the magazine-sized gauge until the top Y axis hole on the
gauge is aligned to the rails position.
3. Move the workholder
workholder setup
setup & calibration
calibration gauge to the
the magazine-sized
magazine-sized
gauge
4. Engage the input
input pin into
into the top Y axis
axis hole (see Figure 3-4)
3-4) on the magazine-sized gauge (see CAUTION below).
5. When the top
top Y axis position
position is correct,
correct, mo
move
ve the workholder
workholder setup
setup & calicalibration gauge to the preheat assembly, make sure that the pin is free from
the magazine-sized gauge. Select OK in the dialog box
K. If necessar
necessary
y, adjust the retainer
retainer to remove the magazine-siz
magazine-sized
ed gauge when
the gauge ejects. Select OK in the dialog box to eject the magazine gauge.
L. Remove
Remove the workholder
workholder setup
setup & calibration
calibration gauge
gauge from the rrails.
ails. Select
Select OK
when done.
M. Install
Install the heat block and clamp inserts.
inserts. Select
Select OK when done.
NOTE: This completes the Input Slot calibration. If needed, do the Output Slot
calibration.
3-12
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3.5
3.5
Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne Ha
Hand
ndle
lerr Con
Confi
figu
gura
rati
tion
on
Magazine dimensions and magazine slot order are entered using dialog boxes
3-8)) in
available through the Magazine Handler Configuration menu (see Figure 3-8
Configuration mode. Refer to Section 5 of IConn Operation Manual for descriptions of GUI menus, illustrated definitions of configuration parameters and
options, and other information concerning magazine handler configuration.
Fi g ure 3-8 Ma
Magg azine Handl
Handler
er C onfig urat
uration
ion Menu
3.6
3.6
Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne Ha
Hand
ndle
lerr Ad
Adju
just
stme
ment
nts
s
3.
3.6.
6.1
1
Se
Sett-up
up tthe
he Be
Belt
lt T
Ten
ensi
sion
on
Purpose
•
Adjust tthe
he tension
tension of
of the input/o
input/output
utput lload
oad tray
tray belts
belts to m
make
ake su
sure
re that the belts
belts
move the magazine smoothly on the tray.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Allen Key Set
•
Torque wrench
•
Belt
Belt Ten
ensi
sion
on Tes
este
terr
Procedure (Figure 3-9)
A. Remove all material from the Magazine Handler Assembly.
B. Pr
Pre
ess [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
C. Remove the inpu
inputt or output tray assembly
assembly.. Refer to paragraph
paragraph 3.7.2 step C. for
input tray assembly and paragraph 3.7.2 step C. for output tray assembly.
D. Put the inp
input
ut or output
output tray assembly
assembly on a wo
work
rk bench
bench..
E. Do the driven timing
timing belts
belts tension
tension setup:
setup:
1. Find the pulley holder at
at the bottom
bottom of the
the load ttray
ray..
2. Loosen the M5 screw on
on the pulley
pulley holder
holder..
3. Put the sensor of the belt
belt tension tester
tester over the applicab
applicable
le driven tim
timing
ing
belt.
4. Loosen the M4 nut on the pulley
pulley holder
holder..
5. Turn the
the M4 screw to
to adjust the
the tension
tension of the driv
driven
en belt.
6. Make sure that
that the measured
measured value
value show
shows
s on the belt tension
tension ttester
ester is
between 43 Hz and 48 Hz.
7. Ti
Tight
ghten
en the
the M5
M5 screw
screw..
8. Tighten
Tighten the M4 nut
nut on the pulley
pulley holder to
to lock the M4
M4 screw
screw..
F. Do the drive timing belt tension
tension setup:
1. Find the
the motor bracket
bracket at the bottom
bottom of the
the load ttray
ray..
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-13
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
2. Loosen the
the two M4 counter
counter sunk
sunk screws that
that attac
attach
h the load tr
tray
ay motor
with motor bracket and clamping plate to the bottom of the load tray.
3. Loosen the M4
M4 nut on the tensioner
tensioner block.
block.
4. Turn the
the M4 screw to
to adjust the
the tension
tension of the drive
drive timing b
belt.
elt.
5. Use the torque
torque wrench and apply
apply a torque between
between 0.1
0.11
1 Nm (1 lb.in.) and
0.14 Nm (1.24 lb.in.) to the M4 screw to put tension on the drive
dr ive timing belt.
6. Tighten
Tighten the M4 nut on the tensioner
tensioner blo
block.
ck.
7. Tighten
Tighten the two M4 counter
counter sunk screws
screws at the top of the load tray.
tray.
G. Install the input or output tray assembly to the machine. Refer to paragraph
3.7.2 step E. for input tray assembly and paragraph 3.7.2 step E. for output
tray assembly.
Driven Belts
Pulley Holder
M5 Screw
Load Tray Assembly
Driven Belt
(Hidden - N
Not
ot Shown Here)
Tensioner Block
Drive Belt
M4 Nut
M4 Screws
M4 Screws
M4 Nut
Load Tray Motor
Motor Bracket with
Clamping Plate
M4 Counter Sunk Screws
Idler Pulley
Motor Pulley
Drive Belt
Common
Pulley
Drive Belt
Common Pulley
Driven Belt
Pulley
Driven Belts (4 places)
Detail - Timing Belt Routing
Fi g ure 3-9
3-9 Load Tray, B el
eltt Tensi on C omp
omponent
onentss
3-14
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3.6.2
.6.2
Tray Ad
Adju
just
stme
ment
nt
Purpose
•
Adju
Adjust
st the
the retain
retainer
er to the speci
specifie
fied
d magazi
magazine
ne le
lengt
ngth.
h.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
None
Procedure
A. Loosen the two thumbscrews below the unload tray.
B. Move the retainer
retainer along
along the guide rails
rails to set the distance
distance for the mag
magazines
azines
that you use.
C. Tig
Tighten
hten the
the two
two thumbscre
thumbscrews.
ws.
3.
3.7
7
Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne H
Han
andl
dler
er Rem
Remov
oval
al a
and
nd IIns
nsttalla
allati
tion
on
The procedures for removing and installing the input magazine handler are basically the same for the output magazine handler. The user should also read and
understand the Warnings and Cautions listed throughout the procedures before
removing or installing the magazine handler.
WARNING: THE Z TOWER ASSEMBLY WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY
APPROXIMATELY 33 POUNDS
(15 KILOGRAMS) AND TRAY ASSEMBLY WEIGHS 15.6 POUNDS (7.08
KILOGRAMS). ONLY ONE PERSON SHOULD BE PRESENT TO LIFT
THE SUBASSEMBLIES OFF FROM THE MACHINE ONE AT A TIME
(STEP B AND C) AND INSTALL IT ON THE MACHINE (STEP D AND E).
WARNING: THE BONDER’S X AND Y MOTORS CONTAIN HIGH MAGNETIC
FIELDS WHICH MAY AFFECT MAGNETICALLY
MAGNETICALLY SENSITIVE DEVICES
DEV ICES
(PACEMAKERS, IMPLANTS, WATCHES,
WATCHES, ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS, ETC.). KEEP ALL MAGNETICALLY SENSITIVE DEVICES
CLEAR OF XY MOTORS.
CAUTION: Comply with the ESD requirements procedure for all electrostatic discharge precautions and restrictions used during the removal and
installation of the input magazine handler.
3.
3.7.
7.1
1
Inpu
Inputt Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne H
Han
andl
dler
er
The illustration in Figure 3-10 shows an input magazine handler and various
points of interest the user should refer to when performing the removal or installation procedures.
Purpose
•
Rem
Remove
ove/in
/insta
stall
ll input
input magazi
magazine
ne han
handle
dlerr for mainten
maintenanc
ance.
e.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Stra
traig
ight
ht hex
hex dri
drive
verr se
sett (met
(metri
ric)
c)
•
5m
5mm
m he
hex
x ti
tip,
p, 3/
3/8”
8” dr
driv
ive
e
•
3/
3/8”
8” dr
driv
ive,
e, 6” ex
exte
tens
nsio
ion
n
•
Ball
Ball h
hex
ex d
dri
rive
verr set
set (met
(metri
ric)
c)
•
3/8” drive
drive male
male to
to 1/4’
1/4’ driv
drive
e femal
female
e ad
adapt
aptor
or
•
5mm lo
long
ng ba
ball
ll he
hex
x ttip
ip,, 3/8”
3/8” dr
driv
ive
e
•
•
1/
1/4”
4” dr
driv
ive
e rrat
atch
chet
et wr
wren
ench
ch
Torq
orque
ue w
wrenc
rench,
h, 70 in. lb. (7.91
(7.91 N
Nm),
m), 3/8” dri
drive
ve
•
Shim
Shim,, 0.
0.00
001”
1” (0
(0.0
.025
25 mm)
mm)
•
Cr
Cros
ossh
shea
ead
d Scre
Screwd
wdri
rive
verr
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-15
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Procedure
A. Turn off machine power. Remove
Remove magazines (if any) from the input magazine
handler. Remove input tower cover, tower flap cover and Y-axis motor cove
cover.
r.
B. Remove Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly ((Figure
Figure 3-10).
3-10).
CAUTION: When lifting the Z Tower
Tower Assembly and Input Tray Assembly during its
removal or installation, do not grasp the assembly at the ends of the
base plate. Doing this may cause the base plate to bow. Grasp and lift
the assembly at points near the center of the base plate.
1. At the rear of the Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly,, disconnect
disconnect conne
connector
ctor P2 of Input
Magazine cable (P/N 08888-1054-000-06) from connector J1 on the Input
Magazine Handler Intermediate Board. See Figure 3-10 for connector location.
2. Disconnect
Disconnect conne
connector
ctor P3 of Input Magazine
Magazine cable
cable (P/N 08888-1054-0
08888-1054-0000006) from Y-axis motor cable connector (P/N 08888-1070-000-xx) .
3. Loosen the
the M4 socket head cap screw
screw (SHCS) that
that secures the
the Y
Y-axis
-axis
motor’s ground wire cable of Input Magazine cable (P/N 08888-1054-00006) to the Y-axis motor. Disconnect the ground wire.
4. Disconnect
Disconnect the Inp
Input
ut MHS sensor
sensor bus cables (P/N
(P/N 08888-1
08888-1082-00
082-000-07
0-07 and
08888-1082-000-08) from connectors J2 and J3 on the Input Magazine
Handler Intermediate Board. See Figure 3-10 for connectors location on
the board
5. Locate two
two (2) M4 x 10 mm SHCS
SHCS that sec
secure
ure the E-ch
E-chain
ain brac
bracket
ket (with
(with
flexible cable track - E-chain) to the rear of the Z Tower Machining Plate.
Loosen the two (2) screws and lift up the E-chain bracket. See Figure 3-10
6. Remove four
four (4) M6 x 20 mm SHCSs
SHCSs with wa
washers
shers tha
thatt secure the
the Z T
Tower
ower
Assembly to the base plate. The screws located at the front and rear of the
Z Tower
Tower base machining plate. Move the Z To
Tower
wer forward in Y-axis direction towards the user to access the screws at the rear and backwards to
access the screws at the front.
7. Using sufficient
sufficient personnel
personnel,, lift the Z Tower
Tower Assem
Assembly
bly off from the machin
machine
e
(see Caution).
8. Perform Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly maintenanc
maintenance,
e, if required.
required.
3-16
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Remove Four SHCSs from Base
Plate. (two SHCSs at both front and
rear of Z Tower Assembly)
Disconnect Appropriate Cables
from Input Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board (see below)
Remove Two SHCS Securing The
E-Chain Bracket to The Rear of
Z Tower Machining Plate (see below)
MHS Sensor Bus
Cable Connector (J2)
MHS Sensor Bus
Cable Connector (J3)
E-Chain Bracket
Two SHCSs
Rear of Z Tower Assembly
Backplane Magazine
Handler Cable
Connector (J1) (Y Axis
Motor Cable is connected
to this cable)
Input Magazine Handler Intermediate Board (top view)
Fi g ure 3-10 R em
emove/
ove/Ins
Ins ta
tall
ll Ma
Magg azine Handler
Handler (Input Mag
Mag azine Handler
Handler S hown)
98888-0000-JB3-01
Magazine Handlers
3-17
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
C. Remove the Input
Input Tray
Tray Assembly:
Assembly:
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The Input Tray
Tray Assembly weight approximately 17.64
pounds (8 Kilograms). To prevent injury, use approved equipment or
one to two person(s) to lift and move the assembly.
1. Make sure that
that the electrical
electrical cables to the
the input tray assembly
assembly ar
are
e correctl
correctly
y
identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Loosen the
the two captive
captive screws
screws that attach
attach the P
PCB
CB cover to tthe
he indexe
indexerr
base.
4. Remove the
the PCB cover to
to access the
the index
indexer
er intermediate
intermediate board.
board.
5. Disconnect
Disconnect the inpu
input/outpu
t/outputt tray cable connector
connector from the connector
connector J14 of
the indexer intermediate board (see Figure 3-11
3-11).
).
6. Loosen the
the four (4) M6 captive
captive screws that attach
attach the in
input
put tray assem
assembly
bly
to the input base plate and lower console top plate.
7. Remove the input
input tray assembl
assembly
y from the
the machine.
machine.
8. Use sufficien
sufficientt personnel
personnel to remove the input
input tray assembly
assembly from the
machine (see Caution).
9. Do the maintenance
maintenance on the input
input tray assembly
assembly,, if necessary
necessary..
3-18
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
.
Indexer Assembly
Disconnect the applicable
cables from the Indexer
Intermediate Board (see below)
Input Tray Assembly
In/Out Cable for Input Tray Cable to Connector J14
In/Out Cable for Output Tray Cable to Connector J15
contains:
- Tray Motor Cable
- Tray Full Sensor Cable
- Magazine Present Sensor
contains:
- Tray Motor Cable
- Tray Full Sensor Cable
- Magazine Present Sensor
Indexer Intermediate Board (top view)
Fi g ure 3-1
3-11
1 Input Tra
Trayy As s em
embl
blyy
D. Insta
Installll the Input
Input Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly
CAUTION: When lifting the Z Tower
Tower Assembly and Input Tray Assembly during its
removal or installation, do not grasp the assembly at the ends of the
base plate. Doing this may cause the base plate to bow. Grasp and lift
the assembly at points near the center of the base plate.
1. Using sufficien
sufficientt personnel,
personnel, lift the Input
Input Z T
Tower
ower Assem
Assembly
bly and place it onto
the left side of the lower console top
t op plate, besides the XY Table Assembly.
2. Make sure the two
two (2) benching
benching surfaces on
on the right sid
side
e of Z Tower
Tower base
machining plate position against the two (2) benching pins on the base
plate.
plate.
3. Slide the Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly to the rear. Make
Make sure the rear of YY-axis
axis motor
mounting surface locates against the benching pin on the base plate.
4. Install
Install four (4) M6 x 20 mm SHCSs with
with washers to sec
secure
ure the Z Tower
Tower
Assembly to the base plate.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Magazine Handlers
3-19
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5. Slide the Z Tower
Tower forward
forward in Y-axis
Y-axis direction
direction towards
towards the user to access
access the
screws at the rear and backwards to access the screws at the front. In a
crisscross pattern, torque each of the four (4) SHCSs to 70 in. lb. (7.91Nm).
(7.91 Nm).
6. At the rear of the Input Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly,, mount the E-chain
E-chain bracket (with
(with
flexible cable track - E-chain) onto the rear
re ar of the Z Towe
Towerr Machining Plate.
Tighten the two (2) M4 x 10 mm SHCS.
7. Connect
Connect connector
connector P2 of Input Magazine
Magazine cable (P/N 08
08888-105
888-1054-000-0
4-000-06)
6)
to connector J1 on the Input Magazine Handler Intermediate Board.
8. Connect
Connect connector
connector P3 of Input Magazine
Magazine cable (P/N 08
08888-105
888-1054-000-0
4-000-06)
6)
to Y-axis motor cable connector (P/N 08888-1070-000-xx).
9. Secure the Y-axis
Y-axis motor’s
motor’s ground wire
wire cable of Input Magazine
Magazine cable
cable (P/N
08888-1054-000-xx) to the Y-axis motor with the existing M4 SHCS.
Tighten the screw.
10.Connect the Input MHS sensor bus cables P/N 08888-1082-000-07 to connector J2 and P/N 08888-1082-000-08 to connector J3 on the Input Magazine Handler Intermediate Board.
11
11.. Install the input tower cover, tower flap cover and Y motor cover.
E. Insta
Installll the
the input
input tra
tray
y assembly
assembly
1. Put the input
input tray assembly
assembly on the
the front edge
edge of the input
input base plate.
plate.
2. screws
Attach the
th
e input tray
assembly
assembly to the input
input base plat
plate
e with the captive
captive
removed
before.
3. Make sure the ‘C’
‘C’ plates on the input
input wall and the input
input fixed wal
walll interlo
interlock
ck
each other.
4. Connect
Connect the input/output
input/output tray cable
cable connecor
connecor to the connector
connector J14 of the
3-11).
). Refer to your notes.
indexer intermediate board (see Figure 3-11
5. Attach the
the electrical
electrical cables with
with cable ties
ties and cable cla
clamps
mps to the inpu
inputt
tray assembly and indexer assembly. Refer to your notes.
F. Install
Install the PCB cover to the indexer
indexer base and
and tighten th
the
e two captive screws.
screws.
G. Push the
the green machine
machine ON
ON switch.
switch.
H. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
3-20
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3.
3.7.
7.2
2
Ou
Outp
tput
ut Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne H
Han
andl
dler
er
The user should read and understand the Warnings and Cautions listed below
before removing or installing the output magazine handler. See Figure 3-10 for
connector locations.
WARNING: THE Z TOWER ASSEMBLY WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY
APPROXIMATELY 33 POUNDS
(15
KILOGRAMS)
ANDONE
TRAY
ASSEMBLY
WEIGHS
15.6 POUNDS
(7.08
KILOGRAMS).
ONLY
PERSON
SHOULD
BE PRESENT
TO LIFT
THE SUBASSEMBLIES OFF FROM THE MACHINE ONE AT A TIME
(STEP B AND C) AND INSTALL IT ON THE MACHINE (STEP D AND E).
WARNING: THE BONDER’S X AND Y MOTORS CONTAIN HIGH MAGNETIC
FIELDS WHICH MAY AFFECT MAGNETICALLY
MAGNETICALLY SENSITIVE DEVICES
DEV ICES
(PACEMAKERS, IMPLANTS, WATCHES,
WATCHES, ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS, ETC.). KEEP ALL MAGNETICALLY SENSITIVE DEVICES
CLEAR OF XY MOTORS.
CAUTION: Comply with the ESD requirements procedure for all electrostatic discharge precautions and restrictions used during the removal and
installation of the input magazine handler.
Purpose
•
Rem
Remove
ove/in
/insta
stall
ll output
output magaz
magazine
ine ha
handl
ndler
er for maint
maintena
enance.
nce.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Stra
traig
ight
ht hex
hex dri
drive
verr se
sett (met
(metri
ric)
c)
•
5m
5mm
m he
hex
x ti
tip,
p, 3/
3/8”
8” dr
driv
ive
e
•
3/
3/8”
8” dr
driv
ive,
e, 6” ex
exte
tens
nsio
ion
n
•
Ball
Ball h
hex
ex d
dri
rive
verr set
set (met
(metri
ric)
c)
•
3/8” drive
drive male
male to
to 1/4’
1/4’ driv
drive
e femal
female
e ad
adapt
aptor
or
•
5mm lo
long
ng ba
ball
ll he
hex
x ttip
ip,, 3/8”
3/8” dr
driv
ive
e
•
1/
1/4”
4” dr
driv
ive
e rrat
atch
chet
et wr
wren
ench
ch
•
Torq
orque
ue w
wren
rench,
ch, 9
90
0 in.
in. lb.
lb. (10.2
(10.2 Nm),
Nm), 3/8”
3/8” drive
drive
•
Shim
Shim,, 0.
0.00
001”
1” (0
(0.0
.025
25 mm)
mm)
•
Screwdriver
Procedure
A. Turn off machine power. Remove magazines (if any) from the output magazine
handler. Remove output tower cover, tower flap cover and Y-axis motor covers.
B. Remove Z Tower
Tower Assembl
Assembly
y.
CAUTION: When lifting the Z T
Tower
ower Assembly and Output T
Tray
ray Assembly during
its removal or installation, do not grasp the assembly at the ends of
the base plate. Doing this may cause
ca use the base plate to bow. Grasp and
lift the assembly at points near the center of the base plate.
1. At the rear of the Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly,, disconn
disconnect
ect connec
connector
tor P2 of Output
Magazine cable (P/N 08888-1054-000-07) from connector J1 on the Output Magazine Handler Intermediate Board. See Figure 3-10 for connector
location.
2. Disconnect
Disconnect the co
connector
nnector P3 of Output
Output Magazine
Magazine cable (P/N 08888-105
08888-10544000-07) from Y-axis motor cable connector (P/N 08888-1070-000-xx).
3. Loosen the M4 socket
socket head cap screw
screw (SHCS) that
that secures the
the Y
Y-axis
-axis
motor’s ground wire cable of Output Magazine cable (P/N 08888-1054000-07) to the Y-axis motor. Disconnect the ground wire.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Magazine Handlers
3-21
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4. Disconnect
Disconnect the Outp
Output
ut MHS sensor bus
bus cables (P/N 08888-108
08888-1082-000-1
2-000-12
2
and 08888-1082-000-18) from connectors J2 and J3 on the Output Magazine Handler Intermediate Board respectively. See Figure 3-10 for connectors location on the board.
5. Locate two
two (2) M4 x 10 mm SHCS
SHCS that sec
secure
ure the E-ch
E-chain
ain brac
bracket
ket (with
(with
flexible cable track - E-chain) to the rear of the Z Tower Machining Plate.
Loosen the two (2) screws and lift up the E-chain bracket. See Figure 3-10
6. Remove four
four (4) M6 x 20 mm SHCSs and washers
washers that
that secure the Z Tower
Tower
Assembly to the output base plate. The screws are located at the front and
rear of the Z Tower
Tower base machining plate. Move the Z T
Tower
ower forward in Yaxis direction towards the user to access the screws at the rear and backwards to access the screws at the front.
7. Using sufficient
sufficient personnel
personnel,, lift the Z Tower
Tower Assem
Assembly
bly off from the machin
machine
e
(see Caution).
8. Perform Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly maintenanc
maintenance,
e, if required.
required.
C. Remove the Output
Output Tray
Tray Assembly:
Assembly:
CAUTION: Injury Hazard. The Output Tray
Tray Assembly weight approximately 23 kg
(50 lbs). To prevent injury,
injury, use approved equipment or two persons to
lift and move the assembly.
assem bly.
1. Make sure
sure that the electrica
electricall cables to
to the output
output tray ass
assembly
embly ar
are
e correctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Remove all
all the cable
cable ties and open
open the cable
cable clamps
clamps if nece
necessary
ssary to
release the cables. Make a note of the cable routing and cable clamps
positions.
3. Loosen the
the two captive
captive screws
screws that attach
attach the P
PCB
CB cover to tthe
he indexe
indexerr
base.
4. Remove the
the PCB cover to
to access the
the index
indexer
er intermediate
intermediate board.
board.
5. Disconnect
Disconnect the inpu
input/outp
t/output
ut tray cable connecor
connecor fr
from
om the connector
connector J15 of
3-11).
).
the indexer intermediate board (see Figure 3-11
6. Loosen the
the four (4) M6 captive
captive screws
screws that attach
attach the out
output
put tray ass
assembly
embly
to the output base plate and lower console top plate.
7. Remove the output
output tray assembly
assembly from tthe
he machi
machine.
ne.
8. Use sufficient
sufficient personnel
personnel to remove
remove the output
output tray assem
assembly
bly from the
machine (see Caution).
9. Do the maintenance
maintenance on the output
output tray assembly
assembly,, if necessary
necessary.
D. Insta
Installll the Output Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly
CAUTION: When lifting the Z Tower
Tower Assembly and Output Tray Assembly during
its removal or installation, do not grasp the assembly at the ends of
the base plate. Doing this may cause the base plate to bow. Grasp and
lift the assembly at points near the center of the base plate.
1. Using sufficien
sufficientt personnel,
personnel, lift the Output Z Tower
Tower Assemb
Assembly
ly and put it on
the output base plate, adjacent to the right side of the XY Table Assembly.
2. Make sure that
that the two (2) benching
benching surfaces
surfaces on the left side
side of Z T
Tower
ower
base machining plate position is against the two (2) benching pins on the
base plate.
3. Slide the Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly to the rear.
rear. Make sure the rear of Y-axis
Y-axis moto
motorr
mount locates against the benching pin on the output base plate.
4. Install
Install four (4) M6 x 20 mm SHCSs and
and washers
washers to secure the
the Z T
Tower
ower
Assembly to the output base plate.
3-22
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
5. Slide the Z Tower
Tower forward
forward in Y-axis
Y-axis dir
direction
ection to
towards
wards the user
user
to access the screws at the rear and backwards to access the screws at
the front. In a crisscross pattern, torque each of the four (4) SHCSs to 70
in. lb. (7.91 Nm).
6. At the rear of the Output
Output Z Tower
Tower Asse
Assembly
mbly,, mount the E-ch
E-chain
ain bracke
brackett
(with flexible cable track - E-chain) onto the rear of the Z Tower Machining
Plate. Tighten the two (2) M4 x 10 mm SHCS.
7. Connect
Connect connect
connector
or P2 of Output Magazine
Magazine cable
cable (P/N 0888808888-1054-00
1054-000-07)
0-07)
to connector J1 on the Output Magazine Handler Intermediate Board.
8. Connect
Connect connect
connector
or P3 of Output Magazine
Magazine cable
cable (P/N 0888808888-1054-00
1054-000-07)
0-07)
to Y-axis motor cable connector (P/N 08888-1070-000-xx).
9. Secure the Y-axis
Y-axis motor’s
motor’s ground wire
wire cable of Output
Output Magazine c
cable
able
(P/N 08888-1054-000-07) to the Y-axis motor with the existing M4 SHCS.
Tighten the screw.
10.Connect the Output MHS sensor bus cables P/N 08888-1082-000-12 to
connector J2 and P/N 08888-1082-000-18 to connector J3 on the Output
Magazine Handler Intermediate Board.
11.Install the output tower cover, tower flap cover and Y motor cover.
E. Install
Install the
the output
output tray
tray assembly
assembly::
1. Put the output
output tray assembly
assembly on the
the front edg
edge
e of the output
output base plate.
plate.
2. Attach the
the output tray
tray assembly
assembly to the out
output
put base p
plate
late with the captive
captive
screws removed before.
3. Make sure the
the ‘C’ plates
plates on the output
output wall
wall and the output
output fixed
fixed wall int
intererlock each other.
4. Connect
Connect the input/output
input/output tray
tray cable connecor
connecor tto
o the connector
connector J15 of the
the
3-11).
). Refer to your notes.
indexer intermediate board (see Figure 3-11
5. Attach
Attach the electrical
electrical cables
cables with cable ties
ties and cable cl
clamps
amps to the inp
input
ut
tray assembly and indexer assembly. Refer to your notes.
F. Install
Install the PCB cover to the indexer
indexer base and tighten
tighten the two cap
captive
tive screws.
screws.
G. Push the green
green machine
machine ON
ON switch.
switch.
H. Sele
Select
ct OK to start initialization.
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-23
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
3.
3.8
8
Pre
reve
vent
ntiive Maint
ainten
enan
ance
ce
A preventive maintenance schedule for the magazine handlers is outlined in Table
3-1..
3-1
WARNING: REMOVE POWER FROM THE MACHINE BEFORE CHECKING THE
SECURITY AND INTEGRITY OF THE MAGAZINE HANDLER’S ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS. IF WORKING IN THE AREA OF THE WORKHOLDER, MAKE SURE ALL HEATING SURFACES HAVE COOLED
BEFORE PROCEEDING.
WARNING: REMOVE POWER FROM THE MACHINE BEFORE CHECKING THE
TIGHTNESS OF THE MAGAZINE HANDLER’S ATTACHING HARDWARE. IF WORKING IN THE AREA OF THE WORKHOLDER, MAKE
SURE ALL HEATING SURFACES HAVE COOLED BEFORE PROCEEDING.
Table 3-1 Magazine Handler Preventive
Preventive Maintenance Schedule
Schedule
Action
Period
Tools
Procedure
Clean magazine handlers
40 hours
Vacuum Hose
Remove any dirt or contaminates
from exposed and moving parts of
the input and output magazine handler.
Check hardware tightness
1000 hours
Hand Tools
Make sure all attaching hardware
(screws, washers, nuts, etc.) is
securely installed.
Inspect electrical connections
1000 hours
Replace magazine stop
buttons
2000 hours
Check for security and integrity of all
electrical connections on input magazine handler, and output magazine
handler. Refer to Section 4 for connector locations.
Hand Tools
Replace all six (6) magazine stop
buttons. One (1) stop button is
located on the upper jaw magazine
gripper assembly; two (2) stop buttons are located on the lower jaw
magazine gripper assembly. See
paragraph 3.9.6.2 for procedure.
3-24
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Action
Lubricate Y-slide bearings
on Magazine Handler
Assembly
Period
3 months to 6
months
Tools
1. Lubricant (10 ml,
in syringe), P/N:
27790-5020-000
2. Lint-Free Cloth
3. Hand gloves
4. Cotton buds
5. Hex Wrench Set
Procedure
1. Push the [Motor Stop] button.
2. Remove the Magazine Handler
assembly cover.
3. Move the Z Tower assembly to the
front
or rear manually when neccessary.
4. Clean the v-grooves of the Y-slide
bearings on the Z Tower
Tower assembly using the lint-free cloth.
5. Apply about 0.1 ml to 0.2 ml of the
lubricant to the left and right sides
of the v-grooves of the Y-slide
bearings.
6. Move the Z Tower assembly along
the Y-slide bearings manually for
10 times.
7. Do steps 5 to 6 again for four
times.
8. Remove the unwanted lubricant
from
thecloth.
Y-slide bearings with the
lint-free
Lubricate Z-slide bearing
on Magazine Handler
Assembly
3 months to 6
months
1. Lubricant (10 ml, 1. Push the [Motor Stop] button.
in syringe), P/N: 2. Remove the Magazine Handler
27790-5020-000
assembly cover.
2. Lint-Free Cloth
3. Move the magazine gripper
3. Hand gloves
assembly up or down manually
4. Cotton buds
when neccessary
n eccessary..
5. Hex Wrench Set
4. Clean the v-grooves of the Z-slide
bearing on the
th e Z Tower assembly
using the lint-free cloth.
5. Apply about 0.1 ml to 0.2 ml of the
lubricant to the left and right sides
of the v-grooves of the Z-slide
bearings.
6. Move the magazine gripper
assembly along the Z-slide bearings manually for 10 times.
7. Do steps 5 to 6 again for four
times.
8. Remove the unwanted lubricant
from the Y-slide bearings with the
lint-free cloth.
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-25
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
3.
3.9
9
Par
artt Re
Repl
plac
ace
eme
ment
nt P
Pro
roce
cedu
dure
res
s
3.
3.9.
9.1
1
Re
Repl
plac
ace
e Se
Sens
nsor
or As
Asse
semb
mblie
lies
s
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the optical
optical switch
switch (sensor
(sensor)) assemblies
assemblies in a magazi
magazine
ne ha
handler
ndler assem3-13).
).
bly (See Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
29–Inc
29–Inch
h Optical
Optical Switch
Switch Assembl
Assembly
y, P/N 0341
03411-1
1-1031
031-001
-001-17
-17
•
29–Inc
29–Inch
h Optical
Optical Switch
Switch Assembl
Assembly
y, P/N 0341
03411-1
1-1031
031-001
-001-18
-18
•
15–Inc
15–Inch
h Optical
Optical Switch
Switch Assembl
Assembly
y, P/N 0341
03411-1
1-1031
031-001
-001-19
-19
•
29–Inc
29–Inch
h Optical
Optical Switch
Switch Assembl
Assembly
y, P/N 0341
03411-1
1-1031
031-001
-001-20
-20
•
17–Inc
17–Inch
h Optical
Optical Switch
Switch Assembl
Assembly
y, P/N 0341
03411-1
1-1031
031-001
-001-23
-23
•
41–Inc
41–Inch
h Optical
Optical Switch
Switch Assembl
Assembly
y, P/N 0341
03411-1
1-1031
031-001
-001-27
-27
Procedure
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
B. Discon
Disconnect
nect the sensor that
that is to be replaced.
replaced.
1. Locate the sensor
sensor.. See input magazine
magazine handler
handler example
example in Figure 3-12 and
Figure 3-13 for sensor locations. See Section 4, paragraph 4.3.2.7 for wiring diagrams illustrating cable and sensor connections.
NOTE: Sensor locations are shown in Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13.
3-13. load and
unload tray sensors are shown in Figure 3-2.
3-2. See Section 4 for wiring
diagrams illustrating cable and sensor connections.
2. Trace
Trace the sensor cable
cable to its mating
mating connector
connector on the magazi
magazine
ne handler
intermediate board and indexer intermediate board (for tray assembly sensors) (see Note above). Disconnect the sensor cable. Note the label on the
mating connector.
C. Loosen cab
cable
le clamps (if
(if any) that secure the sensor
sensor cable. Note
Note how the cable
is routed through the clamps. Remove the sensor cable from the cable clamps.
D. Remove the scre
screw
w that secures the sensor
sensor to its mount. Note the orientation
orientation of
the colored wires within the cable. Remove the sensor assembly from the
machine.
E. Read the sens
sensor
or part number
number from the label on the
the sensor cabl
cable.
e. Obtain a
replacement sensor assembly that has the same part number.
F. Install
Install tthe
he replacem
replacement
ent sensor.
sensor.
1. Mount the sensor
sensor at its
its mounting
mounting location.
location. Use one (1)
(1) screw to secure
secure the
sensor. Make sure the sensor wires are oriented in the same way as the
original sensor.
2. Route the sensor
sensor cable to its
its connection
connection point on the input
input or output maga
maga-zine handler intermediate board or the appropriate interconnect board.
Refer to Figure 3-12,
3-12, Figure 3-13 and the sensor location and cable routing
illustrations in Section 4. Connect the sensor to the mating connector on
the appropriate board.
3. Route the sensor
sensor cable through
through flexible
flexible cabl
cable
e track(s
track(s)) and cable cla
clamps
mps (if
necessary). Secure the cable clamps.
3-26
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
G. Turn on
on machine
machine power.
power. Select OK in the Standby Mode dialog box
to start machine initialization. Verify that initialization is completed successfully.
Z Axis Motor
Z-Axis Motor Cable:
Connects to J4 on
Input Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board
Input Magazine Handler Intermediate Board
See Section 4 for Connector Locations
Y Axis Home
Sensor Cable
Y-Axis Motor Cable:
Connects to J9 on
DMHS Backplane
Y Axis Motor
Z-Axis Brake Cable:
Connects to J19 on
Input Magazine
Z Axis Brake (not
shown - Located
underneath the
Intermediate Board
Z Tower Assembly
Flexible Cable (E-chain):
Housing MHS Sensor
Bus Cables and Backplane
Magazine Cable
Fi g ure 3-12
3-12 C abl
ble
e Routing & S ensors (Input Ma
Magg azine Handl
Handler
er S hown - Deta
Detail A)
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-27
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Flexible Cable (E-chain) Containing:
- Z Axis Home Sensor Cable
- Magazine Gripper Assembly Motor Cable
- Tray Sensor Cable
- Magazine Gripper Home Sensor Cable
- Top Paw Home Sensor Cable
- Bottom Paw Home Sensor Cable
Z Axis Home Sensor
Cable Connects to J9 on
Input Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board
Z Axis Home Sensor
Top Paw Home Sensor
(not shown - mounted under
the Upper Jaw Plate near the
Top Paw Home Sensor Cable
Connects to J11 on Input
Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board
Top Paw Assembly
Magazine Gripper
Assembly Motor
(not shown - mounted
under Lower Jaw Plate)
Magazine Gripper
Home Sensor
Bottom Paw Home Sensor
(not shown - mounted under
the Lower Jaw Plate near the
Bottom Paw Assembly
Magazine Gripper
Assembly Motor
Cable Connects
to J5 on Input
Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board
Bottom Paw Home
Sensor Cable
Connects to J17 on
Input Magazine
Handler Intermediate
Board
Tray Sensor
Fi g ure 3-13
3-13 C abl
ble
e Routing & S ensors (Input Ma
Magg azine Handl
Handler
er S hown - Deta
Detail B )
3-28
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3.
3.9.
9.2
2
Re
Repl
plac
ace
e Ca
Cabl
ble
e As
Asse
semb
mbli
lies
es
The following topics list the procedures required to remove and replace motor
cables (refer to Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13 ) from the magazine handler intermediate boards (input/output). The magazine handler is fitted with flexible cable
tracks (E-chain) that house some of the cables. The flexible cable tracks can be
disassembled for easy cable removal. Refer to Section 4 for connector locations.
3.
3.9.
9.2.
2.1
1
Maga
Magazi
zine
ne Grip
Grippe
perr Ass
Assem
embl
bly
y Mot
Motor
or Ca
Cabl
ble
e
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the magazine
magazine gr
gripper
ipper assembly
assembly mo
motor
tor ca
cable.
ble. The cable
cable is
is routed
routed fr
from
om
the magazine handler intermediate board through the flexible cable track to
the motor.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Tie wraps
•
Maga
Magazin
zine
e Grip
Gripper
per Assemb
Assembly
ly Motor
Motor Cabl
Cable,
e, P/N 08888-1
08888-1081
081-00
-000-0
0-00
0
Procedure
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off. Remove all covers required to
access the input or output
ou tput magazine handler.
B. Locate the flexible
flexible cable track
track that houses the magazine
magazine gripper assembly
assembly
motor cable.
C. Cut tie wraps alo
along
ng the route of the magazine gripper
gripper assembly
assembly motor cable.
Unfasten the cable clamps at the entry and exit points of the flexible cable
track.
D. Remove and ret
retain
ain the magazine
magazine gripper assembly
assembly motor cable from
from cable
clamps on the Z Tower
Tower Assembly. Save hardware for
fo r reuse.
E. Disconnect
Disconnect the maga
magazine
zine gripper
gripper assembly
assembly motor cable con
connector
nector J5 from
from the
magazine handler intermediate board (see Figure 3-12 and Section 4 for connector locations).
F. Remove one (1)
(1) SHCS that secures
secures the magazine
magazine grippe
gripperr assembly motor
motor
cable’s ground wire to the Lower Jaw Block.
G. Disconnect
Disconnect the magazine grip
gripper
per assembl
assembly
y motor cable from its connect
connector
or on
the motor.
H. Starting
Starting at one end of the flexible cab
cable
le track, unsna
unsnap
p the top portion of each
chain link section until enough sections are removed to extract the cable.
I. Remove the magazine
magazine gripper assembly
assembly moto
motorr cabl
cable
e from the
the cab
cable
le track.
track.
Note how the cable is routed through the cable track.
J. Insert the replacemen
replacementt magazine
magazine gripper assembly
assembly motor
motor cable in the flex
flexible
ible
cable track making sure that the polarity of the cable is correct (motor connector to motor). Route and dress the cable as it was before removal. Snap in
place the top portion of each chain link section of the cable track that was
removed in step H..
H..
K. Install
Install one (1) SHCS securing
securing the magazine gripper
gripper assembl
assembly
y motor cable’
cable’s
s
ground wire to the Lower Jaw Block. Tighten the screw.
L. Connect
Connect the magazine
magazine gripper assembly
assembly motor
motor cable to its con
connector
nector on the
motor.
M. Secure the magazine gripper assembly motor cable into cable clamps
clamps on the Z
Tower Assembly.
N. Connec
Connectt the magazine gripper
gripper assembly
assembly motor cable to connec
connector
tor J5 on the
magazine handler intermediate board.
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-29
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
O. Place the magazine
magazine gripper assembly
assembly motor cable and other cables into cable
clamps at the entry and exit points of the flexible cable track. Close the cable
clamps. Install tie wraps where needed.
P. Replac
Replace
e all covers removed in step
step A.
Q. Turn on
on machine
machine power.
power. Select OK in the Standby Mode dialog box to start
machine initialization. Verify MHS operation during initialization and that initialization completes successfully
successfully..
3.9.2
.2..2
Y Axis Motor Cable
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the Y axis motor cable that connect
connects
s from
from the magazine
magazine han
handler
dler interinterface board to the Y axis motor.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Y Axis
Axis Motor
Motor Cable,
Cable, P/N 0888808888-107
1070-0
0-000-x
00-xx
x
Procedure
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off. Remove all covers required to
access the input or output magazine handler.
B. Remove th
the
e Y axis motor cable
cable from cable
cable clamps.
clamps.
C. Discon
Disconnect
nect the Y axis motor
conn
connector
from backp
backplane
lane magazine
magazine cable
P/N 08888-1054-000-XX
(seecable
Section
4ector
for connector
location).
D. Remove one (1
(1)) SHCS that secures
secures the cable’s
cable’s ground wire
wire to the Y axis
motor.
E. Discon
Disconnect
nect the Y axis moto
motorr cable from its
its connect
connector
or on the Y axis motor
motor..
Remove and discard the cable.
F. Connect
Connect the motor-end
motor-end of the replacement
replacement cable
cable to the Y axis motor.
motor.
G. Use one (1) SHCS to secure the cable’s ground wire
wire to the Y axis motor.
H. Conne
Connect
ct the other end of the cable to backplane mag
magazine
azine cabl
cable.
e. Dress and
route the cable through the cable clamps.
I. Replac
Replace
e al
alll cover
covers
s remov
removed
ed iin
n step
step A.
J. Turn
Turn on machi
machine
ne po
power
wer.. Select
Select OK in the Standby Mode dialog box to start
machine initialization. Verify MHS operation during initialization and that initialization completes successfully
successfully..
3.9.2
.2..3
Z Axis Motor Cable
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the Z axis motor cable that is
is routed
routed from the ma
magazine
gazine handle
handlerr interintermediate board to the Z axis motor.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Tie wraps
•
Z Axis
Axis Motor
Motor Cabl
Cable,
e, P/N 08888-1
08888-1093
093-000
-000-XX
-XX
Procedure (refer to Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13)
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off. Remove all covers required to
access the input or output magazine handler.
B. Cut and remove tie wra
wraps
ps (if any) and unfasten
unfasten any cable clamps
clamps securing
securing the
Z axis motor cable to the rear of Z Tower Plate. Note how cable is routed and
dressed.
C. Discon
Disconnect
nect the Z axis motor cable from it
its
s mating connector
connector J4 on the magazine handler intermediate board (see Figure 3-12 and Section 4 for connector
location).
3-30
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
D. Remov
Remove
e one (1) SHCS that secures
secures the Z axis motor
motor cable’
cable’s
s
ground wire to the rear of Z Tower Plate.
E. Disconnect
Disconnect the Z axis mo
motor
tor cable from
from its connector
connector on the Z axis moto
motor.
r.
Remove and discard cable.
F. Connect the
the motor-end of the
the replacement
replacement cable to the Z axi
axis
s motor
motor..
G. Use one (1) SHCS
SHCS to secure
secure the Z axis motor
motor cabl
cable’s
e’s ground
ground wire to the
the rear
of Z Tower Plate.
H. Connec
Connectt the other end of the cable to its mating
mating connect
connector
or J4 on the magazine
handler intermediate board. Route and dress the cable as it was before
removal. Fasten cable with cable clamp and tie wraps where needed.
A...
I. Replac
Replace
e al
alll covers
covers remo
removed
ved in s
step
tep A.
J. Tu
Turn
rn on machi
machine
ne power
power.. Select
Select OK in the Standby Mode dialog box to start
machine initialization. Verify MHS operation during initialization and that initialization completes successfully.
successfully.
3.9.3
3.9
.3
Rep
Replac
lace
e Mag
Magazi
azine
ne Ha
Handl
ndler
er C
Circ
ircuit
uit B
Boar
oard
d Ass
Assemb
embly
ly
Refer to the magazine handler board replacement procedure in Section 4 of this
manual.
3.9.
3.9.4
4
Re
Repl
plac
ace
eL
Loa
oad
dT
Tra
ray
yT
Tim
imin
ing
gB
Bel
eltt
3.
3.9.
9.4.
4.1
1
Repl
Replac
ace
e Driv
Driven
en Tim
imin
ing
g Belt
Belt
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the driven
driven timing belt in
in the load
load tray
tray assembly
assembly of the mag
magazine
azine handler assembly.
assembly.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Torque Gauge
•
Belt
Belt Ten
ensi
sion
on Tes
este
terr
•
Dri
Driven
ven Ti
Timin
ming
gB
Belt
elts,
s, P/N 21060-6
21060-6140
140-00
-000
0
Procedure (Figure 3-14)
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off. Remove magazine(s) from the
load tray if any are present.
B. Loosen the
the two captive screws
screws that attach
attach the PCB cov
cover
er to the indexe
indexerr base.
C. Remove the PC
PCB
B cover to access
access the indexer intermedi
intermediate
ate board.
D. Remove lo
load
ad tray from the tray
tray assembly
assembly (input and out
output).
put).
1. Make sure that
that the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the tray assembly
assembly are corre
correctly
ctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Disconnect
Disconnect the in/ou
in/outt tray extension
extension cable from
from the intermediate
intermediate indexer
indexer
board.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect the tra
tray
y full sensor
sensor cable conne
connector
ctor from the sensor
sensor on the bottom of the unload tray.
4. Loosen the
the four (4) M5 screws
screws from
from the load tray
tray assembly
assembly..
5. Remove
Remove the load
load tray
tray assembly
assembly from
from the machine.
machine.
E. Loosen the
the two (2) M4 screws from
from the front of the load
load tray assemb
assembly
ly..
F. Remove the tray
tray cover
cover and loading
loading plate.
G. Disconnect the electrical connections from the load tray motor
motor.. Make a note of
the connection.
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-31
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
H. Remove the driven
driven timing
timing belt(s):
belt(s):
1. Loosen the
the applicable
applicable M3 screw(s)
screw(s) on the stop block
block (if installed).
installed).
2. Loosen the
the applicable
applicable M4 nut(s) and M4 screw(s)
screw(s) on the pu
pulley
lley holder
holder..
3. Loosen the
the applicable
applicable M5 screw(s)
screw(s) that attach
attach the drive
drive pull
pulley
ey to the pulley
pulley
holder.
4. Loosen
ap
plicable
le two (2) M4 count
counter
er sunk screw th
that
at attach the
the pulley
holder tothe
theapplicab
tray.
5. Carefully
Carefully remove
remove the applicable
applicable driven
driven timing belt(s)
belt(s) from the drive
drive and
common pulleys.
I. Instal
Installl the
the drive
driven
n ti
timin
ming
g be
belt(
lt(s):
s):
1. Put the timing
timing belt(s) in position
position on the applicabl
applicable
e drive and common
common pulleys.
2. Tighten
Tighten the app
applicabl
licable
e two (2) M4 screws
screws that
that loosen before.
before.
3. Tighten
Tighten the applicable
applicable M3 screw(s)
screw(s) on the
the stop block (if install
installed).
ed).
4. Tighten
Tighten the applicable
applicable M5 screw(s)
screw(s) loosen before
before to attach the pulley.
pulley.
5. Tighten
Tighten the a
applica
pplicable
ble M4 nu
nut(s)
t(s) and
and screw(s).
screw(s).
6. Adjust the
the tension
tension of the timing belt.
belt. Ref
Refer
er to paragrap
paragraph
h 3.6.1.
3.6.1.
J. Connect
Connect the electr
electrical
ical connection
connections
s to the load tray motor.
motor. Use
Use your notes
notes..
K. Put the tray cover and lloading
oading pla
plate
te to the front of the load
load tray
tray..
L. Attach the
the tray cover
cover and loading
loading plate
plate to the loa
load
d tray with the
the two (2) M4
screws removed before.
M. Install
Install the load tray to the
the tray assembly:
assembly:
1. Put the load
load tray in position
position on the
the tray assembly
assembly..
2. Make sure
sure that the applicabl
applicable
e side of the load
load tray to
touches
uches th
the
e bottom sursurface of the inner side plate. The inner side plate is attached to the input/outinput /output wall plate.
3. Attach the
the load tray
tray to the tray assembl
assembly
y with the four
four (4) M5 scr
screws
ews
removed before.
4. Connect
Connect the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the module.
module. Use the label
labels
s or your notes.
5. Connect
Connect the tray full
full sensor cable
cable connector
connector to the sen
sensor
sor on the bott
bottom
om of
the unload tray.
6. Connect
Connect the in/out tray extensio
extension
n cable to the intermediate
intermediate in
indexer
dexer board.
board.
3.
3.9.
9.4.
4.2
2
Repl
Replac
ace
e Dr
Driv
ive
e Tim
imin
ing
g Belt
Belt
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the drive timing belt in
in the load tray
tray assembly
assembly of the magazi
magazine
ne handler assembly.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Torque Ga
Gauge
•
Driv
Drive
e Ti
Timi
ming
ng Belt
Belt,, P/N 210
21059
59-6
-6003
003-0
-000
00
Procedure (Figure 3-14)
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off. Remove magazine(s) from the
load tray if any are present.
B. Loosen the tw
two
o captive screws
screws that attach
attach the PCB cover to the in
indexer
dexer base.
base.
C. Remove the PC
PCB
B cover to access the
the indexer intermedia
intermediate
te board.
3-32
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
D. Remove lo
load
ad tray from the tray
tray assembly
assembly (input and out
output).
put).
1. Make sure that
that the electrical
electrical cables
cables to the tray assembly
assembly are corre
correctly
ctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
2. Disconnect
Disconnect the in/ou
in/outt tray extension
extension cable from
from the intermediate
intermediate indexer
indexer
board.
3. Disconnect
Disconnect the tra
tray
y full sensor
sensor cable conne
connector
ctor from the sensor
sensor on the bottom of the unload tray.
4. Loosen the
the four (4) M5 screws
screws from
from the load tray
tray assembly
assembly..
5. Remove
Remove the load
load tray
tray assembly
assembly from
from the machine.
machine.
E. Loosen the
the two (2) M4 screws from
from the front of the load
load tray assemb
assembly
ly..
F. Remove the tray
tray cover
cover and loading
loading plate.
G. Disconnect the electrical connections from the load tray motor
motor.. Make a note of
the connection.
H. Remov
Remove
e the drive timing belt:
1. Loosen the locknut
locknut on the
the tensioner
tensioner block.
2. Turn the
the M4 screw to release
release the
the tensi
tension
on on the dri
drive
ve timing
timing belt.
3. Remove
Remove the two (2) M4 counter
counter sunk
sunk screws
screws from the ro
rod
d suppor
supportt block.
4. Remove the
the four (4) M4 counter
counter sunk
sunk screws
screws at the two sides
sides of the lo
load
ad
tray assembly, at the front.
5. Remove the
the pulley
pulley rod with
with all the comm
common
on pull
pulleys.
eys.
NOTE: Remove the driven timing belts from the common pulleys when you
remove the pulley rod.
6. Carefully
Carefully remove
remove the drive timing
timing belt from the drive
drive and common
common pulleys
pulleys..
I. In
Inst
stall
all the
the dr
driv
ive
e timin
timing
g belt:
belt:
1. Put the drive timing
timing belt in position
position on the motor
motor pulley,
pulley, together
together with the
common pulley and pulley rod.
2. Put the driven timing
timing belts
belts in position on the
the drive and common
common pulley
pulleys.
s.
3. Put the pulley
pulley rod with
with the pulleys
pulleys to the bottom
bottom front of
of the tray
tray..
4. Attach
Attach the rod support
support block to the bottom
bottom of the tray wit
with
h the counte
counterr sunk
screws removed before.
5. Attach the
the pulley
pulley rod with the
the pulleys
pulleys with the four
four (4) M4 scr
screws
ews removed
removed
before, at the two sides of the load tray assembly.
6. Install
Install the driven
driven timing
timing belt(s).
belt(s). Refer
Refer to paragrap
paragraph
h 3.9.4.1,
3.9.4.1, step I.
7. Apply a torque
torque of between
between 0.11
0.11 Nm (1 lb.in.)
lb.in.) and 0.14
0.14 Nm (1.24 lb.in.)
lb.in.) to
the M4 screw on the tensioner block to put tension on the drive timing belt.
8. Ti
Tight
ghten
en the locknu
locknut.
t.
J. Connect
Connect the electrical
electrical connections
connections to the load
load tray motor
motor.. Use your notes.
notes.
K. Put the tray cover
cover and loading
loading plate to the front
front of the load tray
tray..
L. Attach the
the tray cover
cover and loading
loading plate
plate to the load tray
tray with the two
two (2) M4
screws removed before.
M...
M. Install the load tray to the tray assembly.
assembly. Refer to p
paragraph
aragraph 3.9.4.1,
3.9.4.1, step M.
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-33
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Motor Pulley
Drive Timing Belt
Motor Bracket
with Clamp Plate
Load Tray Motor
Electrical Cable
Positions
4x M3 Screws
Pulley Holder
M3 Grub
Screws
Drive Pulley
M5 Screw
Rod Support Block
4x Driven Timing Belts
5x Common Pulleys
M4 Screw
and Nut
4x M4 Counter Sunk Screws
Tension Block
Tray Cover
Stop
Block
Loading Plate
M3 Screws
M4 Counter Sunk Screws
M4 Screw
and Nut
2x M4 Screws
3-14 Loa
Load
d Tray
Tray A s s em
embl
blyy (E xplo
xplode
ded
d View - B ot
otto
tom
m of
of Tray)
Tray)
Fi g ure 3-14
3-34
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3.
3.9.
9.5
5
Re
Repl
plac
ace
e Lo
Load
ad T
Tra
ray
y Mo
Moto
torr
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the motor
motor that
that operates
operates the belts in the load tray
tray on the input
input and output tray assemblies.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Hand tools
Torque Gauge
•
Loa
Load
d Tray
Tray Mo
Moto
torr, P/N 1356
135655-60
6070
70-01
-018
8
Procedure (see Figure 3-14)
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off. Remove magazine(s) from the
load tray if any are present.
B. Loosen the
the two captive screws
screws that attach
attach the PCB cov
cover
er to the indexe
indexerr base.
C. Remove the PC
PCB
B cover to access
access the indexer intermedi
intermediate
ate board.
D. Remov
Remove
e the load tray from the
the tray assembly
assembly (input and ou
output)
tput) (see parapara3.9.4,, step D.
D.).
).
graph 3.9.4
E. Loosen the
the two (2) M4 screws from
from the front of the load
load tray assemb
assembly
ly..
F. Remove the tray
tray cover
cover and loading
loading plate.
G. Disconnect the electrical connections from the load tray motor
motor.. Make a note of
the connection and the electrical cable positions on the motor.
H. Remove the load tray motor:
1. Loosen the locknut
locknut on the
the tensioner
tensioner block.
2. Turn
Turn the M4 scre
screw
w to release
release the tension
tension on the drive
drive timing
timing belt.
3. Remove
Remove the two (2) M4 counter
counter sunk
sunk screws from
from the tra
tray
y that atta
attach
ch the
motor bracket.
4. Remove the
the motor together
together with
with the motor
motor bracket
bracket and the clamp
clamp plate
plate..
5. Remove
Remove the two (2) M3 grub
grub screws
screws from the motor
motor pull
pulley
ey..
6. Remove the motor
motor pulley
pulley from
from the m
motor
otor..
7. Remove the four (4) M3 screws
screws fro
from
m the motor
motor brac
bracket.
ket.
8. Remove
Remove the
the load
load tr
tray
ay motor
motor..
I. In
Inst
stall
all th
the
e load
load tra
tray
y moto
motor:
r:
1. Put the load
load tray motor
motor in position
position on the mo
motor
tor bracket.
bracket. Make sure
sure that the
positions of the electrical cable on the motor is the same as before (see
Figure 3-14).
2. Attach
Attach the motor bracket
bracket to the
the motor wi
with
th the four (4)
(4) M3 screws
screws removed
before.
3. Attach
Attach the motor pulley
pulley to the
the motor wi
with
th the two (2)
(2) M3 grub screws
screws
removed before.
4. Loosely attach
attach the motor
motor bracket,
bracket, together
together with the clamp pl
plate
ate and the
motor, to the bottom of the tray with the two (2) M4 counter sunk screws
removed before.
5. Put the drive timing
timing belt in position
position on the motor
motor pulley,
pulley, together
together with the
common pulley and pulley rod.
6. Connect
Connect the electr
electrical
ical connections
connections to th
the
e load tray moto
motor.
r. Use
Use your notes.
7. Apply a torque
torque of between
between 0.11
0.11 Nm (1 lb.in.)
lb.in.) and 0.14
0.14 Nm (1.24 lb.in.)
lb.in.) to
the M4 screw on the tensioner block to put tension on the drive timing belt.
8. Tighten
Tighten the locknut
locknut on tthe
he tensioner
tensioner block.
9. Tighten
Tighten the
the two (2)
(2) M4 counter
counter sunk screws
screws..
J. Put the tray cover
cover and loading
loading plate
plate to the front
front of the loa
load
d tray.
tray.
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-35
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
K. Attach the tra
tray
y cover and loading
loading plate to the
the load tray with the
the two (2) M4
screws removed before.
3.9.4.1,, step M.
L. Install
Install the load tray to the
the tray assembly
assembly.. Refer to para
paragraph
graph 3.9.4.1
3.
3.9.
9.6
6
Re
Repl
plac
ace
e Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne G
Gri
ripp
pper
er P
Par
arts
ts
3.9.6.
3.9
.6.1
1
Repla
Replace
ce Magaz
Magazine
ine Gripp
Gripper
er Paw
Paw/Pa
/Paw
w Re
Retur
turn
n Spri
prings
ngs
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace magazine
magazine gripper paw and/or paw return
return springs on the upper or
lower magazine gripper assembly (see Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16
3-16).
). The procedure is the same for magazine grippers on both magazine handlers.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Paw,
Paw, Top
Top,, P/N 034
03401
01-05
-0512
12-0
-000
00-xx
-xx
•
Paw,
Paw, Bot
Bottom
tom,, P/N 034
03401
01-0
-054
5433-00
000-x
0-xx
x
•
Paw Return
Return Spri
Spring,
ng, Right,
Right, P/N
P/N 03101
03101-01
-0122-0
22-03939-xx
xx
•
Paw Retur
Return
nS
Spri
pring,
ng, Left,
Left, P/N
P/N 03101
03101-01
-0122-0
22-04040-xx
xx
Procedure (See Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16)
3-16)
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off.
B. Remove the bottom
bottom paw assembly
assembly
1. Remove one (1)
(1) M4 x 20mm SHCS
SHCS on the
the Magazine
Magazine Stop
Stop Button
Button Assembly
bly.. Remove the assembly. Retain the hardware for reuse.
r euse.
2. Locate the
the pivot shaft
shaft set screw
screw in the
the paw bracket
bracket of the bottom
bottom paw
assembly.. It may be necessary
assembly
necessar y to move the lower jaw magazine gripper
assembly to the center in the Y axis direction to gain access to the set
screw.
3. Loosen the
the pivot shaft
shaft set screw.
screw. Do not remove the set
set screw
screw..
4. While holding
holding the bottom paw
paw assembly
assembly in place,
place, use a sma
smallll tool to pu
push
sh
the pivot shaft out of the lower jaw magazine gripper assembly. Retain
Retain the
pivot shaft for reuse.
5. Slowly remove
remove the b
bottom
ottom paw
paw assembly
assembly away from
from the lower
lower jaw magamagazine gripper assembly. While removing the bottom paw assembly, take note
that two (2) compressed springs may fall out from the assembly. Retain the
springs for reuse.
6. Place the
the bottom
bottom paw assembly
assembly on a clean
clean work surface.
surface.
C. Remove
Remove the
the bottom
bottom paw
paw
1. Locate the
the pivot shaft
shaft set screw
screw at the undersid
underside
e of the bottom paw
paw assem
assem-bly.
2. Loosen the
the pivot shaft
shaft set screw.
screw. Do not remove the set
set screw
screw..
3. While holding
holding the bottom paw
paw in place,
place, use a smal
smalll tool to pus
push
h the pivot
pivot
shaft out of the bottom paw assembly.
assembly.
4. Slowly remove
remove the bottom
bottom paw away from
from the assembly
assembly,, making sure th
that
at
the two (2) paw return springs do not escape.
5. Retain
Retain the pivot sha
shaft
ft for reuse.
reuse. Discard
Discard the bottom pa
paw
w and return springs.
springs.
3-36
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
D. Insta
Installll the replacement
replacement bottom
bottom paw and return
return springs
springs on the bottom paw assembly.
assembly.
1. Position
Position the two (2) replacement
replacement paw
paw return springs
springs in the bottom
bottom paw as
shown in Figure 3-15
3-15.. Make sure the spring arms are positioned in the corners of the paw pocket as shown in the figure. Make sure the spring coils
are aligned with the holes in the paw.
2. Place the bottom
bottom paw on the bottom
bottom paw assembly
assembly.. Press the paw agai
against
nst
the paw bracket so that the springs compress and the holes in the paw are
aligned with the mounting hole on the paw bracket.
Bottom Paw Assembly
Pivot Shaft Set Screw
Bottom Paw
Pivot Shaft
Bottom Paw
Assembly
Magazine Stop
Button Assembly
Lower Jaw Bracket
Magazine Stop
Buttons (2 places)
Flat Cutout
Compressed
Spring (2 places)
Paw Bracket
Bottom Paw
Bottom Paw Assembly
Pivot Shaft
Bottom Paw Pivot
Shaft Set Screw
Paw Return
Spring (2 places)
Magazine Gripper Assembly Motor
3-15 B ot
otto
tom
m Paw/
Paw/S
S pring R ep
epla
lacem
cement
ent (Lower J aw Gripper
G ripper As s em
embl
bly)
y)
Fi g ure 3-15
3. Insert the pivot
pivot shaft into
into one side of the bottom
bottom paw,
paw, through the paw
paw
bracket mounting hole, and into the other side of the bottom paw. Make
sure the flat cutout in the pivot shaft is facing down toward the set screw at
the underside of the paw bracket.
4. Tighten
Tighten the set
set screw
screw to secure
secure the pi
pivot
vot shaft.
shaft.
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-37
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
E. Insta
Installll the bottom paw assembly
assembly
1. Place the
the bottom paw
paw assembly
assembly onto the lower
lower jaw magazin
magazine
e gripper
assembly.. Position two (2) compressed springs retained from step B.5.
assembly
between the guided slots in the paw bracket and lower jaw bracket.
2. Press the bottom
bottom paw assembly
assembly against
against the lower ja
jaw
w magazine
magazine gripper
assembly so that the springs compress and the holes in the paw bracket
are aligned with the mounting hole on the lower jaw bracket.
3. Insert the
the pivot shaft
shaft into one side
side of the lower
lower jaw bracket,
bracket, through
through the bottom paw assembly mounting hole, and into the other side of the lower jaw
bracket. Make sure the flat cutout in the pivot shaft is facing up toward the
set screw in the top of paw bracket.
4. Tighten
Tighten the set screw to se
secure
cure the piv
pivot
ot shaft. Ma
Make
ke sure that the bot
bottom
tom
paw assembly sensor flag (part of the paw bracket) can pass between the
bottom paw assembly sensor elements without interference.
5. Use one (1)
(1) M4 x 20mm SHCS
SHCS to secure the
the Magazi
Magazine
ne Stop
Stop Button
Assembly to the lower jaw magazine gripper assembly
assembly.. For Input Magazine
Handler, insert the SHCS to the far right mounting hole of the button holder,
and far left mounting hole for
f or Output Magazine Handler.
F. Remo
Remove
ve the
the top
top paw
paw
1. Locate the
the pivot shaft
shaft set screw
screw in the
the upper jaw bracket
bracket of
of the upper ja
jaw
w
magazine gripper assembly. It may be necessary to move the upper jaw
magazine gripper assembly to the center in the Y axis for access to the set
screw.
2. Loosen the
the pivot shaft
shaft set screw.
screw. Do not remove the set
set screw
screw..
3. While holding
holding the top
top paw in place,
place, use a small
small tool tto
o push the pivot
pivot shaf
shaftt
out of the upper jaw magazine gripper assembly. Retain the pivot shaft for
reuse.
4. Slowly move
move the top paw
paw away from
from the upper
upper jaw magazine
magazine gripper
gripper
assembly,, making sure that the two (2) paw return springs do
assembly
d o not escape.
5. Retain
Retain the pivot sha
shaft
ft for reuse. Discard
Discard the top
top paw and paw ret
return
urn
springs.
G. Install the replacement top paw and return springs on the upper jaw magazine
magazine
gripper assembly
a ssembly..
1. Position
Positi
two 3-16.
(2)
(2) replacement
replac
ement
pa
w spring
return arms
springs
springs
the
the top paw
as corshownoninthe
3-16
Figure
. Make
sure paw
the
areinpositioned
in the
ners of the paw pocket as shown in the figure. Make sure the spring coils
are aligned with the holes in the top paw.
2. Place the top
top paw on the upper
upper jaw bracket.
bracket. Press the
the top paw aga
against
inst the
jaw bracket so that the springs compress and the holes in the top paw are
aligned with the mounting hole on the jaw bracket.
3-38
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Leadscrew Nut
Paw Return
Spring (2 places)
Top Paw Pivot
Shaft Set Screw
Upper Jaw Bracket
Flat Cutout
Top Paw
Pivot Shaft
Top Paw
Magazine Stop Button
Fi g ure 3-16
3-16 To
Top
p Paw/S
Paw/S pring R ep
epla
lacem
cement
ent (Uppe
(Upperr J aw Mag
Mag azine Gr ippe
ipperr A s s em
embl
blyy S hown
hown))
3. Insert the pivot
pivot shaft into
into one side of the top paw
paw,, through the jaw bracket
bracket
mounting hole, and into the
th e other side of the top paw. Make sure the flat
cutout in the pivot shaft is facing up toward the set screw in the upper jaw
bracket.
4. Tighten
Tighten the set screw
screw to secure the pivot
pivot shaft.
shaft. Make sure that th
the
e top paw
sensor flag (part of the top paw) can pass between the top paw sensor elements without interference.
H. Tur
Turn
n on machine power and initi
initialize
alize the machine.
machine. During
During operation,
operation, make
sure that the magazine gripper assembly successfully grasps and locates the
magazine against the wear points and benching buttons.
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-39
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
3.
3.9.
9.6.
6.2
2
Repl
Replac
ace
e Mag
Magaz
azin
ine
eS
Sto
top
p Bu
Button
ttons
s
Purpose
•
Repl
Replac
ace
e maga
magazi
zine
ne sto
stop
p butto
buttons
ns (se
(see
e Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16
3-16).
). One (1)
button is located on the upper jaw magazine gripper assembly; two (2) buttons
are located on the lower jaw magazine gripper assembly. The procedure is the
same for magazine gripper assembly on both magazine handlers.
buttons should be replaced as a set. The buttons
NOTE: The magazine stop buttons
should be replaced according to the preventive maintenance schedule
outlined in Table 2-2.
2-2. If a single button is worn, it may be time to replace
all six buttons (three in each magazine handler).
Frequency
•
The stop
stop buttons
buttons on both
both magazine
magazine handler assemblies
assemblies should be rep
replaced
laced
after every 2000 hours of machine operation.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Magazi
Magazine,
ne, Stop Button,
Button, P/N 0340103401-002
0020-04
0-042-x
2-xx
x
Procedure (refer to Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16)
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off.
B. Replac
Replace
e stop buttons on lower jaw magazine
magazine gripp
gripper
er assembly.
assembly.
1. Locate the
the magazine
magazine stop button
button assembly
assembly on the llower
ower jaw m
magazin
agazine
e
gripper assembly.
assembly.
2. Locate the stop
stop buttons on the magazine
magazine st
stop
op button ass
assembly
embly.. Remove
one (1) SHCS from each button. Remove the buttons and save hardware
for reuse.
3. Use one (1) SHCS
SHCS to secure each
each replacement
replacement button
button to the button
button hold
holder.
er.
Do not over-tighten the screws.
C. Replac
Replace
e stop button on upper jaw magazine
magazine gripper assembly
assembly..
1. Locate the stop
stop button on the upper
upper jaw magazi
magazine
ne gripper assembl
assembly
y.
2. Remove one
one (1) SHCS from
from the stop button.
button. Re
Remove
move the button
button and sa
save
ve
hardware for reuse.
3. Before removing
removing the button,
button, take note
note of its orientatio
orientation
n and positio
position
n in the
counter bore.
4. Use one (1)
(1) SHCS to secure
secure the replaceme
replacement
nt button to tthe
he upper jaw
jaw
bracket of the upper jaw magazine gripper assembly. Do not over-tighten
the screw.
3-40
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
3.
3.9.
9.7
7
Re
Repl
plac
ace
eB
Bra
rake
ke As
Asse
semb
mbly
ly
To replace the Brake Assembly, the entire Z Tower Assembly must be removed
from the machine.
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the brake
brake assembl
assembly
y that reside
resides
s at the
the under
underside
side of the in
input/out
put/output
put Z
Tower Assembly (see Figure 3-17
3-17).
). The brake assembly prevents Z-axis
movement when the Z-axis stepper motor power is off.
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Tie wraps
•
Verni
ernier
er Ca
Cali
lipe
pers
rs
•
Brak
Brake
e assemb
assembly
ly,, P/N 08888-1
08888-1085
085-000
-000-XX
-XX
Procedure
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off.
B. Remove input/outp
input/output
ut tower cover,
cover, tower flap cover and Y motor cover.
cover.
Tower
ower
C. Remove Z T
Tower
ower Assembly
Assembly.. Refer to paragraph 3.7.1 step B. for Input Z T
Assembly and paragraph 3.7.2 step B. for Output Z Tower Assembly.
D. Place the Z T
Tower
ower Assembly on a flat work surface. Position the assembly
such that the tower lay horizontally on the work surface in order to the to gain
access to the brake assembly at the underside of the Z Tower Assembly
Assembly..
E. Rem
Remove
ove brake
brake assembl
assembly
y.
1. Disconnect
Disconnect the brak
brake
e cable connector
connector J19 from the Input/Outp
Input/Output
ut Magazine
Magazine
Handler Intermediate Board (refer to Figure 3-12 and Section 4 for connector locations). Loosen the screws that secure the cable clamps and cut tie
wraps as needed to release the brake assembly cable routed to the underside of the Z Tower Assembly.
2. Remove one
one (1) SHCS that
that secure
secures
s the brake g
ground
round cab
cable
le to the underunderside of the Z Tower Assembly.
3. Note the position
position of the brake
brake cable relating
relating to how the brake
brake assembly
assembly is
mounted at the underside of the Z Tower Assembly
Assembly.. Remove three (3)
SHCSs that secure the brake assembly to the underside of Z T
Tower
ower
Assembly.. Remove the brake assembly.
Assembly
4. Remove the
the brake square
square nut attach
attach to the
the end of Z-ax
Z-axis
is leadsc
leadscrew
rew by
loosening two (2) set screws in the nut. See Figure 3-17.
3-17.
F. Install
Install replacemen
replacementt brake assembly
assembly..
1. Remove
Remove the brake square
square nut from the replacement
replacement brake
brake assemb
assembly
ly..
2. Slide the square
square nut onto
onto the end of the Z-axis
Z-axis leadscrew
leadscrew.. Orientate
Orientate the nut
such that the two (2) set screws in the nut are positioned on the two flat
surfaces on the leadscrew. Set a gap of 16 mm (630 mil) between the nut
surface and the base surface of the Z Tower Machining plate using the ver3-17.. Tighten the set screws.
nier calipers. See Figure 3-17
3. Mount the replacemen
replacementt brake assembly
assembly onto base
base of the Z T
Tower
ower mach
machinining plate ensuring that the cable exits the brake assembly in the direction
noted in step E.3.
E.3... Align the brake assembly mounting holes with the
tapped holes in the base of Z T
Tower
ower plate.
4. Install
Install three (3) SHCSs to secure
secure the replacement
replacement brake
brake assembly
assembly and one
(1) SHCS to secure the ground wire to the underside the Z Tower Assembly
bly.. Tighten all four screws.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Magazine Handlers
3-41
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5. Connect
Connect the brake cable
cable to connector
connector J19
J19 on the inp
input/outp
ut/output
ut magazi
magazine
ne
handler intermediate board. Route and secure the cable in the cable
clamps and tie wraps as it was before being removed in step E.1.
G. Install Z Tower Assembly.Refer
Assembly.Refer to paragraph
paragraph 3.7.1 step D. for Input Z Tower
Assembly and paragraph 3.7.2 step D. for Output Z Tower Assembly.
H. Turn o
on
n machine
machine powe
power.
r. Select
Select OK when the Standby Mode dialog box
appears to start initialization. Verify that MHS initialization completes successfully.
I. Use the Magazine
Magazine Util
Utilities
ities menu
menu to lload
oad a maga
magazine
zine fu
fullll of ca
carriers
rriers onto
onto the
magazine handler where the brake was replaced. Press [MOTOR STOP], then
turn off machine power. Verify that the magazine gripper assembly does not
drop, which indicates that the brake is operating correctly.
J. Replace
Replace input/output
input/output tower
tower cover,
cover, tower flap
flap and Y motor cover
cover..
3-42
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Z axis Leadscrew
Flat Cutout on Shaft
(2 places)
Square Nut
Set Screws
Z Tower Base
16 mm
Bearing
Z-Axis Leadscrew
Brake Assembly
Z Brake Assembly Square
Nut Mounting Detail
Brake Mounting
SHCSs (3 places)
Cable Clamps
(2 places)
Brake assembly
square nut (hidden)
(see mounting detail)
Fi g ure 3-1
3-17
7 B rake A s s em
embl
blyy R ep
epla
lacem
cement
ent
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-43
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
3.
3.9.
9.8
8
Re
Repl
plac
ace
eS
Ste
tepp
pper
er Mo
Moto
tors
rs
3.9.8.1
Z Axis Motor
Purpose
•
Replac
Replace
e the m
motor
otor that
that drive
drives
s the Z T
Towe
owerr Z axis lead
leadscr
screw
ew
3-18).
).
(see Figure 3-18
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
Hand tools
•
Feeler Ga
Gauge
•
Tor
orque
que wren
wrench
ch,, 12 iin.
n. lb.
lb.,, 28 in.
in. lb.
lb.
•
Torque
orque Sc
Screw
rew Drive
Driverr with
with 3/32
3/32 in. Hex
Hex Inser
Insertt Bit
•
Torque
orque Sc
Screw
rew Dri
Driver
ver with
with 3mm
3mm Hex
Hex Insert
Insert Bit
•
Z motor
motor assemb
assembly
ly,, P
P/N
/N 0888
08888-1
8-1093
093-00
-000-xx
0-xx
Procedure
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off.
B. Remove the tow
tower
er cover,
cover, tower flap cover and motor
motor cover on the Input/Output
Magazine Handler Assembly.
C. Locate the Z-axis motor at the top of the Z Tower.
Tower. Disconnect the Z-axis motor
cable from connector J4 on the Magazine Handler Intermediate Board. Make
note of the connector position on the Z motor.
D. Turn the scre
screw
w in the Z-axis motor such that the screws
screws on the rigid coupling
are accessible through the opening
o pening of Z Tower.
Tower. This procedure may lift up or
bring down the magazine gripper assembly.
E. Loosen two (2
(2)) SHCSs in the rigid coupling
coupling to release
release the leadscrew
leadscrew fro
from
m the
coupling by using a torque screw driver with 3/32 in. hex insert bit.
F. Remove four
four (4) SHCSs that
that secure the Z-axis
Z-axis motor to the motor
motor mounting
surface, located at the top of Z Tower
Tower.. Remove the motor with rigid coupling.
G. Loosen two (2) SHCSs in the rigid coupling to release the coupling from the
motor shaft by using a torque screw driver with 3/32 in. hex insert bit. Set aside
the rigid coupling for reuse.
H. Insert a 20 mils feeler gauge into the center slot
slot in the rigid coupling. Install
Install the
rigid coupling with feeler gauge onto the shaft of replacement motor. Tighten
the screw in the rigid coupling to a torque of
o f 12 Ib. in., securing the coupling to
the motor shaft. Remove the feeler gauge.
NOTE: Before installing the rigid coupling onto the motor shaft, use a lint-free
cloth to remove any grease or dirt on the motor shaft and rigid coupling
hole.
I. Place the
the replacement
replacement Z-axis
Z-axis motor
motor wi
with
th rigid coupling
coupling agai
against
nst the motor
motor
mounting surface at the top of Z Tower.
Tower.
J. Position
Position the Z-axis motor
motor properly
properly (check position
position of conn
connector
ector on motor)
motor) and
align the motor mounting holes with the tapped holes in the motor mounting
surface. Make sure the end of the Z axis leadscrew enters the hole in the rigid
coupling. Install four (4) SHCSs to secure the motor to the motor mounting surface. Tighten the four (4) screws to a torque of 28 lb. in.
K. Tigh
Tighten
ten the two (2) bottom screws in the rigid coupling
coupling to secure the leadscrew
leadscrew
to the coupling, to a torque of 12 in.lb.
L. Connect
Connect the Z-axis
Z-axis motor cable
cable to connector
connector J4 on the
the Magazi
Magazine
ne Handler
Handler
Intermediate Board.
M. Install the tower cover, tower flap and motor cover onto the Input/Output Magazine Handler Assembly. Turn on machine power.
3-44
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
N. Sele
Select
ct OK from the Standby Mode dialog box to start machine initialization. Verify that MHS initialization is completed successfully.
SHCS in Z axis
Motor (hidden)
SHCS
(4 places)
Z Axis Motor
Rigid Coupling
Z Tower Plate
Motor Mounting
Surface
Z Axis Leadscrew
Leadscrew Nut
Fi g ure 3-18 R em
emove/
ove/R
R epl
epla
ace Z A xi s Motor
Motor
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-45
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
3.9.8.2
Y Axis Motor
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the motor that
that drives
drives the
the Z Tower
Tower Assembly
Assembly Y axi
axis
s lead
leadscrew
screw (see
3-19).
).
Figure 3-19
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Hand tools
Torque
orque w
wrenc
rench,
h, 12 in. lb.
lb.,, 2
28
8 iin.
n. lb.
lb.
•
Feeler Ga
Gauge
•
Torque
orque Sc
Screw
rew Drive
Driverr with
with 3/32
3/32 in. Hex
Hex Inser
Insertt Bit
•
Torque
orque Sc
Screw
rew Dri
Driver
ver with
with 3mm
3mm Hex
Hex Insert
Insert Bit
•
Y motor
motor ass
assemb
embly
ly,, P/N
P/N 0888
08888-1
8-1070070-000
000-xx
-xx
Procedure
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off. Remove the tower, tower flap
and motor covers on the Input/Output Magazine Handler Assembly.
B. Discon
Disconnect
nect the Y
Y-axis
-axis motor
motor cable connect
connector
or P1 from connecto
connectorr P3 of backplane magazine cable (P/N 08888-1070-000-xx), which is routed from the
DMHS backplane.
C. Turn the screw in the Y-axis
Y-axis motor to move the Z Tower
Tower Assembly towards the
operator, in order to access the rigid coupling screws.
D. Loosen two (2) SHCSs in the rigid coupling to release the Y-axis
Y-axis leadscrew
from the coupling by using a torque screw driver with 3/32 in. hex insert bit.
E. Take note of the connector position on the Y-axis motor. Remove four (4)
SHCSs that secure the Y-axis motor to the motor mounting surface, located at
the rear of Z Tower Base Plate. Remove the motor with rigid coupling.
F. Loosen two
two (2) SHCSs in the rigid
rigid coupling
coupling to release the coupling
coupling from
from the
motor shaft by using a torque screw driver with 3/32 in. hex insert bit. Set aside
the rigid coupling for reuse.
G. Insert a 20 mils feeler gauge into the center slot in the rigid coupling. Install the
rigid coupling with feeler gauge onto the shaft of replacement motor. Tighten
the screw in the rigid coupling to a torque of
o f 12 Ib. in., securing the coupling to
the motor shaft. Remove the feeler gauge.
NOTE: Before installing the rigid coupling onto the motor shaft, use a lint-free
cloth to remove any grease or dirt on the motor shaft and rigid coupling
hole.
H. Place the replacement Y-axis
Y-axis motor with rigid coupling against the motor
mounting surface at the rear of Z Tower Base.
I. Position
Position the Y-axis
Y-axis motor
motor properly
properly (check
(check positi
position
on of conne
connector
ctor on motor)
motor) and
align the motor mounting holes with the tapped holes in the motor mounting
surface. Make sure the end of the Y axis leadscrew enters the hole in the rigid
coupling. Install four (4) SHCSs to secure the motor to the motor mounting surface. Tighten the four (4) screws to a torque of 28 in. lb.
J. Tighten
Tighten the two (2) screws
screws in the rigid
rigid coupling
coupling to secure the lea
leadscrew
dscrew to the
coupling, to a torque of 12 in. Ib.
K. Connec
Connectt the Y-axis
Y-axis motor
motor cable connecto
connectorr P1 to connector
connector P3 of backp
backplane
lane
magazine cable (P/N 08888-1070-000-xx)
L. Install
Install the tower cover,
cover, tower flap cover
cover and motor cover onto the Input/Outpu
Input/Outputt
Magazine Handler Assembly. Turn on machine power.
M. Se
Sele
lect
ct OK from the Standby Mode dialog box to start machine initialization.
Verify that MHS initialization is completed successfully.
3-46
Magazine Handlers
Material Handling System Manual
.
Leadscrew Nut
Y Axis Leadscrew
Rigid Coupling
SHCS in Y axis
Motor (hidden)
SHCS
(4 places)
Y Axis Motor
Z Tower Base
Fi g ure 3-19
3-19 R em
emove/
ove/R
R epl
epla
ace Y A xis Mot
Motor
or
98888-0000-JB3-01
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
3-47
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
3.
3.9.
9.8.
8.3
3
Maga
Magazi
zine
ne Gri
Gripp
pper
er Ass
Assem
embl
bly
y Moto
Motorr
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the motor that drives the magazin
magazine
e gri
gripper
pper leadscr
leadscrew
ew and
and controls
controls
the gripping motion of the upper and lower jaws in Z-axis. (see Figure 3-15)
3-15)
Tools/ Materials/ Parts
•
•
Hand tools
Tor
orque
que wren
wrench
ch,, 12 iin.
n. lb.
lb.,, 28 in.
in. lb.
lb.
•
Torque
orque Sc
Screw
rew Drive
Driverr with
with 3/32
3/32 in. Hex
Hex Inser
Insertt Bit
•
Torque
orque Sc
Screw
rew Dri
Driver
ver with
with 3mm
3mm Hex
Hex Insert
Insert Bit
•
Magazi
Magazine
ne Gri
Grippe
pperr Assembl
Assembly
y moto
motorr, P/N 1356513565-6049
6049-00
-003-x
3-xx
x
Procedure
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn machine power off. Remove the tower cover, tower
flap and motor cover on the Input/Output Magazine Handler Assembly
Assembly..
B. Locate the magaz
magazine
ine gripper assembly
assembly motor.
motor. T
Turn
urn one (1) SHCS in the Z Axis
motor to lift up the magazine gripper assembly to the center position of Z linear
bearing assembly. Make sure the screws in the rigid coupling are accessible.
C. Disconn
Disconnect
ect the magazine gripper
gripper assembly
assembly motor cable (P/N 08888-108108888-1081000-xx) from its connector on the magazine gripper motor. Place the cable in
an
out-of-the-way safe location. Take note of the connector position on the
motor.
D. Loosen two (2) SHCSs in the rigid cou
coupling
pling to release
release the leadscrew from
from the
coupling by using a torque screw driver with 3/32 in. hex insert bit.
E. Remove fou
fourr (4) M4 x 12 mm SHCSs at the underside
underside of the magazine
magazine gripper
assembly that secure the magazine gripper motor with rigid coupling to the
lower jaw bracket. Pull the motor with rigid coupling downwards from the
underside of the magazine gripper assembly. Remove the motor with rigid
coupling.
F. Loosen two
two (2) SHCSs in the rigid
rigid coupling
coupling to release the coupling
coupling from
from the
motor shaft by using a torque screw driver with 3/32 in. hex insert bit. Set aside
the rigid coupling for reuse.
G. Insert a 20 mils feeler gauge into the center slot in the rigid coupling. Install the
rigid coupling with feeler gauge onto the shaft of replacement motor. Tighten
the screw in the rigid coupling to a torque of
o f 12 Ib. in., securing the coupling to
the motor shaft. Remove the feeler gauge.
NOTE: Before installing the rigid coupling onto the motor shaft, use a lint-free
cloth to remove any grease or dirt on the motor shaft and rigid coupling
hole.
H. Place the repla
replacement
cement motor
motor with rigid coupling
coupling at the underside of the lower
lower
jaw bracket against the motor mounting surface. Make sure the end of the Y
axis leadscrew enters the hole in the rigid coupling.
I. Position
Position the motor
motor such
such that its
its cable connector
connector is iin
n the sa
same
me posi
position
tion as it
was when removed in step C. Align the motor mounting holes with tapped
holes in the motor mounting surface.
J. Install
Install four (4) SHCSs
SHCSs to secure
secure the motor
motor to the motor
motor mountin
mounting
g surface.
surface.
Tighten the screws to 28 in. lb.
K. Tigh
Tighten
ten the two (2) screws
screws in the rigid coupling
coupling to secure
secure the leads
leadscrew
crew to the
coupling, to a torque of 12 in. Ib.
L. Connect
Connect the magazine
magazine gripper assembly
assembly motor
motor cable to its co
connecto
nnectorr on the
motor.
M. Move the magazine gripper assembly down to the bottom of the Z linear bearing assembly.
3-48
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
N. Install the tower cover, tower flap cover and motor cover.
cover. Turn on
machine power.
O. Sele
Select
ct OK from the Standby Mode dialog box to start machine initialization.
Verify that MHS initialization is completed successfully.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Magazine Handlers
3-49
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
This pa
pagg e is le
left
ft inte
intentiona
ntionall
llyy bla
blank
nk
3-50
Magazine Handlers
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
4
4.1
Electronics
About T
Th
his Se
Section
Here is what you will find in this section:
•
4.2,
Description,Wire
Description,
gives
an overview
of thedescription
Electronicsoffunction
S
ction
4.2, Overall
ofethe
IConn
High Performance
Bonder
and a brief
each
item in the calibration menu.
•
Each
Each se
sect
ctio
ion
n from
from Sect
Sectio
ion
n 4.3 through 4.5 describes a calibration feature and
the operation guidelines on carrying out the various calibration procedures.
•
Section 4.3,
4.3, Subsystem/Board Descriptions
•
Section 4.4,
4.4, MHS Sensor
•
Section 4.5,
4.5, Cable Assemblies
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-1
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.2
Overa
ralll Descripti
tio
on
4.
4.2.
2.1
1
Sy
Syst
stem
em Or
Orga
gani
niza
zati
tion
on
The electronic control system
system for the Material Handling System (MHS) is controlled by the Distributed Material Handling System (DMHS) back plane board
mounted at the rear of the card rack assembly
a ssembly.. This backplane interconnects the
circuit boards and provides electrical connections to external devices such as
motors, sensors, solenoids and other interface circuit boards mounted on the
MHS.
Figure 4-1 provides a simplified diagram of the MHS electronics system. The
DMHS backplane is communicated via the ethernet (host) from the PC-On-ABoard (PCOAB).
The sensor logic on the Stepper Controller board monitors the status of all sensors on the workholder, input magazine handler, and output magazine handler,
receiving sensor data from the interface boards via a synchronous serial interface. The sensor logic converts the sensor data into a form that is usable by other
boards in the system and makes the sensor data available through the backplane.
(Paragraphs 4.2.3 and 4.4 provide descriptions and show locations of MHS sensors.)
An additional function of the stepper controller board is to generate
gener ate motor control
signal
to three
boards
thatboards
can control
upethernet.
to 16 motors.
trol signals
are stepper
passed driver
to stepper
driver
via the
MotorMotor
drive consignals from the stepper drivers are passed through backplane connectors to
individual steppers motors via the interface boards. The controller monitors fault
signals from the driver boards and home/limit sensor data from the sensor logic.
(Refer to paragraph 4.2.2 for more information concerning stepper motor drive.)
The Indexer Solenoid Driver board is to generate solenoid drive enable signals
from DMHS data. These signals each activate one of the 24 individual solenoid
driver circuits on the Solenoid Driver board, which operate workholder solenoids,
MHS solenoid valves, magazine handler Z–axis brakes, and load tray motors.
Temperatures of the two workholder heating zones (Preheat and Bond Site) are
controlled by the I/O and Temperature Controller circuit board, which has eight (8)
temperature control circuits. The controller heats a workholder zone by switching
a solid–state relay that connects 56V to a resistive heater, and monitors temperature with a type K thermocouple mounted close to the heater. The Input/Output (I/
O) portion of the circuit board generates a board enable signal for the solenoid
driver logic (enables or disables all drivers). Refer to IConn Maintenance Manual
for more information concerning the I/O and Temperature Controller board.
Most of the printed circuit boards are located in a card rack within the IConn
machine lower console. MHS interface boards are mounted on the input magazine handler, output magazine handler, and indexer assembly.
4-2
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Serial Interface, Motor Out
.
Solenoids
1 to 24
Motors
1 to 16
Indexer
Input Mag
Output Mag
sensors
c
.
a
.
Sensor
Bus
Direct
Sensor Input
0 to 7
Host
enal
p
k
.
Ethernet
S
H
M
D
96
Micro/TripleHalf
Stepper Driver Board
Serial Interface, Motor Out
HEX Half Stepper Board
96
B
Serial Interface, Motor Out
HEX Half Stepper Board
96
SPI, Solenoid Out
96
96
HEX Serial Interface,
SPI, Ethernet,
Sensor Bus, Sensors
With speed sensor
Indexer/Solenoid Driver
Board
Stepper
Fans
Controller Board
1&2
Power 5V, 12V, 48V, Gnd
Modell 3131 C ontrol S ys te
tem
m Org anizat
nization
ion
Fi g ure 4-1 Mode
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-3
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.2.2
Stepper D
Drrive
Figure 4-2 shows the signals generated by the stepper controller logic for control
of a typical stepper motor and shows how the motor is connected to its driver circuit on the stepper driver board in the card rack via an interface board.
Stepper
Motor
A1
B2
A2
B1
Motor Cable
Cable
P1
P2
P3
P4
MHS Interface
Board
Power Cable
P1
P2
P3
P4
Backplane Board
A1
A2
P1
B1
P2
B2
P3
P4
P4
STEP
Stepper/Sensor
Board
1/2 Step Driver
MOTOR SERIAL BUS
PCOAB
ETHERNET
Fi g ure 4-2 Typical S te
tepper
pper Mot
Motor
or Control
C ontrol P ath
4-4
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
All motors are operated in an open–loop mode where there is no
motor or equipment position feedback to the control system during motions. The
controller determines the position of motor–driven equipment
eq uipment by finding a sensor–
marked home position (zero point) and keeping track of the motion commands
issued to the motor.
For specific information concerning motor connections at the interface boards and
motor
drive signal paths
board
the backplane,
4.3.
and stepper/sensor
logic,from
referthe
to interface
the diagrams
in to
paragraph
4.3. driver circuit,
4.2.3
.2.3
Sen
enso
sorr Ha
Hand
ndli
ling
ng
Figure 4-3 shows how the status of a typical MHS sensor can be read by the control system. Sensor state data is sent to the sensor logic on the Stepper/Sensor
board by means of a synchronous serial data stream. At the interface board, the
states of all sensors connected to the board are loaded onto multiple eight–bit
long “frames” of data by a serial data transmitter, with the status of each sensor
being assigned to one bit of a frame. As many or as few frames as needed are
assigned to each board. If there are eight sensors or less connected to a board,
then only one frame will be needed.
A frame is sent onto the serial sensor data bus that also carries frames of sensor
state data from the other two MHS Interface boards. The sequence in which the
frames are transmitted is determined by the master serial transmitter on the Stepper/Sensor board, which sends commands and a synchronizing clock signal to
the serial transmitters on the interface boards via the serial sensor data
da ta bus. Each
interface board is assigned unique time slots in which to transmit their frames of
data. From the output magazine handler interface board (last device in the serial
communications path), the serial data stream is sent via the backplane to the sensor logic, which strips out the sensor state data and makes them available to the
stepper controller logic, CPU2 (servo CPU), and I/O board through the VME bus.
Figure 4-6 shows the serial communications path.
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-5
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Fiber
Optic
Sensor
Amp
Photo
Sensor
Output
Serial
Data
Diode GND +5V GND
Voltage
Serial
Serial Data
Transmitter
Serial Communications
Path (Figure 4-4)
Output
+12V
GND
MHS Interface
PC Board
Power Cable
Serial Data
+12V
+5V
GND
Backplane Board
Serial Sensor
Input/Serial
Interface Control
Sensor Data Bits
(SENB1 - SEN B53)
Stepper/Sensor
Board
CPU2
I/O & Temp.
Controller
Board
Fi g ure 4-3
4-3 S ensor Data
Data Input to Control
Control S ys te
tem
m
4-6
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
4.2.
4.2.4
4
DM
DMHS
HS Ba
Back
ckpl
plan
ane
e As
Asse
semb
mbly
ly
The DMHS Backplane circuit board assembly (P/N:08888-4000-000-xx) (see Figure 4-4)
4-4) is attached to the rear of the upper card rack assembly. It interconnects
all MHS related circuit boards assemblies in the upper card rack, supplies operating power to the MHS related circuit boards, and provides connection points for
external equipment. Signals transmitted through the backplane include:
•
Ste
Stepper
pper Control
Controller
ler Board
Board c
connecte
onnected
d to backpla
backplane
ne are communicated
communicated via host
host
ethernet connection (from integrated magnetics transformer).
•
Diffe
Differentiat
rentiate
e pair for the LVDS
LVDS is assigne
assigned
d for the individual
individual 4 channel
channel of motor
motor
serial bus and indexer/solenoid communication.
•
Single RJ45 connec
connector
tor provides
provides connection
connection for th
the
e sensor
sensor bus
bus connecting
connecting
between the individual intermediate board and the stepper controller board.
•
Fan spe
speed
ed signal
signal is routed to both
both the s
stepper
tepper controller
controller an
and
d the indexer
indexer/sole/solenoid board to detect fan failure condition.
•
To distr
distribute
ibute all
all signal,
signal, power
power and driver
driver to the
the indi
individual
vidual interm
intermediate
ediate b
board.
oard.
•
Interco
Interconnect
nnect for parallel
parallel sensors
sensors that is conn
connected
ected to stepper
stepper co
controlle
ntrollerr board.
board.
•
Provide
Provide ttest
est point
point for
for DMHS
DMHS supp
supply
ly moni
monitori
toring.
ng.
The backplane board requires no preventive maintenance and should require no
other maintenance action during the life of the machine. In the event of a malfunction traced to the backplane, the board should be replaced. No attempt should be
made to repair the board.
Fig ure 4-4
4-4 DMHS Backplane Board P/N 08888-4000-000-xxx,, Major C omponents
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-7
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.
4.3
3
Su
Subs
bsys
yste
tem/
m/Bo
Boar
ard
d Desc
Descri
ript
ptio
ions
ns
4.
4.3.
3.1
1
Circ
Circui
uitt Bo
Boar
ard
d Lo
Loca
cati
tion
ons
s
Circuit board assembly locations within the card rack assembly are shown in Figure 4-7 and the boards are identified in Table 4-1
4-1.. Any circuit board may be
located by noting its slot number in the appropriate table, then finding the circuit
board assembly with that slot number in Figure 4-7
4-7.. Locations of the MHS interface circuit boards and the solid–state relay circuit board are shown in Figure 4-8
For more information concerning the card rack circuit board assemblies, the card
rack, and other control system assemblies, refer to IConn Maintenance Manual.
NOTE: All circuit board assemblies are considered Field Replaceable Units
(FRUs). Refer to paragraphs 4.3.3 through 4.3.5 for circuit board
replacement procedures.
Fiber
Optic
Sensor
Amp
Photo
Sensor
Output
Serial
Data
Diode GND +5V GND
Voltage
Serial
Serial Data
Transmitter
Serial Communications
Path (Figure 4-4)
Output
+12V
GND
MHS Interface
PC Board
Power Cable
Serial Data
+12V
+5V
GND
Backplane Board
Serial Sensor
Input/Serial
Interface Control
Sensor Data Bits
(SENB1 - SEN B53)
Stepper/Sensor
Board
CPU2
I/O & Temp.
Controller
Board
Fi g ure 4-5
4-5 S ensor Data
Data Input to Control
Control S ys te
tem
m
4-8
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Input MH
Sensor States
O u tp u t M H
Sensor States
A
Serial
Data
Transmitter
J2
J20A*
J3
J20A*
J3
J20B*
J2
J20B*
Serial
Data
Transmitter
Workholder
Sensor States
Input
Magazine
Handler
Input
Magazine
Magazine
Intermediate
Board
Handler Interface
08888-4116-000-xx
08001--4116--000--xx
Output Magazine
Handler Interface
08001--4116--000--xx
B
J2
J1
Serial
Data
Transmitter
C
Indexer
Intermediate
Indexer
Interface Board
08888-4202-000-xx
08002--4207--000--xx
J16
J45
Sensor Cables
08088 --- 3027 --- 000 --- 00
A: 08888-1082-000-18
08088 --- 3027 --- 000 --- 03
B: 08888-1082-000-17
C: 08888-1082-000-12
08088 --- 3027 --- 000 --- 00
Backplane
DMHS
Backplane
08888-4000-000-xx
08002--4191--000--xx
Fi g ure 4-6
4-6 S erial C om
ommu
municat
nications
ions P ath
98888-0000-JB3-01
Electronics
4-9
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
(Top Level)
Table 4-1 DMHS Circuit Boards, 3U Circuit Board (Top
Slot No.
Part Number
PCB Assembly Name
Function/Reference
B
08888-4000-000-xx
DMHS Backplane Board
Controls, drives, and monitors the
indexer and solenoid operations
1
08888-4032-000-xx
DMHS Indexer/ Solenoid
Board
Monitor and controls operations
on solenoid driver circuits, solenoid valves, Puller Assembly
Assembly,,
Index Assembly, DMHS fan monitor and Stepper Controller Board
Communication. See paragraph
4.3.2.1..
4.3.2.1
2
08888-4166-000-xx
DMHS Hex-half Stepper
Driver Board
Each board drives six half stepper
motors in the Input Z Tower
Assembly,, Input Tray Assembly .
Assembly
Drives the Input Z, Input Gripper,
Input Y,
Y, Heat Block Motor. See
paragraph 4.3.2.2.
4.3.2.2.
3
08888-4300-000-xx
DMHS St
Stepper Co
Controller
Board
Controls all MHS Stepper motors.
See paragraph 4.3.2.3
4.3.2.3..
4
08888-4166-000-xx
DMHS Hex-half Stepper
Driver Board
Drives the Output Z, Output Gripper, Output Y,
Y, Input and Output
Tray,, Motors. See paragraph
Tray
4.3.2.2
4.3.2.2..
5
08888-4214-000-xx
DMHS Micro/Tri-Half Stepper Driver Board
Drives the Indexer X Motor. See
paragraph 4.3.2.4.
4.3.2.4.
4-10
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Air Filter
2x Cooling Fans
Upper Deck 3U
Circuit Boards
1
3
5
2
4
Cable Routing Track
A
Lower Deck 6U
Circuit Boards
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
2x Exhaust Fans
1
s
d
r
a
o
B
k
c
e
D
r
e
p
p
U
s
d
r
a
o
B
k
c
e
D
r
e
w
o
L
k
s
i
D
h
s
X
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
2
3
4
5
d
i
o
x
n
x
le
o rd 0
S a 0
/r o -0
e B 2
x r 3
0
e
4
d e
v
i
In r 8
D 8
8
8
S
H
0
M
D
r
e
p
x
p
x
e
t rd -0
S a 0
fl
0
a o
6
B
H r 6
1
x e
e v
ir -4
8
H
D 8
8
8
S
H
0
M
D
r
lle
o
x
tr
x
n
0
o
0
C
0
r rd 0
e a 0
p o 3
p
4
te B 8
S
8
8
S
8
H
0
M
D
r
e
x
p
x
p
te rd 0
0
S
0
fl a
o
a B 6
6
H r 1
x e 4
e iv 8
H r 8
D 8
8
0
S
H
M
D
r
e
p
x
x
p
e
t d 0
S ra 0
0
fl o
a B 4
H r 1
2
4
ir- e
v
T ri 8
8
S D 8
8
H
0
M
D
x
x
0
0
0
7
2
3
4
1
0
d
r
a
o
B
r
to
a
r
e
n
e
G
ic
n
rd x
a
o -x
B 0
0
re -0
u
t 0
1
ra 0
e 4
p -8
2
m8
rd
a
o x
B x
r e 0
0
iv
r 0
D 5
6
p 1
m4
a
l 8
8
C 8
U
P
C
in
a
M
t
lo
S
e
r
a
p
S
x
x
0
0
0
2
0
3
4
8
8
x
rd -x
a 0
o 0
B -0
U 1
P 6
C 2
4
o -1
v
r 0
0
t
lo
S
e
r
a
p
S
t
lo
S
re
a
p
S
a
l
F
A
0
8
1
1
0
8
0
1
2
o
s
a
tlr
U
3
8
8
0
e 8
S 0
4
e 8
T 0
/IO
5
6
e 8
ir 0
W
7
8
Fig ure 44-7
7 C ard Rack Circuit B oa
oard
rd As s em
embl
blyy Locat
Locations
98888-0000-JB3-01
Electronics
4-11
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Input Magazine
Intermediate Board
Input Z Tower Assembly
Indexer Intermediate Board
(without PCB cover)
Output Magazine
Intermediate Board
Output Z Tower Assembly
J Boat Indexer Assembly
Fi g ure 4-8
4-8 MHS Inte
Interfa
rface
ce Location
Locationss
4-12
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Power Supply
Air Filter
Hinged Card Cage
(Out position)
DMHS Back Plane
Board
Main Back Plane
Board
General Servicing Area
at Lower Console
Console Com
Components
ponents
Cooling Fans (2x)
Lower Console Frame
(Covers Removed)
Upper Deck DMHS Circuit Boards
Hinged Card Cage Cover
PC-on-a-Board Assembly
Flash Disk
Lower Deck Circuit Boards
Exhaust Fans (2x)
Lower Console
owerr S upp
upply
ly Locat
Locations
ions
Fi g ure 4-9 P owe
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-13
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.
4.3.
3.2
2
Circ
Circui
uitt Bo
Boar
ard
d As
Asse
semb
mbli
lies
es
4.3.
4.3.2.
2.1
1
DMHS
DMHS Inde
Indexe
xer/
r/So
Sole
leno
noid
id Dr
Driv
iver
er Bo
Boar
ard
d
Table 4-2
4- 2 provides a summary of the functions, controls/indicators, and test points
p oints
of the Indexer/Solenoid driver board. In addition, a listing of pertinent references
is included in the table.
Table 4-2 DMHS Indexer/Solenoid
Indexer/ Solenoid Driver Board, P/N 08888-4032-000-xx
Functions
Controls/Indicators
Test Points
Reference
•
Co
Cont
ntain
ains
s six
sixtee
teen
n (16)
(16) s
sol
oleno
enoid
id
driver circuits. Each can be operated individually by a signal from
the DMHS Stepper Controller
Board. As a group, the drivers are
enabled or disabled by a signal
from the I/O board.
Ea
Each
ch d
driv
river
er cir
circu
cuit
it h
has
as ove
overc
rcur
urren
rentt
detection circuit and back EMF protection.
•
Bo
Boar
ard
d ge
gene
nera
rate
tes
s a fau
fault
lt sig
signal
nal if
any driver indicates an overcurrent
condition.
TP1: DGND
TP1:
TP2:: AGND
TP2
TP3:: GRIP3_VREF
TP3
TP4:: GRIP1_VREF
TP4
TP5:: PULLER_VREF
TP5
TP6:: ENDCODER_A
TP6
TP7:: Index Gripper
TP7
Control Hall Sensor
Input Signal.
TP8:Spare
TP8
:Spare PWM current control driver 2 reference voltage.
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-10
•
The board consist of two
seven-segment LEDs for
error code displaying
and board diagnostic.
The function of the LED
display should be
changeable through host
command.
•
Co
Cont
ntain
ain si
six
x (6)
(6) chan
channe
nels
ls of
of curr
curren
enttcontrollable drivers (48V, 0-2A) for
•
solenoid/DC motor actuator control.
•
Co
Cont
ntain
ain si
sixt
xtee
een
n (1
(16)
6) c
cha
hann
nnel
els
s of
ON/OFF solenoid drivers (12V,
(12V, 0700mA) with external OT protection.
•
Co
Cont
ntain
ain ei
eigh
ghtt (8)
(8) ch
chann
annel
els
s of ON/
ON/
OFF solenoid drivers (optional,
12V,, 0-400mA)
12V
0-400mA )
•
Co
Cont
ntai
ain
n mult
multip
iple
le jjam
am d
dete
etect
ct int
intererface and handling circuit.
•
Co
Cont
ntain
ain two
two (2
(2)) chan
channe
nels
ls of D
DMH
MHS
S
fan monitor
•
FAULT LED
(RED):
(RED
): Goes
Goes on
if overcu
overcurren
rrentt
TP9
detecte
detected
d or if board
board is TP9:Spare
rent :Spare
control PWM
drivercur4 refdisabled.
erence voltage.
ENABLE LED
(GRN): On when
board enable signal
is active.
DS2 - LED:
LED: Green indicates board has power
up.
Test
Points
TP10
To J4 DMHS
Back Plane
TP1
Fig ure 4-10
4-10 DMHS Indexer/Solenoid Driver Board, P/N 08888-403
08888-4032-000-x
2-000-xx
x,,
Major C omponents
4-14
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
4.
4.3.
3.2.
2.2
2
DMHS
DMHS Hex
Hex Hal
Halff Ste
Stepp
pper
er Dri
Drive
verr Circ
Circui
uitt Boar
Boards
ds
4- 3 provides a summary of the functions, controls/indicators, and test points
Table 4-3
of the DMHS Hex Half Stepper
Stepper Driver Circuit Board. There are two (2) DMHS
Hex Half Stepper Driver Circuit Boards present in the DMHS card rack
r ack assembly.
assembly.
In addition, a listing of pertinent references is included in the table.
Table 4-3 DMHS Hex Half-Stepper Drivers, P/N 08888-4166-00008888-4166-000-xx
xx
Functions
•
Dr
Driv
ives
es six
six h
hal
alff s
ste
tepp
pper
er •
motors under control
of the DMHS Stepper
Controller Board by
motor serial bus.
•
Mo
Moto
torr c
cur
urre
rent
nt and
and sup
sup-ply voltage monitored •
for each driver.
drive r. Stepper fault is returned to
stepper controller and
driver is disabled if
overcurrent detected
or supply voltage lost.
•
Each
Ea
chpeak
driv
driver
errun
is se
set
t ffor
or 2
Amp
current
•
Controls/Indicators
Test Points
D14 - LED: Red indicates communication
error occurs with Stepper Controller Board.
LED - OFF indicates
communication enable.
TP1: +48V DRV
TP1:
TP2:: PGND DRV
TP2
TP3:: +5V DRV
TP3
TP4:: DGND DRV
TP4
TP5:: STEP CLOCK SIGNAL
TP5
of:
1) Input Y-axis motor when
connected to J2 of DMHS
backplane.
2) Output Y-axis motor when
connected to J5 of DMHS
backplane.
LED1 to LED5 and
LED12 (six Half-stepper
motors): Each LED represent a driver motor.
Light turns red if over
current or fault occur.
Light turns green when
signal is active. LED
unlit if over-temperature
condition occurs or
driver is disabled.
LED6 (Power Supply):
Light turns red if fuse
blow or fault occur. Light
turns green indicates
high voltage enable.
LED unlit if power supply is disabled.
TP6: STEP CLOCK SIGNAL
TP6:
of Heat Block motor when
connected to J2 of DMHS
backplane.
TP7: STEP CLOCK SIGNAL
TP7:
of Clamp motor when connected to J2 of DMHS backplane.
J1 pin 6: STEP CLOCK SIGNAL of:
1) Index Theta motor when
connected to J2 of DMHS
backplane.
2)
Eject Theta
motor
when
connected
to J5
of DMHS
backplane.
Reference
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-11
98888-0000-JB3-01
Electronics
4-15
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
To J5 DMHS
Back Plane
TP8
Test
Points
TP1
Fi g ure 4-1
4-11 DMHS Hex Half-Stepper Drivers, P/N 08888-4166-000-xx,
Major C omponents
4-16
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
4.
4.3.
3.2.
2.3
3
DMHS
DMHS Stepp
tepper
er Co
Cont
ntro
roll
ller
er Bo
Boar
ard
d
Table 4-4
4- 4 provides a summary of the functions, controls/indicators, and test points
of the DMHS Stepper Controller board. In addition, a listing of pertinent references is included in the table.
Table 4-4 DMHS Stepper Controller
Controll er Board, P/N 08888-4300-000-xx
Functions
Controls/Indicators
•
Rece
Receiv
ives
es sy
sync
nchr
hron
onou
ous
s
serial sensor data from
sensors interface boards.
•
•
Dist
Distri
ribu
bute
tes
s sens
sensor
or sta
state
te
through ethernet bus.
•
•
In
Inte
terf
rfac
ace
e for
for com
commu
muni
nica
ca-tions with index board digital signal processor (DSP).
•
Moni
Monito
tors
rs MHS
MHS sen
senso
sorr data
data •
and stepper fault signals
•
from stepper drivers.
•
Send
Send st
step
eppe
perr mot
motor
or
motion commands to
DMHS hex half stepper
driver boards, DMHS
Indexer/Solenoid driver
board and DMHS micro-tri
half stepper driver board
by motor serial bus. Can
control up to 16 stepper
motors.
•
Se
Send
nds
s sol
solen
enoi
oid
d con
contr
trol
ol
data from host to indexer/
solenoid board in JDC
command. Controls 24
solenoids.
•
•
•
Test Points
TP1: \REQA - PCI bus
TP1:
request A (low active)
TP2:: \REQB - PCI bus
TP2
request B (low active)
D1 - LED (Yellow): Light
TP3:: \GNTA - PCI bus
TP3
blinking indicates signal
present in network traffic; grant A (low active)
light unlit indicates no net- TP4
TP4:: \GNTB - PCI bus
work present.
grant B (low active)
D2 - LED (Green): Light
TP5:: GND
TP5
indicates FPGA is ready. TP6
TP6:: PGND
TP7:: SFRAME
TP7
D3 - LED (Green): Light
TP8:: SLOCK
indicates motor serial bus TP8
is active.
TP9:: MBTEST0
TP9
TP10:: MBTEST1
TP10
D4 - LED (Red): Light
TP11:: MBTEST2
TP11
indicates board error.
TP12:: MBTEST3
TP12
W1 - Jumper: Ethernet
MAC address (optional).
When it is shorted,
another MDM (Material
handling Distributed Module board) is supported.
RESET (S1)
(S1):: Push button switch. Resets the
stepper control CPU.
W2 - Jumper: FPGA flash
programming. During SPI
flashing programming,
this jumper is shorted.
Reference
Fig ure 4-12
4-12 DMHS Stepper Controller Board, P/N 08888-4300-000-xx ,
Major C omponents
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-17
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.3.
4.3.2.
2.4
4
DMHS
DMHS Mic
Micro
ro/T
/Tri
ri Hal
Halff Ste
Stepp
pper
er Dri
Drive
verr Boar
Board
d
Table 4-5
4- 5 provides a summary of the functions, controls/indicators, and test points
p oints
of the Indexer Interface Circuit Board. In addition, a listing of pertinent references
is included in the table.
Table 4-5 DMHS Micro/Tri Half Stepper Board, P/N 08888-4214-000-xx
Functions
• Drives
Drives th
the
e workhol
workholder
der
indexer microstepper
motor under control of the
Stepper Controller Board.
Controls/Indicators
•
• Motor current and supply
supply
voltage monitored for each
driver. Stepper fault is
returned to stepper control- •
ler and driver is disabled of
overcurrent detected, supply voltage lost or overtemperature.
• Provide
Provide steppe
stepperr pulse
signal to Index board for
jam detection.
• Control
Control a microstepper
microstepper
motor and three (3) hex
half stepper motor.
•
Test Points
TP1: +48V
TP1:
TP2:: PGND DRV
TP2
TP3:: +5V DRV
TP3
TP4:: DGND DRV
TP4
TP5:: PROG1(CommuTP5
nication error signal)
TP6:: PROG2 (Signal
TP6
LED1 (Indexer Microstepper
from Indexer Micromotor): Light turns red if overstepper Motor)
current or fault occur, motor
TP7:: PROG3 (Signal
TP7
stop. Light turns green when sigfrom Front Rail Motor)
nal is active. LED unlit if over6: STEP
temperature condition occurs or J1pin 6:
CLOCK
SIGNAL of
driver is disabled.
Rear Rail Motor.
LED2
(48V
Power
Supply):
Light
turns red
if fuse
blow
or fault
D14 (Communication Indicator
LED):: Red indicates communiLED)
cation error occurs from DMHS
Stepper Controller board (K&S
P/N: 08888-4300-000-XX). Light
unlit indicates communication is
in operation.
occur. Light turns green indicates high voltage enable. LED
unlit if power supply is disabled
•
LED3 (Front Rail motor): Light
turns red if over-current or fault
occur, motor stop. Light turns
green when signal is active. LED
unlit if over-temperature condition occurs or driver is disabled.
•
LED4 (Rear Rail motor): Light
turns red if over-current or fault
occur, motor stop. Light turns
green when signal is active. LED
unlit if over-temperature condition occurs or driver is disabled.
•
LED5 (Programmable Focus
motor): Light turns red if overcurrent or fault occur, motor
stop. Light turns green when signal is active. LED unlit if overtemperature condition occurs or
driver is disabled.
Reference
4-18
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Fi g ure 4-13
4-13 DMHS Micro/
Micro/Tri
Tri Ha
H alf S te
teppe
pperr D river B oa
oard,
rd, Major
Major C om
ompone
ponent
ntss
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-19
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.3.2.
4.3
.2.5
5
Magazi
Magazine
ne Handl
Handler
er Inter
Interme
media
diate
te Board
Board (088
(0888888-41
4116
16-00
-0000-xx)
xx)
The function of the Magazine Handler Intermediate board is listed in Table 4-6 .
The circuit board layout and cable connections are shown in Figure 4-14
4-14..
Figure 4-16 Illustrates cable and sensor connections for the Gripper Interface Circuit Board.
Table 4-6 Magazine Handler Intermediate Board, P/N 08888-4116-000-xx
Functions
Controls/Indicators
Reference
•
Provides connections for magazine handler motors, sensors
and Z axis brake.
W1: Input Magazine Handler
W2: Output Magazine Handler
•
Has
Has c
cir
ircu
cuit
itry
ry to lo
load
ad se
sens
nsor
or
state data onto the synchronous
serial sensor data bus.
NOTE: Remove jumper on W1 will set the
board for use on the Input Magazine Handler.
Figure 4-14,
4-14,
NOTE: Remove jumper on W2 will set the
board for use on the
t he Output Magazine Handler.
J13, Tray Sensor
J14, Y Axis Home Sensor
J19, Z Brake Solenoid
J16, Spare
J8, In Used
Jumper W2: Output
Magazine Handler
J4, Z Axis Motor
Jumper W1: Input
Magazine Handler
J9, Z Axis Home
Sensor
J15, Spare
J7, In Used
J12, Spare
J18, Spare
J10, Magazine Gripper
Home Sensor
J17, Bottom Paw
Home Sensor
J11, Top Paw Sensor
J5, Axis
Magazine
MotorGripper
J2, MHS Sensor
Bus Cable
J1, Backplane
Magazine Cable
J3, MHS Sensor
Bus Cable
Fi g ure 4-14 Ma
Magg azine Handler
Handler Intermediat
Intermediate
e B oa
oard
rd L ayout, Major
Major C omp
omponent
onentss
4-20
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
4.3.2.
4.3
.2.6
6
Indexe
Indexerr Interm
Intermedi
ediate
ate Board
Board (08888
(08888-42
-422626-000
000-xx
-xx))
Table 4-7 shows the connection points of the cable and sensor assemblies on the
Indexer Intermediate Board. The connection points receive interface signals from
the DMHS Backplane board through J2. The circuit board layout and cable connections are shown in Figure 4-15.
4-15.
Table 4-7 Indexer Intermediate Board, P/N 08888-4226-000-xx
08888-4226-000- xx
Functions
•
Prov
Provid
ides
es c
con
onne
nect
ctio
ions
ns for
for
workholder motors, sensors
and flex cable assembly.
•
Has
Has c
cir
ircu
cuit
itry
ry to lo
load
ad sens
sensor
or
state data onto the synchronous serial sensor data bus.
•
Has
Has c
cir
ircu
cuit
itry
ry to pro
proces
cess
s jam
jam
detector signal.
•
Two ch
chan
anne
nels
ls of hi
high
gh curre
current
nt
solenoid for driving tray
motor.
J10, Preheat Motor
Home Sensor Cable
Test Points
Jumper W1 - W3: Not connected. Use for new option.
None
Reference
Figure 4-15
4-15,,
J3, Puller Flex
Assembly Cable
Cable
J19, J Boat Present
Sensor Cable (input)
J14, In/Out Tray
Extension Cable
•
Controls/Indicators
J9, X Sensor
Cable
J23, Gripper Flex
Assembly Cable
Cable
J21, Indexer
Motor Cable
J25, Grip Air Press
Assembly Cable
Cable
J6, Solenoid Cable
J4 Preheat J1, Indexer
J15, In/Out Tray
Motor Cable DMHS Cable Extension Cable
J2, MHS Sensor
Bus Cable
J20, J Boat Present
Sensor Cable (output)
Fi g ure 4-15
4-15 Indexer Intermedia
Intermediate
te B oa
oard
rd Connection P oints
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-21
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.
4.3.
3.2.
2.7
7
Maga
Magazi
zine
ne Hand
Handle
lerr Con
Conne
nect
ctio
ions
ns
Figure 4-16 shows the connection points for cable and sensor assemblies for the
input and output magazine handlers. The Z Tower
Tower Assembly and Tray Assemblies
connections are controlled by the Magazine Handler Intermediate Board and
Indexer Intermediate Board. The connection points receive interface signals from
the DMHS Backplane board through MHS Sensor Bus cable.
Fi g ure 4-16
4-16 Input or Output Interconnect B oa
oards
rds , Cable
Cable and S ens
ensor
or Connections
4-22
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
4.3.3
4.3
.3
Rep
Replac
lace
eD
DMHS
MHS Car
Card
dR
Rack
ack Cir
Circui
cuitt B
Boar
oards
ds
Purpose
•
Repl
Replace
ace a ci
circu
rcuit
it board
board in
in the DMHS
DMHS card
card rac
rack
k assemb
assembly
ly (see
(see Figure 4-7
4-7).
).
Tools/ Equipment
•
Scre
Screw
w driver
drivers
s (for
(for slotte
slotted
d or Phill
Phillip
ips
s head
head screws
screws))
•
ESD P
Prot
rotec
ecti
tive
ve Equi
Equipme
pment
nt/M
/Mate
ateri
rial
als
s
CAUTION: OBEY ALL EST
ESTABLISHED
ABLISHED ESD PROCEDURES WHEN HANDLING OR
STORING CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLIES.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE MACHINE POWER IS OFF BEFORE REMOVING ANY CIRCUIT BOARD FROM THE CARD RACK. WAIT AT LEAST FIVE (5) SECONDS AFTER SWITCHING OFF POWER AT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER
BEFORE PULLING ANY CIRCUIT BOARD OUT OF THE RACK. THIS
DELAY
DELA
Y ALLOWS ANY RES
RESIDUAL
IDUAL CHARGE IN THE POWER SUPPLY
SUPPLY
TO DISSIPATE.
CAUTION: PC BOARDS MUST BE INSTALLED IN THE CORRECT SLOT IN THE
RACK,
THESLOT,
LABELTHE
ON BOARD
THE CARD
DOOR.
IF A BOARD
IN THE PER
WRONG
OR RACK
OTHER
MACHINE
EQUIP- IS
MENT MAY BE DAMAGED WHEN POWER IS APPLIED
Procedure
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power and wait for five [5] minutes to
discharge all hazardous voltages. Open the front door of the lower console.
B. Remove circuit
circuit board
board assembly
assembly from
from the DMHS c
card
ard rack.
1. Loosen the
the captive
captive screw on the
the cardcage
cardcage door and open
open the door.
door. Locate
the DMHS card rack at the top level of the card cage assembly.
2. Using each
each hand to hold
hold on to the card
card puller on tthe
he top and bottom
bottom edge
of the card, eject the card by pulling out the card puller.
3. Immediately
Immediately place
place the circuit
circuit board assembly
assembly in an ESD–pr
ESD–protectiv
otective
e enclosure.
C. Insta
Installll the replacement
replacement circuit
circuit board in the
the card rack.
1. Slide the circuit
circuit board
board into its slot
slot in the card rack un
until
til connec
connector(s)
tor(s) se
seats
ats in
mating connector(s) on the DMHS backplane board.
2. Press firmly
firmly on the top and
and bottom
bottom edges of the card,
card, wit
with
h equal pre
pressure
ssure
applied until the board connector(s) fully seats in the backplane connector(s). Do not press against connectors, switches, or indicators on the
board edge (if any).
3. Close the
the card cage door
door and tighten
tighten the captive
captive screw
screw..
D. Close th
the
e lower console
console front
front door.
door.
E. Turn
Turn on machine power
power.. Star
Startt machine and verify
verify that the machine operates
operates
normally.
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-23
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.3.4
Repla
Replacing
cing the Input/
Input/Outpu
Outputt M
Magaz
agazine
ine Hand
Handler
ler Inter
Intermedia
mediate
te Boar
Board
d
Purpose
•
Replace
Replace the input/output
input/output magazine
magazine han
handler
dler intermediate
intermediate circuit
circuit boa
board
rd as
assemsembly mounted at the rear of the Input/output Z Tower Assembly. (see Figure 417).
17
).
Tools/ Equipment
•
Hex wrench set
•
ESD Prote
Protect
ctiv
ive
e Equip
Equipme
ment
nt/M
/Mat
ateri
erial
als
s
•
Magazi
Magazine
ne Ha
Handle
ndlerr Interm
Intermedi
ediate
ate Boar
Board
d Assemb
Assembly
ly,,
P/N 08888-4116-000-xx
Procedure
A. Press [MOTOR STOP]. Turn off machine power.
CAUTION: OBEY ALL ESTABLISHED
ESTABLISHED ESD PROCEDURES WHEN HANDLING OR
STORING CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLIES.
B. Remove the mag
magazine
azine handler
handler intermediate
intermediate board from
from the rear of the input or
output Z Tower assembly.
1. Remove input/outp
input/output
ut tower cover
cover,, tower flap cover
cover and Y axis motor cover
cover..
2. Locate the magazine
magazine handler
handler intermediat
intermediate
e board at the rear of the Z Tower
Tower
Assembly (Z Tower
Tower machining structure).
3. Disconnect
Disconnect senso
sensors,
rs, motors, and
and cables from the Z Tower
Tower Asse
Assembly
mbly connected to the magazine handler intermediate board (mounted
(mount ed at the rear of
the Z Tower Assembly). (see Figure 4-16 for connecto
connectorr location).
location).
a. MHS Sensor
Sensor Bus cables,
cables, conn
connectors
ectors J2 and J3
b. Z Brake
Brake Motor
Motor cable,
cable, connec
connector
tor J1
J19
9
c. Z M
Moto
otorr cab
cable
le,, J4
J4
d. Z Home
Home S
Senso
ensorr ca
cable
ble,, J9
e. G Mot
Motor
or cab
cable
le,, J
J5
5
f. G Hom
Home
e Sens
Sensor
or ca
cabl
ble,
e, J10
J10
g. Touch Home Sensor cable, J1
J11
1
h. Tray
Tray S
Sens
ensor
or cabl
cable,
e, J13
J13
i. Grip
Grip Home
Home Senso
Sensorr c
cab
able
le,, J
J17
17
j.
Y Home Sensor cable, J14
k. Y M
Mot
otor
or cabl
cable,
e, J1
4. Remove four
four (4) SHCSs
SHCSs that secure
secure the board
board to the four
four (4) hex st
standof
andoffs
fs
on the rear of the input/output
inp ut/output Z Tower assembly.
assembly.
5. Remove the
the board from
from the machine
machine and store
store it in an ESD–protecti
ESD–protective
ve
enclosure.
4-24
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
.
Z Tower Assembly
Standoffs
(4 places)
Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board
SHCS
(4 places)
NOTE: a) Input/output Magazine Handler Intermediate Boards are mounted
with the component side facing the rear of the machine. b) See Figure 416 for magazine handler intermediate board connector locations and reference designators. Reference designators are also printed on the solder side of the board. c) See Figure 4-16 for part numbers of cables,
sensors, and motors connected to board.
Fi g ure 4-17 R epl
epla
ace Input or
or Output Ma
Magg azine Handle
Handlerr Inte
I ntermedia
rmediate
te B oa
oard
rd (Input
(I nput S ide)
C. Insta
Installll the replacement
replacement board on the input or output maga
magazine
zine handler.
handler.
1. Position
Position the board on the rear of the Z Tower
Tower machining
machining structure
structure with its
its
component side facing the rear of the machine. Place the board against the
standoff on the rear of the Z Tower machining structure.
2. Install
Install four (4) SHCSs through
through the board
board and into the standoff
standoffs
s to secure
the board
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-25
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
3. Connect
Connect sensors,
sensors, motors, and cables
cables to the following
following board co
connector
nnectors:
s:
•
J1:
J1: Y Motor
Motor Cab
Cable
le,, 08888
08888-1
-107
070-0
0-00000-xx
xx
•
J2 and
and J3: MHS
MHS Senso
Sensorr Bus Cable
Cables,
s, 08
08888
888-10
-1082-0
82-00000-xx
xx
•
J4:
J4: Z Motor
Motor Cab
Cable
le,, 0888
08888-1
8-109
0933-00
000-x
0-xx
x
•
J5:
J5: G Moto
Motorr Cable
Cable,, 0888
088888-108
10811-000
000-00
-00
•
J9: Z Home
Home S
Sens
ensor
or Cabl
Cable,
e, 0341
03411-1
1-1031
031-000
-000-19
-19
•
J10:
J10: G Home
Home Senso
Sensorr Cable
Cable,, 0341
03411-10311-1031-001
001-17
-17
•
J11:
J11: Touc
Touch
h Home Sensor
Sensor Cable
Cable,, 03411-1
03411-1031
031-00
-001-21
1-21
•
J13:
J13: T
Tray
ray Sensor
Sensor Cable,
Cable, 0341
03411-1031
1-1031-001
-001-18
-18
•
J14:
J14: Y Home
Home Senso
Sensorr Cable,
Cable, 0341
03411-1
1-1031
031-00
-001-23
1-23
•
J17:
J17: Grip
Grip Home
Home Sen
Sensor
sor Cabl
Cable,
e, 0341
03411-1
1-1031
031-00
-001-20
1-20
•
J19:
J19: Z Brake
Brake Moto
Motorr Cabl
Cable,
e, 0888
08888-10
8-1085-0
85-000-x
00-xx
x
4. Setup for board
board use on the
the Input Magazine
Magazine Handler
Handler and O
Output
utput Magazine
Magazine
Handler.
a. For Magazine
Magazine Handler
Handler Intermediate
Intermediate board install
installed
ed on the Input Mag
Magaazine Handler, remove the jumper on W1. This will set the board for use
on the Input magazine handler.
b. For Magazine
Magazine Handler
Handler Intermediate
Intermediate board install
installed
ed on the Output Ma
Maggazine Handler, remove the jumper on W2. This will set the board for use
on the Output magazine handler.
D. Mount the input/output tower cover, tower
tower flap cover and Y motor cover.
cover.
E. Turn on machine powe
power.
r. Verify
Verify that the magazine handler
handler operates prope
properly
rly
during MHS initialization.
4.3.5
4.3
.5
Rep
Replac
lace
e Ind
Indexe
exerr Inte
Interme
rmedia
diate
te Boa
Board
rd
Replace the indexer intermediate circuit board assembly installed in the front of
the J boat indexer assembly.
Tools/ Equipment
•
Hex wrench set
•
Open
Open–e
–end
nd wre
renc
nch
h set
set
•
ESD Prote
Protect
ctiv
ive
e Equip
Equipme
ment
nt/M
/Mat
ateri
erial
als
s
•
Indexer
Indexer Inter
Intermed
mediat
iate
e Board Assemb
Assembly
ly,, P/N 08888-42
08888-422626-000
000-xx
-xx
CAUTION: OBEY ALL ESTABLISHED
ESTABLISHED ESD PROCEDURES WHEN HANDLING OR
STORING CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLIES.
Procedure
A. Press [MOTOR STOP] and turn off machine power.
B. Loosen the tw
two
o captive screws
screws that attach
attach the PCB cover to the in
indexer
dexer base.
base.
C. Remove the PC
PCB
B cover to access the
the indexer intermedia
intermediate
te board.
D. Make sure that the elect
electrical
rical cables
cables to the indexer intermediate
intermediate board
board are correctly identified. If not, make a note of the connection.
E. Disconn
Disconnect
ect the following
following electrical
electrical cables from the indexer intermedia
intermediate
te board
at the front of the indexer assembly. (See Figure 4-15 for connector locations
on the intermediate board.)
•
DM
DMHS
HS Ind
Index
exer
er cabl
cable
e from
from conn
connect
ector
or J
J1
1
•
MH
MHS
S Bus
Bus Se
Sens
nsor
or Cab
Cable
le fro
from
m conn
connect
ector
or J
J2
2
•
Sol
Solen
enoi
oid
d Cab
Cable
le from
from con
conne
nect
ctor
or J6
J6
4-26
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
•
In
In/O
/Out
ut Tra
Tray
y Cabl
Cable
e from
from con
conne
nect
ctor
or J
J14
14
•
In
In/O
/Out
ut Tra
Tray
y Cabl
Cable
e from
from con
conne
nect
ctor
or J
J15
15
•
Grippe
Gripperr Flex
Flex C
Cabl
able
e Assem
Assembly
bly fro
from
m conne
connector
ctor J23
•
Puller
Puller Flex Cab
Cable
le Asse
Assembl
mbly
y fr
from
om conn
connect
ector
or J
J3
3
•
Gr
Grip
ip Air
Air Pre
Press
ss Ass
Assy
y fr
from
om con
conne
nect
ctor
or J
J25
25
•
Preheat
Preheat Motor
Motor Home
Home S
Sens
ensor
or Ca
Cable
ble fro
from
m connec
connector
tor J
J10
10
•
In
Inde
dexe
xerr Moto
Motorr Cable
Cable ffro
rom
m conn
connect
ector
or J
J21
21
•
Prehe
Preheat
at Mot
Motor
or Cabl
Cable
e from
from co
conn
nnec
ector
tor J
J4.
4.
•
See Thro
Through
ugh S
Sens
ensor
or Assem
Assembly
bly C
Cabl
able
e (X senso
sensor)
r) co
conne
nnecto
ctorr J9
•
J Boat
Boat Prese
Present
nt Senso
Sensorr Cable
Cable ((inp
input)
ut) con
connec
nector
tor J
J19
19
•
J Boat
Boat Prese
Present
nt Senso
Sensorr Cable
Cable (ou
(output
tput)) conne
connector
ctor J20
F. Remove the Indexer
Indexer Intermediate
Intermediate Board
Board from the J boat inde
indexer
xer assembly
assembly..
1. Remove the six
six M3 screws and washers
washers that attach
attach the Ind
Indexer
exer Inter
Intermedimediate board to the front of the indexer base (see Figure 4-18
4-18.)
.)
2. Remove
Remove the board from
from the indexer
indexer base and keep
keep it in an ESD–protective
ESD–protective
container.
G. Install the replacement indexer intermediate board on the workholder.
1. Put the indexer
indexer intermediate
intermediate board
board on the ffront
ront of the indexer
indexer ba
base.
se.
2. Attach
Attach the board with
with the screws
screws and washers
washers removed
removed before.
before.
3. Connect
Connect the electr
electrical
ical cables
cables to the indexer
indexer intermediate
intermediate board removed
removed
before. Refer to your notes.
J Boat Indexer Assembly
6 x M3 Screws
6x M3 Washers
Indexer Base
Indexer Intermediate Board
Fi g ure 4-18
4-18 R ep
epla
lace
ce Indexer
Indexer Interme
Intermedia
diate
te B oa
oard
rd (Fr ont View of
of J B oa
oatt Indexer As s em
embl
bly)
y)
H. Instal
Installl the PCB cover to the indexer base and tighte
tighten
n the two captive screws.
screws.
I. Tu
Turn
rn on machi
machine
ne po
powe
werr.
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-27
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.4
MHS Sensors
4.4.1
Sensor T
Ty
ypes
Three types of sensors are used on the MHS:
•
Refl
Reflec
ecti
tive
ve fi
fibe
berr o
opt
ptic
ic se
sens
nsor
ors
s
The reflective sensors trigger when light from the sensor fiber optic reflects
from a surface (in this case a leadframe) and returns to the fiber optic. These
sensors have amplifiers that must be adjusted for sensitivity by the user.
•
Optica
Opticall switch
switch sensor
sensors
s (photos
(photosens
ensors
ors))
Optical switch sensors mark positions for the axes of motion or indicate the
location of material in the MHS. A flag on the moving part of an axis, or on a
mechanism that can be displaced by a piece of material, interrupts the sensor
light beam which signals the control system.
•
Jam De
Detector
The jam detector on the index/tucker arm can sense the increased resistance
to carrier motion during indexing or ejection, which indicates that a carrier is
jammed. A signal from this sensor will stop the ejection and indicate an error.
The operator can then clear the jam at the output magazine. Components of
this sensor include two contact pins and a spring-loaded bar that electrically
connects
the pins
of the
index arm).
When theconnection
carrier is jammed,
bar
loses contact
with (part
the pins,
breaking
the electrical
betweenthe
them.
4-28
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
4.4.
4.4.2
2
Wo
Work
rkho
hold
lder
er Se
Sens
nsor
or Lo
Loca
cati
tion
ons
s
The locations of workholder sensors are shown in Figure 4-19
4-19..
Heat Block Home Sensor
Detail- Slider Assembly, Rear View
J Boat Present Sensor (Input)
Indexer Pin Left Sensor
(Hidden - not shown)
Indexer Pin Right Sensor
(Hidden - not shown)
X Registration Sensor
Puller Pin Sensor
Carrier Jam Sensor
(Hidden - not shown)
J Boat Present
Sensor (Output)
Puller Connector Board
(Part of Flex Cable)
Index Connector Board
(Part of Flex Cable)
Puller Motor Home Sensor
Preheat Motor Home Sensor
Indexer Home Sensor
J Boat Indexer Assembly, Front View
4-19
9 Workhold
Workholder
er S ensor Locations
Locations
Fi g ure 4-1
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-29
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.
4.4.
4.3
3
Ma
Maga
gazi
zine
ne Ha
Hand
ndle
lerr Sen
Senso
sorr Loc
Locat
atio
ions
ns
The locations of sensors and routing of sensor cables, for both input and output
magazine handlers, are shown in Figure 4-20,
4-20, Figure 4-21 and Figure 4-22
4-22..
Figure 4-20 and Figure 4-21 show the z tower assembly on the input magazine
handler. The z tower assembly is identical on both the input and output magazine
handlers. Figure 4-22 shows the load and unload tray sensors for the output magazine handler. The tray assembly on the input magazine handler is a mirror
mirro r image
of output magazine handler.
Y Axis Home
Sensor Cable
Y Axis Home Sensor (not shown)
Mounted under Z Tower Base
Machining Plate - Connects to
J14 on Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board.
Fi g ure 4-20
4-20 Ma
Magg azine Handle
Handlerr S ens
ensors
ors - Detail
Detail A (Input
( Input Ma
Magg az
azine
ine Handle
Handlerr S hown)
4-30
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Flexible Cable Track Containing:
- Z Axis Home Sensor Cable
- Tray Sensor Cable
- Magazine Gripper Home Sensor Cable
- Top Paw Home Sensor Cable
- Bottom Paw Home Sensor Cable
Z Axis Home
Home Sensor Cable Connects to J9 on
Input Magazine Handler Intermediate Board
Z Axis Home Sensor
Top Paw Home Sensor
(not shown - mounted under
the Upper Jaw Plate near the
Top Paw Home Sensor Cable
Connects to J11 on Input
Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board
Top Paw Assembly
Magazine Gripper
Home Sensor
Bottom Paw Home Sensor
(not shown - mounted under
the Lower Jaw Plate near the
Bottom Paw Assembly
Bottom Paw Home
Sensor Cable
Connects to J17 on
Input Magazine
Handler
Intermediate Board
Tray Sensor
Fi g ure 4-21
4-21 Ma
Magg azine Handl
Handler
er S ensors - Deta
Detail B (Input Ma
Mag azine Handl
Handler
er S hown
hown))
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-31
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Output Magazine Wall
Tray Full Sensor
(Hidden - bottom of unload tray)
Unload Tray
Magazine Present Sensor
Load Tray
NOTE: See Figure 4-16 for magazine handler cable, motor and sensor part
numbers. See Section 3 for complete cable routing.
Fi g ure 4-22
4-22 Tra
Trayy A s s em
embl
blyy S ensors - Deta
Detail C (Output Tra
Trayy As s em
embl
blyy S how
hown)
n)
4-32
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
4.4.
4.4.4
4
Re
Refl
flec
ectiv
tive
e Sen
Senso
sorr Amp
Amplif
lifie
ierr Set
Setup
up
There are two (2) reflective sensors in the MHS (refer to Figure 4-23
4-23).
). The J Boat
present amplifiers/sensors, one mounted on the input side (left side) of the rear
rail assembly and the other one is one mounted on the output side (right side).
This sensor finds a J boat is between the indexer assembly and the magazine.
The control system will attempt to move a magazine only if the appropriate sensor
is clear.
The procedures that follow provide only a sensitivity adjustment for the sensor
amplifiers. Other adjustments may be necessary.
Rear Rail Assembly
J Boat Present Sensor
Amplifier (Input)
J Boat Present Sensor Amplifier (Output)
J Boat Indexer Assembly
J Boat Indexer Assembly, Rear View
Switching
Threshold
Configuration
Status LEDs
(Green)
Programing
Push Buttons
Bargraph Display
(Red)
Power LED
(Green)
Yellow
Output LED
Sensor Amp Controls/Indicators
23 R efl
eflect
ective
ive S ensor A mp
mplifier
lifier S et
etup
up
Fi g ure 4 23
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-33
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
4.
4.4.
4.4.
4.1
1
J Boat
Boat Pres
Presen
entt Se
Sens
nsor
or Se
Setu
tup
p
Tools/ Materials
•
Sample J Boat
Procedure
A. Locate the sensor amplifier. The input (load) J boat present sensor amplifier is
mounted on the rear left side of the rear rail assembly. The output (unload) J
boat present sensor amplifier is mounted on the rear right side of the rear rail
assembly.
B. Setup and te
teach
ach the J boat
boat present sensor
sensor amplifier
amplifier..
NOTE: At factory setting, the LED lights (green) on the ‘LO’ and ‘HS’ are turned
ON.
1. Make sure
sure that the ”LO”
”LO” and ”HS” lights
lights are
are turned ON before
before you teach
teach
the replaced amplifier:
a. Press and hold
hold the TEACH
TEACH (or ”-”) button
button of the
the amplifier
amplifier for two tto
o three
seconds until ”LO” and ”DO” of the Status LEDs flash after another.
b. To set the ‘unblock’
‘unblock’ condition
condition (without
(without J boat),
boat), press the TEACH
TEACH (or ”-”)
button one [1] time.
c. To set the ‘block’
‘block’ condition,
condition, put the sample
sample J boat on the work
workholder
holder
rails and in the path of the sensor beam, then press the TEACH (or ”-”)
button one (1) time.
Table 4-8 Recommended
Recommended Signal values for output signal
signal
Bargraph LED
Relative Signal Difference
6 to 8
4 to 5
2 to 3
1
Excellent: Very stable Operations.
Excellent:
Good: Minor sensing variables will not affect sensing reliability
reliability..
Low:: Minor sensing variables may
Low
ma y affect sensing reliability.
Unreliable:: Consider an alternate sensing scheme.
Unreliable
2. If teach is accepted
accepted,, the amplifier
amplifier returns
returns to Run mode.
mode. If not accepted,
accepted, the
Power (green) LED will be OFF and the bargraph signal will flash after
another at 1 & 3 and 5 & 7 which will automatically return to step B1. b. for
the ‘unblock’ condition re-setup.
3. Manually
Manually moves the
the J boat to the sensor
sensor and make
make sure that
that the amplifier
amplifier
detects the whole J boat and the output signal integrity is not affected by
the movement of the J boat. If affected, reteach again. See Table 4-8 for
the relative output signal difference.
4.
4.4.
4.5
5
Se
Sens
nsor
or Stat
atus
us Disp
Displa
lay
y
The MHS sensors are monitored and their status is updated continuously by the
machine control system. Sensor state information can be displayed on the monitor by selecting an option in Diagnostic Mode. Sensor status is updated continuously by the control system. If the user manually triggers the sensor the result
should appear immediately in the display.
display. Refer to Section 5, paragraph 5.4.4,
5.4.4,
Maintenance Diagnostics for more information concerning the sensor status dis-
play.
4-34
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
4.5
Cable Assemblies
Cable assemblies involved in MHS functions are listed in Table 4-9
4-9.. Part number,
name, and cable terminations are provided in the table. See Section 3, paragraph
3.9,
3.9, for routing cables on the input and output magazine handler assemblies.
NOTE: Table 4-9 lists cables for the MHS with magazine handlers assembly (z
tower and tray input assembly
a ssembly.. There are some differences (additional
cables, part number changes) when the magazine handlers are configured for back load or top load operation.
Table 4-9 MHS Cable Assemblies
Cable Part No.
08888
08888-1
-108
0822-000
000-x
-xx
x
Cable Name
MHS
MHS Senso
Sensorr Bus
Cable
From
To
Indexe
Ind
exerr Inter
Intermed
mediat
iate
e Board,
Board, J2
Inpu
Inputt Magazin
Magazine
e Hand
Handler
ler
Intermediate Board, J3
Input Magazine Handler Intermediate Board, J2
Output Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board, J3
DMHS Backplane, J16
Output Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board, J2
08888
08888-1
-125
250-0
0-00000-xx
xx
Index
Indexer
er DMH
DMHS
S cable
cable DMHS
DMHS Back
Backpla
plane
ne,, J7,
J7, J1
J19
9 and
J21
Indexer Intermediate Board,
J1
08888
88-1
-12
251-000-xx
Sol
ole
enoid Cable
DMHS Bac
Backplane, J11, J14,
J39 and J42
Indexer Intermediate Board,
J6
08858-1
0885
8-1032
032-000
-000-xx
-xx
Rem
Remote
ote Teach
each Fibe
Fiberr
Sensor Assembly
Cable
Remote Teach Fiber Sensor
(Amplifiers)
Indexer Intermediate Board,
J19
08
0888
8888-12
1280
80-0
-000
00-x
-xx
x
Gr
Grip
ippe
perr Flex
Flex C
Cab
able
le
In
Inde
dexe
xerr Inte
Interm
rmed
edia
iate
te Boa
Board
rd,,
J23
Gripper Board
08
0888
888
8-1
-129
2977-00
0000-xx
xx
Pull
Puller
er Fl
Flex
ex Cabl
Cable
e
In
Inde
dexe
xerr IInt
nter
erme
medi
diat
ate
e Boa
Board
rd,, J3
J3
Pull
Puller
er Boar
Board
d
08089-1016-000-xx
TC Ext
I/O Temperature Board, J1
Interface Panel - MHS Thermocouples:
Indexer Intermediate Board,
J20
A1: Preheat
A2: Bond Site
08888
08888-20
-2009
09-0
-000
00-x
-xx
x
Heat
Heater
er Po
Powe
werr c
cab
able
le
TDI
TDI R
RoH
oHS
S PD
PDU/
U/Ca
Cabl
ble
e Ass
Assy
y, J
J6
6 Inter
Interfa
face
ce Pan
Panel
el - M
MHS
HS Heat
Heat-ers:
P2: Preheat
P3: Bond Site
08888-1
0888
8-1069
069-000
-000-xx
-xx
Bac
Backpl
kplane
ane Vacuum
acuum
Valve cable
DMHS Backplane, J18
XY Table Assembly - MHS
Vacuum Assembly
08888
08888-1
-106
0611-00
000-x
0-xx
x
Heat
Heat Blo
Block
ck & Clamp
Clamp
Ext cable
DMHS Backplane, J6
Interface Panel - Heat Block
Motor Assembly
P2: Heat Block
08888
08888-1
-108
0844-00
000-x
0-xx
x
Heat
Heat Blo
Block
ck & Clamp
Clamp
Sensor Ext cable
DMHS Backplane, J29 (P1) &
J30 (P2)
Interface Panel - Heat Block
Sensor Assembly
P3: Heat Block
08888-1
0888
8-1054
054-000
-000-06
-06 Backpla
Backplane
ne Input
Input
Magazine Handler
cable
DMHS Backplane, J9
Input Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board, J1
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
4-35
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Cable Part No.
Cable Name
From
To
08888088
88-105
1054-00
4-000-0
0-07
7 Backpla
Backplane
ne Output
Output
Magazine Handler
cable
DMHS Backplane, J8
Output Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board, J1
08888088
88-128
1283-00
3-000-0
0-00
0 In/Out
In/Out Tr
Tray
ay Ext.
Ext.
Cable
Indexer Intermediate Board,
J14
Input Tray Motor, Input Tray
Full Sensor and Input Magazine Present Sensor.
08888088
88-128
1283-00
3-000-0
0-01
1 In/Out
In/Out Tr
Tray
ay Ext.
Ext.
Cable
Indexer Intermediate Board,
J15
Output Tray Motor, Output
Tray Full Sensor and Output
Magazine Present Sensor.
4-36
Electronics
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
5
5.1
Maintenance
About T
Th
his Se
Section
Here is what you will find in this section:
•
Schedule, gives an overview of the MHS
Section 5.2,
5.2, Preventive Maintenance Schedule,
maintenance plan.
•
Each
Each se
sect
ctio
ion
n from
from Sect
Sectio
ion
n 5.3 through 5.6 offers information on toolings and
MHS related errors and help.
•
Section 5.3,
5.3, Special Tools and Gauges
•
Section 5.4,
5.4, Troubleshooting
•
Section 5.5,
5.5, MHS Errors
•
Section 5.6,
5.6, MHS Related Bonding Problems
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-1
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5.
5.2
2
Prev
Preven
enti
tive
ve Ma
Main
inte
tena
nanc
nce
eS
Sch
ched
edul
ule
e
Table 5-1 lists the required preventive maintenance (PM) procedures for the J
boat material handling system. This schedule combines the PM schedules found
in Sections 2 and 3 of this manual.
WARNING: THE
REMOVE
THE POWER
FROM THE MACHINE
BEFORE
CHECKING
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTIONS
OF THE MHS
OR BEFORE
CHECKING HARDWARE TIGHTNESS AND INSPECTING PNEUMATIC LINES
OF THE MHS. MAKE SURE ALL HEATING SURFACES HAVE COOLED
BEFORE PROCEEDING.
Table 5-1 MHS Preventive Maintenance Schedule
Action
Clean heat block
Period
8 hours
Tools/Parts/Supplies
1. Vacuum Hose
2. Solvent
Procedure
1. Remove dirt or contaminates from
the heat block area.
2. Remove heat block insert and
inspect heat block vacuum hole
screen. Remove and clean screen if
it appears clogged.
3. If screen cannot be cleaned successfully,, replace the screen.
cessfully
Remove any dirt or contaminates
from exposed and moving parts.
Clean workholder and mag- 40 hours
azine handlers
Vacuum Hose
Replace heat block vacuum
hose.
1000
1000 hour
hours
s
Tubin
ubing,
g, Si
Sili
lico
cone
ne RubRubber
Remove vacuum tube between rear
of heat block and heatsink. Replace
it with a 9” (228 mm) length of the
specified tubing. Make sure that
there are no air leaks or kinks in the
hose before resuming operation.
Check hardware tightness
1000 hours
Hand Tools
Make sure all attaching hardware
(screws, nuts, etc.) are securely
installed.
Inspect electrical connections on workholder and
1000 hours
—
Check for security and integrity of all
electrical connections. Refer to Sec-
magazine handlers
Inspect pneumatic lines on
workholder
tion 4 for connector locations.
Check for cracks, cuts, leaks, etc.
Check for loose fittings or signs of
stretching or wear. Correct as
required. See Sections 2 and 3 for
tubing and pneumatic fitting locations.
1000 hours
—
Replace magazine stop
buttons on magazine handlers
2000 hours
Hand Tools
Replace all six (6) magazine stop
buttons (see paragraph 3.9.6.2 for
procedure).
Lubricate puller drive rack
on workholder
1000
1000 hour
hours
s
Lubr
Lubrip
ipla
late
te #630630-2
2
P/N: 39086-6004-000
Apply a thin coat of Lubriplate to
rack teeth, make sure that all the
teeth are completely filled. Remove
excess lubricant from top of rack and
around rack when done.
5-2
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Action
Lubricate X-slide bearing
on the indexer assembly
Period
Tools/Parts/Supplies
3 months to 6 1. Lubricant (10 ml, in
months
syringe), P/N:
1001140
2. Lint-Free Cloth
3. Hand gloves
4. Cotton buds
5. Hex Wrench Set
Procedure
1. Push the [Motor Stop] button.
2. Remove the indexer assembly
front cover.
3. Move the gripper assembly to the
left or right side manually when
neccessary.
4. Clean the v-grooves of the X-slide
bearing on the front wall using the
lint-free cloth.
5. Apply about 0.1 ml to 0.2 ml of the
lubricant to the top and bottom of
the v-grooves of the X slide bearings.
6. Move the gripper assembly along
the X-slide bearing manually for
10 times.
7. Do steps 5 to 6 again for four
times.
8. Remove the unwanted lubricant
from the X-slide bearing with the
lint-free cloth.
Lubricate Y-slide bearings
on Magazine Handler
Assembly
3 months to 6 1. Lubricant (10 ml, in
months
syringe), P/N:
1001140
2. Lint-Free Cloth
3. Hand gloves
4. Cotton buds
5. Hex Wrench Set
1. Push the [Motor Stop] button.
2. Remove the Magazine Handler
assembly cover.
3. Move the Z Tower assembly to the
front or rear manually when neccessary.
4. Clean the v-grooves
v-gr ooves of the Y-slide
bearings on the Z Tower
Tower assembly
using the lint-free cloth.
5. Apply about 0.1 ml to 0.2 ml of the
lubricant to the left and right sides
of the v-grooves of the Y-slide
bearings.
6. Move the Z T
Tower
ower assembly along
the Y-slide bearings manually for
10 times.
7. Do steps 5 to 6 again for four
times.
8. Remove the unwanted lubricant
from the Y-slide bearings with the
lint-free cloth.
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-3
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Action
Period
Tools/Parts/Supplies
Lubricate Z-slide bearing on 3 months to 6 1. Lubricant (10 ml, in
Magazine Handler Assem- months
syringe), P/N:
bly
1001140
2. Lint-Free Cloth
3. Hand gloves
4. Cotton buds
5. Hex Wrench Set
Procedure
1. Push the [Motor Stop] button.
2. Remove the Magazine Handler
assembly cover.
3. Move the magazine gripper
assembly up or down manually
when neccessary.
neccessary.
4. Clean the v-grooves of the Z-slide
bearing on the Z Tower
Tower assembly
using the lint-free cloth.
5. Apply about 0.1 ml to 0.2 ml of the
lubricant to the left and right sides
of the v-grooves of the Z-slide
bearings.
6. Move the magazine gripper
assembly along the Z-slide bearings manually for 10 times.
7. Do steps 5 to 6 again for four
times.
8. Remove the unwanted lubricant
from the Y-slide bearings with the
lint-free cloth.
5-4
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
5.3
5.3
Spe
peci
cial
al Tools
ols and
and Gaug
Gauge
es
Table 5-2 list the special K&S tools and gauges that are required for setup and
calibration of the MHS. The table also gives a description of each tool.
Table 5-2 Special Tools
Tools and Gauges
Part Number
Description
Quantity
03035-0501-000-00
Workholder Setup & Calibration Gauge Assembly
1
03035-0502-000-00
Preheat Setup Gauge Assembly
1
03035-0908-001-00
Workholder Setup Gauge
1
03035-0908-005-00
Gauge Pin
2
NOTE: Items listed above are part of the IConn J Boat Adjustment Tool
Tool Kit,
which can be ordered under part number 03035-0909-000-XX
5.4
Troubleshooting
The MHS provides software options designed to aid the operator in assessing the
performance of the system. These options are available in:
•
•
MH
MHS
S Di
Diag
agno
nost
stic
ics
s mode
mode
MHS Uti
Utilit
lities
ies Menus
Menus (T
(Tool
oolbar
bar Opt
Option
ions)
s)
•
MH
MHS
S Manu
Manual
al Mode
Mode Ut
Util
ilit
itie
ies
s
•
Ma
Main
inte
tena
nanc
nce
e Diag
Diagno
nost
stic
ics
s
Procedures for software options can be found in IConn Operation Manual. The
paragraphs that follow contain short descriptions of the software options.
5.4.1
5.4
.1
MHS Wo
Workh
rkhold
older
er a
and
nd M
Moto
otorr Cy
Cycli
cling
ng D
Diag
iagnos
nostic
tics
s
Diagnostics mode allows the user to home and cycle the motors of MHS subsystems by selecting options from Graphical User Interface (GUI) dialog boxes (see
5-1). The following diagnostic dialog boxes are available:
Figure 5-1).
•
In
Inde
dexe
xerr Diag
Diagno
nost
stic
ics
s (See
(See 5.4.1.1
5.4.1.1))
•
5.4.1.2))
Pull
Puller
er Di
Diag
agno
nost
stic
ics
s (See
(See 5.4.1.2
•
•
He
Heat
at Block
Block Diag
Diagnos
nostic
tics
s (See
(See 5.4.1.3)
5.4.1.3)
5.4.1.4))
Inpu
Inputt Magazin
Magazine
e Han
Handle
dlerr (Mag Handl
Handler
er In) D
Diag
iagnos
nostic
tics
s (Se
(See
e 5.4.1.4
•
Outp
Output
ut Magazi
Magazine
ne Han
Handle
dlerr (Mag Hand
Handler
ler Out)
Out) Diagno
Diagnosti
stics
cs (Se
(See
e 5.4.1.4
5.4.1.4))
Select #1
Select #2
Select #3
Select #2
Select #1
Select #5
Select DONE to exit
Select #1
Fi g ure 5-1
5-1 A cces s to Workhold
Workholder
er and
and Ma
Mag azine Handl
Handler
er Cyc ling Menus
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-5
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5.4
.4.1
.1.1
.1
In
Inde
dexe
xerr Dia
iag
gnos
osti
tics
cs
Displayed by selecting (1) INDEXER from the MHS Workholder menu (Figure
( Figure 5-1
5-1).
).
Provides the user with options (Figure 5-2) to home the index gripper X–axis
motor, cycle the motor (either for an operator–entered number of
o f times or continuously), and stop the motor (if cycling).
If the CYCLE option is selected, the SET TIMES TO CYCLE value controls how many
cycles will be performed and the CYCLE PERIOD value controls the duration of a
dwell (delay period) between each cycle. The operator can enter a value or select
the default for either setting.
CONTINUOUSLY
Y option is selected. the motor will cycle until the operIf the CYCLE CONTINUOUSL
ator selects the STOP CYCLING option. The CYCLE PERIOD value controls the duration of dwell between each cycle.
Enter Number of times
to Cycle Indexer Motor
(Cycle function)
Enter Duration of Dwell Between
Cycles in milliseconds
(Cycle and Cycle Continuously Functions)
Enter Default
Value
Function Selections
(Select One)
Activate Selected Function
Activate Selected Function and Exit Dialog Box
Exit Dialog Box
Fig ure 55-2
2 Inde
Indexer
xer Mot
Motor
or Diag
Diag nostics D ia
iallog B ox
5.4.1
.1..2
Puller Dia
Diagnostic
tics
Displayed by selecting (3) PULLER from the MHS Workholder menu (Figure
(Figure 5-1).
5-1).
Provides the user with options (Figure
(Figure 5-3)
5-3) to home the puller motor, cycle the
motor (either for an operator-entered number of times or continuously), and stop
the motor (if cycling). If the CYCLE option is selected, the SET TIMES TO CYCLE
value controls how many cycles will be performed and the CYCLE PERIOD value
controls the duration of each cycle. The operator can enter a value or select the
default for either of these settings.
If the CYCLE CONTINUOUSL
CONTINUOUSLY
Y option is selected. the motor will cycle until the operator selects the STOP CYCLING option. The CYCLE PERIOD value controls the duration of each cycle.
Enter Number of times to cycle
Puller Motor (Cycle function)
Enter Duration of Dwell Between
Cycles in milliseconds (Cycle and
Cycle Continuously Functions)
Function Selections
(Select One)
Enter Default
Value
Activate Selected Function
Function
Activate Selected Function
Function
Exit Dialog Box
and Exit Dialog Box
Fig ure 55-3
3 Pull
Puller
er Diagnos tics Dial
Dialog
og B ox
5-6
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
5.
5.4
4.1
.1.3
.3
Heat Blo
Block
ck Dia
iag
gnost
nostic
ics
s
Displayed by selecting (4) HEAT BLOCK from the MHS Workholder menu (Figure
(Figure
5-1). Provides the user with options (Figure
5-1).
( Figure 5-4)
5-4) to select the preheat block motor,
bond site heat block motor, or both motors. The selected motor or motors can be
homed, cycled for an operator–entered number of times, or cycled continuously.
There is also an option to stop the motor if it is cycling.
If the CYCLE option is selected, the SET TIMES TO CYCLE value controls how many
cycles will be performed and the CYCLE PERIOD value controls the duration of a
dwell (delay period) between each cycle. The operator can enter a value or select
the default for either of these settings.
If the CYCLE CONTINUOUSLY option is selected. the motor(s) will cycle until the
operator selects the STOP CYCLING option. The CYCLE PERIOD value controls the
duration of each cycle.
Enter Number of times to cycle
Selected Motor (Cycle function)
Enter Duration of Dwell Between
Cycles in milliseconds (Cycle and
Cycle Continuously Functions)
Motor Selection
Enter Default
Value
(Select One)
Function Selections
(Select One)
Activate Selected Function
Function
Activate Selected Function
Function
and Exit Dialog Box
Exit Dialog Box
5-4
4 Hea
Heatt B lock Diag
Diag nostics Di alo
logg B ox
Fig ure 55.
5.4.
4.1.
1.4
4
Maga
Magazi
zine
ne Hand
Handle
lerr Dia
Diagn
gnos
osti
tics
cs
(1) MAG HANDLER IN or (2) MAG HANDLER OUT from the
Displayed
by selecting
MHS Magazine
Handlers menu (Figure
(Figure 5-1).
5-1). Provides the user with options (Fig(Figure 5-5)
5-5) to select the magazine handler Y axis motor, Gripper motor, Z axis motor,
motor,
or all three motors in the magazine handler assembly. Separate menus are available for the input magazine handler (shown in Figure 5-5
5-5)) and output magazine
handler. The selected motor or motors can be homed, cycled for an operator–
entered number of times, or cycled continuously. There is also an option to stop
the motor when it is cycling.
If the CYCLE option is selected, the SET TIMES TO CYCLE value controls how many
cycles will be performed. The operator can enter a value or select the default for
this setting. The CYCLE PERIOD parameter can not be set on this menu; dwell
between cycles duration is controlled by machine programming.
If the CYCLE CONTINUOUSLY option is selected. the motor(s) will cycle until the
operator selects the STOP CYCLING option.
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-7
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Enter Number of times
to Cycle Selected Motor(s)
(Cycle function)
Cycle Period Value entry
not active on this dialog box
Enter Default Value
Motor Selection
(Select One)
Function Selections
(Select One)
Activate Selected Function
Function
Activate Selected Function
Function and Exit Dialog
Dialog Box
Exit Dialog Box
5-5 Ma
Magg azine Hand
Handller Mot
Motor
or Diagnos tics D ial
ialog
og B ox
Fi g ure 5-5
5.4.2
5.4
.2
Temp
empera
eratur
ture
e Con
Contro
trolle
llerr Dia
Diagno
gnosti
stics
cs
The Temperature
Temperature Control Diagnostics option allows the user to display error status indicators that relate to the temperature
temp erature control system for the two workholder
heating zones. This option should be used to investigate a suspected temperature control problem. Selecting [3] TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER from the Diagnostic Mode menu displays the Temperature Control Diagnostics dialog box (see
Figure 5-6).
5-6). Clicking on the DONE button in the dialog box ends the Temperature
Control Diagnostics session and displays the Diagnostic Mode menu.
5.4.2.1
System Errors
The System Errors section of the dialog box reports errors that relate directly to
the temperature control circuitry on the I/O and Temperature Controller circuit
board. When the bonder is powered up, the temperature controller circuitry undergoes power–on confidence testing. If any portion of the circuitry named in the
System Errors section fails the confidence test, the error is logged into the software that displays the Temperature Control Diagnostics dialog box. Later, when
this dialog box is displayed, the appropriate indicator will be colored Red.
If an error exists, the user should ensure that it is a valid error by removing power
from the bonder, then:
•
Checking
Checking al
alll ele
electrica
ctricall connectio
connections
ns in the tthermoc
hermocouple
ouple temperature
temperature sensor
input circuit
•
Reseat
Reseating
ing the boar
board
d in the card
card rack
rack con
connec
nectors
tors
•
Reapplying pow
power
If the same error appears when the Temperature
Temperature Control Diagnostics dialog box is
displayed again, then the I/O and Temperature
Temperature Controller circuit board
boar d probably
needs replacement.
5-8
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Select #3
Select
Diagnostic
E rror Indicat
Indicators
ors
Red = Error
Green = Normal Operation
Select Done to exit
Fi g ure 5-6
5-6 Te
Temp
mpera
eratu
ture
re Controll
Controller
er Diagnos tics D ial
ialog
og B ox
5.4.2.2
Any Zone Errors
The Any Zone Errors indicator will be RED if a zone error exists in either the Preheat or Bond Site heating zones. The error that is active in the zone will have its
error indicator colored Red in the Zone Errors section of the dialog box. The zone,
Preheat, Bond, or Post Heat, for which errors are displayed can be selected using
the ZONE button. When selected, a drop down menu will appear from which the
user can select the desired zone.
5.4.2.3
Zone Errors
Unlike system errors, zone errors are monitored in real time. For example, if the
user displays the Temperature Control Diagnostics dialog box and, at that instant,
a zone error occurs, the user would see the corresponding error indicator change
its state from Green to Red. If a zone error does occur, the problem may be a
faulty temperature controller circuit, thermocouple sensor, heater power control
relay, or heater element.
•
Loop Break
Loop break indicates an open circuit in the output circuit of the temperature controller (heater relay control).
•
Se
Sens
nsor
or Out
Out A/D
A/D Ra
Rang
nge
e
Sensor out of analog to digital (A/D) range indicates a probable open thermo
couple input circuit
•
Se
Sens
nsor
or Ove
verr Rang
Range
e
Over range is an input value that is higher than the normal upper limit of the control loop. This is often an indication of an open thermocouple input circuit.
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-9
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
•
Sens
Sensor
or Unde
Underr Rang
Range
e
Under range is an input value that is lower than the normal lower limit of the control loop. This is often an indication of a shorted thermocouple or short elsewhere
in the sensor input circuit.
•
Low Alarm
Low alarm is a condition in which the measured temperature is below the control
band specified relative to the control set point. For example, if a ±5 degree alarm
limit is set, this indicates the temperature is more than 5 degrees below set point.
•
High Alarm
High alarm is a condition in which the measured temperature is above the band
specified relative to the control set point. For example, if a ±5 degree alarm limit is
set, this indicates the temperature is more than 5 degrees above set point.
5.
5.4
4.3
Re
Re–I
–Ini
niti
tia
aliz
lize MH
MHS
S
Selecting option 4 RE-INITIALIZE MHS from the Diagnostic Mode menu starts an
MHS initialization sequence, the same sequence that is performed whenever the
machine exits Standby Mode. (See Figure 5-6 for Diagnostics Menu.) All axes of
motion in the MHS workholder and magazine handlers are sent to their home
positions. Each stepper motor will turn in the direction that will drive the equipment toward its home sensor. When the home sensor
s ensor is actuated, the motor will
stop, then turn in the opposite direction to
t o place the equipment at its programmed
home position.
If there is any material in the workholder (carriers), or magazines in the magazine
handler grippers, the user will be asked to remove the material and magazines.
When the user signals that this has been done by selecting OK in the dialog box,
the initialization begins. Magazines on load/unload trays may remain in place.
Refer to Section 1 of this manual for material removal procedures.
NOTE: Any stepper motor driven assembly can be sent to home position individually by selecting an option in the appropriate motor cycling dialog
box. Refer to paragraph 5.4.1 for more information.
5.
5.4.
4.4
4
Ma
Main
inte
tena
nanc
nce
e Diag
Diagno
nost
stic
ics
s
The Maintenance Diagnostics allows the user to view and test all of the sensors
throughout the bonder and material
m aterial handler system. To access the Maintenance
Diagnostics dialog box, select MAINTENANCE DIAGNOSTICS from the Diagnostic
menu (see Figure 5-7).
5-7).
Select #5
Select DONE to exit
Fi g ure 5-7 Ma
Mainte
intena
nance
nce Diag nos
nosttics Dial
Dialog
og B ox
5-10
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Selecting SENSOR from the Maintenance Diagnostics dialog box
5-8)) after a slight
causes the Sensor Diagnostics dialog box to appear (see Figure 5-8
delay. The delay is due to the software collecting and computing all of the sensor
data throughou
throughoutt the machine.
machine.
The Sensor Diagnostics dialog box contains indicators which reflect the change
status and the On/Off (i.e., blocked /unblocked) state of the sensor. The dialog
box also contains a color legend informing the user how to decode the meaning of
an indicator when it is set to a specific color.
Status: Sensor values (ON or OFF)
White = ON, Black = OFF
White
Black
Fig ure 55-8
8 S en
enss or Diagnos tics Dialog
Dialog B ox
The control buttons that appear in the “Sensor Diagnostics” dialog box are
defined as follows.
•
FREEZE
•
•
UNFREEZE
•
•
Clicking
Clicking on this button
button freezes
freezes the display
display of the indica
indicators
tors iin
n the “Sensor
Diagnostics” dialog box.
Clicking
Clicking on
on this button unfreezes
unfreezes the
the dis
display
play of the indica
indicators
tors iin
n the “Sensor
Diagnostics” dialog box.
DONE
•
Exits the Sensor
Sensor Diagnostics
Diagnostics dialog box and
and displays
displays the Ma
Maintena
intenance
nce
Diagnostics main dialog box.
The following topics define the workholder and magazine handler sensors that
appear in the Sensor Diagnostics dialog box.
•
INPUT Z HOME
•
Optica
Opticall swi
switch
tch senso
sensorr used to detect
detect when
when th
the
e Z axis mo
movem
vement
ent of tthe
he
input magazine handler is at its home position. The magazine handler Z
axis controls the up and down positioning of the gripper assembly.
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-11
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
•
INPUT G HOME
•
•
INPUT_GRIP
•
•
Optica
Opticall switch
switch sensor
sensor used to detect
detect when
when tthe
he Z axis moveme
movement
nt of the o
oututput magazine handler is at its home position. The magazine handler’s Z
axis controls the up and down positioning of the grip
gripper
per assembly.
OUTPUT G HOME
•
•
Sensor located on the input mag
mag handler
handler lload
oad tra
tray
y. Used to detect
detect whe
when
na
magazine on the input load tray is in the correct position to be picked up
(gripped) by the gripper assembly.
assembly. The input load tray feeds magazines to
the gripper containing unprocessed material.
OUTPUT Z HOME
•
•
Sensor llocated
ocated at the bottom of the input mag handler’s
handler’s gripper assembly
assembly..
As the gripper assembly moves forward in the Y axis, this sensor detects
the edge of the tray. The sensor informs the
t he software that the gripper is at
the correct position to pick up a magazine.
INPUT Y HOME
•
•
Sensor located
located on the upper
upper paw
paw of the input
input mag
mag han
handler
dler g
gripper
ripper assemassembly
bly.. Used to detect when the upper paw of the gripper assembly comes in
contact with (grips) a magazine. This sensor informs the software that the
magazine is properly registered in the gripper jaws.
INPU
IN
PUT
T TR
TRAY
AY DET
ETEC
ECT
T
•
•
Sens
Sensor
or located
located unde
underr the lower
lower paw
paw if the input
input ma
mag
g handler
handler gr
gripp
ipper
er
assembly.. Used to detect when the lower paw of the gripper
assembly
gr ipper assembly
comes in contact with (grips) a magazine. This sensor informs the software
that the magazine is properly registered in the gripper jaws.
INPUT TOUCH
•
•
Optica
Opticall switch
switch sensor
sensor used
used to detect
detect when tthe
he uppe
upperr and lower paws of
of the
input magazine handler gripper assembly are at their home position (i.e.,
the gripper is fully opened, ready to grip magazine).
Optica
Opticall switch
switch sensor
sensor used
used to detect
detect when tthe
he uppe
upperr and lower paws of
of the
output magazine handler gripper assembly are at their home position (i.e.,
the gripper is fully opened, ready to grip magazine).
OUTPUT_GRIP
•
Sens
Sensor
or located
located unde
underr the lower
lower paw
paw if the outpu
outputt mag handle
handlerr gripper
gripper
assembly
assembly.
Used towith
detect
when
the lower paw
the gripper
grinforms
ipper assembly
comes in .contact
(grips)
a magazine.
This of
sensor
the software
that the magazine is properly registered in the gripper jaws.
•
OUTPUT TOUCH
•
•
Sensor located
located on the upper
upper paw
paw of the ou
output
tput m
mag
ag han
handler
dler gripper
gripper assembly
bly.. Used to detect when the upper paw of the gripper assembly comes in
contact with (grips) a magazine. This sensor informs the software that the
magazine is properly registered in the gripper jaws.
OUT
UTPU
PUT
T TR
TRAY DET
ETEC
ECT
T
•
Sensor located at the bottom of the output mag handler’s
handler’s gripper assembly
assembly..
As the gripper assembly moves forward in the Y axis, this sensor detects
the edge of the tray. The sensor informs the
t he software that the gripper is at
the correct position to pick up a magazine.
•
OUTPUT Y HOME
•
•
Sensor located on the
the base
base plate
plate of the o
output
utput mag h
handler
andler assembly
assembly..
Used to detect when the Y-axis movement of the magazine handler is at its
home position. The magazine handler’s Y-axis controls the forward and
backward positioning of the gripper assembly.
PULLER HOME
•
Optica
Opticall switch
switch sensor
sensor that
that detects
detects when
when the puller assembly
assembly is at its home
position. The sensor is located
locate d on the puller assembly.
5-12
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
•
PREH
PR
EHEA
EAT
T BL
BLOCK HO
HOM
ME
•
•
PULLER PIN
•
•
•
Referred
Referred to the J Boat Present
Present Sensor
Sensor.. The sensor detects
detects that
that a J boa
boatt
has been injected into the workholder. The sensor is on the left side of the
rear rail assembly. It contains the fiber optic and sensor amplifier.
OUTPUT TRAY 1
Sensor located
located on the output
output mag h
handler
andler unload tray.
tray. Us
Used
ed to detect
when the unload tray is full of magazines.
OUTP
OU
TPUT
UT TR
TRAY
AY 2 / GUI
GUIDE
DE DO
DOOR
OR
•
•
Sensor located
located on the
the input
input mag handler
handler load tray
tray.. Used to detect
detect wh
when
en a
magazine on the input load tray is in the correct position to be picked up
(gripped) by the gripper assembly
assemb ly.. The input load tray feeds magazines to
the gripper containing unprocessed device.
INPUT WALL
•
•
Sensor located on the input mag handler
handler unload tray.
tray. Use
Used
d to detect when
the unload tray is full of magazines.
INPUT TRAY 2
•
•
Optical
Optical switch
switch sensor that detects
detects the up/dow
up/down
n position
position of the
the ind
index
ex pi
pin.
n.
INPUT TRAY 1
•
•
Optical
Optical switch
switch sensor that detects
detects the presenc
presence
e of a boat under the index
index
pin.
INDE
IN
DEXE
XER
R PI
PIN
N RI
RIG
GHT
•
•
Mechanical-c
Mechanical-contac
ontactt sensor
sensor that
that detects
detects when a jam occurs in th
the
e ind
index/
ex/
tucker area. The sensor is spring loaded and detects a jam when a force
pushes the index pin to its left. This force can be the result of a jammed
boat during an index (pin in the boat) or the tucker pushing against the
index pin because of a jam during boat ejection.
INDEXER PIN LEFT
•
•
Optical
Optical switch
switch sensor
sensor that
that detects
detects when th
the
e inde
index/tuck
x/tucker
er ass
assembly
embly is at its
home position. The sensor is on the index/tucker assembly.
IND
NDE
EXE
XER
R JA
JAM DET
DETEC
ECT
T
•
•
Sensor that detects
detects the leading
leading edge
edge of a boat as it is pull
pulled
ed into the workworkholder by the puller assembly. The puller will continue making an attempt to
pull more of the boat into the workholder until this sensor is blocked or the
software times out. The sensor is on the rear rail assembly.
assembly.
INDEXER HO
HOME
•
•
Optical
Optical sw
switch
itch sensor that reports
reports the u
up/down
p/down posit
position
ion of the puller
puller pin.
REGISTRATION X
•
•
•
Optical
Optical switch
switch sensor
sensor that
that detects
detects w
when
hen th
the
e prehe
preheat
at block
block is at it
its
s home
position.
Sensor located on the output mag handler
handler load ttray
ray.. Used to det
detect
ect wh
when
en a
magazine on the output load tray is in the correct position to be picked up
(gripped) by the gripper assembly. The output load tray feeds empty magazines to the gripper.
OUTPUT WALL
•
•
JAM MODULE
•
•
Referred
Referred to the J Boat Present
Present Sensor
Sensor.. The sensor detects
detects that
that a J boa
boatt
has been ejected from the workholder. The sensor is on right side of the
rear rail assembly. It contains the fiber optic and sensor amplifier.
For
For iint
nter
erna
nall us
use
e onl
only
y.
SYST
SY
STEM
EM LO
LOW
W PRE
PRESS
SSU
URE
•
Sensor
Sensor locat
located
ed in the
the main input
input air
air assembl
assembly
y at the lo
lower
wer co
conso
nsole.
le.
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-13
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
•
HEAT BLOCK HOME
•
•
HEAT
HE
AT BL
BLO
OCK VAC
ACUU
UUM
M
•
5.
5.4.
4.5
5
Sensor located
located in the sl
slider
ider assembly
assembly th
that
at is used to detect
detect wh
when
en the bond
site heat block is at its home position.
Vacuum sensor used to detect
detect the
the presence
presence of vacuum
vacuum a
att the bond site
heat block.
MH
MHS
ST
Too
oolb
lbar
ar Ut
Utili
ility
ty Me
Menu
nus
s
Selecting one of the MHS utilities buttons from the toolbar in the display provides
a dialog box from which common workholder or magazine handler functions can
be carried out. Entry into other modes to use these functions can
ca n thus be avoided.
5.4
.4.5
.5.1
.1
MHS Wo
Work
rkho
hold
lde
er Util
Utilit
itie
ies
s
The Workholder Utilities menu appears when W/H OPER is selected from the tool
5-9).The
).The functions listed in this menu allow the operator to send
sen d a
bar (see Figure 5-9
command to the workholder to do a single action.
Tool Bar
Select DONE to exit dialog
Select #8
Fi g ure 5-9
5-9 A cces s to Work hold
holder
er and
and Ma
Magg H andle
ndlerr Utilities
Utilities (without
( without s afet
fetyy cover)
The workholder utilities are defined as follows:
•
[1]]
[1
STOP
ST
OP IN
INDE
DEXI
XING
NG:: Stop the indexing of boat through the workholder.
•
PULL
PU
LL BO
BOAT
AT IN
IN:: Causes the workholder to pull a boat from the supply
[2]
[2]
(left-side) magazine.
•
EJEC
EJ
ECT
T BO
BOAT
AT:: Causes the workholder to push a boat into the receiving
[3]
[3]
(right-side) magazine.
•
CLEA
CL
EAR
R WORK
WORKHO
HOLD
LDER
ER:: Causes the workholder to remove all boats.
[4
[4]]
5-14
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
•
[5]
[5]
5-10))
BOAT
BO
AT IN
INJE
JECT
CT:: Opens another dialog box (see Figure 5-10
that allows the operator to set the
t he ON or OFF status of the puller for p
pulling
ulling
boats from the supply (left-side) magazine. Once the desired setting is
made, the user selects DONE which causes the Workholder Utilities dialog
box to appear.
Fi g ure 5-10 B oa
oatt Inject Dial
Dialog
og B ox
•
[1] BOAT INJECT OFF: Stop boat injection. No additional boats are pulled
into the workholder. Those boats in the workholder are processed normally unless
unless Stop Indexing
Indexing is activated.
activated.
•
•
[6
[6]]
[2] BOAT INJECT ON: Restores normal operation.
HEA
EAT
T BL
BLOC
OCK:
K: Allows the user to perform heat block related functions. The
dialog box shown in Figure 5-11 appears. Once the desired setting is made,
the user selects DONE which causes the Workholder Utilities dialog box to
appear.
Fi g ure 5-1
5-11
1 Hea
Heatt B lo
lock
ck Dialog
Dialog B ox
•
[1] LOWER HEAT BLOCK: Causes the heat block to be lowered to the index-
ing height (i.e., the position below the boat, so as to clear the boat during
the indexing of a device).
•
[2] RAISE HEAT BLOCK: Causes the heat block to be raised to the bonding
height.
•
[3] HOME HEAT BLOCK: Causes the heat block to be lowered to the home
position.
•
[7]]
[7
HEAT
HE
AT BL
BLOC
OCK
K VAC
VACUU
UUM:
M: Opens the dialog box (see Figure 5-12
5-12).
). The user
may then set the vacuum to On or Off. Once the desired setting is made, the
user selects DONE which causes the Workholder Utilities dialog box to appear.
Fi g ure 5-12
5-12 Hea
Heatt B lo
lock
ck Vacuum
Vacuum Dial
Dialog
og B ox
•
[1] HEAT BLOCK VACUUM ON: Applies heat block vacuum.
•
[2] HEAT BLOCK VACUUM OFF: Removes heat block vacuum.
vacuum.
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-15
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5.4
.4.5
.5.2
.2
MHS
MHS Ma
Magaz
azin
ine
e Uti
Utili
liti
tie
es
The Magazine Handler Utilities menu appears when MAG OPER is selected from
the tool bar (see Figure 5-9).The
5-9).The functions listed in this menu allow the operator to
send a command to either magazine handler to do a single action.
The magazine handler utilities are defined as follows:
•
•
JOG MAGAZINE (Input and Output)
•
Moves the magazine
magazine held in
in the gripper
gripper to its next s
slot,
lot, a
as
s defi
defined
ned by the
programmed sequenced or user–defined
user–defin ed slot order. If no magazine is in the
gripper, a magazine will be picked up from the load tray.
REVERSE JOG MAGAZINE (Input and Output)
•
•
Moves the magazine
magazine held in
in the gripper
gripper to its
its prev
previous
ious slot,
slot, as define
defined
d by
the programmed sequenced or user–defined slot order.
EJECT MAGAZINE (Input and Output)
•
•
Dep
Deposi
osits
ts th
the
e magazin
magazine
e held b
by
y the grippe
gripperr on the unloa
unload
d tray.
tray.
MAG SELECTION
•
5.
5.4.
4.6
6
Toggl
oggles
es IINPU
NPUT
T mode
mode or
or OUTPU
OUTPUT
T mode.
mode.
MH
MHS
SM
Man
anua
uall Mo
Mode
de Ut
Util
ilit
itie
ies
s
Manual mode has MHS utility dialog boxes that allow the user to operate the MHS
subsystems through the Graphical User Interface (GUI) (See Figure 5-13).
5-13). The
following utility dialog boxes are available:
•
Index Ut
Utiliti
tie
es
•
Heat
Heat Bl
Bloc
ock
k Uti
Utili
liti
ties
es
•
Preh
Prehea
eatt Blo
Block
ck Ut
Util
ilit
itie
ies
s
•
Pin Utilities
Select #3
Select DONE to exit
Fi g ure 5-13
5-13 A cces s to MHS Ut
Utilit
ilities
ies ( Ma
Manua
nuall Mod
Mode)
e)
5.4.6.1
Index Ut
Utilities
Provides options that allow the user to operate the workholder either continuously
or for a user–entered number of index cycles (Figure
( Figure 5-14
5-14).
). Indexing can be done
with material in the MHS (“Normal” index commands) or with no material in the
MHS (“Dry” index commands). A count of index cycles is kept and displayed in
the dialog box, which can be reset to zero at any time by the user. Boat injection
can be set to On or Off before index cycling is started. Index commands available
on the menu are:
5-16
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
•
NORMAL INDEX and DRY INDEX
•
•
CONTINUOUSLY
LY
NORMAL INDEX CONTINUOUSLY and DRY INDEX CONTINUOUS
•
•
Stops
tops workhol
workholder
der opera
operation
tion w
when
hen th
the
e work
workhold
holder
er is cycli
cycling.
ng.
PARK IN
INDEXER
•
•
Workholder
Workholder will operate
operate until stopped
stopped by the
the user
user.. Normal
Normal Index
Index ContinuContinuously requires material (boats) in the workholder. Dry Index Continuously
will take place without material in the workholder. The number of index
cycles completed appears in the TOTAL INDEX COUNT area.
STOP IN
INDEXING
•
•
When either command
command is select
selected,
ed, th
the
e wor
workholde
kholderr wil
willl perform
perform the
the number
number
of index cycles shown in the INDEX TIMES area at the top of the dialog box
(unless stopped by the user before completion). Normal index requires
material (boats) in the workholder. Dry index will take place without material
in the workholder. The number of cycles completed appears in the TOTAL
INDEX COUNT area.
Moves indexer
indexer to “parked”
“parked” position.
position. When parked,
parked, each subsy
subsystem
stem is
is at a
programmed distance from its sensor–marked home position.
HOME IN
INDEXER
•
Indexe
Indexerr seeks
seeks its home
home sens
sensor
or the
then
n moves
moves to its
its ho
home
me po
posit
sition
ion..
Set number of index cycles to perform
(Normal Index and Dry Index Commands)
Set the bond time to perform
(Normal Index Command)
Enter Default
Value
Number of Indexes Performed
Enable/Disable Boat Inject Function
Reset Total Index
Count to Zero
Command Selection
(Select One)
Activate Selected Function
Function
Activate Selected Function
Function
and Exit Dialog Box
Exit Dialog Box
Fi g ure 5-14
5-14 Index Utilitie
Utilitiess Dial
Dialog
og B ox (Manua
(Manuall Mode
Mode))
Setup Options available in the dialog box are:
•
INDEX TIMES
•
Controls
Controls how
how many
many ind
index
ex cycles
cycles will be performed
performed for Normal
Normal Index and
Dry Index Commands. User can enter a value or select the default number
of cycles.
•
BOND TIME
•
•
Controls
Controls the
the bonding
bonding time
time that
that will
will b
be
e perf
performed
ormed for Normal
Normal Index Commands. User can enter a value or select the default time.
CLEA
CL
EAR
R TOT
TOTAL
AL IN
INDE
DEX
X COUN
COUNT
T
•
Resets
Resets the index
index cycle
cycle counte
counterr to
to z
zero
ero..
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-17
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
•
BOAT INJECT
•
5.4
.4.6
.6.2
.2
Can be set to ON or OFF. If OFF, boats will not be pulled in from the input
magazine handler when required during a Normal Index cycle or Normal
Index Continuously cycle. After the last boat in the workholder is moved
into the output magazine handler,
h andler, the index cycle will stop. If ON, leadframes will be injected as needed.
Heat Bl
Bloc
ock
k Util
tilit
itie
ies
s
The Heat Block Utilities allow the user to force or set several bond site operations.
Selecting [2] HEAT BLOCK UTILITIES from the MHS Utilities menu displays the heat
block dialog box (see Figure 5-15
5-15).
). Utilities available are:
•
LOWER HE
HEAT BL
BLOCK
•
•
RAISE HE
HEAT BL
BLOCK
•
•
When tthis
his command
command is selected
selected the bond
bond s
site
ite heat
heat block
block is rai
raised
sed to its
bond plane level, where it is placed during bonding operations.
CLOSE OFFSET
•
•
When th
this
is command
command is
is selected
selected the
the bond site heat
heat blo
block
ck moves
moves to its boat
boat
clearance level which it is placed at during an index cycle.
When tthis
his command
command is selected
selected,, the bond site h
heat
eat bl
block
ock is
is pos
positione
itioned
d at
the entered offset value from its raised position.
HOME HEAT BLOCK
•
When th
this
is command
command is
is selected
selected the bond site
site he
heat
at block
block move
moves
s to iits
ts ho
home
me
position.
Fi g ure 5-15
5-15 Hea
Heatt B lock Utilities
Utilities D ial
ialog
og B ox (Manua
(Manuall Mode
Mode))
5.4
.4.6
.6.3
.3
Pr
Pre
ehea
heat Blo
Block
ck Utili
tiliti
tie
es
The Preheat Block Utilities allow the user to force or set several preheat block
operations. Selecting [3] PREHEAT BLOCK UTILITIES from the MHS Utilities menu
5-16).
). Utilities available are:
displays a dialog box (see Figure 5-16
•
LOWE
WER
R PR
PREH
EHEA
EAT
T BL
BLOCK
•
•
RAIS
RA
ISE
E PRE
PREHE
HEA
AT BLO
BLOC
CK
•
•
When tthis
his command
command is selected
selected the preheat
preheat heat block
block moves to it
its
s boat
clearance level which it is placed at during an index cycle.
When tthis
his command
command is selected
selected the preheat
preheat heat block
block is ra
raised
ised to its
its
device heating level.
HOM
HO
ME PRE
PREH
HEA
EAT
T BLO
BLOC
CK
5-18
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
•
When
When thi
this
s comman
command
d is selec
selected
ted th
the
e pre
prehea
heatt heat
heat blo
block
ck mo
moves
ves
to its home position.
Fi g ure 5-16 P rehea
reheatt B lock Utilities
Utilities Dial
D ialog
og B ox (Manua
(Manuall Mode
Mode))
5.4.6.4
Pin Utilities
Options on the Pin Utilities dialog box allow the user to operate the puller arm,
indexer pin, and tucker actuator (see Figure 5-17).
5-17). The user can also
home the puller and the indexer
indexer.. Puller functions available in the dialog box a
are:
re:
•
LOWER PULLER PI
PIN
•
•
HOME PULLER
•
•
When this
this command
command is
is selected
selected tthe
he puller
puller pin is rai
raised
sed to its "boat p
pulling
ulling""
position. The puller pin solenoid is de-energized when the puller pin is in
this position.
LIFT TUCKER
•
•
When this
this command
command is selected
selected the iindexer
ndexer pin is
is lowered
lowered to its
its ind
indexing
exing
position (within the index hole on the boat). The indexer pin solenoid is
energized when the indexer pin is in this position.
LIFT PULLER PIN
•
•
When this
this command
command is
is selected
selected the
the tuck
tucker
er is lowered
lowered to its
its tu
tucking
cking positi
position
on
(tucks the boat into the output magazine). The tucker solenoid is energized
when the tucker is in this position.
LOWER IN
INDEXER PIN
PIN
•
•
Moves
Moves tthe
he puller
puller assemb
assembly
ly to
to it
its
s ho
home
me p
posi
ositio
tion.
n.
LOWER TUCKER
•
•
When this
this command
command is
is selected
selected tthe
he puller
puller pin is low
lowered
ered tto
o its reset p
posiosition. The puller pin solenoid is energized when the puller pin is in this position.
When this
this command
command is selected
selected the tu
tucker
cker is ra
raised
ised to its
its res
reset
et pos
position.
ition.
The tucker solenoid is de-energized when the tucker is in this position.
LIFT IN
INDEXER PI
PIN
•
Command Selection
When this
this command
command is
is selected
selected th
the
e inde
indexer
xer pin
pin is raised
raised tto
o its reset position (above the top surface of the boat). The index pin solenoid is de-energized when the indexer pin is in this position.
(Select One)
Activate Selected Function
Function
Exit Dialog Box
Exit Dialog Box
Fi g ure 5-17
5-17 Pi n Utilit
Utilities
ies Di alo
logg B ox (Manua
(Manuall Mod
Mode)
e)
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-19
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5.5
MHS Errors
5.
5.5
5.1
Er
Erro
rorr In
Indi
dic
cat
atio
ions
ns
5.
5.5.
5.1.
1.1
1
Erro
Errorr Reco
Recove
very
ry Opt
Optio
ions
ns Dia
Dialo
log
g Box
Box
When the machine detects an error in MHS operation, it displays a dialog box on
the monitor screen. The error may also light one of the signal lights on the light
tower and sound the audible alarm (depending upon signal light/alarm programming), and stop machine operation if necessary.
Figure 5-18 illustrates the dialog flow for a typical error event. Dialog Box ‘A’,
which appears as soon as the error is detected, displays error information plus
gives the user up to five error recovery options from which to choose. Depending
upon the error event that is reported, certain options may be inactive (grayed).
One of the error recovery options ( MORE) supplies the user with additional information related to the error event (Dialog box ‘B’ in Figure 5-18
5-18.)
.) Selecting DONE in
this dialog box will display Dialog box ’A’.
Error messages are listed in paragraph 5.5.2. The options found in most error dialog boxes are:
•
CONTINUE
•
•
RETRY
•
•
When tthis
his option
option is selected
selected,, the operati
operation
on being
being perform
performed
ed when
when the
the err
error
or
was detected is continued or restarted. If the error indication is not
repeated, machine operation will continue and no other user action is
required. If it is repeated, the user should select the ABORT button and troubleshoot for the cause of the error.
ABORT
•
•
Ret
Retrie
ries
s the operat
operation
ion.. Checks
Checks if error
error condit
condition
ion still
still e
exis
xists.
ts.
RECOVER
•
•
Ign
Ignore
ore the
the er
error
ror and
and proce
proceed
ed with
with th
the
e current
current ope
operati
ration.
on.
When tthis
his option
option is selected
selected,, the operati
operation
on being
being perform
performed
ed when
when the
the err
error
or
was detected is stopped and not retried. The user must manually restart
the operation or troubleshoot for the cause of the error before proceeding.
MORE
•
When tthis
his option
option is selected
selected,, a second dialog box a
appears
ppears that shows
shows the
error number, a more detailed error message than the one in the recovery
options dialog box, and additional information that may be helpful when trying to correct the error (see Figure 5-18 , Dialog Box ‘B’). When done reading the dialog box text, the DONE button is selected to return to the error
recovery options dialog box.
5.
5.5.
5.1.
1.2
2
Si
Sign
gnal
al Ligh
Lights
ts and
and Aud
Audib
ible
le Al
Alar
arm
m
The signal light tower at the top of the machine has three colored lamps: Red,
Amber, and Green. The green lamp is usually lit to indicate normal automatic
operation. The red and amber lamps are lit to indicate machine errors, material
requirements, or changes in machine status, accompanied by an audible alarm.
Machine software allows the users to program the conditions under which the signal lamps light and the alarm sounds. Refer to Section 1 of this manual and IConn
Operation Manual for more information.
information.
5-20
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Select MORE to
display next dialog
box (B)
Dialog Box A
Select DONE to
display options
dialog box (A)
Dialog Box B
Fig ure 55-18
18 E rror Recovery
Recovery Opt
Options Dialo
Dialogg B oxe
oxess
5.5.
5.5.2
2
Er
Erro
rorr a
and
nd St
Stat
atus
us Me
Mess
ssag
ages
es
5.
5.5.
5.2.
2.1
1
”H
”Hom
ome
e Not
Not Foun
Found”
d” or ””No
Nott Out
Out of
of Home
Home”” Erro
Errors
rs
[SUBSYSTEM] HOME NOT FOUND
[SUBSYSTEM] IS NOT OUT OF HOME
MAGAZINE HANDLER MOTOR Y, Z, OR G HOME ERROR
[Subsystem] may be Puller, Index/Tucker, Heat Block, Puller Pin or Index Pin.
P in.
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
5.
5.5.
5.2.
2.2
2
Select CONTINUE in the dialog box. If the error is repeated, use the options
in the error recovery dialog box to try to identify the cause of the error:
•
Chec
Check
k ffor
or mecha
mechanic
nical
al pr
prob
oble
lem.
m.
•
Chec
Check
k sen
senso
sorr o
ope
pera
rati
tion
on..
•
Check
Check motor
motor or actuato
actuatorr electri
electrical
cal connec
connection
tions
s and wi
wirin
ring.
g.
•
Chec
Check
k mo
moto
torr or act
actuat
uator
or ope
opera
rati
tion
on..
Mate
Materi
rial
al Cond
Condit
itio
ion
n Erro
Errors
rs
MATERIAL IN WORKHOLDER
WORKHOLDER NOT EMPTY
DEVICE OVERHEATED
EYEPOINT TEACH FAILURE
MATERIAL CANNOT BE PULLED IN - ALREADY PRESENT
NO MATERIAL IN SLOT
MAGAZINE HANDLER FAILED ON GET MAGAZINE
REMOVE BOAT FROM RAILS
BOAT IS NOT PRESENT IN WORKHOLDER
LOAD TRAY EMPTY (INPUT MAG OR OUTPUT MAG)
UNLOAD TRAY FULL (INPUT MAG OR OUTPUT MAG)
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
Supply MHS with
with material
material or remove material
material as indicated,
indicated, tthen
hen re
restart
start
operation.
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-21
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5.5.2
.2..3
Statu
tus
s Messages
WHL WANTS BOND HEAD MOVED
WHL WANTS BOND HEAD POSITIONED
MHS INDEX TERMINATED
INDEX SEQUENCE ABORTED
MHS DEVICE INDEXED
MHS DEVICE SKIPPED
MHS CARRIER PULLED IN
MHS CARRIER EJECTED
MHS INITIALIZATION EXECUTED
MHS PWRFAIL (POWER FAILURE) RECOVERY EXECUTED
MHS JAMMED CARRIER REMOVED
MH TEACH OPERATION WORKED
MH CAL SLOT OPERATION WORKED
MH CAL TRAY OPERATION WORKED
MHS MAG LOADED
MHS MAG LOADED_O
MHS MAG UNLOADED
MHS MAG UNLOADED_O
•
5.5
.5.2
.2.4
.4
No error
error recov
recovery
ery actio
action
n require
required
d from the
the us
user
er.. Select
Select OK to remove
the message
message..
Cal
Calib
ibra
rati
tio
on Mess
Messag
age
es
MHS [ANY DEVICE] CALIBRATION SUCCESSFUL
WORKHOLDER CALIBRATION TERMINATED
HEAT BLOCK CALIBRATION TERMINATED
TUCKER EJECT CALIBRATION TERMINATED
SLOT CALIBRATION TERMINATED
TRAY CALIBRATION TERMINATED
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
5.5
.5.2
.2.5
.5
Select OK to remove message. Repeat calibration procedure if error message indicated that the calibration was terminated before successful completion.
Mag
Magazin
zine Han
Handli
ling
ng Err
Error
ors
s
[INPUT/OUTPUT]] MAG HANDLER DETECTED SLOT SENSOR BLOCKED
[INPUT/OUTPUT
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Che
Check
ck whether
whether there
there is
is a boat exten
extended
ded betwe
between
en the magaz
magazine
ine an
and
d the
workholder rails. If so, move the boat into the magazine and select CONTINUE. If there is no boat at the slot sensor fiber optic, set up the J Boat
present sensor amplifier (refer to Section 4 for procedure.)
[INPUT/OUTPUT]
[INPUT/OUTPUT] MAGAZINE HANDLER WILL ALSO HOME Y
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Select CONTINUE to resume operation. No other action is required.
[INPUT/OUTPUT]
[INPUT/OUTPUT] MAGAZINE HANDLER G HOME WILL ALSO HOME [Y OR Z]
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Select CONTINUE to resume operation. No other action is required.
[INPUT/OUTPUT] MAGAZINE HANDLER G HOME WILL DROP MAGAZINE
[INPUT/OUTPUT]
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Grasp magazine
magazine held
held by the gripper
gripper of indicate
indicated
d mag
magazine
azine handler
handler,, then
then
select CONTINUE . Gripper will release magazine.
5-22
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
MH LOSS OF PWRFAIL DATA
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
Use the
the arrow keys to
to move the gr
gripper
ipper to
to a location
location where it will
will not contact any part of the magazine handler during initialization. Initialize the
MHS. Y,
Y, Z, and Gripper axes must find home position before operation can
be resumed.
[INPUT/OUTPUT] MAG HANDLER: MAG INTERFERENCE POSSIBLE
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
Grasp
Grasp magaz
magazine
ine held
held b
by
y the
the gri
gripper
pper,, then
then sele
select
ct CONTINUE . Gripper will
release magazine.
[INPUT/OUTPUT] MAG HANDLER: OPERATION SUSPENDED
[INPUT/OUTPUT]
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
Use the
the arrow keys to
to move the gr
gripper
ipper to
to a location
location where it will
will not contact any part of the magazine handler during initialization. Initialize the
MHS. Y,
Y, Z, and Gripper axes must find home position before operation can
be resumed.
[INPUT/OUTPUT] MAG HANDLER TRAY DETECT SENSOR NOT BLOCKED
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
Select CONTINUE. Gripper will attempt to locate tray again. If it fails to
locate tray, check position of gripper when it tries to find the tray. If not
good, perform tray calibration. If gripper position is good, then gripper tray
sensor is probably defective and should be replaced.
[INPUT/OUTPUT] MAG HANDLER TRAY DETECT SENSOR BLOCKED
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
Select CONTINUE. Gripper will attempt to locate tray again. If gripper is positioned so tray sensor is not blocked and the error is repeated, then gripper
tray sensor is probably defective and should be replaced.
[INPUT/OUTPUT] MAG HANDLER TRAY DETECT SENSOR STATE ERROR
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
Select CONTINUE. Gripper will attempt to locate tray again. If it fails to
locate tray, check position of gripper when it tries to find the tray. If no good,
perform tray calibration. If gripper position is good, then gripper tray sensor
is probably defective and should be replaced.
[INPUT/OUTPUT] MAG HANDLER GRIPPING SENSORS NOT BLOCKED
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
Hold magazin
magazine
e in gripper
gripper (if presen
present)
t) and initialize
initialize the M
MHS.
HS. Gr
Gripper
ipper axis
must find home position before operation can be resumed. If error is
repeated, check gripper sensor operation and replace sensor assemblies
as needed.
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-23
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
[INPUT/OUTPUT
[INPUT/OUTPUT]] MAG HANDLER GRIPPING SENSORS BLOCKED
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Hold magazi
magazine
ne in gripper (if present)
present) and initial
initialize
ize th
the
e MH
MHS.
S. Gripper
Gripper axis
must find home position before operation can be resumed. If error is
repeated, check gripper sensor operation and replace sensor assemblies
as needed.
[INPUT/OUTPUT]] MAG HANDLER GRIPPING SENSOR STATES NOT SAME
[INPUT/OUTPUT
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Hold magazi
magazine
ne in gripper (if present)
present) and initial
initialize
ize th
the
e MH
MHS.
S. Gripper
Gripper axis
must find home position before operation can be resumed. If error is
repeated, check gripper sensor operation and replace sensor assemblies
as needed.
[INPUT/OUTPUT]] MAG HANDLER GRIP SENSOR BLOCKED
[INPUT/OUTPUT
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Initia
Initialize
lize the MHS.
MHS. If error is repeated,
repeated, check grip sensor operation
operation and
and
replace sensor assembly as needed.
MH FAILED TO UNLOAD MAGAZINE
[INPUT/OUTPUT]] MAG HANDLER FAILED LOAD
[INPUT/OUTPUT
[INPUT/OUTPUT]] MAG HANDLER FAILED UNLOAD
[INPUT/OUTPUT
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Remove magazines
magazines from
from unload
unload ttray
ray at
at the input or output
output magazin
magazine
e handler (as indicated). Select CONTINUE to resume operation.
[INPUT/OUTPUT]
[INPUT/OUTPUT] MAG HANDLER FAILED TO LOAD MAGAZINE
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Mak
Make
e sur
sure
e there
there are
are mag
magazi
azines
nes o
on
n load
load tray
tray. Sel
Select
ect CONTINUE. Gripper will
attempt to load magazine again. If it fails, check position of gripper when it
tries to find the tray. If not good, perform tray calibration. If gripper actually
has loaded magazine, then grip sensor is probably defective and should be
replaced.
TOO MUCH ROTATION FOUND WHEN TEACHING MAGAZINE
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Select ABORT. Use magazine handler utilities menu (tool bar selection) to
place magazine on unload tray
t ray.. Move magazine to load tray and select
option to move magazine to first slot position. Restart procedure to
teach
tea
ch magazin
magazine.
e.
TEACH OPERATION FAILED
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Select ABORT. Restart procedure to teach magazine handler.
5-24
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
MHS MOTOR DRIVER ERROR
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
5.
5.5.
5.2.
2.6
6
Fault reported
reported in driver circui
circuitt boar
board
d that operat
operates
es one of the steppe
stepperr
motors in the magazine handler or workholder. Make sure no MHS motor is
stalled. If motors are good, then driver circuit board should be replaced.
Refer to Section 4 for circuit board locations and replacement procedure.
In
Inje
ject
ctio
ion,
n, Inde
Indexi
xing
ng,, and
and Eje
Eject
ctio
ion
n Err
Error
ors
s
CARRIER X REGISTRATION EDGE NOT FOUND
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
X–registratio
X–registration
n sensor
sensor did
did not
not dete
detect
ct ca
carrier
rrier leading
leading edge during injection.
injection.
Check:
•
X–registratio
X–registration
n sensor
sensor while blocking
blocking a
and
nd un
unblocki
blocking
ng se
sensor
nsor element
elements
s in
the rear rail. Make sure the sensor display (Diagnostic mode) indicates
when the sensor is blocked. If not, check sensor electrical connections.
If good, the sensor should be replaced.
•
Carrie
Carrierr dimens
dimensions
ions and other
other ind
indexi
exing
ng p
param
aramete
eters.
rs.
•
Puller
Puller op
opera
eratio
tion
n - make sure
sure that
that the puller
puller ar
arm
m engages
engages a hole
hole in the
boat and can pull the boat into the workholder input.
DEVICE’S EYEPOINT NOT FOUND
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
PRS coul
could
d not find
find devi
device
ce ey
eyepo
epoint
int afte
afterr ind
index.
ex. Chec
Check:
k:
•
Diffuser
Diffuser air
air pressure.
pressure. Increasing
Increasing pressure
pressure may enable PRS to find e
eyeyepoint.
•
Mate
Materi
rial
al cond
condit
itio
ion
n an
and
d type
type..
•
Device illumination
illumination.. Make
Make sure
sure that
that ther
there
e is a high
high con
contrast
trast betwee
between
n
bordering eyepoint features. Make sure that there is no variation in
brightness with eyepoint features. Reteach eyepoint after any illumiination adjustment. Refer to eyepoint selection guide in IConn Operation
Manual.
CARRIER JAMMED DURING INDEX OR EJECTION
•
Error Re
Recovery
•
Verify
Verify tthat
hat there
there is actual
actually
ly a jammed
jammed carrier in the workholder
workholder or
or at the
the
workholder output. If so, clear the jam manually and select CONTINUE. If
this error is displayed often with no jammed carrier in the workholder,
check:
•
Condition
Condition of
of the index overlo
overload
ad contact
contact pins o
on
n the indexe
indexer.
r. Increased
Increased
resistance in the contact pin circuit caused by pin corrosion or contamination may cause false carrier jam signals
•
Operation
Operation of the spring-l
spring-loaded
oaded bar that
that electrical
electrically
ly co
connect
nnects
s the conta
contact
ct
pins. Except when there is a jam, the bar must be in contact with the
pins.
•
•
Electrical
Electrical wiring
wiring and connections
connections from tthe
he pins
pins to the indexer
indexer interface.
interface.
Any open circuit condition will signal an carrier jam.
If actua
actuall carrier
carrier jam
jams
s occ
occur
ur fr
freque
equentl
ntly
y, che
check:
ck:
•
Rail parallelism
parallelism - mak
make
e sur
sure
e that gap be
between
tween rails at output
output e
end
nd of
workholder is equal to gap at the input end. Refer to the rail alignment
procedure in section 2 for more information.
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-25
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
•
Rail Heigh
Heightt - perform
perform rail
rail height
height adjustment.
adjustment. Follow the displayed
displayed
instructions precisely when using the rail
r ail height adjuster.
•
Carrier
Carrier width
width - make sure boat width
width param
parameter
eter value
value is ac
accurate
curate for
device being processed.
•
Magazine
Magazine di
dimensio
mensions
ns an
and
d slot
slot calibratio
calibration
n - ifif carriers
carriers jam at
at magazine
magazine
slot lead–ins or against sidewall, make sure Slot Pitch, Magazine Width,
and Distance from Bottom parameter values are correct. If they are,
perform an output slot calibration.
•
•
Magazine
Magazine po
position
sitioning
ing - If leadframe
leadframes
s pass
pass par
partway
tway into magazi
magazine
ne and
then jam, make sure rear magazine wall is in contact with the three (3)
magazine stop buttons on the gripper jaws. If not, eject and reload the
magazine. Also, perform an output slot calibration and make sure that
both wear plates in the lower gripper jaw contact the calibration gauge
at the same time. If not, loosen four (4) SHCSs that secure the gripper
to the Y axis casting and rotate the gripper until both wear plates are in
contact with the gauge.
If jam errors are indicate
indicated
d when
when indexer
indexer is be
being
ing dry
dry cy
cycled
cled ((run
run without
without
material), check:
•
Mechanical
Mechanical interference
interference - between
between the
the tuc
tucker
ker ar
arm
m or index pin a
and
nd an
any
y
part of the workholder or output magazine handler. Make sure that the
tucker blade is centered between the front workholder rail and the front
boat support blade when the tucker arm is down. Make sure tucker
blade is not bent or otherwise damaged.
CLAMP VACUUM NOT PRESENT
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
Vacuum sensor (optional)
(optional) has
has detected
detected low v
vacuum
acuum at bon
bond
d site after a
device was clamped. Check:
•
Device defect.
defect. Make
Make sure
sure underside
underside of device
device has n
no
o defect
defect th
that
at pre
pre-vents a good vacuum seal with the top surface of the heat block insert.
•
Heat block
block conditi
condition.
on. Make
Make sure top of heat b
block
lock iinsert
nsert iis
s clean
clean so that
device can seat properly on the insert.
•
V
accum
accumhoses.
hoses
hoses - make
make sure that
that there
there are no b
bloc
locked
ked,, crac
cracked
ked,, or
kinked
•
False vacuum error indications.
indications. Adjust vacuum sensor.
sensor. (R
(Refer
efer to
Section
Sectio
n 2 for vacuum sensor setup
setup procedure).
procedure).
CARRIER CANNOT BE PULLED IN - ONE ALREADY PRESENT
INDEXER AXIS LIMIT ERROR
EMPTY INPUT MAGAZINE SLOT
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
No ca
carrie
rrierr was ffoun
ound
d in a magaz
magazine
ine sl
slot
ot wh
when
en an atte
attempt
mpt w
was
as mad
made
e to
inject a carrier into the
th e workholder. Select CONTINUE . If the error is
repeated, use the Magazine Handler Utilities to load a new input magazine.
5-26
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
WORKHOL
WORKHOLDER
DER DETECTED SLOT SENSOR BLOCKED
•
Erro
rror Recove
overy
•
Che
Check
ck whethe
whetherr there
there is a boat betwe
between
en the workh
workhold
older
er and the
the inpu
inputt or
output magazine. If so, move the boat into the magazine and select CONTINUE. If there is no boat under the slot sensor fiber optic, set up the input
or output slot sensor amplifier (refer to Section 4 for procedure.)
RAIL INDEX MOTION ERROR
RAIL CORRECTION MOTION ERROR
DEVICE CLAMPED IN WORKHOLDER
•
Erro
rror Recove
overy
MHS MOTOR DRIVER ERROR
•
Erro
rror Recove
overy
•
Fault reported
reported in driver circui
circuitt boar
board
d that operate
operates
s one of the steppe
stepperr
motors in the magazine handler or workholder. Make sure no MHS motor is
stalled. If motors are good, then driver circuit board should be replaced.
Refer to Section 4 for circuit board locations and replacement procedure.
5.5
.5.2
.2.7
.7
Init
Initia
iallizat
izatio
ion
n Er
Error
rors
MHS INITIALIZATION FAILED
•
Erro
rror Recove
overy
•
Press [MOTOR STOP]. Select OK in the Standby Mode dialog box to restart
the initialization. If the error is repeated, check:
•
Workholder
Workholder and magazin
magazine
e han
handler
dler home sensors and workholder
workholder rail
jam sensors. Make sure there are no cuts in the insulation of the rail jam
sensor wires that may allow a short to ground through the workholder.
•
Workholder
Workholder and magazin
magazine
e hand
handler
ler m
motion
otion axes. Make sure there is no
mechanical interference in any axis of motion.
•
Electrical
Electrical connections
connections at indexer
indexer flex cable boards and at indexer interface board. Electrical connections at magazine handler wiring harnesses and interface board.
•
Oper
Operati
ation
on of stepp
stepper
er motor
motors.
s.
MH MAGAZINE WILL BE DROPPED
•
Erro
rror Recove
overy
•
Gra
Grasp
sp maga
magazin
zine
e he
held
ld by the gri
grippe
pperr, then
then se
selec
lectt CONTINUE. Gripper will
release magazine.
CLEAR MAGAZINE HANDLER TRAYS OF ANY MAGAZINES
•
Erro
rror Recove
overy
•
Remove
allselect
magazin
magazines
es from
from. unl
unload
oad and
and loa
load
d trays
trays of the m
magazin
agazine
e handlers, then
CONTINUE
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-27
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
MAGAZINE HANDLER SETUP ERROR
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
5.5
.5.2
.2.8
.8
Perf
Perform
orm tray
tray and s
slot
lot calib
calibrat
ration
ions
s for both
both magazin
magazine
e hand
handler
lers.
s.
Pr
Pro
ogram
ram Ex
Exe
ecu
cuti
tion
on Err
Error
ors
s
UNDEFINED MHS COMMAND
DISABLED OR ACTIVE MHS COMMAND
RESOURCES FOR EXECUTION OF MHS COMMAND ARE UNAVAILABLE
WORKHOLDER SOFTWARE RESET REQUEST
CANNOT CREATE SEMAPHORE
CANNOT OPEN CHANNEL
MAGAZINE HANDLER SOFTWARE LOGIC ERROR
MAGAZINE HANDLER SOFTWARE CREATION ERROR
MAGAZINE HANDLER ERROR SENDING MESSAGE
MAGAZINE HANDLER ERROR RECEIVING MESSAGE
UNDEFINED LEADFRAME LOCKING STATUS
UNDEFINED INDEX TYPE
UNDEFINED INDEX STATUS
UNDEFINED CORRECTION STATUS
UNDEFINED INDEXING CYCLE
UNDEFINED WORKHOLDER STATE
UNDEFINED PULLER STATE
UNDEFINED PULL TYPE REQUESTED
JAM DETECTION CONTROLLER’S COMMAND FAILED
JAM DETECTION CONTROLLER’S DIAGNOSTIC FAILED
•
Er
Errror Recovery
•
If a pro
progra
gram
m exe
execut
cution
ion error
error is
is indica
indicated
ted,, always
always se
selec
lectt CONTINUE or
RECOVER in the dialog box. If the error is repeated, select ABORT and then
perform an MHS initialization. If the error is repeated when operation is
resumed, press [MOTOR STOP], then shut down and restart the machine.
This will reload machine operating code.
5-28
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
5.6
5.6
MH
MHS–
S–Re
Rela
late
ted
d Bond
Bondin
ing
g Prob
Proble
lems
ms
Some problems seen in the bonding process or in general machine operation
may be caused by errors in operation, calibration, or setup of the MHS. Flow diagrams in the paragraphs that follow were prepared to help correct common MHS–
related problems:
•
EYE POINT FIND FAILURES - See paragraph 5.6.1
•
NON–STICK ON PAD ERRORS - See paragraph 5.6.2
•
NON–STICK ON LEAD ERRORS - See paragraph 5.6.3
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-29
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5.
5.6.
6.1
1
Ey
Eye
eP
Poi
oint
nt Fi
Find
nd Fa
Fail
ilur
ures
es
Test bond several
leadframes.
leadfra
mes. Observe
START
MHS
operat
ion.
Inspect operation.
leadfra
leadframes.
mes.
PRS or optics
problems?
NO
YES
Leadframe clamping
problem?
Check optics focus.
Adjust if necessary.
Increase diffuser
air pressure.
Reteach eyepoint.
Change lighting or
eyepointt scene area.
eyepoin
Perform PRS
Calibration.
NO
Problem corrected?
YES
YES
Check device thickness. Enter correct
thickness if incorrect.
Check for vacuum
at top of heat block.
Check pneumatic
system if no vacuum.
Perform clamp calibration.
NO
DONE
5-30
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
5.6.
5.6.2
2
No
Non–
n–St
Stic
ick
ko
on
n Pa
Pad
d (N
(NSO
SOP)
P) E
Err
rror
ors
s
NO
START
Transducer working
Properly?
YES
Check Transducer
cable service
loop. Loosen
cable any tighten
cable.
Device thickness
correct?
YES
NO
Bond plane
height correctly
calibrated?
Enter correct value
for device thickness parameter.
parameter.
YES
NO
Preheat and
bond site temperature correct?
Perform Transducer Alignment calibration to set bond
plane height.
Check
Transducer
and USG
Board
Adjust workholder
rail height to OPTIMAL setting in relation to bond plane
height.
NO
Check bond site
and preheat temperature set points.
Change set points
if necessary.
YES
Correct clamp
and heat block
insert for L/F
used?
NO
Verify that correct
p-parts for L/F
installed. Replace
p-parts if incorrect.
Check actual bond
and preheat temperature. Enter
Check if tie bar
temperature
as needed. offsets
seated correctly
If p-parts are replaced, teach MHS
before continuing
production.
Problem corrected?
YES
NO
There may be a bonder or
material problem. Check
bond parameters, device,
and wire.
YES
DONE
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
5-31
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
5.
5.6.
6.3
3
No
Non–
n–St
Stic
ick
k on Le
Lead
ad ((NS
NSOL
OL)) Er
Erro
rors
rs
NO
START
Transducer working
Properly?
YES
Check Transdu
Transducer
cer
cable service
loop. Loosen
cable any tighten
cable.
Device thickness
correct?
NO
Enter correct value
YES
Bond plane
height correctly
calibrated?
YES
NO
YES
for
device thickness
parameter.
Preheat and bond
site temperature
temperature
correct?
NO
Perform Transducer
Alignmentt calibration
Alignmen
to set bond plane
height.
Correct clamp
and heat block
insert for L/F
used?
NO
Check
Transducer
and USG
Board
Adjust workholder rail
height to OPTIMAL
setting in relation to
bond plane height.
Verify that correct
p-parts for L/F
installed.
installe
d. Replace
p-parts if incorrect.
Check bond site
and preheat temperature set points.
Set correct set
points if necessary
necessary..
Check Lead finger
vibration, if yes do
clamp calibration.
-- Adjust c lamp
force offset
Check Heat block
perpendicular
Check actual
bond and preheat
temperature.
temperat
ure. Enter temperatu
temperature
re
offsets as needed
needed..
Problem corrected?
NO
If p-parts are replaced, teach
MHS before continuing production.
There may be a bonder
or material problem.
problem.
YES
Check bond parame
ters, device, and wire.
YES
DONE
5-32
Maintenance
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
A Glos
Glossar
sary
y of
of Term
Terms
s & Abbr
Abbrevi
eviati
ation
ons
s
-AALIAS:
Area or feature on a die or leadframe which may be mistaken by the PRS for a valid eye point.
p oint.
ALIGNMENT: Material alignment is the positioning of the material at the bondsite. This positioning may be
accomplished by the use of the Pattern Recognition System or by the operator depending on the
parameters and settings in the bond program.
ALIGNMENT TOLERANCE: Maximum allowable deviation from the programmed distance between the two oper-
ator points of a reference system. Valid only for 2-point reference systems. Suggested tolerance
should be 10% of the smallest bond pad dimension. For outer leads, it should be referenced to
the lead with tolerance and may be somewhat greater to allow for the potentially larger expansion.
ALTERNATE EYE POINT: An eye point for an alternate reference. For example: if there are two possible vendors
of a particular die that the manufacture uses where the two die are not identical, the program
would call out an alternate reference system/eye point. See also "Backup Eye point".
AXIS POSITION INDICATORS: X, Y and Z values at the upper right of the monitor screen. X and Y values of the
crosshair are relative to the previously entered X-Y zero. Z refers to the bondhead height, again
with reference to a previously entered zero location.
-BBACKUP EYE POINT: Another eye point on the same die in a different
different location. Its purpose is to give the vision
system a second chance to find an eye point for alignment purposes.
BITS:
Bond Integrity Test System. Used to detect non-stick bonds at the die (NSOP), non-stick bonds at
the leadframe, or short tails (SHTL) during auto bonding.
BIMODAL:
Only two primary brightness levels are present.
BOND FORCE: The force applied to promote a good bond (capable of providing an electrical connection). It is
the contact force, in grams, exerted on the wire during bonding.
BOND HEIGHT: The height at which the bonding tool touches the work surface.
BOND OFF: A process for forming a gold ball once the wire is loaded through the capillary (with a fraction of
an inch extended beyond the capillary). Used when repairing a broken wire or replacing a wire
spool.
BOND POWER: The ultrasonic energy exerted by the USG during bond time.
BOND PROGRAM: see Process Program.
BOND TIME: The length of time that the USG is turned ON for each bond. This affects the strength of tthe
he
bond. If bond time is too low or too high, the bonds will be relatively weak. Experimentation
using shear tests will reveal the optimum setting.
BONDING:
Bonding requires the calculation of bond locations based on the alignment data and the control of
all the subsystems necessary to accomplish the bonding.
BOOT/BOOTING: The initial activity of the machine after
after a reset or power up to re-load the machine’s software
and prepare it for processing.
BUTTON:
A button may be square, rectangular, or triangular in shape. When clicked on, it starts a process,
brings up a dialog box, steps through a list of choices, increases/decreases a value, or opens an
edit field.
Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations
98888-0000-JB3-01
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
-CC/V:
see Constant Velocity Value.
th e machine
CALIBRATION MODE: A mode of the machine that allows the operator to calibrate parameters of the
to ensure valid measurements. For example: to set the distance between the tool and the optics
(crosshair offset),find limits, set the pixels to pulse ratio in the PRS.
CAMERA IMAGE: The window that displays the image from the camera on the machine’s screen.
CAMERA LINEARITY: Alignment of the video camera CCD image element with the machine axes of motion.
This is accomplished by rotating the camera body.
CHESSING: Moving the work table (in the X and Y directions) corresponding to manual controls by using the
mouse and mouse button [B2]. Holding the Arrow button down will cause the auto repeat function
to take effect and the image will move at a continuous rate. Chessing only applies to the graphics
and video image window. There are three forms of chessing available to the operator:
•
JUMPING - Position the cursor at the desired location and press B2.
•
DRAGGING - Press and hold B2 then drag the image.
•
INCHING - Use the cursor keys on the keyboard to move a single pixel at a time
(depending upon the zoom factor).
COMPONENT FILES: The other files used with the Process Program File to create a process program. The
process program file has the .BND extension and may have a filename of up to 80 characters. A
component file has a REF., .PRM, OPR, .CHG,
.CHG, .WIR, .PDL, or a .EYE extension and may have a
filename of up to 40 characters.
CONFIGURE MODE: A mode of the machine that allows the operator to configure or style the machine to meet
the factory’s needs.
work surface after TIP and,
CONSTANT VELOCITY VALUE (C/V): The speed of the capillary descending to the work
therefore, the constant velocity of the capillary against the work. If set too high, bonds may be
squashed. If set too low,
low, the operating times may be unacceptably high. Value is expressed in
microns/msec or mmps.
CROSSHAIR: On-screen horizontal and vertical cross image which are used with tthe
he X, Y
Y,, and Z directional
buttons to locate eye points, operator points, etc. for the process program. The large yellow
crosshair appears initially in the center of the graphics and the video image windows. The two
windows and their crosshair are handled slightly differently. The crosshair on the video image
window is always centered. Selecting a new position causes the video image to shift and the
crosshair is automatically recentered. Hence, it is possible to "work your way" across the bond
site. The graphics image crosshair can be moved to any position in the graphics window and
depending upon the zoom factor this may include the entire work area or only a very small portion
of it. Manipulation of either window will cause an appropriate change in the other window.
CROSSHAIR OFFSET: A taught distance which compensates for the fact that the objective lens and the capil-
lary are not in line above a device. This adjustment is necessary when the crosshair
crossh air is being used
to represent the location of the bond tool over the device.
CURSOR: The on-screen "+" used to point to and click on menus, menu items, and buttons and to grab and
adjust slide bars.
A-1
A-2
Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
-DDE-SELECT:To close or turn off a menu, menu item, function, or state by positioning the cursor on top of the
desired item and clicking the B1 (left) mouse button. If a state is de-selected, the highlighting will
be turned off to show that the state is no longer active.
DEFAULT BUTTON: A square button with a “D” in the center of it. Clicking on this button will set a parameter
value to its pre-determined default value.
DEFAULT BUTTON
DIALOG BOX:A window that appears temporarily to request information or to allow adjustment or selection of
settings/parameters.
without moving the cursor
cursor..
DOUBLE-CLICK: To rapidly press and release the mouse button [B1] twice without
DRAG:
To move an item on the screen by first positioning the cursor over the item and then pressing and
holding the mouse button [B1] while manipulating the mouse to move the cursor.
DRY CYCLE: Cycle the MHS workholder with or without material present in the workholder
workholder,, without bonding
wire.
-EEFO:
see Electronic Flame-Off.
EFO GAP:
The vertical distance between the EFO electrode and the tip of the wire on the capillary when the
bond head is at its reset position.
EFO OPEN: Refers to an error condition that occurs when the wire tail is too short or no wire is at the tip of the
capillary or the EFO Gap is too great.
EFO TIME:
The time that the EFO is turned on.
EJECT:
This refers to the activity of transferring materials from one mechanical sub-system to another.
For example: eject a leadframe refers to the process of moving a leadframe from the output side
of the workholder to the output magazine in the output elevator. To eject a magazine means to
move it from the elevator to the output platform.
ELECTRONIC FLAME-OFF: The hardware that produces the electronic spark to m
make
ake the gold ball form at the
end of the wire exposed at the tip of the capillary.
ENTER:
Using the MMI keypad or the keyboard to enter and edit information.
EYE POINT: A human and machine identifiable feature of the material. The number of
o f eye points and their
location can be specified in process program. This reference point is learned by the PRS during
the teach sequence. For each reference system, the number of eye points must equal the number of operator points. Die eye points make use of the fine detail typically found on die reference
systems. Lead eye point looks for long straight edges such as those normally found in an outer
lead reference system.
EXCEPTION: Failure, fault, or unusual occurrence.
Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations
98888-0000-JB3-01
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
-FFACTORY AUTOMATION SERVER/SYSTEM: A computer which can supervise the wire bonder through a commu-
nications link using the SEMI SECS protocol.
FAS:
Factory Automation Server/System.
FORCE:
see Bond Force.
screen. These buttons are
FUNCTION BUTTONS: Two rows each containing 10 buttons at the bottom of the screen.
used to begin or end an action. The function associated with a button may change when certain
types of operations are performed.
FUNCTION KEYS: The row of 10 keys at the top of the keypad located on the MMI. These keys perform the
same functions as the bottom row of Function buttons. The function associated with a key may
change when certain types of operations are performed.
-GGUI:
An abbreviation for the term Graphical User Interface.
-HHOST:
A remote computer that can gather or issue process information from/to
fr om/to the machine, select pro-
cess programs for the equipment, and control the machine.
HOST INTERFACE: A technique to exchange information between a host computer and the machine. The host
computer may also exert control over the machine using this interface.
HOT KEY:
The numeric character associated with an item in a menu or dialog box. When working in menus
or dialog boxes, pressing the item’s Hot Key selects the that item. By selecting the item, a data
entry field may open, an operation may be performed or another menu or dialog box may appear.
HOT
KEY
-IIC:
A device with two reference systems: the outer leads or substrate and the die.
ICON:
A symbol that represents a window or action/s.
INDEXING:
Indexing moves new material into position for bonding. Indexing may occur after an entire unit
has been processed or after a partial unit has been processed. The index may present an entirely
new unit to the bond location or a new part of the same unit.
INJECT:
Generally this term refers to leadframes and usually means a leadframe will be moved from the
input magazine into the workholder.
A-3
-JJ WIRE:
A Kulicke and Soffa technique to lay designed bent w
wires.
ires. This technique puts a J-shape into the
bonding wire by using a parameter called lateral motion.
JOG:
A term to indicate a vertical index of a mag handler’s
handler ’s gripper assembly.
assembly.
A-4
Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
-KKEYBOARD:A QWERTY keyboard (keypad) located on the MMI (see MMI).
KINK HEIGHT:The vertical distance between the first bond and the position above the first bond where the XY
table starts the Reverse Motion.
-LL/F:
LeadFrame.
LEADFRAME:Carrier for IC devices incorporating metal leads to which wires from IC bond pads are attached
LIGHT TOWER:A post on which a number of signal lights are mounted to indicate the machine’s state (Motors
stopped, operating automatically, error, etc.).
LINEARITY: Camera rotation. See Camera Linearity.
LOT:
A grouping of materials for tracking purposes.
LOT ID:
A name or number associated with a lot for identification purposes.
LOT TRACKING:A technique to monitor the process and collect data for historical purposes.
LOW LOOPING:The Kulicke and Soffa process for making very low wire loops.
LOWER CONSOLE:The machine’s main card rack, electronics(cards), power supplies, amps for the servos and
LTOL:
steppers, the disk drives, the chassis, and the fans.
An abbreviation for the term “line tolerance”. Line tolerance is used to ensure that the placement
of operator points and eye points are valid.
-MM/C:
Machine.
parameter.
MACHINE DEPENDENT PARAMETER: A bonder or machine specific parameter.
MAN MACHINE INTERFACE (MMI): Means through which the machine operator communicates with the control
system. Operator controls via the mouse, buttons, function keys, and keypad on the lower console.
MANUAL:
Depending upon context this term may refer to the Manual Mode of the machine’s
machine’s operation or
indicate human intervention is required to complete a process.
MANUAL MODE: A machine mode that allows the operator to bond wires in a manual fashion. That is, desig-
nate the location of bond sites and lay a single wire.
MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEM: The Material Handling System consists of the electronics, mechanics, and
controlling software that is used to move material through the machine. The Material Handling
System may be considered as part of the process if the heating elements are controlled by the
Material Handling System.
MATRIX:
An array of chips, devices or device groups that are arranged in columns and rows.
MBD:
Missing Ball Detector.
MDP:
see Machine Dependent Parameter
MENU:
A list of available commands in a window.
window. Menu titles may appear in the banner at the top of the
window. The illustration shows the MANUAL mode menu.
window. The illustration shows the MANUAL mode menu.
MODE
BAR
MENU
MHS:
see Material Handling System.
Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations
98888-0000-JB3-01
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
MMI:
see Man Machine Interface.
MODE:
A logical grouping of related tasks or functions usually accessed by selecting the “mode” of operation in a dialog box or menu (e.g., “Add” mode when teaching operator points). This term could
also be used to refer to an operating state of the machine such
su ch as Auto mode, Manual mode, Program mode, etc.
MODE BAR: The horizontal bar that contains the names of the program’s major sections or modes. The mode
bar is at the top of the display screen. The illustration above shows the leftmost modes in the
mode bar. MANUAL mode is the active mode
MOTORIZED WIRE SPOOL: Activated by a sensor indicating the wire loop is getting taunt and deactivated by a
sensor indicating the wire loop is getting slack.
MOUSE:
Input device with three buttons and a ball used to position an on-screen cursor and make selections or adjustments (see illustration).
MOUSE BUTTONS: The three mouse buttons are located on the mouse and are referred to as B1, B2, and B3
on the screen. The function of each button changes depending on the operations being performed on the screen. Refer to the screen for the current button functions. Some of the possible
functions for the three buttons are listed below.
Mouse Buttons
B1, B2, B3
Mouse
•
B1 = Left
Left Button:
Button: Select,
Select, Add/Lea
Add/Learn,
rn, Uns
Unsele
elect,
ct, Nex
Next,
t, Step
•
B2 = Cent
Center
er Butt
Button
on:: Ches
Chess
s
•
B3 = Right Button: Delete, Unselect,
Unselect, Auto Learn, Relearn,
Relearn, Assign,
Assign, Disass
Disassociociate, Reverse
MTBA:
Mean Time Between Assists. Average length of time between bonder-detected errors.
MTBF:
Mean Time Between Failures. Average length of time between events that require actual repair
by a technician.
MTTA:
Mean Time To
To Assist. Average amount of time to fix a bonder program.
MTTR:
Mean Time To
To Repair. Average amount of time needed for a technician to complete the repair.
MWS:
see Motorized Wire Spool
substr ate and one for each
MULTI-CHIP: A device with more than 2 reference systems: one for outer leads or substrate
die on the device.
-NNSOL:
No Stick on Lead. BITS error message indicating wedge is lifted from the second bond.
A-5
No Stick on Pad. BITS error message indicating ball is lifted from the first bond.
NSOP:
-OON-LINE HELP:A window is displayed containing text that explains an indicated object for the machine opera-
tor. Note: once On-line Help is activated other topics are available for review.
ON-LINE PROCEDURE: A window with information for the machine operator that gives step by step instructions
for some procedure to be performed on the machine. For example: threading the wire.
To display the contents of a file in a window or to enlarge an icon to a window.
OPEN:
A-6
Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
OPERATOR POINT: A location on the die or outer lead that a machine operator can identify to
ensure the device is properly aligned. This reference point is taught by the operator. Used if the
PRS fails. Must be targeted before device can be bonded. Preferred location is on bond pad or
streets.
OPTICS OFFSET:The displacement between the center of the optical path and the bonding tool.
-PPAD FIND:
This function uses the PRS to automatically center first bonds on bond pads.
Vision System. This term usually refers to the electronics
PATTERN RECOGNITION SYSTEM (PRS): A part of the Vision
and software that actually recognize patterns at the work site for alignment purposes. The PRS
allows the bonder to operate without attention by automatically finding eye points before each
device is bonded. Compensates for variations in die location from package
package to package.
PERFORMANCE LOGGING: Refers to statistical information that can be automatically gathered by the machine
and includes such information as MTBA, MTTA, MTBF,
MTBF, MTTR, and Utilization time.
PFR:
see Power Failure Recovery.
PIXEL:
The smallest graphic unit that can be displayed on the screen, usually a single dot.
POINT:
Moving the cursor to a specific area on the screen.
POWER FAILURE RECOVERY: This routine provides resumption of automatic operation after power failure.
PREHEAT:
Heating the device before it reaches the bond station.
PROCESS PROGRAM (PP): Made up of re-usable modules of ASCII text that can be read, modified, saved, and
restored. These modules contain the instructions and p
parametric
arametric information that the machine
will need to process materials.
PROCESS PROGRAM FILE:Main file of a process program. Component Files are the other files used with this
file to create a process program. The process program file has the .BND extension and may
have a filename of up to 80 characters.
PROCESS STATISTICS
STATISTICS::Refers to information automatically gathered by the machine while the equipment is
automatically bonding. Included in this set of statistics would be: number of devices bonded, and
number of bonds since capillary was replaced.
pr ogram.
PROGRAM MODE:A mode that allows the operator to load, edit or teach a process program.
PROMPT:
A program initiated statement which indicates an operator action is needed. Prompts are normally
located in dialog boxes or in the monitor screen’s information boxes, below the Mode bar.
PRS:
see Pattern Recognition System.
PRS CALIBRATION:A procedure to establish the relationship between the vision systems pixels and the
machines motion pulses particularly to ensure orthogonality between the two systems.
-Q-RRADIO BUTTON:A diamond shaped button. Radio buttons are grouped in sets of two or more. Only one radio
button per set can be active at a time. As shown in the example, “Normal Index” is selected.
RADIO
BUTTONS
Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations
98888-0000-JB3-01
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
REFERENCE SYSTEMS:A reference system is a logical grouping of bond sites, typically all the bond sites of a
particular object in the work area, always of the same height. Examples of ref
reference
erence systems are:
•
al
alll tthe
he bo
bond
nd site
sites
s on
on a di
die
e
•
all the bond sit
sites
es on
on the
the outer
outer lead
lead (le
(lead
ad shelf
shelf))
The goal of the reference system technique is to allow the mixing and matching of die and outer
lead without the necessity of re-teaching. A complete process program would contain the definition of all of the reference systems in the work area in addition to instructions regarding
r egarding the wiring
of the device.
REFERENCE SYSTEM ORIGIN: The origin (0,0) of an instance of a reference system.
typically,, when ball bonding, the first
REVERSE BONDING: Refers to the reverse sequence of bonding. Where typically
(ball) bond is on the die and the second (wedge) bond is on the lead. In reverse bonding the first
bond is on the lead and the second bond is on the die pad.
REVERSE MOTION: The reverse motion causes the XY table to move a defined distance in the reverse direc-
tion (away from the second bond) after the bond head has risen to a preset height (Kink Height)
while still above the first bond to achieve a unique wire shape.
-SS ING:
This term refers to unintentionally curved wires. When viewed from the overhead position these
wires take on a slight “S” shape.
SCAN CORRIDOR: The area and direction that the VLL will scan when searching for the lead.
SCREEN: The display area of the monitor.
SCROLL BAR: A horizontal or vertical bar within a dialog box containing a center button which can be moved
to show additional text or choices.
SELECT:
To choose or turn on a menu, menu item, function, or state by positioning the cursor on top
t op of the
desired item and clicking mouse button B1. If a state is selected, the selection will be highlighted
to show that it is active. Items in dialog boxes and menus may also be selected by pressing the
item’s “Hot Key” if a number is to the left of the item.
SEQUENCE STOP MODE: A mode the machine enters when the operator presses the sequence Stop Button
while the machine is in automatic mode. Its effect is to pause the action at the earliest safe place
in the process. For example: at the end of a wire or at the end of an index. While in Sequence
Stop mode the operator may operate the machine as if it were in Manual
Manu al mode. While generally it
is assumed the operator will release the sequence stop button and continue processing materiSHTL:
als, it is possible to escape automatic operation entirely from this mode of the machine
Short Tail.
Tail. BITS error message indicating that the wire tail formed after the second bon
bond
d is too
short.
SITE:
Depending on context it can mean a bonding site (a die pad or lead bonding site), a die, a die and
outer lead, device group, or all the area accessible by the bond head.
SKIP:
An index where the materials that will be moved away from the work site have not been processed.
SLIDE BAR: A horizontal or vertical bar with a center button used to make sliding adjustments to a setting such
as illumination or focus. As shown, the illuminators can be increased by moving the center button
to the right or decreased by moving it to the left.
A-7
SLIDE BAR
SOIC:
Small Outline IC.
SPC:
see Statistical Process Control.
A-8
Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
STANDBY:
This mode is entered by pressing the [Motor Stop] control button on the MMI. In
Standby mode, power to the electric motors and solenoids is interrupted.
STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL: A technique to improve manufacturing yield by gathering and analyzing
data, and then altering the process while in progress to improve or keep the product consistent.
STEP AND REPEAT: A machine feature to process a number of identical devices (device groups) without an
index. For example, if several identical die are in the same work site instead of teaching each die
individually the operator would teach the process once and then teach only the locations of successive die.
SWAP:
To move the images in the screen’s display windows so that they change place (swap). The
image in the large window moves to the small window and the image in the small window moves
to the large window. Initiated by the pressing F1 function key.
-T--T
[TAB]:
A key used to move from one edit field or selection to the next.
TABLE MAPPING:A method of correcting any precision errors in the XY table positioning.
TABLE ORIGIN:The absolute origin (0,0) of the table. Reference System Origins are located within
with in (mapped on
top of) this reference system.
TAIL LENGTH:Tail length is the length of the wire “tail” left hanging below the capillary after the second bond is
TIP:
made. This parameter effects the size of the ball that will be formed by the EFO.
see Tool Inflection Point.
( or constant) velocity.
TIP HEIGHT: The height above the work surface to start search (or
TOL CORRECTION: Top of Loop correction equalizes wire payout and adjusts trajectory during part of the cycle
to help loop height consistency in some applications.
TOOL INFLECTION POINT: The distance above the bond surface at which the speed of the descending capillary
changes from controlled deceleration to constant velocity.
velocity. TIPs are learned for all wires. Subtracting the programmed TIP offset value from the learned bonding height gives the TIP offset.
TRANSDUCER:A device that converts electrical into vibration energy to weld the wire.
-Utransduce r as part of the bonding
ULTRASONICS GENERATOR: The mechanics and electronics that vibrate the transducer
process.
monitor, man machine interface, keyboard, light tower
tower,,
UPPER CONSOLE: Bonder subassemblies including: monitor,
audio alarm, wire feed, pneumatic controls and cabling.
UPH: UNITS PER HOUR.
HOUR. The number of units bonded per hour.
UPS:
Uninterruptible Power Supply
S upply..
USG:
see Ultrasonics Generator.
UTILITIES MODE: A mode of the machine that allows the operator to make adjustments that are typically not
related to the process. For example: copying disks, deleting files, etc.
-V--V
VIDEO LEAD LOCATOR: Finds exact taught location of bond positions on the outer leads to each device to
ensure accurate placement. Maintains information about position, angle, width, and illumination
levels. Notifies bonder of any lead displacements to ensure correct bond placement. Takes video
image directly from the monitor.
VISION SYSTEM: There are two aspects of the vision system: the optics and the electronics. The Vision Sys-
tem provides information for the proper alignment of die bond sites and leads within the work site.
VLL:
see Video Lead Locator.
Vision
ision System from one position of
VLL ASSOCIATION: A contiguous group of leads that can be viewed by the V
the table.
98888-0000-JB3-01
Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
-WW/C:
Wire clamp.
W/H:
Workholder.
WIRE FEED: A system for taking wire from a wire spool and delivering it to the bonding tool. A wire feed mech-
anism including: mechanics, electronics, sensors, and controlling software.
WIRE GROUP:A group of wires that reside in the same reference system that have the same bond parameters
applied to them.
WIRE PATH: The mechanics including: possibly compressed air, supports, etc. that is the bonding wire’s route
from the spool to the capillary.
WIRE SAG:
Refers to a wire whose loop tends to dip down u
unintentionally
nintentionally..
-XX AXIS:
The side to side motion of the bond head (see XY table).
X-Y ZERO:
Primary alignment point for a package. Used as point from which all other X and Y coordinates
are calculated. Suggested location is at bottom left-hand corner of package on a lead.
XY TABLE:
A positioning system for moving a load (a bond head in the case of wire bonders) in XY
X Y (horizontal) space.
-Y--Y
Y AXIS:
The front to back motion of the bond head (see XY table).
YIELD:
The percentage of good bonded devices processed by the machine vs. the number of unbonded
devices that enter the machine.
-ZZ APEX:
The highest point achieved by the Z axis between bonds of a single wire.
Z AXIS:
The up and down motion of the bond head.
A-9
A-10
Glossary of Terms & Abbreviations
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
B ICon
IConn
n J Boat
Boat Wire
Wire Bond
Bonder
er MHS
MHS Wir
Wirin
ing
g Di
Diagr
agram
ams
s
See below for IConn J Boat MHS Wiring Diagram.
98888-0000-JB3-01
IConn J Boat Wire Bonder MHS Wiring Diagrams
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
This pa
pagg e is le
left
ft inte
intentiona
ntionall
llyy bla
blank
nk
B-1
B-2
IConn J Boat Wire Bonder MHS Wiring Diagrams
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Index
A
Abbreviations A-1
Adjust Puller Gripper Jaw Gap 2-15
B
Belt Tension Setup, Magazine
Magazine Tray 3-13, 3-15
Bond Site/Preheat Heat
Heat Block Assembly Replacement
Bond Site Heat Block
Block Assembly 2-80
Bond Site Heater Assembly 2-76
Bond Site Motor
Motor 2-85
Bond Site Thermocouple Assembly 2-78
Compression Spring 2-71
Preheat Heat Block Assembly 2-79
Preheat Heater Assembly 2-73
Preheat
Prehe
at Linear Slide Assembly 2-86
Preheat Motor 2-8
2-82
2
Preheat Thermocouple
Thermocouple Assembly 2-75
C
Cable Assemblies 4-35
Calibration
Access to Software
Software Options 1-12
General Descriptions 1-12
Workholder 2-40
Clamp 2-44, 2-50
Heat Block 2-51
Tucker Eject 2-52
Workholderr Calibrations 2-53
Workholde
Circuit Boards
Descriptions 4-8
Indexer Interface Board 4-18
Indexer Intermediate Board 4-21
Locations 4-8
Replace Card Rack Circuit Cards 4-23
Replace Indexer Interface 4-26
Replace Input/Output Interface 4-24
4-24
Roller Jam Detect Board
Board 4-20
Stepper Controller 4-14
Clamp Calibration 2-44, 2-50
Clear Leadframes from Workholder 1-20
Signal Light 1-9
Video & Graphics
Graphics Display 1-10
Video Monitor 1-9
D
Declaration of
of Exemption S-22
Descriptions
Carrier Injection 2-9
Device Indexing 1-5
General 1-3
Magazine Handlers 1-5
Workholder 1-4
Dictionary A-1
E
Electronics 4-1
Cable Assemblies 4-35
MHS Sensors 4-28
Overview
Overv
iew 4-2
Sensor Handling
Handling 4-5
Stepper
Stepp
er Drive 4-4
System Diagram
Diagram 4-3
System Organization
Organization 4-2
Replace Circuit Boards
Replace Indexer Intermediate Board 4-26
Replacing the Input/Output Magazine Handler
Intermediate Board 4-24
Replace DMHS Card Rack Circuit Boards 4-23
Subsystem/Board Description 4-8
Circuit Board Locations 4-8
DMHS Hex Half Stepper Driver Circuit Boards
4-15
DMHS Indexer/Solenoid Driver Board 4-14
DMHS Micro/Tri Half Stepper Driver Board
4-18
DMHS Stepper Controller Board 4-17
Indexer Intermediate Board 4-21
Interconnect Boards 4-22
Magazine Handler Intermediate Board 4-20
Emergency Off Switch S-8
Other Safety Features S-9
Configuration
Boat/Device Dimensions
Boat Dimensions 2-55
Bond Plane Offset 2-57
Overview S-8
Specifications S-8
Testing Operation S-8
Equipment-Specific Warnings S-2
Device Dimensions 2-56
Configuration, MHS 2-54
Controls/Indicators 1-6
Alarm, Audible 1-9
Control Panel
Panel 1-6, 1-8
Emergency
Eme
rgency Off 1-6
Locations 1-7
98888-0000-JB3-01
F
Fire Safety S-7
Fire Suppression S-7
Maintenance S-7
Index
INDEX-1
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
G
General Precautions S-3
Glossary A-1
Grippers
MHS utilities 5-18, 5-19
H
Heat Block Vacuum Sensor Adjustment 2-38
Heated Material and Equipment S-6
Servicing Heated Equipment S-6
User Responsibilities S-6
I
Identification Label Descriptions S-18
EFO Box Odering Notice Label S-18
Equipment Identification Label S-18
Index/Tucker
Parts
Index Arm
andReplacement
Pin 2-95
Tucker 2-98
Tucker Solenoid 2-99
Indexer Flex Cable Assembly Replacement
Gripper Flex Cable Assembly 2-113
Puller Flex Cable Assembly 2-111
Indexer Intermediate Board 4-21
Indexer Pin/Tucker Eject Setup
Indexer Pin Setup Sequence 2-20
Tucker Eject Setup Sequence 2-22
Initial Start-Up 1-18
Introduction S-1
Descriptions 1-3
General Information 1-1
Operating Procedures 1-18
Operator Controls 1-6
Product Conversion 1-22
Software Functions 1-12
Specifications 1-6
L
Leadframe Present Sensor Setup 4-34
Load/Unload Magazines 1-20
Calibration 3-7
Input/Output Slot 3-9
Input/Output Tray 3-7
Components 3-2
Description 3-2
Magazine Handler Adjustments 3-13
Magazine Handler Configuration 3-13
Positions 3-3
Removal and Installation 3-15
Input Magazine Handler 3-15
Output Magazine Handler 3-21
Setup 3-6
Maintenance 5-1
MHS Errors 5-21
MHS-Related Bonding Problems 5-30
Preventive Maintenance Schedule 5-2
Special Tools and Gauges 5-5
Troubleshooting 5-5
Manual Mode Utilities 5-16
MHS Utilities 5-14
Motor Diagnostics 5-5
Re-Initialize MHS 5-10
Sensor Diagnostics 5-10
MHS Errors 5-21
Error and Status Messages 5-22
Error Indications 5-21
MHS Information in other Manuals 1-2
MHS Manual Contents 1-1
MHS Manual Mode Utilities
Clamp Utilities 5-18
Gripper Utilities 5-18
Index Utilities 5-16
Pin Utilities 5-19
MHS Manual Scope 1-1
MHS-Related Bonding Problems 5-30
Eye Point Find Failures 5-31
Non-Stick on Lead (NSOL) 5-33
Non-Stick on Pad (NSOP) 5-32
Microscope Use S-6
O
Operating Procedures 1-18
Bonder/Workholder System Shutdown 1-21
Clear Leadframes from Workholder 1-20
Initial Start-Up 1-18
Load/Unload Magazines 1-20
M
Remove Magazines from Magazine Handlers 1-20
Stop Auto Bonding 1-20
Options
Heat Block Vacuum Sensor Adjustment 2-38
Machine Emissions S-9
Gases,Vapor,Dust S-9
Ionizing and Non-Ionizing Radiation S-9
Noise S-9
Vibration S-9
Magazine Handler Adjustments
Belt Tension Setup 3-13
Tray Adjustment 3-15
Magazine Handlers 3-1
INDEX-2
P
Parts Replacement 2-71
Control System
Card Rack Circuit Boards 4-23
Index
98888-0000-JB3-01
Material Handling System Manual
Indexer Interface 4-26
Input/Output
Input/Outp
ut In
Intterfac
erface 4-24
Workholder 2-7
2-71
1
Bond Site/Preheat Heat Block
Block Assembly 2-71
Index/Tucker 2-95
Workholder Sensor Locations 4-29
Servicing Electrical
Electrical Equipment S-4
Lockout/Tagout
Lockou
t/Tagout Procedure S-5
Servicing
Servici
ng the Power Supply S-5
Types of Electrical
Electrical Hazards S-4
Indexer Flax Cable Assembly 2-111
Puller 2-88
Rails 2-101
Replace Heat Block Vacuum Solenoid Valve
2-116
Sensor
Sensor Assemblies 2-106
Preventive Maintenance
Schedule 5-2
Workholder 2-69
Product Conversion 1-22
Conversion Sequence
Sequence 1-22
Enter/Edit MHS Parameters 1-24
Load Process Program 1-24
MHS Operation Check 1-25
Replace Clamp/Heat Block Inserts 1-23
Required
Requi
red Tools/Parts 1-23
Puller Parts Replacement
Replacement
Puller Finger
Finger 2-88
Puller Motor 2-90
2-90
Puller Rack 2-89
Puller Solenoid 2-93
Puller Pin Setup
Puller Pin Setup Sequence 2-16
Shutdown and Start-up
Start-up Procedures S-23
Shutdown Procedure S-23
Start-up Procedure S-23
Shutdown Bonder/MHS 1-21
Software Functions
Functions 1-12
Auto Run Configuration 1-16
Calibration 1-12
MHS Configuration 1-12
MHS Diagnostics 1-17
MHS Magazine Utilities 1-14
MHS Utilities
Utilities 1-13
MHS Workholder Utilities 1-15
Specifications
Carrier Dimensions 1-6
1-6
Magazine Dimensions
Dimensions 1-6
Other 1-6
Stop Auto Bonding 1-20
Symbols and Messages S-1
Caution S-1
Note S-1
Warning
Warni
ng S-1
T
R
Rail Calibration 2-40
Rail Parts Replacement
Indexer
Index
er Motor 2-101
Leadscrew Bearing 2-105
X Axis Leadscrew Assembly 2-103
Record of Changes S-2
Remove Magazines from Magazine Handlers 1-20
Remove/Install Input Magazine Handler 3-15
Remove/Install Workholder 2-61
Roller Jam Detect Board 4-20
S
Safe Handling
Heated Material and Equipment S-6
Terms and Conventions S-1
Tools and Fixtures 5-5
Trained Operators and Service Technicians S-4
Troubleshooting 5-5
Error Indications 5-21
Error Messages 5-22
Initialize MHS 5-10
Maintenance Diagnostics 5-10
MHS Manual Mode Utilities 5-16
MHS Related Bonding Problems 5-30
MHS Toolbar Utility Menus 5-14
MHS Workholder and Motor Cycling Diagnostics 5-5
Temperature Controller Diagnostics 5-8
U
Use of This Manual S-1
Safety 1-2
Sensor Assemblies Replacement
J Boat Present Sensor Amplifier 2-109
Optical Switch Assemblies
Assemblies 2-107
X Registration
Sensor 2-106
Sensors
4-28
Magazine Handler Sensor Locations 4-30
Reflective Sensor Setup 4-33
Leadframe Present Sensor 4-34
Sensor
Sens
or Types 4-28
Status Display 4-34
98888-0000-JB3-01
V
Video & Graphics Display 1-10
W
Warning and Safety Labels S-10
Berylium Product Warning S-16
Burn Hazard Warning S-14
Index
INDEX-3
IConn High Performance Wire Bonder
Disconnect Power Label S-15
Electrical Hazard Warning S-15
Emergency Off S-14
Equipment Grounding IEC S-16
General Hazard Warning S-15
Hard Stop Caution S-17
Operator ESD Connection S-16
Pinch Point Hazard Warning S-14
Workholder 2-1
Boat Indexing and Ejection Sequence 2-11
Boat Injection Sequence 2-9
Boat Transfer Sequence 2-11
Calibration 2-40
Heat Block Calibration 2-51
Workholder 2-40
Workholder Calibration 2-53
Components 2-2
Configuration 2-54
Boat/Device Dimensions 2-55
Indexing Options 2-59
Indexing Parameters 2-57
Workholder Configuration 2-59
General Description 2-2
J Boat Indexer Assembly Removal and Installation
2-61
J Boat Slider Assembly Removal and Installation 2-66
Preventive Maintenance 2-69
Setup & Adjustments 2-13
Preheat Heat Block/Bond Site Alignment 2-32
Puller Rack Backlash Adjustment 2-36
Subsystems 2-5
Bond Site Heat Block Assembly 2-7
Front/Rear Rail Assemblies 2-6
Index/Tucker Assembly 2-7
Indexer Intermediate Board 2-8
J Boat MHS Pneumatic System 2-8
Preheat Heat Block Assembly 2-6
Puller Assembly 2-5
Workholder Calibrations 2-53
Workholder Setup & Adjustments 2-13
Bond Site Heat Block Alignment 2-24
Heat Block Vacuum Sensor Setup 2-38
Index Pin/Tucker Eject Setup 2-20
Puller Pin Setup 2-15
Rail Parallelism Adjustment 2-27
Setup Sequence 2-13
Workholder Gauge 2-15